Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
LYRASIS IVIembers and Sloan Foundation
http://www.archive.org/details/haverfordcollege1972have
r
I
av error
"I
O U GtCtIjiO i that you preach truth and do
righteousness as you have been taught,
whereinsoever that teaching may commend itself to
your consciences and your judgments. For your
consciences and your judgments we have not sought to
bind; and see you to it that no other institution, no
poHtical party, no social circle, no religious organization,
no pet ambitions put such chains on you as would
tempt you to sacrifice one iota of the moral freedom of your
consciences or the intellectual freedom
of your judgments."
Tresident Isaac <5harpless,
Commencement, 1888
laverford College seeks to prepare men for lives of service, respon-
sibility, creativity, and joy, both during and after college.
The College shares with other liberal arts colleges of academic
excellence:
— a commitment to open inquiry by both its students and faculty,
combined with rigorous appraisal and use of the results of that
inquiry
— an emphasis on a broad education in the natural and social
sciences, the humanities, and the arts, combined with strong
competence in at least one field of the student's choosing
— an educational program that aims more at preparing men to
think and act clearly, boldly, and humanely in whatever life
work they choose than at training for specific professional
fields.
The College's distinctive character comes from its striving for:
— candor, simplicity, joy, and moral integrity in the whole of
college life in keeping with Haverford's Quaker traditions
— a harmony for each man among his intellectual, physical, social,
esthetic, and spiritual concerns
— a creative use of smallness that places students in the closest
contact with dedicated scholars in the pursuit of knowledge
— a sense of community marked by a lasting concern of one per-
son for another and by shared responsibilities for helping the
College achieve its highest aims
— a system of responsible self-government in the student body
and in the faculty
— a balance for students and faculty between disciplined involve-
ment in the world of action and detachment to reflect on new
and old knowledge alike.
In sum, the College seeks to be measured, above all, by the uses to
which its students, graduates, and faculty put their knowledge, their
humanity, their initiative, and their individuality.
1
Haverford College Publication, Vol. 68, No. 4, August, 1970
Issued six times a year by Haverford College, Haverford, Pa. 19041:
January, February, May, August, September and December. Entered
as second-class matter and postage paid at Haverford, Pa.
-^•i.X:
^^
W^y^.
.;-.^.
"\%
■ " -^--^
^::iY^' ■
CONTEIMTS
STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 1
COLLEGE CALENDAR, 1970-71 5
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 11
THE COLLEGE AND ITS PROGRAM 29
Purpose 30
History 31
Resources 32
Admission 40
Expenses 42
Financial Aid 43
Curriculum 45
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 69
Departments 71
Special Programs of Instruction 165
STUDENT SERVICES AND ACTIVITIES 179
Health Program 180
Counseling Services 181
Student Government, Honor System 181
Student Organizations and Publications 183
Community Concern 184
FELLOWSHIPS, SCHOLARSHIPS AND PRIZES 185
Endowed Fellowships 186
Endowed Scholarships 186
Prizes 193
ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 200
Alumni Clubs 201
INDEX 213
CORRESPONDENCE DIRECTORY 218
MAP Inside rear cover
The contents of this catalog are designed to cover a two-year
period, 1970-72. A supplement containing updated information will
be issued in the fall of 1971. Additional current information is
available at any time from the appropriate college office; please see
the correspondence directory at the back of this catalog.
T *f T F
Sept.
Oct.
15 16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24 25 26
28 29 30
1 2 3
7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17
19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28 29 30 31
Jan.
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
25
26
27
28
29
30
Feb.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
Mar.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
15 16 17
29 30 31
College days in BLACK
1
;;tv[;;
■:j.'
";^."
'1
r '
r
S
Nov,
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
30
Dec.
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
Apr.
May
1
m
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
1
3 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20 21 22
25
Haverford College
CALENDAR 1970-1971
Freshmen arrive Tues. 8
Other new students arrive Thurs. 10
New and re-entering students register for academic courses Fri. 1 1
Returning students arrive Sat.
Opening Collection 8:00 p.m., Sun.
First Semester classes begin 8:00 a.m., Mon.
Upperclassmen register for non-academic courses Mon.
First faculty meeting 4:15 p.m., Mon.
Fall term non-academic courses begin Wed.
12
S
13
E
14
P
14
T.
14
16
Last day for changing courses
. . . Mon.
28
Last day for dropping a course without penalty
Last day to request no-numerical-grade option (juniors and seniors) . .
. . . Mon.
. . . Mon.
12 0
12 *'
Christmas vacation ends — Review period begins 8:00 a.m., Mon. 4
All papers (except those in lieu of examinations) due by*. . . .4:00 p.m., Wed. 6
Midyear examinations Thurs. 7 through Sat. 16
Papers in lieil of examinations (and laboratory notebooks)
due as scheduled by instructor, but not later than* 4:00 p.m.. Wed. 13
Midyear Recess 5:00 p.m., Sat. 16 to 8:00 a.m., Mon. 25
Second semester classes begin 8:00 a.m., Mon. 25
Last day for changing courses Mon. 8
Last day for dropping a course without penalty Mon. 22
Last day to request no-numerical-grade option (juniors and seniors) . . . .Mon. 22
Winter term non-academic courses end Fri. 26
Applications for Cope and Murray Graduate Fellowships
due in President's office Sat. 27
Fall term non-academic courses end Fri. 20
Swarthmore Day (no classes) Sat. 21 N
Registration for Winter term non-academic courses Mon. 23 0
Thanksgiving vacation begins 12:30 p.m., Wed. 25 V.
Classes resume and Winter term non-academic courses begin. .8:00 a.m., Mon. 30
Registration for Spring semester Mon. 30 through Fri. 4 D
Midyear examination schedules due in Recorder's office Mon., Tues. 7, 8 E
First semester classes end — Christmas vacation begins 11:30 a.m.. Sat. 19 C.
Registration for Spring term non-academic courses Mon. 1 M
Spring term non-academic courses begin Mon. 8 A
Spring vacation 4:00 p.m., Thurs. 18 to 8:00 a.m., Mon. 29 R.
Sophomores' major registration cards due in
Associate Dean's office 4:00 p.m., Fri. 9 .
Registration for Fall semester Mon. 12 through Fri. 16 _
Applications for scholarships due in Admissions office Wed. 14
Final examination schedules and Registration for Fall semester
due in Recorder's office Mon. 19 through Fri. 23
Prize competition manuscripts due in Recorder's office 4:00 p.m., Fri. 30
Spring term non-academic courses end Fri. 7
Second semester classes end — Review period begins 11:30 a.m.. Sat. 8
All papers (except those in lieu of examinations) due by*. . . . 12:00 noon. Sat. 8
Senior comprehensive examinations Tues. 11 through Thurs. 13
Final examinations for seniors Wed. 12 through 12:00 noon, Wed. 19 ^
Final examinations for all other students Wed. 12 through Sat. 22 ^
Papers in lieu of examinations (and laboratory notebooks)
due as scheduled by instructor, but no later than* 4:00 p.m., Tues. 18
Oral examinations for College honors Mon., Tues., Wed. 17, 18, 19
Final faculty meeting 9:00 a.m., Thurs. 20
COMMENCEMENT Tues. 25
Parents' Day — Oct. 3
SPECIAL SATURDAY EVENTS
Homecoming Day — Nov. 14
Alumni Day — May 1
^'For severe academic penalties applied to late papers and notebooks, see Page 62.
FACULTY
AND
ADMIIMISTRATIOIM
FACULTY
John R. Coleman President
B.A., University of Toronto; M.A., and Ph.D., University of Chicago; LL.D.,
Beaver College; LL.D., University of Pennsylvania.
EMERITI
Manuel J. Asensio Professor of Romance Languages, Emeritus
B.A., University of Granada; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Hugh Borton President, Emeritus
B.S., Haverford College; A.M., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of
Leyden; LL.D., Temple University; LL.D., University of Pennsylvania; LL.D.,
Haverford College.
Howard Comfort Professor of Classics, Emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Thomas E. Drake Professor of American History, Emeritus
A.B., Stanford University; A.M., University of Michigan; Ph.D., Yale
University.
Clayton W. Holmes Professor of Engineering, Emeritus
B.S. in M.E. and M.E., University of New Hampshire; M.A., Haverford
College.
Archibald Macintosh .... Vice President and Director of Admissions, Emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania; LL.D., Haverford College.
Cletus O. Oakley Professor of Mathematics, Emeritus
S.B., University of Texas; S.M., Brown University; Ph.D., University of
Illinois.
Abraham Pepinsky Professor of Psychology, Emeritus
A.B. and A.M., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., State University of Iowa.
Harry W. Pfund Professor of German, Emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
L. Arnold Post Professor of Greek, Emeritus
B.A. and M.A., Haverford College; A.M., Harvard University; B.A. and
M.A., Oxford University; L.H.D., Haverford College.
Roy E. Randall Professor of Physical Education and
Director of Intercollegiate Athletics, Emeritus
Ph.B., Brown University.
Leon H. Rittenhouse Professor of Engineering, Emeritus
M.E., Stevens Institute of Technology.
Ralph M. Sargent Francis B. Gummere Professor of English, Emeritus
A.B., Carleton College; Ph.D., Yale University.
Edward D. Snyder Professor of English, Emeritus
A.B., Yale University; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
12
i
Douglas Van Steere T. Wistar Brown Professor of Philosophy, Emeritus
S.B., Michigan State College; B.A. and M.A.^ Oxford University; A.M. and
Ph.D., Harvard University; D.D., Lawrence College; L.H.D., Oberlin College;
L.H.D., Earlham College; S.T.D., General Theological Seminary.
Alfred J. Swan Professor of Music, Emeritus
B.A. and M.A., Oxford University.
Howard M. Teaf, Jr Professor of Economics, Emeritus
B.S. in Economics, M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
PROFESSORS
Manuel J. AsENSiottt Professor of Romance Languages
B.A., University of Granada; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
John Ashmead, Jr.**''= Professor of English
A.B., A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Richard J. Bernstein Professor of Philosophy
A.B., University of Chicago; B.S., Columbia University; M.A. and Ph.D.,
Yale University.
Edwin B. Bronner Professor of History
A.B., Whittier College; M.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania.
Robert H. Butman Director of Drama with rank of Professor
on joint appointment with Bryn Mawr College
B.A. and M.A., University of North Carolina.
William E. Cadbury, Jr.**** Director, Post-Baccalaureate
Fellowship Program and Professor of Chemistry
B.S. and M.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
John R. Cary Professor of German
B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University.
John P. Chesick*** Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Purdue University; Ph.D., Harvard University.
William C. Davidon* Professor of Physics
B.S., M.S. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
John W. Davison Professor of Music
B.A., Haverford College; A.M., Harvard University; Ph.D., University of
Rochester.
Frances De Graaff* Professor of Russian
on joint appointment with Bryn Mawr College
Ph.D., University of Leyden.
*On sabbatical leave, first semester, 1970-71.
***On sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
****On leave of absence, 1970-71.
tttOn appointment, 1970-71.
13
Paul J. R. Desjardins* Professor of Philosophy
B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
William Docherty, Jr Professor of Physical Education and
Director of Physical Education
S.B., Temple University.
Harmon C. Dunathan*=^* Professor of Chemistry
B.A., Ohio Wesleyan University; M.S. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Irving Finger*** Professor of Biology
B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Harvey Glickman** Professor of Political Science
and Director of African Studies
A.B., Princeton University; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Louis C. Green Professor of Astronomy
A.B., A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Marcel M. Gutwirth Professor of Romance Languages
A.B., Columbia College; A.M. and Ph.D., Columbia University.
Norman B. Hannah Diplomat-in-Residence
with rank of Professor
B.A., University of Illinois; M.A., Louisiana State University.
A. Paul Hare Professor of Sociology
B.A., Swarthmore College; B.S., Iowa State University; M.A., University of
Pennsylvania; Ph.D., University of Chicago.
Douglas H. Heath**** Professor of Psychology
A.B., Amherst College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Theodore B. Hetzel Professor of Engineering
B.S., Haverford College; B.S. in M.E., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. and
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University.
Holland Hunter Professor of Economics
B.S., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Dale H. Husemoller Professor of Mathematics
B.A., University of Minnesota; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
John A. Lester, Jr Professor of English
B.S., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Ariel G. Loewy Professor of Biology
B.S. and M.S., McGill University; Ph.D., University of Permsylvania.
Colin F. MacKay Professor of Chemistry
B.S., University of Notre Dame; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
*On sabbatical leave, first semester, 1970-71.
**On sabbatical leave, second semester, 1970-71.
***On sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
****On leave, second semester, 1970-71.
14
Sidney I. Perloe Professor of Psychology
B.A., New York University; Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Frank J. Quinn Professor of English
B.A., M.A. and B.Litt., Oxford University.
William H. Reese Professor of Music and Director of Glee Club
A.B., Amherst College; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of
Berlin.
Edgar S. Rose Professor of English
A.B., Franklin and Marshall College; A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Melvin Santer Professor of Biology
B.S., St. John's University; M.S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., George
Washington University.
Alfred W. Satterthwaite Professor of English
A.B., A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Gerhard E. Spiegler Provost and Professor of Religion
D.B., M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
John P. Spielman, Jr Professor of History
B.A., University of Montana; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin.
Alfred Swan! Professor of Music
B.A. and M.A., Oxford University.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
Duncan Aswell Associate Professor of English
A.B., Harvard College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Thomas A. Benham Associate Professor of Engineering
B.S. and M.S., Haverford College.
Bradford Cook Associate Professor of Romance Languages
B.A., Williams College; Ph.D., Yale University.
Thomas J. D'Andrea Associate Professor of Psychology
B.A. and Ph.D., University of Minnesota.
Robert M. Gavin, Jr Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.A., St. John's University; Ph.D., Iowa State University.
Daniel J. Gillis Associate Professor of Classics
B.A., Harvard College; M.A. and Ph.D., Cornell University.
Dietrich Kessler Associate Professor of Biology
B.A., Swarthmore College; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin.
L. Aryeh Kosman Associate Professor of Philosophy
B.A. and M.A., University of California; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Roger Lane Associate Professor of History
B.A., Yale University; Ph.D., Harvard University.
tOn appointment for the first semester, 1970-71.
15
Richard Luman Associate Professor of Religion
A.B., A.M. and Ph.D., University of Iowa.
Wyatt MacGaffey*'^* Associate Professor of Anthropology
B.A. and M.A., Cambridge University; Ph.D., University of California, Los
Angeles.
John W. McKenna Scull Associate Professor of
English Constitutional History
B.A., Amherst College; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., Cambridge
University.
Douglas G. Miller Associate Professor of Physics
A.B., Yale University; Ph.D., University of Rochester.
R. Bruce Partridge Associate Professor of Astronomy
on the Sloan Foundation Grant
B.A., Princeton University; D. Phil., Oxford University.
Joseph Russo Associate Professor of Classics
B.A., Brooklyn College; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Charles Stegeman Associate Professor of Fine Arts
Academic Royale des Beaux-Arts, Brussels.
JosiAH D. Thompson, Jr Associate Professor of Philosophy
B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Claude E. Wintner Associate Professor of Chemistry
A.B., Princeton University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS
Edward F. Bauer**** Assistant Professor of German
B.A., St. John's College; M.A., Vanderbilt University; Ph.D., Princeton
University.
R. Christopher Cairns Assistant Professor of Fine Arts
A.B., Oberlin; M.F.A., Tulane University.
DisKiN Clay Assistant Professor of Classics
B.A., Reed College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Washington.
Francis X. Connolly Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.S., Fordham University; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Rochester.
AsoKA Gangadean Assistant Professor of Philosophy
B.A., City College of New York; Ph.D., Brandeis University.
Linda G. Gerstein Assistant Professor of History
B.A. and M.A., Radcliffe College; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Jerry P. Gollub Assistant Professor of Physics
A.B., Oberlin College; A.M., Harvard University.
***On sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
****0n leave of absence 1970-71.
16
Samuel Gubins Assistant Professor of Economics
A.B., Reed College; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University.
G. Eric Hansen Assistant Professor of Political Science
A.B., Lawrence School; A.M., M.A.L.D. and Ph.D., The Fletcher School of
Law and Diplomacy, Tufts University.
Stephen S. Hecht Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.A., Duke University; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
William F. Hohenstein Assistant Professor of Sociology
A.B., Maryknoll Seminary; M.A., University of Pennsylvania.
J. Bruce Long Assistant Professor of Religion
B.A., Taylor University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
Richard J. Lubarsky Assistant Professor of English
B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania.
Geoffrey Martin Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Yale University; Ph.D., Columbia University.
Patrick McCarthy Assistant Professor of Romance Languages
A.M., Harvard University; D. Phil., Oxford University.
Robert A. Mortimer Assistant Professor of Political Science
B.A., Wesleyan University; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University.
Vivianne T. Nachmias Assistant Professor of Biology
on the Sloan Foundation Grant
B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., Radcliffe College; M.D., University of
Rochester.
Joseph Neisendorfer Assistant Professor of Mathematics
on the Sloan Foundation Grant
B.S., University of Chicago; M.A., Princeton University.
J. Kemp Randolph Assistant Professor of Physics
on the Sloan Foundation Grant
B.A., Williams College; Ph.D., Harvard University.
James C. Ransom ='=** Assistant Professor of English
B.A., University of New Mexico; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Harry L. Rosenzweig Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology; M.S., University of Arizona;
Ph.D., University of Virginia.
Preston B. Rowe Assistant Professor of Psychology
A.B., Dartmouth College; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Michael K. Showe Assistant Professor of Biology
B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of California, San Diego.
Sara M. Shumer Assistant Professor of Political Science
A.B., Barnard College; M.A., University of California, Berkeley.
***0n sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
17
Craig Stark Assistant Professor of Religion
A.B., Harvard College; A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Robert E. Stiefel Assistant Professor of German
A.B., Oberlin College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Walter J. Trela Assistant Professor of Physics
B.S., Brown University; Ph.D., Stanford University.
Sidney R. Waldman Assistant Professor of Political Science
A.B., Oberlin College; Ph.D., University of North Carolina.
Andrzej Zabludowski Assistant Professor of Philosophy
on the Sloan Foundation Grant
M.A. and Ph.D., University of Warsaw.
LECTURERS AND INSTRUCTORS
Peter Atwood Instructor in Mathematics
B.S., Trinity College.
Laura BLANKERTzt Lecturer in Sociology
A.B., Swarthmore College; M.A., Bryn Mawr College.
Harold Boatrite Lecturer in Music
D.Mus., Combs College of Music.
David L. ELDERt Lecturer
B.A. and M.A., Oberlin College.
Jeffry GALPERtt Instructor
B.A., Dartmouth College; M.S., Columbia University.
Helen M. Hunter Visiting Lecturer in Economics
B.A., Smith College; Ph.D., Radcliffe College.
Tadeusz Krauze! Visiting Lecturer in Political Science
M.A., University of Lodz.
Samuel T. Lachs Lecturer in Religion
on joint appointment with Bryn Mawr College
B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.H.L., The Jewish Theological Seminary;
Ph.D., Dropsie College.
Murray S. LEviNtt Visiting Lecturer in Political Science
B.A., Haverford College; M.A. and LL.B., Harvard University.
Maria Marshall Lecturer in German
Diplom-Psychologin, University of Munich.
Zelbert MoOREtt Lecturer in Political Science
B.A. and M.A., University of Oklahoma.
Temple Painter Lecturer in Music
B.Mus., Curtis Institute.
tOn appointment for first semester, 1970-71.
ttOn appointment for second semester, 1970-71.
18
Doris S. Quinn Lecturer in English
B.A. and M.A., Oxford University.
Frederick C. Schulze, jR.t Lecturer in Russian
on joint appointment with Bryn Mawr College
B.A., Haverford College; M.A., Columbia University.
Paul E. Wehr Lecturer in Sociology
B.A., University of Connecticut; M.A., University of North Carolina; Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania.
SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS
John E. Butler Assistant in Biology
Thomas Davis Assistant in the Science Division
Francis De Pasquale Member of the Resident Chamber Music Group
Cellist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member, De Pasquale Quartet.
Joseph De Pasquale Member of the Resident Chamber Music Group
Diploma, Curtis Institute of Music; Violist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member,
De Pasquale Quartet.
Robert De Pasquale Member of the Resident Chamber Music Group
New School of Music; Violinist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member, De Pasquale
Quartet.
William De Pasquale Member of the Resident Chamber Music Group
Violinist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member, De Pasquale Quartet; Concert
Master, Philadelphia Orchestra for Robin Hood Dell Summer Concerts.
Marthalyn Dickson Suburban Involvement Coordinator,
Center for Nonviolent Conflict Resolution
A.B., Asbury College; M.A., Cornell University.
Sylvia Glickman . .Pianist in Residence of the Resident Chamber Music Group
B.S. and M.Sc, Juilliard School of Music; L.R.A.M., Royal Academy of
Music.
Elizabeth U. Green Research Associate in Biology
A.B., M.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College.
Mary Hoxie Jones Research Associate in Quaker Studies
A.B., Mount Holyoke College.
Louise G. Onorato Laboratory Instructor in Biology
B.S., Wilkes College; M.S., Temple University.
Rudolph Tolbert Community Organization Coordinator,
Center for Nonviolent Conflict Resolution
James L. Vaughan Director of Counseling Services
B.A., Earlham College; B.D., Yale Divinity School; M.S. Yale University.
tOn appointment for first semester, 1970-71.
19
Jane Widseth Counselor
B.A., University of Minnesota; M.A., Boston University.
APPOINTMENTS UNDER SPECIAL GRANTS
Catherine L. Busch Research Assistant in Physics
B.S., University of Pennsylvania.
Mabel M. Chen Research Associate in Astronomy
B.S., The National Taiwan University; M.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College.
Linda J. Dilworth Research Assistant in Biology
Carol C. Heller Research Assistant in Biology
B.A., Wilson College.
Eleanor K. Kolchin Research Associate in Astronomy
B.A., Brooklyn College.
Cecily D. Littleton Research Associate in Astronomy
B.A. and B.Sc, Oxford University.
Patricia Marker Research Assistant in Biology
Slavica S. Matacic Research Associate in Biology
M.S. and Ph.D., University of Zagreb.
Sara Shane Research Assistant in Biology
B.A., Swarthmore College.
Allen G. Shenstone Research Associate in Astronomy
B.S., M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University; B.A. and M.A., Cambridge
University.
Harriet Stone Research Assistant in Biology
B.A., Antioch College.
ADMINISTRATION
John R. Coleman President
B.A., University of Toronto; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago; LL.D.,
Beaver College; LL.D., University of Pennsylvania.
William W. Ambler Director of Admissions
B.A., Haverford College.
William F. Balthaser Director of Public Relations
B.S., Temple University.
Elmer J. Bogart Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds
Temple University Technical Institute.
William E. Cadbury, Jr. . . .Director of Post-Baccalaureate Fellowship Program
B.S and M.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Stephen G. Cary Vice President for Development
B.A., Haverford College; M.A., Columbia University.
20
George N. Couch Public Relations Associate
B.A., Haverford College.
Delores R. Davis Recorder
Janet Henry Administrative Aide
Gregory Kannerstein Assistant Dean of Students
B.A., Haverford College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania.
Albert J. Levine Associate Director of Development
B.A., Hunter College.
James W. Lyons Dean of Students
B.A., Allegheny College; M.S. and Ed.D., Indiana University.
Zelbert L. Moore Assistant to the President
B.A. and M.A., University of Oklahoma.
Charles Perry Secretary to the Administration
B.A., Haverford College; M.S.S., Bryn Mawr College.
David Potter Associate Dean of the College
B.A., Haverford College; Ed.M., Temple University.
William A. Shafer, Jr Assistant Director of Admissions
B.A., Haverford College.
William E. Sheppard, II Director of Alumni Affairs
B.S., Haverford College.
Charles W. Smith Vice President for Business Affairs
F.C.A., Institute of Chartered Accountants; A.C.I.S., Chartered Institute of
Secretaries; CPA.
Gerhard E. Spiegler Provost and Dean of the Faculty
D.B., M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
Dana W. Swan, II Director of Athletics
B.A., Swarthmore College.
Stephen P. Theophilos Assistant Business Manager
B.A. and B.D., Hellenic College; M.S., Boston University.
Paul E. Wehr Director of the Center for Research on
Nonviolent Conflict Resolution
B.A., University of Connecticut; M.A., University of North Carolina; Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania.
John A. Williams Assistant Director of Admissions
B.A., Haverford College.
MEDICAL STAFF
William W. Lander Physician
B.S., Ursinus College; M.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Peter G. Bennett Psychiatrist
B.A., Haverford College; M.D., University of Pennsylvania.
21
Louise Anastasi Head Nurse
R.N., Philadelphia General Hospital; B.S.N., Hunter College.
LIBRARY STAFF
Edwin B. Bronner Librarian; Curator of the Quaker Collection
B.A., Whittier College; M.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania.
Barbara L. Curtis Cataloger, Quaker Collection
B.A., Bryn Mawr College; M.A.T., Radcliffe College; M.S. (L.S.), Drexel
University.
David A. Fraser Associate Librarian, Administration
B.A., Hamilton College; M.A. and M.S. (L.S.), Syracuse University.
Else Goldberger Acquisitions Librarian
Ph.D., University of Vienna.
M. Constance Hyslop Circulation and Government Documents Librarian
B.A., Mount Holyoke College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.S.
(L.S.), Drexel University.
B JORG MiEHLE Reference Librarian
University of Oslo; Graduate, Norwegian State Library School; B.S. (L.S.),
Drexel University.
Rhona Ovedoff Catalog Librarian
B.A. and Dip. Lib., University of the Witwatersrand.
Esther R. Ralph Assistant Librarian, Reader Services
B.S., West Chester State College; B.S. (L.S.), Drexel University.
Ruth H. Reese Associate Librarian, Technical Services
B.A., Acadia University; B.S. (L.S.), Simmons College.
Sylvia Schnaars Serials Librarian
B.A., Ohio Wesleyan University; M.S. (L.S.), Villanova University.
Herbert C. Standing Catalog Librarian
B.A., William Penn College; M.A., Haverford College; B.D., Drake Uni-
versity; M.S. (L.S.), Drexel University.
Shirley Stowe Social Sciences Bibliographer
B.A., Radcliffe College; M.S. (L.S.), Drexel University.
THE JOINT COMPUTING CENTER OF BRYN MAWR,
HAVERFORD, SWARTHMORE
Charles J. Springer Acting Director
B.S., Union College.
David S. Bailey Systems Analyst
B.S., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., University of Southern
California; Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Hazel C. Pugh Operator
22
COLLEGE VISITORS ON SPECIAL FUNDS 1969-70
WILLIAM PYLE PHILIPS FUND
Joseph Agassi
Professor of Philosophy of Science
Boston University
Abram Amsel
Professor of Psychology
University of Texas
JusTirj Aronfreed
Professor of Psychology
University of Pennsylvania
Shlomo Avineri
Chairman, Department of
Political Science
Hebrew University, Jerusalem
Eduardo Baranano
Consultant in Architecture, Planning
and Development
Hillsborough, California
Michael G. Barratt
Professor of Mathematics
University of Manchester
Seymour Benzer
Professor of Biology
California Institute of Technology
Daniel Biebuyck
Chairman, Department of
Anthropology
University of Delaware
Daniel Branton
Assistant Professor of Botany
University of California, Berkeley
William P. Brown
School of Criminal Justice
SUNY, Albany, N. Y.
Thomas C. Bruice
Professor of Chemistry
University of California,
Santa Barbara
Richard W. Buford
Former Executive Director of the
New York City Planning
Commission
Eveline Burns
Department of Political Science
New York University
Joseph Califano, Jr.
Former top domestic assistant to
President Johnson,
Washington, D. C.
E. J. Capaldi
Professor of Psychology
Purdue University
Pierre Cartier
Department of Mathematics
University of Strasbourg
Amiya Chakravarty
Professor of Philosophy, SUNY,
New Paltz, Former associate of
Tagore and Gandhi
Charles Chatfield
Department of History
Wittenberg University
Pierre Conner
Professor of Mathematics
University of Virginia
Philip Converse
Professor of Political Science
University of Michigan
John Darley, Jr.
Associate Professor of Psychology
Princeton University
Pierre Deligne
Department of Mathematics
Institut des Hautes fitudes
Scientifiques and Harvard
University
Shri Narayan Desai
Secretary, Shanti Sena
(Indian Peace Brigade)
Rajghat, Varanasi, India
J. L. DiLLARD
Professor of Linguistics
Ferkauf Graduate School of
Humanities and Social Sciences,
Yeshiva University
Jerry Donohue
Professor of Chemistry
University of Pennsylvania
23
WILLIAM PYLE PHILIPS FUND, Cont.
Manfred Eigen
Max Planck Institut fiir
Physikalische Chemie
Gottingen, Germany
Cyprian Ekwensi
West African Novelist
Ministry of Information, Biafra
James Fernandez
Associate Professor of Anthropology
Dartmouth College
Sidney Fleischer
Associate Professor of Biology
Vanderbilt University
Roger Godement
Professor of Mathematics
University of Paris and Institute
for Advanced Study, Princeton
Richard C. Gonzalez
Chairman, Department of
Psychology, Bryn Mawr College
John B. Gurdon
Lecturer in Biology
Oxford University
F. E. P. HiRZEBRUCH
Professor of Mathematics
University of Bonn and Institute for
Advanced Study, Princeton
Dell H. Hymes
Professor of Anthropology
University of Pennsylvania
Aaron J. Ihde
Professor of Chemistry and
History of Science
University of Wisconsin
Philemona Indire
Senior Lecturer in Education
University College, Nairobi
Former Undersecretary of Foreign
Affairs, Kenya
RoBioN Kirby
Professor of Mathematics
University of California, Los
Angeles, and Institute for
Advanced Study, Princeton
Lawrence Kohlberg
Professor of Education and Social
Psychology, Harvard University
Alan D. Krisch
Professor of Physics
University of Michigan
N. KUIPER
Professor of Mathematics
University of Amsterdam and
Institute for Advanced Study,
Princeton
William Labov
Professor of Linguistics
Columbia University
K. Gordon Lark
Professor of Biophysics
Kansas State University
Richard Lashov
Professor of Mathematics
University of Chicago
Nehemia Levzion
Coordinator of African Studies
Institute of Asian and African
Studies, Hebrew University,
Jerusalem
Carelton Mabee
Division of History and
Political Economy
SUNY, New Paltz
Milton Mayer
Author, Professor of English
University of Massachusetts
Clifford Matthews
Professor of Chemistry
University of Illinois, Chicago
Ian L. McHarg
Professor of Landscape Architecture
and Regional Planning
University of Pennsylvania
William Mitchell
Professor of Political Science
University of Oregon
Harold J. Morowitz
Associate Professor of Biophysics
Yale University
Lois B. Murphy
Senior Psychologist
Menninger Foundation
C. V. Narasimhan
Chief of Cabinet
United Nations
24
WILLIAM PYLE PHILIPS FUND, Cont.
Jason Nathan
Former Director of Housing and
Redevelopment, New York City
James G. O'Hara
U.S. House of Representatives
Washington, D. C.
Earl Old Person
President, National Congress of
American Indians; Chairman,
Blackfeet Tribe
Browning, Montana
James Olds
Professor of Psychology
California Institute of Technology
George E. Palade
Professor of Cell Biology
Rockefeller University
P. J. E. Peebles
Professor of Physics and Astronomy
Princeton University
TULLIO Regge
Permanent Member, Institute for
Advanced Study, Princeton
T. Y. Rogers, Jr.
Director of Affiliates
Southern Christian Leadership
Conference
John Robert Ross
Professor of Linguistics
Massachusetts Institute of
Technology
Bayard Rustin
Director, A. Philip Randolph
Institute, New York
Arthur Schawlow
Chairman, Department of Physics
Stanford University
Jean-Pierre Serre
Professor of Mathematics
College de France, Paris
Gene Sharp
Center for International Affairs
Harvard University
Lavv^rence Siebenman
Professor of Mathematics
Institute for Advanced Study
Princeton
Elliott Skinner
Professor of Anthropology
Columbia University
Former U.S. Ambassador to the
Republic of Upper Volta
Roman Smoluchowski
Professor in the Solid State Group
Department of Aerospace
Engineering
Princeton University
Larry Stein
Department of Psychopharmacology
Wyeth Laboratories
Gilbert Steiner
Brookings Institution
Washington, D. C.
Fritz Stern
Seth Low Professor of History
Columbia University
Courtney E. Stevens
Fellow and Tutor, Magdalen College
Oxford University
William A. Stewart
Director, Education Study Center
Washington, D. C.
Dennis Sullivan
Professor of Mathematics
Massachusetts Institute of
Technology
Kip Thorne
Professor of Astronomy
California Institute of Technology
Jui H. Wang
Eugene Higgins Professor of
Physical Chemistry
Yale University
Joseph Weber
Professor of Physics
University of Maryland
Arthur Wightman
Professor of Mathematics and
Physics, Princeton University
Harris Wofford
President-elect
Bryn Mawr College
25
SCHOLARS IN THE HUMANITIES FUND
James Boeringer
Professor of Music
Susquehanna University
William S. A. Dale
Chairman, Department of Fine Arts
University of Western Ontario
Gerald F. Else
Professor of Classical Studies
University of Michigan
Eric Havelock
Professor of Classics
Yale University
William H. Poteat
Professor of Religion and Culture
Duke University
Richard H. Robinson
Professor of Indian Studies
University of Michigan
Walter Sokel
Professor of German
Stanford University
Robert Suderburg
Professor of Music
University of Wisconsin
J. A. B. van Buitenen
Professor of Sanskrit
University of Chicago
Jerome H. Wood, Jr.
Assistant Professor of History
Temple University
WILLIAM GIBBONS RHOADS FUND
Alfred Mann
Professor of Music, Rutgers
University, Conductor, Bach
Choir of Bethlehem, Pa.
Barbara De Pasquale
Violinist, Philadelphia Orchestra
Frederick Rzewski and His Group
"Musica Elettronica Viva"
Rome, Italy
Donald Swann
Composer
London, England
Stan Van Der Beek
Film maker
Artist in Residence
Massachusetts Institute
Technology
of
LINCOLN FAMILY FOUNDATION FUND FOR THE HUMANITIES
Giles Constable
Henry Charles Lea Professor of
Medieval History
Harvard University
William Theodore Debary
Chairman, Department of
Oriental Thought
Columbia University
Donald Keene
Professor of Japanese Literature
Columbia University
New York Trio da Camera
New York
Nathan Rotenstreich
Former Chairman, Department of
Philosophy, and former Rector
Hebrew University, Jerusalem
J. B. Trapp
Warburg Institute
London
THOMAS SHIPLEY FUND
Ralph Ellison
Author
New York
MARY FARNUM BROWN FUND
Daniel Day Williams
Union Theological Seminary
New York
26
ACADEMIC COUNCIL
The Academic Council consists of the President as chairman; the
Provost; the Associate Dean as executive secretary; three elected divi-
sional representatives of the faculty, one to be elected yearly; and the
two faculty representatives to the Board. The Academic Council:
1) appoints the standing faculty committees, 2) makes recommendations
to the President on faculty appointments, reappointments, promotions,
and tenure in accordance with accepted procedures, and 3) may con-
sider matters having college-wide academic implications which are re-
ferred to it by the President and/or by members of the Council. The
elected members of the Academic Council for the academic year begin-
ning September 1, 1970 are Mr. Glickman (Social Sciences), Mr. Santer
(Natural Sciences), and Mr. Kosman (Humanities).
STANDING COMMITTEES OF THE FACULTY
(The President and Provost are ex-officio members of all committees)
Administrative Advisory: Marcel Gutwirth, Chairman
Samuel Gubins, Sidney Perloe, Michael Showe, Robert Stiefel
Community Concerns: Holland Hunter, Chairman
Preston Rowe, Francis Connolly, William Docherty,
Theodore Hetzel, Sara Shumer
Student Standing and Programs: John Spielman, Chairman
Patrick McCarthy, David Potter, Walter Trela
Computing Center: Robert Gavin, Chairman
Louis Green, Eric Hansen
Distinguished Visitors: Richard Luman, Chairman
Charles Stegeman, Claude Wintner
Educational Environment: Josiah Thompson, Chairman
Thomas Benham, Robert Butman, Bruce Long, William Reese
Educational Policy: Colin MacKay, Chairman
Edwin Bronner, John Davison, Dale Husemoller,
William Hohenstein, Roger Lane, David Potter
Faculty Research and Study: Douglas Heath, Chairman
John McKenna, Douglas Miller
Inter-College Cooperation: Linda Gerstein, Chairman
Richard Bernstein, John Cary, Louis Green
27
•:J^
■i^-'4--A<C
-
^^^Mh^^^L ^- 1^^^^^^^
■*?s
', " ;V^ *
jjg-ai
.Wf*'
kW^..^,,^
.,,>?*itt»*-*VJ»»' ^^
■^^^^kKK '^'fliVSHi
THE
COLLEGE
AIMD ITS
PROGRAM
PURPOSE
Haverford College is dedicated to academic excellence — created in
an environment of concern for the growth of individuals within the
College community.
The College places strong emphasis upon a rigorous academic pro-
gram. That program is flexible in form and content to meet the needs of
individual students, but this flexibility assumes that the men of ability
who come here will use their ability to the highest degree.
Our faculty is noted above all for its strength in teaching. These men
and women are scholars who love their work and expect to transmit to
students their enthusiasm and high standards in their respective fields.
They are teaching at a small liberal arts college as an opportunity for
creative interchange with individual students. They expect much from
themselves and their students; they expect to learn as well as to teach
in this close relationship with undergraduates.
We aim to utilize the full resources of the College, in and out of the
classroom, to promote the personal and intellectual growth of our
students. Through an ambitious program of visiting lecturers, through
arts and cultural activities, through self-government and service pro-
grams, through a student-centered athletic program, and through day-
to-day living on campus, we stress each man's development. We ask
our students to give of themselves, even as they draw new strengths
from others. The classroom and the extra-curricular world are, for us,
inseparable parts of the educational environment. And we seek excel-
lence throughout that entire environment.
We strive to create an atmosphere in which personal and intellectual
integrity, honesty, and concern for others are dominant forces. We
expect every student who studies with us to adhere to the Honor Code
as it is adopted each year by the Students' Association. That code is a
way of life at Haverford. The Coflege does not have as many formal
rules as most other colleges; what it has instead is something more
demanding — a set of expectations about how men will govern their
affairs and conduct themselves so as to show respect and concern for
others around them. We welcome students' participation in making the
College still better in the future. We expect our students to contribute
responsibly and considerately, individually and collectively, in the task
of fashioning new programs that let us achieve our core aims of
academic excellence in a humane and stimulating atmosphere.
Haverford College has strong Quaker roots. The continuing influence
of the Religious Society of Friends shows most clearly in our emphasis
30
on the interplay of the individual and the community, our concern for
the uses to which men put their expanding knowledge, and our interest
in educating ethical human beings and leaders. No religious activities
are compulsory, and admission is open to men of all faiths. A weekly
meeting on Thursday mornings (Fifth Day) is a visible sign of our
communal searching, through both silence and the spoken word, for
the principles by which able men can lead moral lives.
HISTORY
Founded in 1833, Haverford was the first college established in the
United States by members of the Society of Friends. Our founders said
they wanted to provide an "enlarged and liberal system of instruction"
to meet the intellectual needs of "Friends on this continent." They pre-
dicted that their course of instruction in science, mathematics and
classical languages would be "as extensive as given in any literary
institution in this country."
And so it has been.
They built their new school (one solid, stone structure at first) in the
center of the rolling farmland west of Philadelphia — in the Welsh
Tract, a large area originally set aside by William Penn for Quaker
immigrants from Wales. A British gardener was brought over to land-
scape the grounds. His work remains today on Haverford's beautiful
216-acre campus. At first the new institution, called Haverford School,
was open only to Quakers. In 1847 non-Quakers were admitted. In
1856 the school became Haverford College — a degree-granting
institution.
LOCATION
Geographically, we're right where our founders put us. But the
area has changed considerably since 1833. Today, Haverford is in
the heart of Philadelphia's verdant Main Line suburbs, just 10 miles
west of the city. Center-city, with its urban advantages and challenges,
is only 20 minutes away. The area offers extensive cultural, scientific,
commercial, and industrial facilities. Within a half-hour drive from our
campus there are some 20 other colleges and universities. Transporta-
tion is good. The Penn-Central Railroad's Haverford station is a brief
walk from our campus. For auto traffic, we front on U. S. Route 30,
Lancaster Pike, just a few miles south of the Pennsylvania Turnpike.
By train, we're two hours from New York City and three hours from
31
Washington. Philadelphia International Airport is a half-hour express-
way drive.
Yet the campus remains the park-like, peaceful, natural setting that
the first students found in 1833. The years have only matured the
plantings and increased the beauty. We have improved things here and
there. Our Edward Woolman Arboretum and Nature Walk, combining
beauty and botany, for example, was created by an alumnus of the
class of 1893 who initiated the project with a generous donation, spent
some 15 of his last years working on the walk — often with his own
hands — and then left a bequest to finish the job.
RESOURCES
LIBRARY: The library was planned and developed to provide intellectual
resources needed to sustain our academic curriculum. Over the years,
the faculty has selected the majority of the volumes. Most books are on
open shelves accessible to students for almost 100 hours each week
during the college year.
Through special collections we provide opportunities for independent
research in several fields, notably Quaker history. Independent study in
the social sciences is aided by our Government Depository and Inter-
national Documents Collections. And there are other collections of
manuscripts, orientalia and Renaissance literature. These special collec-
tions are described later in this section.
The library currently holds about 280,000 volumes and receives some
1,800 periodicals and serials. It is an academic library, planned and
operated for our students and faculty; but alumni and members of the
Library Associates also are welcome guests.
The library building was constructed in several stages. The first
portion of the Thomas Wistar Brown Library was built in 1864.
Successive additions were made; and in 1968 we constructed the large,
connected James P. Magill Library, named for a member of the class
of 1907. As part of the Magill Library project, the older adjoining
structure was thoroughly renovated and air-conditioned.
The library now has about 73,000 sq. ft. of floor space, six levels,
shelf space for 500,000 volumes, seating capacity for 500 persons, and
a fire-proof vault, with controlled temperature and humidity, for rare
books and manuscripts. There are 260 study carrels. Thirty are enclosed
and reserved for faculty, and the rest are for students. Of those, 24 are
soundproof for students who want to use typewriters in the library.
Special reading and work areas include the following:
32
The Borton Wing, named for Hugh Borton, class of 1926, former
president of Haverford College, contains the Harvey Peace Research
Room and the vault for rare books and manuscripts.
The Crawford Mezzanine provides writing and study tables for 44
students. It honors Alfred R. Crawford, class of 1931, former vice
president of the college.
The Giimmere-Morley Room, a browsing room, is in memory of
Professors F. B. Gummere, class of 1872, and Frank Morley, Sr.
The Hires Room, named for Harrison Hires, class of 1910, and
Mrs. Hires, is an audio room offering both discs and tapes.
The Rufus M. Jones Study, a reconstruction of a room in Rufus
Jones's home, contains his books and furniture. Jones, a noted Quaker
philosopher, Haverford alumnus and teacher (class of 1885), spent
almost 50 years on our campus.
The Microforms Room is equipped with microfilm, microfiche, and
microcard readers plus microfilm files of The New York Times, the
Philadelphia Public Ledger and Landmarks of Science.
The Christopher Morley Alcove serves as a browsing area and
contains exhibits and collections of the writings of Christopher Morley,
a member of the class of 1910.
The C. Christopher Morris Cricket Library and Collection is a
handsome room housing material on the history of American cricket,
with special emphasis on the sport at Haverford College and in the
Philadelphia area.
The Philips Wing was renovated in 1952 and named in honor of
one of our principal benefactors, William Pyle Philips, class of 1902.
Plans call for use of this wing as a special reading room for semi-rare
books and periodicals.
The Sharpless Gallery was named in honor of Isaac Sharpless,
president of Haverford from 1887 to 1917, and furnished by the class
of 1917. A selection of the college's paintings hangs there.
The Strawbridge Seminar Room is used for seminars and com-
mittee meetings.
The Treasure Room, provided through the generosity of Morris E.
Leeds, class of 1888 and a former chairman of the board of managers,
contains part of the Quaker Collection. Staff offices and research
33
facilities for visiting scholars are provided in the Treasure Room and
Borton Wing.
Special libraries are maintained in Stokes Hall for chemistry, physics,
and mathematics; in Sharpless Hall for biology; in the Drinker Music
Center for music; and in Hilles Laboratory for engineering.
We have nine major special collections: The Quaker Collection, the
Tobias Collection of the Writings of Rufus M. Jones, the Rufus M.
Jones Collection on Mysticism, the Charles Roberts Autograph Letter
Collection, the French Drama of the Romantic Period Collection, the
Christopher Morley Collection of Autographed Letters, the William
Pyle Philips Collection, the Harris Collection of Ancient and Oriental
Manuscripts, and the Lockwood Collection of Works on the Renaissance.
The Quaker Collection began in 1867 when the board of managers
decided to gather "an important reference library, especially for works
and manuscripts relating to our own Religious Society." At that time,
the library already contained many Quaker books and manuscripts,
including the "Letters and Papers of William Penn."
Today, The Quaker Collection is a major repository for both printed
and manuscript material about the Society of Friends. Its 25,000 books
include more than 4,000 volumes printed before 1700. The nucleus of
these early works is the William H. Jenks Collection of Friends Tracts,
containing 1 ,600 separately bound titles, mostly from the 1 7th century.
There are several thousand pamphlets and serials in our nearly com-
plete set of bound volumes of Quaker periodicals. In addition, we have
a magnificent collection of Yearly Meeting minutes. The Quaker Col-
lection's 86,000 manuscripts, documents, maps and pictures include the
journals of about 700 important Friends, the papers of leading Quaker
families. Meeting records, archives of Quaker organizations, and
material on Friends' relationships with Indians.
Through gifts and purchases, we add to The Quaker Collection
constantly. We especially welcome gifts of family papers, books and
other material related to the history of Friends. On request, the librarian
will send a brochure giving more information on The Quaker Collection.
The Rufus M. Jones Collection contains 1,360 books and pam-
phlets on mysticism published between the 15th century and the present.
The Tobias Collection includes practically the complete writings of
Quaker philosopher Rufus Jones. There are 325 separate volumes and
eight boxes of pamphlets and extracts. Jones' personal papers, also kept
at Haverford, generally are available to scholars.
34
The Roberts Collection contains more than 20,000 manuscript
items such as a complete set of the signers of the Declaration of
Independence and letters of famous authors, statesmen, educators,
artists, scientists, ecclesiastics and monarchs. It also includes valuable
papers on religious, political and military history.
The French Drama Collection was given to the College by William
Maul Measey. It consists of several hundred popular plays produced in
Paris between 1790 and 1850.
The Morley Collection comprises about 1,000 letters and memo-
randa selected by the late author, Christopher Morley, from his cor-
respondence files. There are autographed letters from more than 100
contemporary authors. Morley was born on our campus.
The Philips Collection primarily consists of rare books and manu-
scripts, mostly of the Renaissance period. Among the Philips treasures
are first editions of Dante, Copernicus, Spenser, the King James Bible,
Milton, Newton and the four folios of Shakespeare.
The Harris Collection has more than 60 Hebrew, Latin, Arabic,
Syriac and Ethiopian rolls and codices collected by J. Rendel Harris.
The Lockwood Collection consists of some 3,000 volumes of works
on the Renaissance gathered and given to us by Dean P. Lockwood,
librarian from 1920 to 1949.
The offerings of our library are widened by affiliations. For example,
we maintain a cooperative arrangement with nearby Bryn Mawr and
Swarthmore colleges. The library facilities of each college are open to
faculty and students of all three schools. The Philadelphia Bibliograph-
ical Center and Union Library Catalogue — the largest regional cooper-
ative catalog in America — enables users of our library to locate
books in more than 200 Philadelphia-area libraries.
ACADEMIC BUILDINGS: The one sohd, stone structure we started with in
1833 cost $19,251.40. It's still here. Now it is called Founders Hall, but
for years it was just known as "The College." Today, it houses mostly
administration and faculty offices. Since Founders Hall went up, more
than 20 major buildings and over 35 lesser structures have been con-
structed on campus. Most are shown on the campus map at the rear of
this catalog. Many are the homes of faculty members, most of whom
live on or near the campus.
The major classroom and laboratory buildings are Chase Hall, the
35
Hilles Laboratory of Applied Sciences, the Strawbridge Memorial
Observatory, the Henry S. Drinker Music Center, Stokes Hall, Sharpless
Hall, the Lyman Beecher Hall Building and Yarnall House.
Hilles houses the computing center and the business office.
Stokes is the home of the physics, chemistry, and mathematics
departments. It has classrooms, laboratories, offices, a 205-seat audi-
torium, and our science library with space for 20,000 volumes.
Sharpless contains the biology and psychology departments — mainly
classrooms, offices and laboratories.
Hall Building contains an African-studies room as well as a perma-
nent display of primitive art. It also houses classrooms and offices.
Drinker houses the music department, record collection, music
library, practice facilities, classrooms, and offices.
Yarnall House is the temporary quarters of our Center for Non-
violent Resolution of Conflict.
SCIENCE FACILITIES: We are equipped for teaching and research in
modern nuclear and atomic physics. There are six general physics
laboratories for course work, seven specialized laboratories for student-
faculty research, and two rooms used exclusively by seniors for their
major projects. Our physics equipment includes: an X-ray unit for
powder diffraction work, a subcritical reactor containing 2.5 tons of
uranium, a doubly shielded room for work with electromagnetic radia-
tion, lasers, multi-channel pulse-height analyzers, a PDP-9 computer,
and equipment for the study of low -temperature phenomena down to
1°K.
Our chemistry facilities enable students to use sophisticated instru-
mentation extensively at all levels of study. There are five laboratories
for course work, an instrument room, specialized-equipment rooms, and
six laboratories in which students conduct research projects jointly with
the faculty. Chemistry equipment available for routine use by students
includes: a Varian A 60 nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometer; a
C. E. C. 21-620 mass spectrometer; a Packard Tri-Carb liquid scin-
tillation spectrometer for use in radioactive tracer studies; a Hitachi-
Perkin-Elmer visible and ultra-violet scanning spectrophotometer;
two F. & M. research gas chromatographs, one of which has a flame
ionization detector, and a Wang 700 B programmable electronic cal-
culator. The X-ray laboratory is outfitted with a Picker multifocus
36
X-ray generator, an Enraf-Nonius integrating precession camera, and
associated apparatus which students can use in their projects to deter-
mine molecular structures. In addition to these major items, there are
simpler spectrophotometers and simpler apparatus for work with radio-
active tracers. The physical-chemistry laboratory equipment includes a
Bausch and Lomb grating spectrograph, six high-vacuum systems, bomb
and microcalorimeters, and a variety of high precision electrical and
electronic apparatus. Mettler single-pan balances and ground-joint
glassware are used in all instructional laboratories. We have a glass-
blowing shop and a science-division machine shop.
Grants from the National Science Foundation may be available to
our chemistry students who wish to participate in summer research
projects at Haverford.
Haverford is well equipped for the study of modern molecular
biology. In Sharpless Hall, two of the floors devoted to biology house
a large freshman-sophomore laboratory and a junior laboratory equipped
to handle all aspects of cell biology. One of these floors also has animal
rooms and shops for glass-blowing, woodworking and metalworking.
The third biology floor is where senior students work with their profes-
sors on joint research projects. That floor has several constant-temper-
ature rooms, ultracentrifuges, a high-resolution electron miscroscope,
spectrophotometers, liquid scintillation counters, and an automatic
amino-acid analyzer.
Psychology has the top two floors of Sharpless Hall, containing
animal quarters, an animal laboratory with sound-proofed and elec-
tronically controlled experimental rooms, a set of individual animal- and
human-research rooms, a perception laboratory, a social-personality
observation laboratory with one-way mirrors, and a shop. All the labo-
ratory rooms are wired to a central control panel, permitting us to
create complex communication and control patterns. We also have a
physiological-psychology room for animal work.
The Observatory contains: a 10-inch, f/15 refractor; several smaller
telescopes; a meridian circle; a zenith telescope; a spectrohelioscope; an
astrographic mounting with two 4-inch f/7 cameras, one corrected for
blue wave lengths, the other corrected for red; and a 4-inch guide
telescope; a Grant comparator with x- and y- traverse and automatic
position and density recording; various smaller instruments and our
astronomical library of some 3,000 bound volumes.
COMPUTING CENTER: With Bryn Mawr and Swarthmore colleges, we
maintain on campus an $800,000 computing center used mainly for
37
student instruction and for faculty and student research. Smaller com-
puters on the three affiliated campuses handle simple local tasks, while
referring more ambitious computing projects to the main equipment at
Haverford.
The main unit, an IBM System/360 Model 44, has two memory
units: a high-speed unit with a memory of 32,768 words and a reading
speed of one million words per second, and a slow-speed unit with a
memory of almost five million words and a reading speed of 39,000
words per second. Our second, smaller computer is a PDP-8/I unit
manufactured by the Digital Equipment Corporation. This unit links
the equipment at the other two colleges to our main computer. The
PDP-8/I is connected by remote terminals to laboratories, offices and
classrooms on our campus and to other schools in the area. We also
have several key punches, a sorter, a reproducer, a tabulator and other
equipment.
All computing equipment may be used by students. In addition to
the usual scientific applications, our computing center also is used for
work in the social sciences, the arts and humanities. A committee, with
faculty and student members from all three campuses, supervises the
computing center. Students serve on the center's operating staff.
RESIDENCE HALLS: As an integral part of our educational philosophy,
we encourage students to become as involved as possible in our com-
munity life. Normally we expect students to live on campus — except
for married students and those living at home. Freshmen are assigned
the rooms available after the other classes have made their choices;
new students are notified of their housing assignments before they arrive
on campus in September.
We expect students to treat college property with care; we hold a
student financially responsible for any damage to his room.
About 95 per cent of the students live on campus — mostly in suites
with two, three, four or six private bed-study rooms adjoining a common
living room. Barclay Hall houses 100 men in two-man suites, single
rooms and double rooms. Lloyd Hall has mostly six-man suites,
although there are a few two-man suites; total occupancy is 108 men.
Leeds Hall, with 52 men, has both four-man suites and single rooms.
Gummere Hall has two-, three-, and four-man suites plus some single
rooms — 1 29 places altogether. Jones and Comfort Halls each house
61 students in three- and four-man suites plus some single rooms; each
hall has a suite for visiting scholars. Lunt Hall, with three- and four-
38
man suites and single rooms, holds 63 students. Williams House, for
Spanish-speaking students, accommodates seven men. French House
contains a faculty apartment and student quarters for 13 men; and 15
men are quartered in "710" House.
With the exception of Barclay, all residence halls are either fairly
new or completely renovated. Renovation of Barclay is scheduled for
completion in 1971.
OTHER BUILDINGS: The offices of the president, provost and admissions
director are in Roberts Hall, a columned building that also contains a
700-seat auditorium. The dean of students, associate dean of the
college, recorder, development office, alumni office and public relations
office are in Founders Hall. The business office is in Hilles; and the
Union building houses the bookstore, snack bar, student lounges, and
the college radio station WHRC.
The ten-bed Morris Infirmary contains a clinic, an emergency treat-
ment room, an acute-care unit, and an isolation unit for contagious
diseases. It has its own kitchen and quarters for resident nurses.
We opened a new dining center in 1969.
ART COLLECTION: Haverford's small permanent art collection includes
paintings and drawings by Homer, Kurd, Inness, Peale, Sargent and
Whistler. From time to time, there are also temporary exhibitions of
paintings, drawings and photographs on campus. At the beginning of
each semester, we lend students framed reproductions of outstanding
works of art to hang in their rooms. We also lend a few originals.
MUSIC: The music library contains a large collection of music scores,
including the complete works of several composers. Our record collec-
tion, started with a Carnegie Corporation gift, is used for teaching and
study. There are nine practice pianos and an electric practice organ on
campus. In Roberts Hall, where larger concerts are held, there are a
Steinway grand piano and a Schlicker pipe organ. Professional concerts
add much to the college year.
ATHLETIC FACILITIES: The gymnasium, the Alumni Field House and
our other athletic facilities are described later in the section on physical
education.
39
ADMISSION
The policy of Haverford College is to admit to the freshman class
those applicants who, in the opinion of the College, are best qualified to
profit by the opportunities which Haverford offers and at the same time
to contribute to undergraduate life. Due regard is given not only to
scholarly attainment, as shown by school record and examination, but
also to character and personality, plus interest and ability in extracur-
ricular activities. Applicants compete for admission to a carefully se-
lected and comparatively small student body — no more than 700 men.
A candidate's preparatory course should include a minimum of: four
years of English; three years of mathematics, including two years of
algebra; three years of one foreign language, in preference to two years
in each of two languages; a laboratory science; and a year in history or
social studies. The candidate's personal interests dictate what additional
secondary-school courses he takes in foreign language, mathematics,
science, social studies and history. Most candidates will have taken
honors, enriched or advanced-placement courses if offered in their
school.
Each applicant must take the Scholastic Aptitude Test and three
achievement tests of the College Entrance Examination Board before
February of his senior year. The English Composition Test is required
as one of those three achievement tests; but the candidate may choose
any other two tests he wants.
The applicant is responsible for completing all arrangements to take
the tests and to have the scores reported directly to Haverford. Infor-
mation about them may be obtained from his school guidance officer or
from the College Entrance Examination Board, Box 592, Princeton,
N.J. 08540.
A candidate for freshman admission should apply early in the senior
year. His application should be accompanied by a check or money
order for $15, drawn to the order of Haverford College. This applica-
tion fee is not refundable. The deadline for receipt of freshman applica-
tions is January 31; all supporting credentials must be received by
February 15. We begin reviewing applications in January, and complete
our decisions in early April. Applicants will be notified by mid-April.
We hope the candidate will visit the campus because a visit is the
best way he can learn about Haverford. Student-guided tours of the
campus and interviews with a member of the admissions staff should
be scheduled in advance with the admissions office. The telephone
40
I
number is (215) 649-9600, ext. 223; the mailing address is Haverford
College, Haverford, Pennsylvania 19041.
The admissions office is open from 9:30 a.m. to 4 p.m. on Mondays
to Fridays. During the school year it is also open from 9 a.m. to noon
on Saturdays. The admissions staff is not available to interview candi-
dates in February and March, when decisions are being made.
Haverford alumni in various sections of the country have volunteered
to meet prospective candidates and to give first-hand information about
us. Their names and addresses can be found toward the rear of this
catalog under "Alumni Representatives."
EARLY-DECISION: We offer an early-decision plan for candidates whose
first choice is Haverford. Early-decision candidates must take the re-
quired College Board examinations in their junior year of secondary
school. We must have their application before November 1 of their
senior year.
TRANSFER STUDENTS: Haverford College admits a small number of
transfer students each year. In addition to filing his application, a
transfer candidate must submit a secondary-school transcript on our
form, the results of his College Board examinations, a college tran-
script, and a letter of recommendation from a responsible official of the
college that he is attending. The application deadline is May 1 ; decisions
are usually announced in June.
ADVANCED STANDING: If a student is qualified, he may be permitted to
omit one of the introductory courses — proceeding directly to work at
the intermediate level in that subject. Some departments give placement
examinations to determine a student's qualifications; other departments
are less formal.
Students who have taken high-school courses under the Advanced
Placement Program may take the tests in these subjects given by the
College Entrance Examination Board each May. If a student does well
on these tests, we may give him advanced placement, or college credit,
or both.
We also may grant credit for work a student does at another college
before he enters Haverford. To be considered for such credit, the stu-
dent must arrange to have the transcript of that work sent to us. Under
our Flexibility Program, a student can make special use of such credits.
41
EXPENSES
We consider a regular student to be one who takes four or more
courses in a given semester, or who has been granted permission under
the FlexibiHty Program to carry fewer courses.
The tuition charge for all regular students is now $2,325 for the
academic year. For special students, tuition is currently $350 per course,
per semester. The residence fee is $1,300. There is also a unit fee of
$175 per year.
These fees — tuition, residence and unit — total $3,800 per year. We
expect rising costs will force an increase for the academic year beginning
in September, 1971.
The residence fee covers board-and-room charges when college is in
session. This includes: heat; electric light; weekly housekeeping service;
and the use of bedroom furniture, including bureau, table, chair, and a
bed (the linen for which is furnished and laundered by the College). We
ask students to supply any other furniture they want, plus blankets and
towels.
The unit fee covers the following: student activities fee: admission to
the art series (entertainment and cultural events) ; laboratory fees; health
fee; accident insurance (a maximum of $1000 within one year of each
accident); psychological tests when we require them; and a diploma.
We have four scheduled vacation recesses during the school year:
Thanksgiving, Christmas, midyear recess, and spring vacation. With
minor exceptions, student services and facilities and academic facilities
are closed or drastically curtailed during vacation periods. An extra
room-charge of $3 per day is made for students remaining on campus
during the Christmas or spring vacations.
We also require a $150 deposit, payable in full before the beginning
of the first semester, to cover the cost of books and any other incidental
charges that may arise during the school year. On January 15 this
deposit is brought up to $150 by billing the student for charges already
made against it. Each student's deposit account must have a balance,
on May 15, adequate to cover all final charges. If this bill, or any other
indebtedness, is not paid by the end of the semester, we withhold credits
for the work performed. Any unspent balance is refunded at the end of
the academic year.
Bills are rendered August 15 and January 15 for the following
semester's tuition, board, room, unit fee, and deposit. They must be
paid in full before the beginning of the semester. To avoid last minute
42
congestion, we ask that bills be paid by mail in advance. If the fees
are not paid, we won't consider the student as enrolled at the college.
When a student requires a special diet for medical reasons, and this
is approved by our physician, we make a charge of $8 weekly. This
charge may be larger if the special foods are unusually expensive.
We charge freshmen $35 to cover the cost of their orientation week,
called customs week. (New students who are not freshmen come for the
last portion of customs week and are charged a fee of $20).
A student's official transcript normally will not be sent until all out-
standing charges — fees, books, library fines and other incidental
charges — have been paid.
We do not make a reduction or refund of the tuition charge after the
first two weeks of any semester; but if a student withdraws before the
completion of the first two weeks, we'll make a complete refund of his
tuition. In case of withdrawal or absence because of illness, a full refund
of the room-and-board fee cannot be made because overhead expenses
continue. However, if a student withdraws more than four weeks before
the end of a semester, or is absent because of illness for four weeks or
more, we'll make a partial refund of the room-and-board fee in the
amount of $20 for each week of absence. We do not refund the unit fee
for any reason.
COLLEGE RESPONSIBILITY: The college is not responsible for loss because
of fire, theft, or any other cause. Students who want fire insurance can
get information at the business office.
MONTHLY PAYMENTS: Students who prefer to pay tuition and other fees
in monthly instalments may do so through the Bryn Mawr Trust Com-
pany. Details of this plan, including charges of financing, may be
obtained from our business office.
FINANCIAL AID
For its size, Haverford traditionally has had comparatively large
endowment and trust funds. The income from these investments, plus
annual gifts from alumni and other friends, allow us to maintain high
educational standards and to underwrite a substantial financial-aid pro-
gram at the same time. But it costs increasingly more to provide a
quality, liberal education. The body of knowledge expands; new pro-
grams are required; expenses in general mount; and we constantly seek
new endowments and trusts.
43
In total, it costs about $8,500 per year to give one student a Haver-
ford education with its low student-faculty ratio, its individual instruction
by highly qualified teachers and its modern laboratory and library
facilities. Fortunately, the student is never requii-ed to pay the full cost.
Our endowment and other funds underwrite a large portion of the
expense. As a result, each student, whether he receives formal financial
aid or not, starts out at Haverford with about 55 per cent of the total
costs of this education paid. Through his tuition and other fees, the
student pays the remaining 45 per cent.
The college has many ways to help students who can't meet their
expenses. More than 35 per cent of our students receive formal financial
aid from the college, and another 10 per cent receive financial aid from
other sources. In short, more than 45 per cent of our students get
financial help — almost half the student body.
We emphasize that no able student who is seriously interested in
Haverford should hesitate to apply because of financial reasons.
The financial aid program — which includes scholarships, loans, and
jobs — is administered by a committee composed of the director of
admissions as chairman, the associate dean and the dean of students.
Aid is awarded on the basis of merit and need. Although no aid is
awarded for more than one year, it is our practice to continue a student's
aid if his academic and personal record is satisfactory and his need
continues.
Aid is not granted to a student whose previous college bill has not
been paid in full.
New students requesting aid must file a Parents Confidential State-
ment with the College Scholarship Service at the appropriate CSS office
before January 15th. The applicant can get the CSS form from his
school guidance officer or directly from CSS at Box 176, Princeton,
N.J. 18540.
Students who are enrolled at the college and who need aid must file
applications with the director of admissions before April 15.
Further details about financial aid may be obtained from the director
of admissions.
PLACEMENT SERVICE
We have a modest but effective placement service. The alumni office
maintains current information on jobs open in business, government and
institutions. We arrange for personnel recruiters to interview our students
— at the student's request.
44
si
4
CURRICULUM
Haverford is a liberal arts college. Its curriculum is designed to
develop in its students the capacity to learn and to understand, to make
sound and thoughtful judgments. The requirements for the degree en-
courage the exercise of these skills in each of the broad fields of human
knowledge, and a fuller development of them in a single field of
concentration.
GUIDELINES FOR LIBERAL EDUCATION
In its original meaning "liberal" was applied to those arts and sciences
that were considered worthy of a free man, as opposed to "servile" or
"mechanical" disciplines. "Liberal education" has persisted as an ideal
which is not only worthy of a free man but is the means of liberating
and freeing man by providing him with an understanding and apprecia-
tion of the tradition that has shaped him and the social and natural
world in which he lives.
The purpose of these guidelines is to help the student in planning a
course of study at Haverford. The student should realize that there are
many different types of educational experiences that can take place at an
institution such as Haverford. Each student has a great deal of freedom
and responsibility in planning his course of study at Haverford. It is
expected that, with the help of his adviser, a course of study will be
planned which will be designed to meet the individual's particular inter-
ests, educational background, and intellectual strengths and weaknesses.
While there are disagreements about everything that a liberal education
ought to include, there is a consensus concerning its general shape.
1 . Written and oral communication. One of the most difficult and
important skills is the art of writing and speaking lucidly and coherently.
A student will discover that there are few areas of human knowledge
that he can explore in depth unless he has perfected his abihty to write
and speak effectively. These skills will be stressed in the program of
Freshman Seminars. A student who is weak in the skills of verbal com-
munication is well advised to take courses which pay greater attention
to training in this art.
2. Foreign language. The mastery of a foreign language, ancient or
modern, can not only deepen the student's appreciation of his own
language but can increase his sensitivity and understanding of the nature
of language and can enable him to gain a far more intimate understand-
ing of different cultures. Since many Haverford students continue their
education in graduate school, a student ought to know that many gradu-
45
ate programs require a reading knowledge of at least two foreign
languages.
At present all students are required to take at least one year of foreign
language study at Haverford unless they can satisfy their language re-
quirement by examination. But a student who starts the study of a for-
eign language at Haverford should realize that a single year of study is
insufficient to achieve minimal competence in reading or speaking. While
not required, all students are strongly advised to plan to take two or
more years of formal language study.
3. Mathematics. One remarkable feature of contemporary intel-
lectual evolution is the diverse ways in which almost all areas of human
knowledge have been influenced by the development and application of
mathematics. Increasingly, mathematics is having an important effect on
many areas of the humanities and social sciences. It is becoming a lan-
guage and a tool needed for serious inquiry and understanding of almost
any area of human knowledge.
4. Humanities, social sciences, and natural sciences. The student
should realize that this division of the areas of human knowledge is a
relatively recent development. Some fields that are now considered parts
of the social sciences were once considered to belong to the humanities,
just as the natural sciences were once considered parts of natural phil-
osophy. A primary reason for distinguishing these divisions is that they
do exhibit different emphases, approaches, techniques, basic concepts,
and problems. It is expected that every student at Haverford will acquire
elementary acquaintance with the distinctive approaches, concepts, and
contributions represented by the humanities, social sciences, and natural
sciences. This does not mean that students must gain a survey knowledge
of these three areas. Rather, it is expected that every student will be able
to write and speak effectively about some aspect of these areas which
will display his appreciation for distinctive approaches represented by
these areas of human knowledge.
In planning his course of study a student should keep these aims in
mind. Normally students may achieve these aims by taking courses from
the three divisions of the College. But simply receiving a passing grade
in a course is not necessarily sufficient, of itself, to achieve this basic
mastery. A student should view his courses as only one means for
achieving the mastery expected by the Coflege; he should take advantage
of other educational means to achieve a knowledge of the humanities,
social sciences, and natural sciences.
46
J
FRESHMAN PROGRAM
Each freshman, on entering the College, selects a Freshman Seminar.
In most cases the teacher of that seminar will also be the student's
adviser. A tentative selection of courses is accomplished by the freshman
and his adviser during the orientation (Customs) week. Every effort is
made by the adviser and others (including the Associate Dean, the
Dean of Students, his assistant, the counselors, admissions officers, and
Customs men) to facilitate mutual adaptation between the freshman and
the College. It is anticipated that freshmen wiU "try out" a variety of
courses in the first few days of classes and that considerable course
shifting will occur. A series of standard tests is administered to aU
entrants within the first few days of the first semester. These tests are
helpful in guidance and counseling.
The freshman will be helped to plan a course of study for his first
four semesters, taking into account the "Guidelines for Liberal
Education,"
During the spring of his freshman year he v^dll participate in an
inquiry intended to help him evaluate his progress and program (see
below).
Freshman Seminars
The program of Freshman Seminars is intended to give the student
an exciting and unique educational experience at the very beginning of
his college education. While it is generally accepted that students should
have the chance to experiment with interdepartmental seminars and
individual projects at an advanced level, the freshman seminar program
is designed to make these opportunities available to the freshman.
Freshman Seminars are not intended to be formal introductions to
the various departments of the College. They are taught by members
of all divisions of the College, and have interdisciplinary approaches.
The themes of the seminars represent vital concerns of the faculty and
have been designed to meet a variety of intellectual interests of the
incoming freshman.
The faculty hopes that each student will expose himself to areas of
knowledge and ways of thinking which may be new to him and which
may change altogether his ideas about desirable areas of specialization.
Since it is important that this diversified experience be gained early, the
faculty strongly recommends that the other three courses in each of the
freshman semesters be in three different departments. Sophomores
normally will not be permitted to take more than two courses in the
47
same department in any one semester. The Committee on Student Stand-
ing and Programs will exercise general supervision over unusual combi-
nations of courses.
The courses open to freshmen are generally numbered below 200.
If he is qualified, a freshman may be permitted by the department con-
cerned and by the Associate Dean to take more advanced courses.
FRESHMAN INQUIRY*
In the spring of his freshman year, each student v^ill be required to
participate in a Freshman Inquiry. The purpose of the Inquiry is to
advise the student through a review and evaluation of his performance
and future study plans.
The Inquiry consists of an oral examination and assessment of circa
75 minutes. In preparation, all participating students must prepare a
1 500 word essay describing their current intellectual position and submit
a justified plan for their future course of study. In addition, students may
present one example of what they consider to be their own best work.
In September each freshman and his adviser must draw up a two-year
study plan keeping in mind the "Guidelines for Liberal Education." A
copy of this plan must be filed with the Associate Dean for inclusion in
the student's record. Study plans substantially at variance with the
"guidelines" must be justified in writing by the adviser. Subsequent
substantial departures from the plan of study require a written explana-
tion by the adviser to be submitted to the Associate Dean.
Inquiry committees normally consist of three faculty members and
two seniors, the faculty representing the different divisions of the College,
the seniors to come from different divisions and not from the depart-
ments of the faculty members. Where possible, the student's adviser will
be a member of the Inquiry Committee.
Inquiry committees may simply approve a student's performance and
study plans, or may approve of his performance but suggest changes in
his plan of study, and/or require the student to repeat the Inquiry in his
sophomore year. Committees will discuss their assessment with the
student present and participating. A written version of each student's
assessment will be filed with the Recorder who will transmit copies to
the student and his adviser before registration for the following semester.
*This applies to the Class of 1974 and those following; some members of the
Class of 1973 may be required by the Associate Dean and/or the adviser to take
the Inquiry in the spring of 1971.
48
A copy will also be placed in the student's College record, but it will not
become part of his transcript.
BACHELOR'S DEGREE
To graduate from Haverford College a student must complete suc-
cessfully the equivalent of four years of academic work, a specific
minimum number of semester courses (see below) and five terms of
work in physical education taken in the first two years.
In addition, for the Qass of 1971, a student must include among the
36 courses required for the degree: the former English 11-12 or its
equivalent, the courses needed under the distribution requirement, and
those required by his major department. The requirements for the Class
of 1972 are the same, except that 34 courses are required for the degree.
For the Class of 1973 and those following, a student must include
among the 32 courses required for the degree, one freshman seminar in
each semester of his first year. He must also take an Inquiry (see above) .
To avoid undue specialization the College requires that 21* courses
be passed in departments outside the student's major. Classics majors
and students with double majors automatically satisfy this requirement.
A course cannot be used to satisfy a major department requirement
for the degree if the grade is below 65.
A degree candidate must also meet the standards of his major depart-
ment in work designed to provide, in his senior year, a synthesis and
evaluation of his work in the department.
Each student is accountable to himself and to the College (through
the Committee on Student Standing and Programs) for the use to which
he puts his talents and the resources of the College. This means that a
student who is passing may be dropped and one who is failing may be
permitted to continue. Although he may be permitted to continue at the
College by the Committee on Student Standing and Programs, a student
who fails to pass at least eight semester courses will be considered
academically deficient, as will one who barely passes his courses in any
semester beginnmg with his sophomore year.
Through the Academic Flexibility Program described later, a student
may introduce variations in programs to meet his particular needs.
The degree conferred upon candidates meeting the requirements is
that of Bachelor of Arts, or, upon request from students majoring in the
natural sciences, mathematics, or engineering. Bachelor of Science.
* 19 for the Class of 1972 and those following.
49
Course Load
A normal course load for each semester is considered to be four
courses.* Any student is free to take more than the number of courses
required for the degree, but to take more than five at one time he must
have had a sufficiently strong record the preceding semester, as judged
by the Associate Dean. To take fewer than four courses in any semester,
a student must secure the approval of the Committee on Student Stand-
ing and Programs, with the exception that he may take three and one-
half courses in one semester providing he takes four and one-half in the
other.
Course Intensification
The College believes that experience in a wide diversity of courses
is an essential part of a Haverford education, but the College also
recognizes that students may sometimes profit from the opportunity to
work more intensively in a smaller number of subjects. Therefore, with
the approval of his adviser, a student may register, with the instructor's
permission, for double credit in one course and, in unusual cases, in
more than one. In a double-credit course, the student undertakes an
approved program of independent study in conjunction with a regular
course and submits a paper or passes an examination based on his
independent work. Such independent work is not suitable in all subjects,
and the instructor of the course must be the final judge of whether or
not it should be attempted. In unusual cases a student may apply to the
Committee on Student Standing and Programs for permission to pursue
a reduced program without enrolling in a double-credit course.
Distribution Requirement^
By the end of his sophomore year a student must have passed the
former English 11-12 or its equivalent, and in addition at least two
semester courses in each of the three divisions of the College. For the
purposes of this requirement courses cross-listed between departments
in two divisions will count only in the division in which they are actually
taught. General courses meet distribution requirements in the division
in which they are actually taught. Elementary and intermediate language
courses may not be counted toward distribution requirements.
The departments of the College (including Bryn Mawr departments
of Archaeology, Geology, History of Art and Italian, for which Haver-
ford has no counterparts) are divided into three divisions as follows:
*Prior to the academic year 1969-70 the normal course load was five courses each
semester during the first two years and four each semester during the last two.
tThis applies to the Classes of 1971 and 1972.
50
I
Humanities: Archaeology, Classics, English, Fine Arts, French, Ger-
man, History of Art, Italian, Music, Philosophy,
Religion, Russian and Spanish.
Natural Sciences: Astronomy, Biology, Chemistry, Engineering, Geol-
ogy, Mathematics and Physics.
Social Sciences: Economics, History, Political Science, Psychology,
and Sociology and Anthropology.
Courses taken at Bryn Mawr College will be accepted as satisfying
distribution requirements, but not normally courses taken elsewhere. For
transfer students, credit toward distribution requirements for work
already done is evaluated by the Associate Dean at the time of admission.
Foreign Languages
In order to graduate, a student whose native language is English must
complete one year of a foreign language at Haverford or two years' work
by qualifying examination.
At the time a student is admitted to a department his major super-
visor, in consultation with the student and his language instructors, will
decide whether the student's projected upperclass work and special
interests require him to pursue additional language study, and if so,
what study is required.
Free Electives
A number of courses sufficient to bring the total to at least the num-
ber of semester courses required for the degree shall be chosen by the
student in consultation with his faculty adviser, with the understanding
that the College reserves the right, through the adviser and the Associate
Dean, to prevent unreasonable combinations.
N on- Academic Requirements and Electives
In addition to the semester courses of academic work required, five
terms of non-academic work in physical education are required of each
student during the freshman and sophomore years, unless the student is
excused on medical grounds. Students may select courses for credit
from among offerings in intercollegiate, intramural, and instructional
activities, or they may propose project courses for the approval of the
department chairman. The non-academic program offers courses in
three nine-week terms in the fall, winter and spring.
51
Students who fail to fulfill the non-academic work requirement may
not be permitted to continue at the College. All cases of failure to fulfill
the requirement will be reviewed by a committee consisting of the dean
of students, the chairman of the physical education department and two
students.
Major Concentration
Specific requirements for Major Concentration are stated under the
name of each department. During the fourth semester of his attendance,
each student should confer with the major supervisor of the department
in which he wishes to major, and apply to him for written approval of a
program of courses for the last four semesters. Such a program must
provide for the completion, by the end of the senior year, of approxi-
mately 1 2 semester courses, or the equivalent, at least six of which must
be in the major department and the others in closely related fields.
Should the student's application be rejected by all departments in which
he is interested, he should consult the Associate Dean. Each student is
expected to file with the Associate Dean, before the date specified on
the College calendar, a copy of his major program signed by his major
supervisor. Any student who continues delinquent in this matter,
unless he is excused by the Associate Dean, will be debarred from the
final examinations in his fourth semester. Should the student's application
be rejected by all the departments to which he applies, he will not be
permitted to continue at the College.
A student who applies for permission to become a major in any
department may be rejected for scholastic reasons only. The College
rule on this point is:
If, at the time specified for application, the average of the grades
obtained by a student in the "preliminary courses"* of any de-
partment is 75 or above, the student will be accepted by that
department.
If the average of the grades obtained in these courses is below
70, the student will be accepted in that department only under
exceptional circumstances.
If the average of the grades obtained in these courses is 70 or
above, but below 75, the decision will be at the discretion of the
major supervisor.
^"Preliminary courses" are any courses the student may already have taken in
the department to which he is applying. If the applicant has not already taken
any courses in that department, the department may name courses in other
departments which are to be regarded as "preliminary."
52
A student who has been formally accepted as a major by any depart-
ment has the right to remain as a major in that department as long as
he is in college. Should he wish to change from one department to
another after the beginning of his fifth semester, the change can be made
only with the consent of the new major supervisor and the Associate
Dean.
The College affirms the responsibility of each department to make the
work in the major field as comprehensive as possible for the senior.
There is a need, in the senior year especially, to challenge the student's
powers of analysis and synthesis and to foster the creative use of the
knowledge and skills that he has acquired in his previous studies. There
is also the need to evaluate the performance of the senior in the field of
his major, not only to safeguard the academic standards of the College
but to help the student discover where he stands at this moment in his
career. In short, synthesis and evaluation in some form are both essential.
While upholding these educational objectives, the College recognizes
that they may be achieved by various means, such as (1) a Senior
Departmental Study course, at the end of which the student takes a
comprehensive examination, (2) a thesis or advanced project paper,
(3) a course or courses specially designed or designated, or (4) some
combination of these or other means.
Each department, therefore, in its statement of major requirements
is expected to specify the particular mode of synthesis and form of
evaluation that it has adopted for the senior year.
Examinations in courses in the major subject taken in the last
semester of the senior year may be omitted at the discretion of the
major supervisor.
Courses taken in summer school will not satisfy Haverford course
requirements for the major unless prior written approval is granted by
the major supervisor.
A student who has demonstrated unusual maturity and who has
special interests and abilities may be permitted to arrange an inter-
departmental major. The program of courses and the nature of the
comprehensive examination will be worked out at the time the major is
selected by the student in consultation with, and subject to, the approval
of the chairmen of the departments concerned, one of whom will be
designated as major supervisor for that student. The permission of the
Associate Dean is also required for an interdepartmental major.
In rare cases, and only for high-ranking students, a double major may
be arranged, in which the student takes the complete major in each of
53
two departments. In order to take a double major, a student must re-
ceive permission from the Associate Dean as well as from the chairman
of each of the departments concerned.
It is possible for a student, through the Academic Flexibility Program,
to design his own major.
There also exists (largely through the initiative of an interested stu-
dent) an Urban Studies major, described in detail elsewhere in this
catalog, which allows a focus provided by none of the departments of
the College but which is based on work offered by the departments.
Independent Study Courses
Most departments offer Independent Study Courses, numbered 480f
and 480i, for the purpose of encouraging independent work by qualified
students. These courses provide opportunities to investigate topics not
covered in formal courses, to do extensive reading on a subject, to do
field work, or to do library research. A student wishing to undertake
independent study must secure the permission of his adviser for the
project and of a faculty supervisor prior to registering for the course.
Members of the faculty are under no obligation to supervise Independent
Study Courses. Independent study done without faculty supervision
will not be given College credit. Requirements such as examinations or
papers are determined jointly by the instructor and the student. Written
evaluation of the work performed may be submitted in place of a
numerical grade.
A student may register for only one credit of Independent Study per
term. These courses are normally of half-credit value unless specified
for a full credit by the instructor. To undertake more than one, he must
secure permission from the Committee on Student Standing and Pro-
grams. A student wishing to explore more thoroughly a subject covered
in an existing course is urged not to undertake an Independent Study
Course, but to consider the "double credit" option.
FINAL HONORS
Final Honors are awarded to students who have undertaken and
carried through academic work of high quality. Final Honors are of two
kinds, those awarded by departments and those awarded by the College.
1. The exact nature of departmental Honors work and the criteria
used in judging it are listed in the departmental statements in this
catalog. For Honors the work in the department must be considerably
54
superior to that required for graduation, including a demonstration of
the student's competence, insight and commitment to his field of interest.
Individual departments may award Honors to students whose depart-
mental work has been of high quality and High Honors to those who
have demonstrated both high quality and originality, indicating an
unusual degree of competence.
2. Students who have been awarded Departmental Honors may be
invited by the Committee on Student Standing and Programs to stand for
College Honors: magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Magna
cum laude indicates that a student has understood to a superior degree
the significant relations between the area of his own specialized com-
petence and his College work as a whole. Summa cum laude indicates
an even more outstanding achievement. Magna cum laude and summa
cum laude are awarded by the faculty on recommendation of the
Committee.
The Committee on Student Standing and Programs will fix the mini-
mum academic standards and procedures acceptable in any year for
magna cum laude and summa cum laude and may require oral and/or
written examinations or essays.
FLEXIBILITY PROGRAM
Since different students have different needs, abilities, and goals, there
may be cases where the general regulations prevent a student from
making the best use of educational opportunities at Haverford. Provision
is therefore made for changing the normal requirements in certain
individual cases.
Power to act on requests for exceptions to any of the academic regu-
lations is in the hands of a standing committee of the faculty, called
the Committee on Student Standing and Programs, which consists of
three faculty members, the Associate Dean of the College and three
students. Before granting an exception, the committee will secure ap-
proval from the student's major supervisor or, if the student is an under-
classman, from his adviser. Any student who believes that a special
course program would promote his best intellectual development, is
invited to present a proposal to this group. Students with exceptional
abilities or exceptional preparation or both are encouraged to consider
whether a program out of the ordinary may help them to make the
most of their opportunities. The College suggests consideration of the
following, as examples of special programs which might be followed:
55
Enrichment and Independent Study. Students with outstanding
records who have the approval of the appropriate departmental chairmen
and the Committee on Student Standing and Programs may depart from
the usual course patterns. Three examples follow:
(a) A student admitted to the Thesis Program may enroll in his
senior year in as few as three courses, and complete a thesis
based on independent work.
(b) A student admitted to an Interdepartmental Program must first
have been accepted as an interdepartmental major (the two
departments need not be in the same division). His program,
which may include a reduced course load and a thesis, as in (a)
above, will also include some advanced independent work re-
lating to both departments.
(c) A student admitted to a Concentrated Program will be permitted
more than the usual amount of concentration, taking in each of
two or three of his last four semesters, two double-credit courses
in his major field, or a closely related field.
Students who meet the standards set by departments for Honors may
be granted departmental or interdepartmental Honors for these programs.
Graduation in less than eight Haverford semesters. Students with
extra credits, gained from the Advanced Placement Program, summer
school, or carrying an overload, or from some combination of these,
may be able to finish requirements for the Haverford degree in less than
the normal four years. Other students may obtain credit for a year's
work under either the Study Abroad or the Junior Year Language pro-
grams. Such students, like transfer students, may graduate after fewer
than eight semesters at Haverford, but with the usual number of course
credits.
Sufficiently mature students, if they possess outstanding ability or are
judged to have legitimate reason for special consideration, may be al-
lowed to graduate without necessarily accumulating all of the credits
normally required. The Committee on Student Standing and Programs
may apprave an individual student course program for graduation with
fewer than the usual number of courses. Three examples of possible
programs are:
(a) Graduation after three years: A student who has done consist-
ently good work and who, by the beginning of his second year at
Haverford, has credit for 15* or more courses, may request per-
*12 for the Class of 1973 and those following. i|
56
mission to graduate after only two more years at the College.
If such permission is granted, it will be with the proviso that he
must maintain a very high level of performance and, to help
assure sufficient breadth in his program, he must not only meet
the usual distribution and minimum departmental require-
ments, but must study for four consecutive semesters some
subjects (or meaningful combination of subjects) outside of the
division in which his major department lies. His continuation
in this program is subject to review, before he enters his senior
year, by the Committee and by his major supervisor.
(b) A term away from Haver ford: There may be occasion when a
student's needs are best served by studying or serving elsewhere
for a time, without gaining formal academic credit, as he would
if he were in a program like Study Abroad. A student accepted
into the "term away" program must meet all departmental and
distribution requirements, and must successfully complete a
total of seven semesters at Haverford and at least one semester
elsewhere (or six at Haverford, and two or more elsewhere) en-
gaged in a program (academic, service to others, gainful employ-
ment, etc.) approved in advance by the Committee on Student
Standing and Programs and by his major supervisor, and evalu-
ated by them after completion.
(c) Reduced course load: The course requirement in effect at
Haverford helps to assure the diversity which is an important
part of a liberal education. There may, however, be students
who could profit by carrying fewer then the normal number of
courses each semester. The Committee on Student Standing and
Programs is authorized to permit some students, where good
reason can be shown, to omit one of their courses.
Graduation in more than eight Haverford semesters. Although
most students are expected to graduate in four academic years, some, as
indicated above, may take less and some may be permitted to take more.
Students who wish to take a five-year program with no modification
of requirements should secure the approval of their adviser and of the
Associate Dean. In all other cases of extended programs, even if no
modification of academic requirements is involved, the student should
petition the Committee on Student Standing and Programs.
Examples of the latter would include students with physical handicaps
which prevent them from carrying a full load, students who wish to
complete a program in four and one-half years, and students who wish
57
to take, simultaneously with their work at Haverford, part-time work
elsewhere (such as journalism, design, etc.) for which academic credit
at Haverford is not appropriate. All petitions for academic flexibility
should be submitted in writing to the Associate Dean who will present
them to the Committee on Student Standing and Programs. To be con-
sidered, a petition must bear the written endorsement of the student's
adviser.
FIVE-YEAR PROGRAM
Haverford offers a five-year program in addition to its regular four-
year program.
A student becomes eligible for the five-year program by demonstration
of compelling educational necessity for such a program to his adviser
and to the Associate Dean. If, in the judgment of the Associate Dean,
modification of the normal requirements is involved, the student must
also secure the approval of the Committee on Student Standing and
Programs.
Students will normally be expected to request admission to the pro-
gram during their sophomore or junior years.
DEVELOPMENTAL READING
A program of developmental reading, under the supervision of the
counselors, offers an opportunity for students to improve their reading
and study proficiency. Few students, if any, have realized their real
potentiality in this field. Through a series of conferences, and some
group sessions, methods of developing higher level reading skills are
explored and practiced. Any student who is willing to concentrate upon
it, while reading for his various subjects, will find that he can increase
his speed and comprehension.
PREPARATION FOR PROFESSIONS
A large number of Haverford College students plan, after graduation,
to enter upon further courses of study. As a liberal arts college, Haver-
ford arranges its curriculum so that students who have such plans are
able to meet the entrance requirements of graduate and professional
schools. The College does not, however, attempt to anticipate in its own
curriculum the work of any graduate or professional school. It is the
conviction of the faculty that the best preparation for graduate work is
a liberal education with sound training in basic disciplines, to which
more specialized training may later be added.
58
A student who intends to go to a professional school is free to choose
his major in accord with his principal abilities and interests, since pro-
fessional schools, such as those of business administration, education,
law, medicine, or theology, usually accept students on the basis of merit
regardless of their choice of major and, except in the case of medical
schools, without specific course requirements. The requirements of most
state boards of medical licensure are such that all students who hope
to be admitted to a medical school must take two semester courses,
each of which must include laboratory work, in biology (usually Biology
002a and Biology 100), Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202b, 203a, and
Physics 113 a, 114b.
Students who plan to go to professional schools should seek advice
as early as possible from appropriate faculty members as follows:
education, Mr. Lyons; engineering, Mr. Hetzel; international affairs,
Mr. Hansen; law, Mr. Mortimer; medicine, Mr. Kessler; theology, Mr.
Luman.
If a student plans to do graduate work in a departmental subject,
such as economics, mathematics, history, etc., he should consult as early
as possible with the chairman of the department at Haverford which
most nearly corresponds to the department in which he plans to work
in graduate school. This adviser will be able to guide him in his selection
of courses, his choice of major (which will not necessarily be in the
department of his intended graduate study), and other questions which
may have bearing on his future.
Law schools, medical schools, and some graduate schools require
applicants to take special admission tests. Arrangements for taking
these tests are the responsibility of the student concerned; he can obtain
information about them from the faculty members mentioned above.
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
The academic regulations of Bryn Mawr College will apply to Haver-
ford students enrolled in Bryn Mawr courses. Administrative interpreta-
tions or decisions will be made by the deans at Bryn Mawr.
Bryn Mawr students in Haverford courses are subject to Haverford
regulations as applied and interpreted by the Associate Dean.
Conflicting Courses
A student is not allowed to elect conflicting courses, except with the
permission of the Associate Dean and the two instructors concerned.
59
Audited Courses
A student who wishes to audit a course should obtain the permission
of the instructor. No charge is made for auditing, and audited courses
are not hsted on the transcript.
Course Changes
Courses may be changed during the first two weeks of each new
semester. During that time students are free to make changes after
consultation with their advisers and the Associate Dean.
Changes will not be permitted later except in cases where the student
is known to be an excellent student and where he receives the consent
of the professor to whose course he is changing and of his adviser and
of the Associate Dean.
A student who has registered for a fifth course may drop that course
without penalty at any time before the end of the fourth week of classes
with the approval of his adviser and the Associate Dean.
Lecture and Laboratory Courses
With the approval of the instructor in the course, the student's adviser,
and the Associate Dean, a student may take for credit either the labora-
tory work or the class work of a course which normally includes both.
The grade received is recorded on the student's transcript with the
notation "Lecture only" or "Laboratory only," as the case might be.
Such a course is not included among the courses required for gradua-
tion, nor among the courses required outside the student's major
department, nor among the courses needed to meet a limited elective
requirement.
Evaluation of Academic Performance
The instructor in each course submits at the end of each semester a
numerical grade, or in some senior seminars, a viTitten evaluation for
each student. A grade of "CIP" (course in progress) may be sub-
mitted at midyear for senior research courses which run throughout
the year, and for certain other courses as agreed on by the instructor and
the Associate Dean, and so announced at the beginning of the course.
Passing grades at Haverford range from 60 to 100 inclusive. Failing
grades range from 45 to 59 inclusive (the lowest grade given to a student
who completes a course is 45 ) .
60
If a student drops a course, or is required by his instructor to drop
it, the grade is recorded as "DR" and counts as a 40. If a student is
permitted to withdraw from a course for unusual reasons including those
beyond the student's control, such as illness, it is recorded as "W" and
is not assigned a numerical grade, nor regarded as a failure.
The Committee on Student Standing and Programs reviews students'
records at intervals, and has authority to drop students from college, or
to set requirements for additional work in cases of students whose work
is unsatisfactory. As a rule, the Committee will drop from college
freshmen who do not pass their courses, and those upperclassmen who
do not show work which is better than passing. The normal expectation
is that each year a student's work should show noticeable improvement.
Furthermore, any student whose record is such as to justify the belief
that he is not availing himself of the opportunities offered by the College
may be dropped at any time the Committee makes such a determmation.
In a year course in which the work of the second semester depends
heavily on that of the first, a student who fails the first semester but
nevertheless is allowed to continue may receive credit for the first
semester (although the grade will not be changed) if his grade for the
second semester is 70 or above, provided that the instructor in the course
states in writing to the Recorder at the beginning of the second semester
that this arrangement applies.
A student who, because of special circumstances such as illness, re-
ceives a low grade in a course, may petition his instructor and the Asso-
ciate Dean for a special examination. If the request is granted and the
student takes the special examination, the grade in that examination will
replace the grade originally received in the midyear or final examination
in computing the final grade for that course; the new course grade will be
entered in place of the old on the student's transcript, and the semester
average will be revised accordingly.
Policy on Release of Student Grades
Received during the First Two Years
Grades received by students at Haverford College during their first
two years are intended for internal use. The intention of the faculty is
to recognize the first two years as a time prior to majoring, when students
should be encouraged to do the maximum of experimentation m new
areas where their interest may be high but their aptitude may be untested.
The official transcript records only whether a student dropped, failed
or withdrew from a course. The absence of any notation is an indication
that he passed.
61
The Associate Dean of the College makes all decisions on any ex-
ceptions to this policy. The student's request is a necessary, but not
always a sufficient, condition for the release of grades.
Normally, grades for the first two years are released only to another
college or university when the student is transferring during the first two
years.
Courses taken in the first two years which are directly related to the
student's intended graduate study, may be released to graduate or to
professional schools.
Grades are not provided for use by insurance companies.
Late Papers
If a paper is assigned in place of the final examination in a course,
the date by which it is due may be set by the instructor not later than
4:00 p.m. on Wednesday, January 13th, 1971, for the first semester, or
Tuesday, May 18th, 1971, for the second semester. Laboratory note-
books must be turned in not later than these same dates. Late papers or
notebooks will be given one-half of the grade they would have received,
unless arrangements have been made in advance with the instructor in
the course and the Associate Dean. If a paper represents the entire grade
for a course, the maximum grade for such a late paper is 60 or, in a
course required for the major, 65. Full details of academic procedures
and regulations concerning the proper completion of work are issued
during each semester.
Courses Taken Without Recorded Grade
Each semester juniors and seniors may elect one course outside the
division of their major department, for which no grade will be recorded
on the transcript. A notation will be made, however, if the student fails,
drops, or is permitted to withdraw from the course. Students must
inform the Recorder of a course to be so handled by the end of the
fourth week of classes.
Courses with Written Evaluation
In certain senior seminars, a department may choose to give a brief
written evaluation of performance instead of a numerical grade. These
evaluations will be attached to the transcript record and will serve in
place of numerical grades in those courses. Where such evaluation is to
be used, this fact will be announced to the students at the time of
registration.
I
62
INTERCOLLEGIATE COOPERATION
The variety of courses available to Haverford students is gready
increased as a result of a cooperative relationship among Haverford,
Bryn Mawr College, Swarthmore College, and the University of Penn-
sylvania. Under this arrangement, full-time students of any of these
institutions may, upon presentation of the proper credentials, enroll for
courses at another institution of the group without added expense.
Students wishing to take advantage of this arrangement must obtain
the permission of the Associate Dean.
Haverford students taking courses at the University of Pennsylvania
are expected to make their own arrangements for transportation. Bryn
Mawr and Haverford jointly operate two buses which make regular
hourly trips between the two campuses on weekdays, and a bus operates
several times a day between Haverford and Bryn Mawr and Swarthmore.
STUDY ABROAD
Well-qualified students who request it may be granted permission to
spend a semester or a year studying in a foreign country. Such permis-
sion will require approval of the student's major supervisor and the
Associate Dean. If the student is not a language major, approval will
also be required of the chairman of the department of the language
spoken in the country selected. Interested students should consult the
Associate Dean early in the sophomore year; he will direct them to
faculty members best qualified to advise them. Students who may want to
take their entire junior year abroad should plan their programs so that
all limited elective requirements are completed by the end of the sopho-
more year. The program of studies abroad must be worked out in
advance; if the program is completed successfully, the College wiU grant
credit toward the degree for the work accomplished. Scholarship funds
may be transferred for approved study abroad.
JUNIOR-YEAR LANGUAGE PROGRAM
Provision is made, through a cooperative program with Princeton
University, for the intensive study of certain languages not offered at
Haverford — Arabic, Chinese, Japanese, Persian, and Turkish. A stu-
dent participating in this program spends the summer after his sopho-
more year in a program of intensive study of the language chosen, and
then spends the junior year at Princeton University, continuing the
.study of the language and taking each semester two or three other
63
courses in related regional studies. The remainder of his program will
be electives, usually courses important for his major at Haverford.
Students interested in this program should confer with the Associate
Dean in the early spring of the sophomore year. To be nominated by the
College, a student must have a good academic record, and must have
secured the approval of his major supervisor. Selection from among
the nominees is made by Princeton University.
Students who wish to study the less common languages without taking
time away from Haverford should consider the offerings in Italian at
Bryn Mawr College and in Oriental, Scandinavian, and Slavic lan-
guages at the University of Pennsylvania. Arrangements for taking such
courses may be made in consultation with the Associate Dean.
AFRICAN STUDIES
Students wishing to focus their interest on African civilization are
encouraged to enroll in courses emphasizing African materials offered
by several departments in the humanities and social sciences at Haver-
ford, Bryn Mawr and Swarthmore Colleges and to arrange for regional
concentration in fulfilling departmental requirements for majors. In
planning their programs, students should consult Professor Harvey
Glickman, director of African studies, or Professor Wyatt MacGaffey.
VISITORS AND LECTURES
Individual departments of the faculty invite visitors to Haverford for
varying periods of time to meet with members of the department and
with students interested in that field. These departmental visitors, who
sometimes give public lectures, contribute considerably to the vitality of
the work in the various departments.
This program has been greatly strengthened as a result of a generous
bequest from the late William P. Philips. A substantial sum from this
bequest is used to bring to Haverford "distinguished scientists and states-
men," whose visits may last anywhere from a few hours to a full aca-
demic year.
CENTER FOR NONVIOLENT RESOLUTION OF CONFLICT
Haverford College has long had a special concern for the peaceful
resolution of conflict, particularly where it involves interracial or inter-
national relations. Current urban unrest and increasing violence among '
nation-states call for new approaches to conciliation and problem-solving.
64
Young men, faced with involvement in war and with racial injustice
that conflicts with their basic values, have a special concern for seeking
constructive ways by which to influence the course of such conflicts
away from war and domestic violence.
Haverford's tradition also includes a commitment to encourage and
work for social and political change that assures an individual's dignity,
economic justice in society, and the opportunity for the fullest develop-
ment of a man's potential regardless of his origins — all brought about
by nonviolent means.
These concerns for creative resolution of violent conflict and for
nonviolent means of inducing change have led the College to provide for
the establishment of a Center for Nonviolent Conflict Resolution. In
the Center program, students and faculty, in seminars, in individual and
group research projects, and in action programs increase their under-
standing of human conflict and its relationship to change, and explore
ways of developing nonviolent means for limiting it.
The Center is supported by a grant from the Ford Foundation, by
means of which it operates two programs in urban poverty neighbor-
hoods and one in suburban Philadelphia, in all of which Haverford
students may participate for academic credit. The objective of both urban
and suburban programs is to promote a healthy mixture of detachment
and involvement that encourages both relevant scholarship and enlight-
ened service for change. Further information on the Educational In-
volvement Program is provided elsewhere in this catalog.
The Center program is concerned as well with international peace and
nonviolent change. An International Affairs Internship is being de-
veloped with the American Friends Service Committee.
Students interested in the program should consult Paul Wehr, director
of the Center.
THE MARGARET GEST CENTER FOR THE
CROSS-CULTURAL STUDY OF RELIGION
The establishment of the Center was made possible by a bequest of
Margaret Gest in memory of her parents, Emily Judson Baugh Gest and
John Marshall Gest. In keeping with Miss Gest's desires and will, the
Center aims "to promote better understanding among peoples" through
the study of the "fundamental unity of religions" without "negating the
differences." The current Center program is supported by a friend of
_ Margaret Gest.
65
The Center is under the direction of Professor Gerhard Spiegler and
a College Advisory Council. The following courses of lectures are
supported by the Center:
1. Philosophy East and West. Mr. Desjardins
2. Religious Traditions in India: Ancient and Modern. Mr. Long
3. The History of Western Religious Thought
and Institutions. Mr. Luman
4. History and Principles of Quakerism. Mr. Bronner
T. WISTAR BROWN FELLOWSHIP
Haverford College has resources available from the T. Wistar Brown
Fund which make it possible to provide a Fellowship each year for a
mature scholar. The recipient of this Fellowship usually spends most of
his time doing research in the Quaker Collection of the Library. The
Fellowship currently carries a stipend of $6,000.
Inquiries regarding this Fellowship should be addressed to the office
of the Provost.
POST-BACCALAUREATE FELLOWSHIP PROGRAM
Under this program, established in 1966, fellowships are awarded to
young men and women of promise who can profit by studying for a
year at a highly demanding liberal arts college after receiving the
bachelor's degree and before entering graduate or professional school.
It is supported by substantial grants from the Rockefeller Foundation
and the Josiah Macy, Jr. Foundation and smaller grants from several
other sources. Most of the scholarships have been awarded to graduates
of the predominantly Negro colleges of the South.
For the academic year 1970-71, support is available for approximately
30 students interested in earning a Ph.D. degree and following careers
of college or university teaching and research, and for 24 students inter-
ested in medicine. Fellows for this year will study at Bryn Mawr, Haver-
ford, Oberlin, Pomona, and Swarthmore Colleges. They will choose
their courses from the regular offerings, selecting those they feel will
best fill their scholarly needs and interests.
HONOR SOCIETIES
Phi Beta Kappa. The Haverford College Chapter of the Phi Beta
Kappa Society of America was chartered in 1898 as Zeta of Pennsyl-'
vania. Election of members-in-course, alumni members, and honorary
66
members, based upon scholarly attainment and distinction, takes place
toward the end of the academic year.
President, Bernard V. Lentz '33; Secretary, Holland Hunter '43;
Treasurer, John Davison '51.
Founders Club. The Founders Club was established in 1914 as a
Haverford organization of students, alumni, and faculty. Election to its
membership is recognition of a sound academic record combined with
noteworthy participation in extracurricular activities. Undergraduate
elections are usually limited to the junior and senior classes. President,
E. Howard Bedrossian '42; Secretary, Robert Ihrie, Jr. '70; Treasurer,
Matthew M. Strickler '62.
67
•\
*.<
■J^
^-
*
"imsn
^ ^.dai^^
COURSES
OF
IIMSTRUCTIOrJ
'^K^MUj^H^Ki^MuaiS
NUMBERING SYSTEM
001-099 indicate elementary and intermediate courses.
100-199 indicate first year courses in the major work.
200-299 indicate second-year courses in the major work.
300-399 indicate advanced courses in the major work.
400-499 indicate special categories of work (e.g., 480 for independent
study courses).
a . . . the letter "a" following a number, indicates a one-credit course
given in the first semester.
b . . . the letter "b" following a number, indicates a one-credit course
given in the second semester.
c . . . the letter "c" following a number, indicates a one-credit course
given two hours a week throughout the year.
d ... the letter "d" following a number, indicates a half-credit course
given during September-October.
e ... the letter "e" following a number indicates a half-credit course
given during November-December.
f ... the letter "f" following a number indicates a half-credit course
given throughout the first semester.
g ... the letter "g" following a number indicates a half-credit course
given during February-March.
h ... the letter "h" following a number indicates a half-credit course
given during April-May.
i ... the letter "i" following a number indicates a half-credit course
given throughout the second semester.
In general, courses listed as full-year courses (two credits) must be
carried through two semesters. In some cases one semester of such a
course may be taken with credit, but only with permission of the
department concerned. Students are reminded that one course carried
throughout the year is the equivalent of eight semester hours.
70
I
0
ASTRONOMY ^
CO
Professor Louis C. Green, Chairman j
Associate Professor R. Bruce Partridge f wk
0
The departmental work is designed to give students an understanding Tl
of and an interest in the universe in which they hve. The relation of
astronomy to other fields of learning is kept to the fore.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
The normal major requirements are Astronomy 211a, 212b and four addi-
tional 1-semester courses numbered above 300; Mathematics 113a and 114b, or
119a; Physics 115a and 116b, or the former 19; three written comprehensive
examinations of three hours each.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
All astronomy majors are regarded as candidates for Honors. The award of
Honors will be made on the basis of superior work in the departmental courses,
in certain related courses, and in the comprehensive examinations.
101a THE DEVELOPMENT AND IMPACT OF ASTRONOMICAL IDEAS
Mr. Partridge
A non-technical introduction to the astronomer's view of the universe. In
general, a historical approach is used, from the ideas of Copernicus and
Galileo, through the early astrophysicists of the last century, to Einstein
and Hubble. The course will attempt to show how astronomical discoveries
have fundamentally altered our ways of perceiving the universe.
102b ASTRONOMY OF THIS DECADE Mr. Partridge
Some of the important astronomical discoveries of this decade are discussed
semi-quantitatively. Emphasis is placed on objects such as pulsars and
quasars which have greatly extended the range of our knowledge of the
physical world, on new and puzzling phenomena such as gravity waves, and
on results obtained through the space program. Prerequisite to Astronomy
102b is Astronomy 101a or the consent of the instructor.
121a THE SOLAR SYSTEM Mr. Green
This introductory course develops the dynamics necessary for an under-
standing of the principal motions and interactions of the bodies in the solar
system. The vector model of atomic and molecular structure is discussed
and used to interpret the spectra of the planets, comets, and sun. This in-
formation together with that available from direct observation from the
earth's surface and from space is united in a discussion of the origin of the
tAppointed on the Sloan Foundation Grant.
71
solar system. Optional observation periods, as well as an opportunity for
students to use the telescopes on their own. Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a
or the consent of the instructor.
122b STARS AND GALAXIES Mr. Green
This introductory course deals with the dynamics, characteristics, and physi-
cal conditions of the different kinds of objects found in the universe, stars,
clouds of diffuse matter, and various types of galaxies, as derived from
direct observation and from spectroscopic and theoretical studies. The evolu-
tion and interaction of these components of our universe and the probable
history of the universe as a whole are reviewed. Optional observation
periods, and opportunities for individual use of the telescopes. Prerequisite:
Astronomy 121a or the consent of the instructor.
211a, 212b METHODS OF THEORETICAL PHYSICS AND
ASTROPHYSICS Mr. Green
Ordinary and partial differential equations as well as certain integral equa-
tions of astronomy and physics are discussed. Attention is given to the more
important special function, Sturm-Liouville theory. Green's functions, and
boundary value problems. Approximate solutions are sought by linearization,
perturbation, and variational procedures, with some use of numerical
methods. Applications will be to the quantum mechanics of atomic, molecu-
lar, and nuclear structure and collisions, the Hamilton-Jacobi theory of
satellite and planetary motion, the mechanics of deformable bodies as
applied to astronomical problems, and radiative transport. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 113a and 114b, or 119a, and Physics 115a and 116b, or the
former 19. Prequisite to Astronomy 212b is Astronomy 211a or the consent
of the instructor.
311a GENERAL RELATIVITY AND HIGH ENERGY ASTROPHYSICS
Mr. Green
The tensor calculus is developed and applied to a discussion of general
relativity and certain current variants. The observational and experimental
evidence is reviewed. Problems of high energy astrophysics, particularly
gravitational radiation and gravitational collapse, are considered. Prerequi-
site: Mathematics 113a and 114b, or 119a, and Physics 115a and 116b or
the former 19.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
320b COSMOLOGY Mr. Partridge
Various theoretical models for the origin and evolution of the universe, in-
cluding the "Big Bang" and "Steady State" models, are discussed. The
relevant observational evidence is then reviewed. The course ends with an
attempt to construct a unified picture of the evolution of the universe and
some of the systems within it. Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a and 114b,
or 119a, and Physics 115a and 116b, or the former 19.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
340b RADIO ASTRONOMY Mr. Partridge
The course provides an introduction to the basic techniques of radio
astronomy and to the various mechanisms that give rise to line and con-
72
tinuum emission at radio frequencies. In addition, some of the most im-
portant observational results of radio, infra-red, and other non-optical
branches of astronomy are presented. Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a and
114b, or 119a, and the former Physics 19 and 20, or 213a.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
360b PLASMA ASTROPHYSICS Mr. Green
The principles of plasma physics are developed and applied to such topics
as the Van Allen belts, solar phenomena, the cosmic ray flux, the alignment
of the interstellar dust, and interplanetary and interstellar magnetic fields.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a and 114b, or 119a, and the former Physics
19 and 20, or 213a, or the consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
371a STELLAR STRUCTURE AND EVOLUTION Mr. Green
The theory of stellar structure is reviev/ed and the problem of stellar evolu-
tion is discussed on the basis of the theoretical and observational evidence.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a and 114b, or 119a, Physics 115a and 116b,
or the former 19.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
380b NUCLEAR ASTROPHYSICS Mr. Green
A discussion is given of the nuclear reactions leading to stellar energy gen-
eration, to the origin and abundance of the elements in various types of
astronomical objects, and to the catastrophic stages of stellar evolution. The
nuclear species in the cosmic rays and nuclear age determinations are con-
sidered. Prerequisite: Physics 115a and 116b, or the former 19, and
Astronomy 212b (or concurrently), or the consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
391a, 392b SPECIAL TOPICS IN ASTROPHYSICS
Messrs. Green and Partridge
The content of this course may vary from year to year. It may be repeated
for credit. Prerequisite: considerable maturity in mathematics, physics and
astronomy.
Not offered in 1970-71
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Messrs. Green and Partridge
An example of the content of this course is the determination of the abund-
ance of the elements in stellar atmospheres based on high dispersion spectra
obtained at one of the major American observatories. Other examples of
course content are optical and microwave observations relating to cosmo-
logical problems. Prerequisite: the consent of the instructor.
73
BIOLOGY
Professor Melvin Santer, Chairman
Professor Irving Finger***
Professor Ariel G. Loewy
Associate Professor Dietrich Kessler
Assistant Professor Vivianne T. NACHMiAsf
Assistant Professor Michael Showe
Laboratory Instructor Louise G. Onorato
The biology program is designed to give a solid foundation in general
biological principles, an insight into recent developments of experi-
mental aspects of the field, and an opportunity for a research experi-
ence in the senior year. Special emphasis is placed on molecular and
cell biology. The reading tutorials are designed primarily for students
not intending to major in biology.
The prospective biology major normally takes no biology in his
freshman year, but instead prepares himself for work in biology by
taking chemistry and perhaps mathematics or physics.
Students with a strong high school background in chemistry may,
with permission of the department, take Biology 100 in their freshman
year.
The courses designed for the major program are built up in a series
of three stages:
(1) One full-year sophomore course (100), which introduces the
student to cellular, microbial, and developmental biology.
(2) Five advanced courses and laboratories numbered in the 200's
to be taken at the junior or senior level, designed to create
sufficient competence for research in the senior year.
(3) Senior Research Tutorials taken for single or double credit
(chosen from 300, 301, 302, 303, 304) involving reading of
current literature, laboratory research, student lectures and
seminars, and a senior thesis. The topics of these research
tutorials lie in the areas of principal interest of the instructors.
Senior Research Tutorials may be started with the consent of the
= *On sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
tAppointed on the Sloan Foundation Grant.
74
d
instructor during the junior year. A student has the opportunity ni
to apply for a summer research stipend which enables him to —
begin his research in the summer following his sophomore or Q
junior year. Qualified chemistry or physics majors may be ad- p
mitted to the Senior Research Tutorials with consent of the Q
instructor. m
(4) Biology 399c, a senior seminar taken at half intensity for both ,/
semesters. It consists of student papers and discussions, faculty
presentation of research problems, and the year's Philips
program.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Biology 100; four courses, at least two of which are selected from Biology
200a, 201b, 202b, 203 b, and 204a, the other two selected from Chemistry 202a,
307d, 307e, 305d, 305e, 306b, and 356b, Biology courses at Bryn Mawr num-
bered 201a or higher, and Biology courses at Swarthmore numbered 25 or
higher; one year-sequence of Biology courses in the 300's; Chemistry 101a or
107a, and 108b and 203b; Biology 399c. Majors desiring to take courses at
Bryn Mawr or Swarthmore must first consult with the chairman of the Haver-
ford Department. In addition, all majors, regardless of the number of Biology
200-series courses taken, must enroll in two junior-level laboratory courses.
Where prerequisites are required for these courses, the student must achieve a
grade of at least 70 unless otherwise stated, or receive the consent of the in-
structor to apply them as prerequisites.
The Department strongly recommends the following additional courses, since
they provide a minimum theoretical background for advanced work in biology:
Mathematics 113a and 114b, or 119a and 220b; Physics 113a and 114b, or 115a
and 116b.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Since all biology majors participate in the departmental senior research pro-
gram, they are all candidates for Departmental Honors. These are awarded upon
consideration of the following criteria of achievement: (a) grade average in
courses, (b) senior research and thesis, (c) performance in Biology 399c.
GENERAL COURSES INTENDED PRIMARILY FOR NON-BIOLOGY MAJORS
001b READING TUTORIAL: TOPICS IN MODERN BIOLOGY I Mr. Showe
The development of current concepts of the nature of living organisms and
methods of investigating it, from Aristotle through Harvey, Pasteur, and
Schrodinger to Watson and Crick, with particular emphasis on 20th century
discoveries and ideas. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
002a READING TUTORIAL: TOPICS IN MODERN BIOLOGY II
Mr. Kessler
The theory of evolution and the relationship of this theory to studies of
75
I
social behavior in animals will be the topic for 1970-71. A reading list of
original works in the discipline and a study guide will be distributed at the
beginning of the semester. The student will be asked to write papers care-
fully analyzing the material. The relevance of the readings to the study of
man's social behavior will be considered. Students will meet periodically in
tutorial sessions with the instructor to discuss student papers and go over
study guides. A film series on animal behavior will be included as part of
the course. No prerequisites.
003b READING TUTORIAL: TOPICS IN MODERN BIOLOGY III
Mr. Santer
An examination of selected topics in biology of potential interest to those
whose major interest lies outside the science division. Topics to be discussed
will be announced prior to registration.
004a READING TUTORIAL: TOPICS IN MODERN BIOLOGY IV
Mr. Finger
An examination of selected topics in biology of potential interest to those
whose major interest lies outside the science division. Topics to be discussed
will be announced prior to registration.
Not offered in 1970-71.
005b READING TUTORIAL: TOPICS IN MODERN BIOLOGY V
Mr. Loewy
An integrated approach to human biological and social evolution. Readings
in philosophy of science, theories of evolution, the fossil and archeological
record of man, primitive human societies, contemporary problems in human
ecology and the future of man.
Not offered in 1970-71.
006b READING COURSE IN EVOLUTIONARY THEORY Mr. Finger
The purpose of this course is to enable the student to acquaint himself with
evolutionary theory, both current and past, by reading advanced textbooks,
reviews, and scientific journals. Prerequisite: Biology 100 or consent of the
instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
COURSES INTENDED PRIMARLY FOR STUDENTS
WITH PREREQUISITES IN CHEMISTRY
100 CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION Staff
Four hours; three lectures and one laboratory period
An introductory course in cell biology which combines the areas of cytology,
biochemistry, biophysics, genetics, microbiology, and some developmental
biology. The purpose of this course is to integrate these diverse approaches
into a unified view of cell structure and function. This is a sophomore
course, although freshmen with adequate preparation in chemistry may
qualify with consent of the instructor. Students who wish to postpone the
76
A
course to the junior year should obtain permission of the instructor at the
end of their freshman year. Prerequisite: Chemistry 101a or 107a or consent
of the instructor.
200a CELL BIOLOGY l: METABOLIC BIOCHEMISTRY AND
BIOSYNTHESIS OF MICROMOLECULES Mr. Santer
A study of the various pathways of carbohydrate metabolism and of meta-
bolic processes leading to ATP synthesis. The biosynthesis of amino acids
and nucleotides, DNA, RNA, and proteins. Prerequisite: Biology 100.
201b CELL BIOLOGY II: STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF PROTEINS
AND NUCLEIC ACIDS Mr. Loewy
A study of the structure and properties of proteins and nucleic acids. The
course will include an analysis of mechano-chemical phenomena in terms of
the properties of interacting protein molecules.
202b CELL BIOLOGY III: CYTOLOGY AND DIFFERENTIATION
Mr. Kessler
A study of intracellular structure and function emphasizing morphological
and biochemical methods. Pertinent problems in cell differentiation are con-
sidered. Seminars are organized around discussions of original journal ar-
ticles. Laboratory projects provide an introduction to cytochemistry with the
light and electron microscopes. Prerequisite: Biology 100.
203b CELL BIOLOGY IV: HEREDITY AND REGULATION Mr. Finger
The topics to be emphasized are the structure and mutability of genes, trans-
mission and storage of genetic information, and the translation of this
information into specific macromolecules. Cytoplasmic control of gene ex-
pression and other mechanisms for the regulation of gene activity also will
be discussed. Prerequisite: Biology 100 or consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
204a CELL BIOLOGY V: CELLULAR CONTROL MECHANISMS
Mr. Showe
This course will be a detailed study, based on a reading of original litera-
ture, of the means by which cells regulate their synthetic and metabolic pro-
cesses, including: control of synthesis of small molecules (amino acids and
nucleotides) and of catabolic pathways, and the integration of cell functions.
Topics to be discussed will include regulation of enzyme activity, induction
and repression of enzyme synthesis, and regulation of the synthesis of pro-
teins and nucleic acids. Emphasis will be on studies performed using micro-
organism-bacteria, fungi, and bacteria viruses. Prerequisite: Biology 100.
200f LABORATORY IN METABOLIC BIOCHEMISTRY Mr. Santer
One period per week, one half-credit.
The purpose of this laboratory is to gain experience in a variety of bio-
chemical techniques. One major project will be the isolation of transfer
77
RNA, chromosomes and enzymes necessary for synthesis of proteins in vivo
and reutihzation of these to study aspects of protein synthesis in vitro.
20 li LABORATORY IN MECHANO-CHEMICAL PHENOMENA
One laboratory period per week, one half-credit. Mr. Loewy
The purpose of this laboratory is to apply the techniques of protein chem-
istry and enzymology to the understanding of mechano-chemical phenomena
such as protoplasmic streaming and muscle contraction.
202i LABORATORY IN MICROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES
Mr. Kessler and Mrs. Nachmias
One laboratory period per week, one half-credit.
Students will carry out a project which permits the use of the electron
microscope and associated techniques such as negative staining and photo-
graphic developing and printing. Some light microscope technique may also
be included. The project will involve the isolation of actin and myosin from
rabbit muscle and subsequent examination of their ultrastructure.
203i LABORATORY IN IMMUNOCHEMISTRY Mr. Finger
One laboratory period per week, one half-credit.
The purpose of this laboratory is to gain experience in the application of
immunological techniques to the separation and characterization of macro-
molecules. An immunochemical analysis of serum components will be carried
out with gel diffusion techniques. Fractions purified by column chromato-
graphy and salting-out will be characterized by electrophoresis and two
dimensional diffusion in tubes and slides. Students will also immunize and
bleed rabbits.
Not offered in 1970-71.
204f LABORATORY IN BACTERIAL VIROLOGY Mr. Showe
One laboratory period per week, one half-credit.
The life cycle of bacterial viruses will be examined in detail, with emphasis
on the use of the bacteriophage-infected cell as a model system for exam-
ining basic life processes at the molecular level. Topics will include synthesis
of macromolecules, regulation of gene expression, the effects of mutation,
and the control of virus assembly. Techniques used will include electron
microscopy, acrylamide gel electrophoresis and the use of radioisotopes as
tracers.
300 SENIOR RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN MECHANO-CHEMICAL
PHENOMENA Mr. Loewy
Student research in the molecular basis of mechano-chemical phenomena.
Techniques for structural analysis of covalent protein-protein interactions
are used. Laboratory work is supplemented with readings related to the area
of investigation and with the presentation of discussions by students. Pre-
requisite: Biology 201b or consent of the instructor.
78
301 SENIOR RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN CELL BIOCHEMISTRY
Mr. Santer
Student research on the chemical composition and hereditary control of
cytoplasmic particles involved in protein synthesis. Laboratory work is
supplemented with readings from the current literature, and seminars by
students on material related to the research. Prerequisite: Biology 301b or
200a or consent of the instructor.
302 SENIOR RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN PHYSIOLOGICAL GENETICS
Mr. Finger
The major problem to be studied is the regulation of gene activity. Pre-
requisite: consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
303 SENIOR RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN EXPERIMENTAL CYTOLOGY
Mr. Kessler
Studies on the localization and structure of actin-like proteins from various
cell types. Ultra-structural studies will be undertaken by electron micro-
scopy. Various immunological methods will be employed. Prerequisite:
Biology 202b or consent of the instructor.
304 SENIOR RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN MOLECULAR MORPHO-
GENESIS Mr. Showe
Studies on the synthesis of multimolecular structures in cells are carried out
using biochemical and genetic techniques. The systems currently being used
are the electron transport chair of Escherichia coli, and bacteriophage T4.
Students should be prepared to develop independent approaches to experi-
mental problems. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
399c SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
A senior seminar which meets one evening each week consisting of:
(a) Presentation for discussion of research plans and research results
by students and faculty.
(b) Participation in the Department's Philips visitors program.
(c) Presentation by students of papers on contemporary developments
in experimental biology, providing an opportunity for library re-
search and for the writing of a paper.
(d) A written, open-book comprehensive examination testing the stu-
dent's ability to synthesize and analyze the material in course work.
Students should register for Biology 399c in both the fall and spring terms,
since the work of the course will be distributed through two semesters.
Course credit is given, however, only for the second semester.
79
CHEMISTRY
^On sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
■=0n leave of absence, 1970-71.
n
z
m
Professor Colin F. MacKay, Chairman
Professor William E. Cadbury****
Professor John P. Chesick*** ^
Professor Harmon C. Dunathan*** ■-
Associate Professor Robert M. Gavin, Jr. CD
Associate Professor Claude Wintner H
Assistant Professor Steven S. Hecht J^
Assistant Professor Geoffrey Martin i^
The program in chemistry is designed to meet the needs of students
who are pursuing chemistry for any of a variety of reasons. Introductory
courses in the Department provide a broad introduction to the science of
chemistry as one of the liberal arts. Intermediate and advanced courses
provide sound preparation for a wide range of professional activities in
the physical, biological, and medical sciences. At all levels extensive
use is made of the wide range of instruments available for student use.
(See section of catalog on "Facilities".)
The major program in chemistry recognizes that chemistry as a
discipline occupies the broad area between physics and biology and has
strong ties to both. Indeed, some of the most exciting areas in science
today are found in the interdisciplinary fields of chemical physics and
chemical biology. The department major allows the student maximum
flexibility in designing a program which can be directed either toward
one of these interdisciplinary areas or toward one of the more tradi-
tional areas of chemistry. This flexibility is apparent in the major
requirements, which accept on an equal basis advanced courses in
biology, chemistry, or physics.
This flexibility allows the major adviser and each student in con-
sultation to plan a program which takes into account that student's
interests and career aims. Students who are interested in graduate study
in any of the three areas of departmental emphasis are strongly urged
to go beyond the eight course program which constitutes the college
major. Some typical programs which prepare for graduate study are
given below:
Chemistry: Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202a, 203b, 301a, 302b, 307d, 307e,
306b, 309ci, 309e, 355a, or 356b; Physics 113a, 114b; Mathematics 113a,
114b, or 119a. Russian or German language study is strongly advised.
81
Chemical Physics: Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202a, 203b, 301a, 304b, 306b;
the former Physics 25 or the equivalent, and two advanced courses in either
Physics or Physical Chemistry; Mathematics 113a, 114b, 220b, and 221a.
Chemical Biology: Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202a, 203b, 301a, 356b; Biology
100, 201b, 200a; Physics 113a, 114b; Mathematics 113a, 114b.
Pre-Medical Students: See the section of the catalog on preparation for
professions. The usual requirement of four courses in Chemistry may be
met by enrolling in Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202a, 203b.
All Students taking their first course in the Department are required
to take a placement examination given during freshman week. This
examination, the results of advanced-placement tests, and school records
will form the basis for placement in Chemistry. Students who are inter-
ested in the mathematically-based areas of chemistry may want to con-
sider taking Physics 113a and Chemistry 202a as freshmen.
In addition to the course program, opportunities are offered for pur-
suit of laboratory research problems under faculty direction. These are
described under Research Tutorials below.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
The following major requirements are applicable for the Class of 1973 and
later. Requirements for the classes of 1971 and 1972 will be worked out in
consultation with the Chemistry Department.
Chemistry 107a, 108b, 202b, 301a; Mathematics 113a, 114b (or 119a); Physics
113a or the former Physics 19; plus four advanced courses in Chemistry, Biology,
or Physics. One of these advanced courses must be in the area of organic chemistry
or biology and one must be in the area of physics or physical chemistry. Biology
courses numbered 200 or above and Physics courses numbered 200 or above are
defined as advanced courses. Reading courses and courses designed for non-
scientists do not meet this requirement. Any requirement may be met by taking
a course of equivalent level at Bryn Mawr.
It is advised that Physics 113a be completed by the middle of the sophomore
year, to provide maximum flexibility in course planning during the junior and
senior years.
A student must earn a grade of at least 70 in those courses listed as prerequi-
site to an advanced course in order to qualify for admission to the advanced
course.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Students who are considered qualified will be invited to become candidates
for Departmental Honors during the second semester of the junior year. Honors
candidates will be expected to do superior work in major courses and to complete
a senior research problem at a level superior both in quality and quantity of
effort to that expected in normal course work. Research work extending through
two semesters is usually expected of a candidate for Departmental Honors. A
final paper and oral presentation of the work will be expected.
82
I Ola ATOMS AND MOLECULES IN ISOLATION AND IN INTERACTION
Three lectures; no laboratory Mr. Hecht
Basic concepts of importance in the field of chemistry are developed. Both
individual and bulk properties of atoms and molecules are considered, thus
establishing a basis for an appreciation of the significance of chemical reac-
tivity in a variety of situations. Open to students with no previous training
in science.
107a THE CHEMISTRY OF THE LIGHT ELEMENTS I
Messrs. Gavin and MacKay
Four hours; three lectures and one laboratory
The molecular architecture, bond properties, and energetics of the com-
pounds of elements from hydrogen to chlorine are examined and used to
develop a unified analysis of their modes of chemical reactivity. Prerequisite:
previous chemistry and assignment by the Department.
108b THE CHEMISTRY OF THE LIGHT ELEMENTS II Mr. Wintner
Four hours; three lectures and one laboratory
This course is an introduction to the chemistry of carbon, or organic chem-
istry. The properties of the common organic functional groups and the basic
mechanistic concepts of organic chemistry are discussed. These properties
are viewed within the context of the chemistry of the other light elements as
developed in Chemistry 107a. Prerequisite: Chemistry 107a or consent of
the instructor.
202b BASIC PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY Mr. MacKay
Four hours; three lectures and one laboratory period
A course designed to acquaint the student with basic areas of physical
chemistry and to serve as the gateway to the area-oriented physical chemistry
courses in the curriculum. Particular emphasis will be placed on solution
thermodynamics and equilibria. Other topics include electrochemistry, col-
ligative and phase properties, and chemical kinetics. Laboratory exercises
will consist of the quantitative study of systems illustrating principles de-
veloped in the lectures. Prerequisite: Physics 113a or the former Physics 19
and Mathematics 113a or 119a.
203a TOPICS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Mr. Wintner
Four hours; three lectures and one laboratory period
Topics in stereochemistry, reaction mechanisms, biochemistry, and natural-
products chemistry will build on the fundamentals developed in Chemistry
107a, 108b. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108b.
208b TOPICS IN CHEMICAL SCIENCE Messrs. MacKay and Gavin
An examination of selected topics in chemistry of potential interest to those
whose major interests lie outside the science division. Topics to be discussed
will be announced prior to registration. No prerequisite. Not open to stu-
dents who have taken chemisti^y, biology, or physics courses numbered 113a
or higher.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
83
301a, 302b LABORATORY IN CHEMICAL STRUCTURE AND
REACTIVITY Messrs. Hecht and Martin
Two laboratory periods
This course integrates inorganic, organic, and physical chemistry concepts in
a broad laboratory study of structure and its relationship to chemical reac-
tivity. A variety of spectroscopic methods are introduced as structural and
analytical tools. Chemical kinetics, isotopic labeling, chromatography, and
other physical methods are used in studies of reactions of inorganic and or-
ganic compounds. These include photochemical and enzyme-catalyzed reac-
tions. The experiments are "open-ended" and students are encouraged to
design their own approach to the questions investigated. Prerequisites:
Chemistry 108b and Chemistry 202b.
303a,b QUANTUM MECHANICS AND SPECTROSCOPY Mr. Zimmerman
Offered at Bryn Mawr College.
304b ADVANCED PHYSICAL AND INSTRUMENTAL METHODS
LABORATORY Staff
One lecture and two laboratory periods
Laboratory study of the applications of spectroscopic, X-ray, and other
methods to the determination of molecular structure, and of the reactive and
nonreactive interactions of molecules and ions. Prerequisites: Chemistry
202b and 306b which may be taken concurrently.
305d PRINCIPLES OF CHEMICAL KINETICS Mr. MacKay
Emphasis will be placed on microscopic properties and their significance for
kinetics; on mechanism, and on models. Prerequisite: Chemistry 202b or
the former Physics 19.
A half -course offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
305e TOPICS IN PHYSICAL AND INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Staff
Variable content depending on interests of students and faculty. Topic for
1970-71: The Chemistry of the Transition Metals. Prerequisite: Chemistry
107a and 202b or Chemistry 107a and the former Physics 19.
A half-course offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
306b QUANTUM CHEMISTRY Mr. Gavin
An introduction to quantum mechanics, with applications to problems in
chemical bonding and molecular spectroscopy and structure. The computer
is used in illustrative problem work. Prerequisite: Chemistry 202b or the
former Physics 19.
307d CLASSICAL CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS Mr. Chesick
Emphasis is placed on a careful examination of the concepts central to
thermodynamics, and on the internal structure and logic of the subject.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 202b or the former Physics 19.
A half-course offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
84
ll
307e INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL MECHANICS Mr. Chesick
The foundations of the subject in mechanics and probability theory are
discussed. From these foundations the thermodynamic functions are de-
veloped in a form which allows their computation from molecular properties.
Emphasis is on the properties of gases. Prerequisite: Chemistry 202b or the
former Physics 19.
A half-course offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
309d,e TOPICS IN PHYSICAL AND INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Staff
Variable content depending on interests of students and faculty involved.
Topics for 1970-71: 309d, Structure Determination by Scattering Methods;
309e, Group Theory and Its Applications to Chemistry. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 202b or Physics 115a.
Two half-courses offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
355a ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Messrs. Hecht and Wintner
Selected topics from the fields of stereochemistry and organic reaction
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 203a.
356b BIOCHEMICAL MECHANISMS Mr. Dunathan
The organic chemistry of proteins, polypeptides, and polynucleotides. The
theory and mechanism of enzyme action. Selected biological problems of
chemical interest. Prerequisite: Chemistry 203a.
Not offered in 1970-71.
Research Tutorials
Students with solid preparation in the Department's course work and a
strong desire to do independent laboratory work may register for a research
tutorial in an area of active faculty research. In these tutorials the student
attempts to define and solve a research problem under the close supervision
of a faculty member.
361a, 362b RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Messrs. Chesick, Gavin, MacKay, and Martin
Directed research in problems of molecular structure determination,
quantum chemistry, hot-atom chemistry, gas-phase reaction kinetics and
photochemistry, or one of a selected group of topics in inorganic chemistry.
363a, 364b RESEARCH TUTORIAL IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Messrs. Dunathan, Hecht, and Wintner
Directed research in areas of physical-organic chemistry and biochemistry.
Topics include studies of the mechanism of action of enzymes, utilizing
pyridoxal phosphate as a cofactor, and problems in free radical chemistry.
85
CLASSICS Q
Associate Professor Daniel J. Gillis, Chaiiman W
Associate Professor Joseph R. Russo «!
Assistant Professor Diskin Clay 55
(D
The Classics Department offers instruction in the language, litera- q
ture, and civilization of the Greek and Roman peoples. Principal em- m
phasis is laid upon meeting the Greek and Roman legacy through the *"
medium of the original languages, but courses in Classical Civilization
offer opportunities to study ancient history and literature in English
translation.
Two major programs offer students an opportunity either to specialize
in the ancient world or to follow the Classical Tradition into its later
manifestations.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Two major programs are available in this Department:
A. Classics Major: ten semester courses divided between Greek and Latin,
of which two must be from Classics 301a, 302b, 303a, 304b; Classics 490b;
a written examination in translation from Greek and Latin, to be taken at a
time set by the Department, ordinarily not later than the second week of the
second semester of the senior year. If a candidate fails this examination the
Department will decide when he may repeat it.
B. Classics and the Classical Tradition Major: a specific program, to be
approved by the Department, involving at least one ancient language and one
modern field of study, and a substantial paper; eight semester courses in Greek
or Latin; two semester courses in related fields in other departments; Classics
490b; a written examination in translation from Greek or Latin. If a candidate
fails this examination the Department will decide when he may repeat it.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
A. Classics Major: an average of 85 or better in classics courses during the
junior and senior years; a grade of 85 or better in the translation examinations;
either a substantial paper written during the senior year and due on or before
May 1 on a topic approved by the Department, or the completion of 300 pages
of reading in Greek and Latin during the junior and senior years in addition
to normal course assignments, the material to be chosen in consultation with
the Department; a one-hour oral examination on Honors and course work.
B. Classics and the Classical Tradition Major: Requirements are the same
as for Honors in Classics except that courses in the related field outside the
Department are to be counted in computing the grade average; the student will
not have the option of substituting reading in Latin and Greek for the paper,
which may be substantial extension of the paper required for the Major; the
oral examination will cover both ancient and later parts of the candidate's
special field.
87
COURSES IN GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
101a-102b ELEMENTARY GREEK Mr. Clay
Intensive study of the elements of the language, followed by reading of
easy Greek prose and poetry.
201a INTRODUCTION TO GREEK LITERATURE Mr. Russo
Readings in Homer's Odyssey, with lectures and reports on the Homeric
world. Prerequisite: Classics 10 la- 102b or the equivalent.
202b INTRODUCTION TO GREEK LITERATURE Mr. Russo
Reading of the major Greek poets of the centuries between Homer and
Aeschylus. Prerequisite: Classics 201a or permission of the instructor.
30 1 a GREEK LITERATURE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY: POETRY
Mr. Russo
Reading of the Oedipus tragedies of Sophocles, plus critical study of his
other plays in English translation. Prerequisite: Classics 201a or 202b or
the equivalent.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
302b GREEK LITERATURE IN THE FIFTH CENTURY: PROSE
Mr. Gillis
Readings in the Histories of Herodotus and Thucydides, with special atten-
tion to literary aspects of the works. Prerequisite: Classics 201a or 202b or
the equivalent.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
303a, 304b GREEK LITERATURE IN THE FOURTH CENTURY: PROSE
Staff
Study of Platonic dialogues, as dictated by the needs of the students enrolled.
Students majoring in Classics will be afforded opportunities to practice Greek
composition. May be repeated for credit with change of content. Prerequisite:
Classics 201a or 202b or the equivalent. Classics 304b may be taken without
303a.
COURSES IN LATIN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
103a-104b ELEMENTARY LATIN Messrs. GilHs and Russo
Basic instruction in Latin declension and conjugation; then reading in Latin
prose and poetry, with special emphasis on Ovid. ^
105a LATIN LITERATURE I: PROSE Mr. Gillis
Review of grammar and vocabulary: reading of five or six major orations
of Cicero. Prerequisite: Classics 103a-104b or two or three years of prepara-
tory Latin.
106b LATIN LITERATURE I: POETRY Mr. Clay
Readings in the Aeneid of Vergil. Prerequisites: Classics 103a-104b and
105a or 107a or the equivalent, at the discretion of the instructor.
88
107a LATIN LITERATURE II: PROSE Mr. Gillis
Readings in the Agiicola, Germania and Annales of Tacitus. Prerequisite:
Classics 105a, 106b, or four years of preparatory Latin.
108b LATIN LITERATURE II: POETRY Mr. Clay
Readings in the Augustan poets.
203a LATIN LITERATURE III: POETRY Mr. Clay
Readings in the De reriim natura of Lucretius. Prerequisites at the discretion
of the instructor. This course may be repeated for credit with change of
content.
204b LATIN LITERATURE III: PROSE Mr. Gillis
Studies in the Pro Caelio and De oratore of Cicero. Prerequisites at the
discretion of the instructor. This course may be repeated for credit with
change of content.
COURSES IN CLASSICAL CIVILIZATION NOT REQUIRING THE USE OF
GREEK OR LATIN
119a GREEK CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
(Also called History 119a and Religion 119a; for course description see
History 119a.)
120b ROMAN CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
(Also called History 120b and Religion 120b; for course description see
History 120 b.)
208b SEMINAR IN CLASSICAL LITERATURE: "ODYSSEUS AND
ULYSSES" Mr. Russo
A close reading of Homer's Odyssey and James Joyce's Ulysses, in the hope
of answering such questions as:
1 ) To what extent does Joyce seem inspired by Homer's poem and in
what ways is his book like or unlike the Odyssey'}
2) What is a novel, what is an epic, and which has Joyce written?
3) How does each author make language the artist's special tool for
expressing his view of the world man lives in^ and an instrument for
relating himself to his tradition and at the same time going beyond it?
No prerequisites. Limited to twelve non-Freshman. Given annually with
change of topic. May be repeated for credit.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Prerequisites at the discretion of the instructor.
490b SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
89
ECONOMICS
Professor Holland Hunter, Chairman
President John R. Coleman
Assistant Professor Samuel Gubins
Lecturer Helen M. Hunter
At Bryn Mawr
Professor Joshua C. Hubbard, Acting Chairman
Associate Professor Richard B. DuBoff
Lecturer Susan Wachter
The work in economics provides a basis for understanding and
evaluating the operation of the American economy and other types of
economy. Concepts and analytic methods are presented as aids in
formation of intelligent policy judgments. The introductory course,
Economics 101a,b (a one-semester course offered each semester) is
designed to give the kind of informed perspective on economic per-
formance standards that should be part of a liberal education. The
group of intermediate courses offers a fuller range of material on major
topics in the field, designed to be useful to non-majors as well as
majors. The group of advanced courses supplies a theoretical and
methodological foundation for those who either expect to major in
economics or to make use of economics in their professional careers.
Majors are encouraged to take these courses in their sophomore or
junior years, where practicable. In all courses students are exposed to
the data and primary source material that underlie sound economic
analysis, and are encouraged to apply oral, written, and computer
methods in analyzing this evidence.
Students planning a career in economics, business, and management
will find various economics courses useful as introductions to the
mathematical methods and theoretical models that are now part of
advanced professional training. In addition, it is recommended that
students with these career interests include calculus, probability and
statistics, and linear algebra in their course work.
The major research which is a requirement of the major may be
carried out during the second half of the junior year or during the
senior year as part of a research seminar or as work performed in
Economics 480, 481.
90
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS ^
Economics 101a,b, 301a; two semester courses from 303a, 304b, 305b; three f|
other semester courses, one of which is a reasonable course taken during the «
spring of the junior year or during the senior year; and three other approved *»
courses in the social sciences or mathematics. The comprehensive examination 2
involves a required written examination and, at the student's option, an oral a
examination. W
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS ^
Plans for Honors work will usually be laid during a student's junior year. An 1 1
Honors project will involve a paper of high quality, usually begun in a research f||
seminar, together with an oral examination.
101a,b INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS Staff
Study of the institutions and principles of the American economy, with
stress on the forces promoting stable growth with minimum inflation and
unemployment. Analysis of the relationships that determine individual in-
comes and prices, the issues that arise in international economic affairs, and
the problems of poverty at home and abroad. Diverse readings, class dis-
cussion, papers.
201a ECONOMIC HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT Mr. DuBoff
Long-term trends in output, resources, technology; structure of consumption,
production, distribution; foreign trade and finance; basic causes of economic
growth and underdevelopment; the role of the state. Quantitative findings
provide the points of departure. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
202a LATIN AMERICAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mrs. Wachter
A theoretical and empirical analysis in an historical setting of the factors
which have led to the economic underdevelopment of Latin America. The
interrelationship between political and social change and economic growth.
204b THE MODERN CORPORATION Mr. Coleman
Study of selected issues in the role of the corporation in the economy and
society: pressures in decision-making, relations with government and labor,
response to new social concerns, and development of leadership.
205b PRIVATE ENTERPRISE AND PUBLIC POLICY Mrs. Wachter
A theoretical and empirical analysis of the behavior of business firms and
the structure of industrial markets in the U.S. economy; evaluation of the
performance of these markets; social and political implications of public
regulation of private enterprises. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
206b INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC THEORY AND POLICY
Current problems in international trade; the theory of trade; the balance of
payments and the theory of disturbances and adjustment in the international
economy; economic integration; the impact of growth in rich and poor
countries on the development of the world economy. Prerequisite; Eco-
nomics 101a, b.
Offered in 1971-72.
91
207a MONEY AND BANKING Mr. Hubbard
The development and present organization of the money and banking system
of the United States; domestic and international problems of monetary
theory and policy. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
208b PUBLIC FINANCE AND FISCAL POLICY Mr. Hubbard
A study of local, state, and Federal revenues and expenditures with particu-
lar emphasis on the Federal budget; fiscal policy as a positive means of
shaping public taxation and expenditure so as to contribute to a stable,
full-employment economy. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
209a ECONOMICS OF URBAN POVERTY Mr. Gubins
Study of economic aspects of urban poverty problems, investment in human
resources, financing of urban sei^vices, relations between income and earn-
ings; theoretical and empirical analysis of benefits and costs of poverty
programs. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
210a THE SOVIET SYSTEM Mr. Hunter
(Also called Political Science 210a)
An analysis of the structure and functioning of major Soviet economic,
political, and social institutions. Current arrangements are studied as prod-
ucts of historical development. Present performance and prospects are
evaluated. Prerequisite: two semester courses of economics, political science,
or history.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
212b POLITICAL ECONOMY Mr. DuBoff
An analysis of contemporary capitalism as a socio-economic system. Free
market, Keynesian, Marxist and Socialist theories are appraised. Readings
may include Marx, Baran, Sweezy, Galbraith, Friedman and others. Prereq-
uisite: Economics 101a, b.
214b ECONOMICS OF MINORITIES
An examination of economic and social indicators relating to national and
local conditions; specific studies of labor and housing markets in the Black,
Appalachian and American Indian communities. Theories of racial dis-
crimination and poverty. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
Offered in 1971-72.
216b WESTERN EUROPEAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mr. DuBoff
Selected topics in the economic history of Britain, France, Germany, and
Italy since 1760 are examined, both theoretically and empirically. Represent-
ative topics may include the "industrial revolution," technological change,
demographic trends, the growth of international trade and finance, the
impacts of the world wars, and the effects of national economic policies.
Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
218b SEMINAR IN LABOR RESOURCES Mr. Coleman
Selected issues in the functioning of labor markets and the development of
human resources. Illustrative topics: frictions in labor markets from un-
skilled through professionals, ideology in contrasting work groups, rise and
92
I
status of labor unionism, public policy on collective bargaining, investment
in education and training. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
300b RESEARCH SEMINAR ON HUMAN RESOURCES,
POVERTY, AND URBAN ECONOMICS Mr. Gubins
Students will engage in independent, empirical research on manpovi'er de-
velopment, poverty, and urban problems of the Philadelphia region. Pre-
requisite: Economics 209a or permission of the instructor.
301a STATISTICAL METHODS IN ECONOMICS Mrs. Hunter
An introduction to the concepts and procedures that underlie the quantitative
analysis of economic and other social data. Frequency distributions, proba-
bility and sampling, time series, index numbers, regression analysis, com-
puter programming. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
302b INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMETRICS Mrs. Hunter
Quantitative methods of economic analysis and forecasting are presented in
class and then used by students in individual projects. Multiple regression
analysis, econometric m.odels, economic forecasting, use of maximization
and input-output methods. Prerequisite: Economics 301a or permission of
the instructor.
303 a MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS Mr. Gubins
Rigorous review of the theoretical foundations of income determination,
monetary phenomena, and fluctuations in price level and employment. In-
troduction to dynamic processes. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
304b MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS Mr. Gubins
Systematic investigation of analytic relationships underlying consumer wel-
fare, efficient resource allocation, ideal pricing, and the distribution of in-
come. Half of the course is devoted to the application of microeconomic
theory to current problems. Prerequisite: Economics 101a, b.
305b DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS Mr. Hunter
Theoretical treatment of the structural changes associated with the process
of economic development, especially in poor countries, and rigorous analysis
of criteria for policy judgments in development programming. Introduction
to input-output and linear programming methods. Prerequisite: Economics
101a, b.
307b RESEARCH SEMINAR ON COMMUNIST DEVELOPMENT
Mr. Hunter
Students will investigate past or prospective development processes in the
USSR, Eastern Europe, or China, selecting a conceptual or empirical prob-
lem and applying social sciences analytic methods. Prerequisite: Economics/
Political Science 210a or permission of the instructor.
311a RESEARCH SEMINAR ON INTERNATIONAL TRADE
Student research will involve constructing measures of recent develop-
ments between trading nations, testing hypotheses using existing data and
current statistical techniques, or attempting extensions of international trade
theory. Prerequisite: Economics 206b or permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
480, 481 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
93
ENGINEERING AND APPLIED SCIENCE [Jl
2
Professor Theodore B. Hetzel, Chairman m
Associate Professor Thomas A. Benham jj"
The newly revised and expanded program in Engineering and Applied fll
Science is designed to provide a sound preparation for a career in en- fTI
gineering or industry by a combination of basic engineering courses jfl
with a broad range of those in the natural sciences, mathematics, social "•
sciences, and humanities. 2
The creative aspects of engineering are emphasized by involving the
student in development of special engineering projects, one at an ele-
mentary level in the sophomore year and another at an advanced level
in the senior year. These laboratory projects in design and construction
will take into account not only the technical but also the scientific and
social implications of the project.
The iatroductory course is divided into two distinct elements. The
first semester, planned primarily for engineering majors, concentrates
on engineering design. The second is an introduction to automatic com-
putation, for students in engineering and in the social and natural
sciences as well. It will center around problems of numerical methods
and procedures involving the use of linear algebra, differential and
integral calculus, and elementary statistics, making extensive use of the
College's IBM 360 digital computer.
The courses for the engineering major plus the general College re-
quirements in the natural and social sciences and the humanities, to-
gether with several free electives, constitute a program such as is some-
times called "General Engineering" or "Engineering Administration."
Haverford graduates with a major in engineering who wish to carry
on further technical training in engineering are granted advanced stand-
ing in undergraduate engineering schools or are admitted to graduate
schools. Those engineering majors who seek employment in leading
industrial firms have found that their preparation at Haverford has
prepared them well for engineering employment as well as for future
study and training.
Our students profit by opportunities to visit industrial plants and
attend meetings of technical societies in the Philadelphia area.
95
0
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Engineering 210a, 240b, 250a, 260a, 320b, 480 a or b, 490; Mathematics 113a;
Physics 113a; Economics 101a and 101b; three additional courses above the intro-
ductory level, from engineering, mathematics, or the natural sciences, chosen in
consultation with the Engineering Department.
110a INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING DESIGN Mr. Hetzel
One class and two laboratory periods
Principles and conventions of engineering graphics, including pictorial drawing
and descriptive geometry; the materials and methods of production; the com-
ponents of machines and their kinematic analysis. Prerequisite: consent of
the instructor.
210a ANALYTICAL MECHANICS Mr. Hetzel
A study of statics, kinematics, and dynamics; forces in equilibrium, friction,
moments of inertia, plane motion, work and energy, impulse and momen-
tum, mechanical vibrations. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
230a MATHEMATICAL METHODS IN ENGINEERING Mr. Benham
Use of such advanced mathematical techniques as infinite series, transforms,
Bessel functions, and complex variables. Problems are chosen from various
fields of engineering. Prerequisites: Mathematics 113a; Physics 113a.
240b ENGINEERING DESIGN Messrs. Benham and Hetzel
One class and two laboratory periods
The group will choose a feasible problem, consider the technical, economic,
and social aspects; and invent, design, and construct a solution to the problem.
Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
250a INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Mr. Benham
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Direct and alternating current circuits and machines, transient phenomena.
Engineering 230a recommended.
260b INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS Mr. Benham
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Electronic devices, magnetic and control circuits, radiation and detection of
electromagnetic waves, transmission systems. Prerequisite: Engineering 250a.
220c INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATIC COMPUTATION Mr. Snyder
Two lectures and two hours of laboratory throughout the year, for one
semester-course credit
Lectures will present basic mathematical material and the fundamentals of
numerical analysis. Emphasis will be more on over-all viewpoints than on
96
particular techniques. The laboratory will consist of computer programming
with problems drawn as far as possible from the student's major field. Pre-
requisite: Mathematics 113a or the equivalent.
Offered at Bryn Mawr as Mathematics 220c.
320b THERMODYNAMICS Mr. Hetzel
A study of energy, its sources, liberation, transfer, and utilization; gases,
vapors, and their mixtures; theoretical and actual thermodynamic cycles for
power and refrigeration. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
330a MECHANICS OF MATERIALS Mr. Hetzel
A study of beams, shafts, columns, vessels, and joints, acted upon by simple
and combined stresses. Prerequisite: Engineering 210a and consent of the
instructor.
340b INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES Mr. Hetzel
The thermodynamics, fluid flow, and performance of internal combustion
engines; consideration of fuels, carburetion, injection, etc. and several labora-
tory investigations of engine performance. Prerequisite: Engineering 320b or
consent of the instructor.
350a CIRCUIT THEORY Mr. Benham
Four hours, inchiding one laboratory period
Networks, resonance, integrating and differentiating systems, and filters.
Prerequisite: Engineering 250a and 260b (which may be taken concurrently)
or consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
360b ADVANCED ELECTRONICS Mr. Benham
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Amplifiers, rectifiers, oscillators, pulse-height analyzers. Prerequisite: En-
gineering 350a or consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
370a COMMUNICATION THEORY Mr. Benham
Review of communication systems; study of the theory and problems asso-
ciated with noise; introduction to information theory. Prerequisite: consent
of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
480a,b INDEPENDENT STUDY Messrs. Benham and Hetzel
Engineering majors are required to do at least one semester of individual
work in some special field of investigation, such as the engineering of a
project with consideration of its technical, industrial, commercial, and
sociological aspects.
490 SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES
97
ENGLISH III
Professor Alfred W. Satterthwaite, Chairman ~
Professor John A. Lester, Jr. y|
Professor John Ashmead, Jr.*** P
Professor Edgar Smith Rose in
Professor Frank J. Quinn ■.
Associate Professor Duncan Aswell ^
Assistant Professor James C. Ransom***
Assistant Professor Richard Lubarsky
Lecturer Doris S. Quinn
The Department of English aims to make accessible to students their
cultural heritage in English and to help them perfect their reading and
writing skills. These aims are reciprocal. Only if students read well are
they able to possess their heritage; only if they realize through literature
the full resources of language will their own writing attain the desired
level of effectiveness.
Many students who choose to major in English intend to pursue some
aspect of the subject professionally: to proceed to graduate school, to
teach literature, or to undertake a literary career. The program of the
Department provides preliminary education for all these purposes. The
study of literature in English is recommended likewise to those students
who intend to enter a non-literary profession such as law, government
service, the ministry, medicine, or business. The Department welcomes
such students.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
A variety of major programs is available in the Department of English, limited
only by the following provisions:
The details of each English major's program vi^ill be worked out with a member
of the English faculty chosen by the student to act as his major adviser. Upon the
chairman's approval, this program becomes a contract of academic work which
the student will undertake in his junior and senior years. The contract may be
revised on consultation with and approval of the student and faculty member
concerned.
The program will include one semester of introductory work in the field (101a
or 101b), English 398b, and at least seven other courses pertinent to advanced
English studies. As many as two semesters of study of a foreign literature in the
original language or classical literature in translation will be accepted toward the
English major.
Normally the major in English will entail a concentration in English literature
or in American literature or, in cooperation with appropriate departments,
***0n sabbatical leave, 1970-71.
99
American Studies. Individual contracts with a consistent plan for some study in
the literary tradition relevant to the student's special interests (including contracts
in comparative literature) will be given sympathetic consideration.
The student's attention is called to the range and variety of types of literature
and literary study which are offered in the English curriculum. In substance there
are courses which study various literary periods in depth, others which concen-
trate on a major author or small group of authors, or inquire into a particular
literary problem or a particular literary genre, or which deal with literary theory
and criticism, the art of writing, and the art of the film. In procedure, courses
variously involve lecture-discussion, seminar, project work, or independent read-
ing. It is expected that the major in English will take advantage of this variety
in offerings.
The nature of the English 398b course to be offered will be determined through
an inquiry (in November of the senior year) which will consider the progress
achieved by each student in the terms of his individual contract.
In November of each academic year the English faculty will meet with all
English majors (and prospective majors) to discuss English Department courses
proposed for the following year.
Courses in English taken at Bryn Mawr College (under the terms specified
earlier in this catalog) may count toward the major.
The comprehensive examination will be determined individually, in consultation
with the contract supervisor, with the approval of the Chairman of the
Department.
Students who plan to proceed to graduate work are reminded that virtually
all graduate schools require a reading knowledge of both French and German,
and some of the leading ones require a knowledge of Latin, also, for the Ph.D.
degree in English.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Students whose work shows superior achievement will be invited to become
Honors candidates at the end of their junior year. Candidates for Honors must
achieve an overall average of 85 or better in English courses (including 398b)
completed in their junior and senior years.
Each Honors candidate must submit a substantial paper which demonstrates
his ability to handle critically and to present in scholarly fashion an acceptable
literary subject. This paper must be in the hands of the chairman of the Depart-
ment not later than May 1st of the student's senior year. To be accepted for
Honors this paper must, in the judgment of the English faculty, reveal superior
achievement.
Honors are awarded on the basis of achievement in courses, an Honors project,
and the comprehensive examination. High Honors are granted on the further
evidence of distinction in an oral examination.
101a,b THE READING OF LITERATURE Staff
The course provides a disciplined grounding in the skills of appreciation,
analysis, and interpretation. It will emphasize the close reading of a small
number of exemplary texts, drama and films as well as poetry and fiction,
with some secondary readings in theory and criticism. The course will
100
incorporate to some extent the tutorial and the stress on writing of the former
EngHsh 11-12. A one-semester course offered in each semester. Required of
all English majors, but not a prerequisite for English courses taken by
non-majors.
121a GENERAL COURSE IN ENGLISH LITERATURE (I) THE HERO:
PAST AND PRESENT Mr. Lester
A consideration, with variations, of the heroic life as seen in the English
literary heritage; its pattern and meaning, in past and present.
Not offered in 1971-72.
nib GENERAL COURSE IN ENGLISH LITERATURE (II) Mr. Lester
Major figures in English literature from the early eighteenth century to the
present.
Not offered in 1970-71.
133a LITERATURE OF THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE (I) Mr. Ransom
A critical study of the literature of the Elizabethan age.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
134b LITERATURE OF THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE (II)
Mr. Satterthwaite
A critical study of the literature of the late Elizabethan period through the
early Stuart reigns.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
U2a THE ART OF POETRY Mr. Quinn
The analysis and interpretation of selected poems in terms of tone, image,
metaphor, diction, prosody, theme, symbol, and myth. Enrollment limited to
freshmen and sophomores.
147a LINGUISTICS, RHETORIC, AND LITERATURE Mr. Ashmead
(See General Courses: Linguistics 147a)
Not offered in 1970-71.
221a THE RISE OF THE NOVEL Mr. Rose
A concentrated study of selected works of fiction from Defoe to Austen,
employing such concepts as plot, character, setting, theme, style, mimesis,
and point of view.
222b THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE NOVEL Mr. Lester
Narrative fiction from Austen to Joyce.
101
233a THE AGE OF MILTON Mr. Rose
Selected works by Milton in the context of metaphysical poetry, baroque
prose, and Restoration drama.
234b THE NEOCLASSICAL MOVEMENT Mr. Satterthwaite
A study of some of the major works of Swift, Pope, and Johnson.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
245a AMERICAN LITERATURE AND AMERICAN STUDIES BEFORE
1890 Mr. Ashmead
An inquiry into the relationships of American literature and American
culture mainly before 1890, centering on examination of a few related issues,
forms, or topics, especially as these have relevance today.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
246b AMERICAN LITERATURE AND AMERICAN STUDIES SINCE 1890
Mr. Ashmead
An inquiry into the relationships of American literature and American culture
since 1890, centering on examination of a few related issues, forms, or topics.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
255a SELECTED AMERICAN AUTHORS, ISSUES, AND LITERARY
THEORIES, MAINLY BEFORE THE CIVIL WAR Mr. Aswell
An exploration of a few related authors and their works, especially as these
mark significant and lasting new directions in American literature.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
256b SELECTED AMERICAN AUTHORS, ISSUES, AND LITERARY
THEORIES, FROM THE CIVIL WAR TO WORLD WAR I Mr. Aswell
An exploration of a few related authors and their works, especially as these
mark significant new directions in American literature. The specific topic
will be announced each year the course is given.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
261a BLACK LITERATURE IN AMERICA Mr. Aswell
A study of black literary expression in various forms, with emphasis on
works by W. E. B. DuBois, Richard Wright, Ralph Ellison, and LeRoi Jones.
Some peripheral attention to certain white authors (such as Joel Chandler
Harris and Gertrude Stein), for purposes of drawing specific and pointed
comparisons. Enrollment limited.
270b SHAKESPEARE Mrs. Quinn
Extensive reading in Shakespeare's plays. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
102
I
280b CREATIVE WRITING Mr. Ashmead
Practice in writing imaginative literature. Chiefly confined to prose fiction.
Regular assignments, class discussions, and personal conferences. Prerequisite:
junior standing and consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
311a SOUTHERN LETTERS: 1919 TO THE PRESENT Mr. Lubarsky
An examination of the flowering of Southern American literature after World
War I, with particular emphasis on William Faulkner, lohn Crowe Ransom,
Allen Tate, Robert Penn Warren, Thomas Wolfe, Flannery O'Connor, Eudora
Welty, and John Barth. Enrollment limited. Prerequisite: a prior course in
English or consent of the instructor.
333a THE ROMANTIC PERIOD Mr. Ransom
Critical reading in the literature of the English romantic tradition. Prerequi-
site: consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited to juniors and seniors.
Not offered in 1970-71.
334b THE VICTORIAN PERIOD Mr. Lester
Readings in the controversial, critical, and imaginative literature of the
period. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
345a BRITISH LITERATURE OF THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
Mr. Quinn and Mrs. Quinn
Selected writers in poetry, prose, and drama. Prerequisite: two courses in
English above the freshman level. Enrollment limited to juniors and seniors.
346b AMERICAN LITERATURE OF THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
Messrs. Aswell and Lubarsky
Selected writers in poetry, prose, and drama. Prerequisite: two courses in
English above the freshman level. Enrollment limited to juniors and seniors.
351a LITERARY THEORY AND CRITICISM Mr. Rose
(Also called Philosophy 351a)
A systematic exploration of various approaches to literature. Reading in
aesthetics, criticism, and imaginative literature. Discussions and critical
papers.
Not offered in 1970-71.
355a CHAUCER AND THE CHAUCERIANS Mr. Quinn
A study of the Canterbury Tales, Troilus and Criseyde, Chaucer's prose,
and the work of Henryson and Dunbar. Prerequisite: consent of the instruc-
tor. Enrollment limited.
103
361a TOPICS IN SHAKESPEARE Mr. Satterthwaite
Close study of a few plays. Seminar. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
Enrollment limited.
364b TOPICS IN AMERICAN LITERATURE Mr. Rose
1970-71: T. S. Eliot. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
366b TOPICS IN AMERICAN LITERATURE Mr. Lubarsky
1970-71: American Drama and Film: Modern American drama from Eugene
O'Neill to LeRoi Jones, with consideration of selected films which have been
adapted from plays. The course will consider the theories of the two media,
and the influence they have had on one another.
371a TOPICS IN ENGLISH LITERATURE Mr. Lester
1970-71: W. B. Yeats. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
375a TOPICS IN ENGLISH LITERATURE Mr. Satterthwaite
1970-71: Gerard Manley Hopkins. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
Enrollment limited.
378b TOPICS IN ENGLISH LITERATURE Mr. Quinn
1970-71: James Joyce. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
398b SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
A required course for majors, English 398b reviews the work of the program
in preparation for the Comprehensive Examination. Procedure each year
will be determined at a November inquiry (see under Major Requirements).
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Project courses consist of individual study and writing under the supervision
of a member of the department. They are available only to advanced stu-
dents and are offered only at the discretion of individual teachers. Candi-
dates for Honors are expected to undertake, in the last semester of the
senior year, a project leading to the Honors paper.
104
FINE ARTS Tl
z
m
Associate Professor Charles Stegeman, Chairman
Assistant Professor Christopher Cairns HI
Professor Theodore B. Hetzel
At Bryn Mawr
Associate Professor Fritz Janschka H
-i
The aims of the courses in the field of Fine Arts are dual : (Q
1 — For the students not majoring in Fine Arts:
to develop the visual sense to the point where it increases
human perception, and to present to the student the knowledge
and understanding of all art forms and their historical context.
2 — For students intending to major:
beyond the foregoing, to promote thinking in visual terms and
to foster the skills needed to give expression to these in a form
of art.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
For those majoring in Painting or related two-dimensional disciplines: required
courses: Fine Arts 101; two courses of Fine Arts 115a or b, 225a or b, 231a or b,
241a or b, 251a or b; Fine Arts 233a and b; Fine Arts 333a or b; Fine Arts 371a
or b; Fine Arts 499, plus three Art History courses to be taken at Bryn Mawr.
For those majoring in Sculpture or related three-dimensional disciplines:
required courses: Fine Arts 101; two courses of Fine Arts 115a or b, 224a or b,
231a or b, 241a or b, 251 a or b; Fine Arts 243a and b; Fine Arts 343a or b;
Fine Arts 371a or b; Fine Arts 499, plus three Art History courses to be taken at
Bryn Mawr.
101 FINE ARTS FOUNDATION PROGRAM Messrs. Cairns, Hetzel, Stegeman
Drawing — D; Painting — P; Photography — F; Sculpture — S
This course aims at introducing the student to at least three different disci-
plines from the four presently offered by the department: drawing, painting,
photography and sculpture. Each subject will be an introductory course,
dealing with the formal elements characteristic of the particular subject as
well as the appropriate techniques. In discussing these disciplines their
interrelationships will be shown. Part of the work will be from Life model
in drawing, painting and sculpture. These subjects will be offered as half-
semester courses; one can choose all four in either or both semesters for
two course credits or any three for one and one-half credits.
The course will be structured so that the student experiences the differences
as well as the similarities between the various expressions in art, thus afford-
ing a "perspective" insight into the visual process as a basis for artistic
expression. Enrollment limited.
105
k
115a,b GRAPHIC ARTS Mr. Janschka
Offered at Bryn Mawr College.
225a,b ADVANCED DRAWING Mr. Janschka
Offered at Bryn Mawr College.
231a,b DRAWING ALL MEDIA Mr. Stegeman
This course will deal with the various drawing media, such as charcoal,
conte, pencil, ink and mixed media. It will explore the relationship between
media, techniques and expression. The student will be exposed to the prob-
lems involving space, design and composition as well as "thinking" in two
dimensions. Part of the work will be from Life model. May be repeated for
credit. Prerequisites: Fine Arts 101 and consent of the instructor.
241 a,b DRAWING ALL MEDIA Mr. Cairns
This course will deal in essence with the same problems as Fine Arts 231a, b.
However, some of the drawing media will be clay modeling in half-hour
sketches; the space and design concepts solve three-dimensional problems.
Part of the work will be done from Life model. May be repeated for credit.
Prerequisites: Fine Arts 101 and consent of the instructor.
233a,b PAINTING: MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUES Mr. Stegeman
This course will allow a thorough investigation of the problems of (1) form,
color texture and their interrelationships, (2) influence of the various paint-
ing techniques upon the expression of a work, (3) the characteristics and
limitations of the different media, (4) control over the structure and com-
position of a work of art, and (5) the relationships of form and composition,
and color and composition. Media will be primarily oils but acrylics, water-
colors and egg tempera will be explored. Part of the work will be from Life
model. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Fine Arts 101 and consent
of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
243 a,b SCULPTURE: MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUES Mr. Cairns
This course will develop ( 1 ) the awareness of the behavior of objects in
space, (2) the concepts and techniques leading up to the control of form
in space, and (3) the characteristics and limitations of the various sculpture
media and their influence on the final work. Clay modeling techniques will
be used predominantly but not exclusively. Part of the work will be done
from Life model. Students will learn fundamental casting techniques. May
be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Fine Arts 101 and consent of the
instructor. Enrollment limited.
251a,b PHOTOGRAPHY Mr. Hetzel
A course in the use of photography to record and express information and
emotion. Basic camera techniques and black/white processing will be taught,
but emphasis will be on the creation of prints. May be repeated for credit.
Prerequisites: Fine Arts 101 and consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
333a,b EXPERIMENTAL STUDIO (PAINTING) Mr. Stegeman
Prerequisites: Fine Arts 233a or b, and consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
106
I
i
343a,b EXPERIMENTAL STUDIO (SCULPTURE) Mr. Cairns
In these studio courses the student is encouraged to experiment with ideas
and techniques with the purpose of developing a personal expression. It is
expected that the student will already have a sound knowledge of painting or
sculpture techniques and is at the stage where personal expression has become
possible. At the end of the semester the student will exhibit his project. May
be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Fine Arts 243a or b, and consent of the
instructor. Enrollment limited.
371a,b ANALYSIS OF THE VISUAL VOCABULARY: PAINTING AND
SCULPTURE SINCE WORLD WAR II Mr. Stegeman
This illustrated lecture and discussion course aims at developing the visual
sense; at establishing a link of understanding between things seen and per-
ceived, and concepts; to analyze and understand the meaning of art; to know
and evaluate the individual expression of artists of the last twenty-five years.
May be repeated for credit. Enrollment limited to 50.
481a,b INDEPENDENT STUDY Messrs. Cairns and Stegeman
This course gives the advanced student the opportunity to experiment with
his concepts and ideas and to explore in depth his talent. Prerequisite: consent
of the instructor.
499 SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
In this course the student reviews the depth and extent of his experience
gained, and in so doing creates a body of work giving evidence of his
achievement. At the end of the senior year the student is expected to pro-
duce— in essence — a one-man show of his work.
108
i
GENERAL COURSES
HUMANITIES 201 INTERPRETATION OF LIFE IN WESTERN LITERA-
TURE Messrs. Butman and Lubarski
A study in their entirety of selected literary and philosophic works which
are great imaginative presentations of attitudes toward life. The course spans
Western culture from Homer to the present, and the readings are drawn
from all the major literatures of the West, in the best available translations.
Stress is laid on student involvement in issues raised by these books; con-
sequently, the class work is handled entirely by the discussion method.
HUMANITIES 301 TWENTIETH CENTURY FICTION Mr. Gutwirth
A reading of major works from Proust to Borges, by way of loyce, Thomas
Mann, and Italo Svevo. Individual students will be expected to take a leading
part in the discussion of works falling within their major subjects. Faculty
consultants will be called in from time to time to lecture or participate in
the discussion of specialized topics. A reading knowledge of one foreign
language relevant to the topic is required. Limited to 15 students. Prerequisite:
consent of the instructor.
LINGUISTICS 308 INTRODUCTION TO LINGUISTICS Miss Dorian
Language in the social context: human versus animal communication; child-
hood language acquistion; bi-lingualism; regional dialects; usage and the
issue of "correctness'"; social dialects; speech behavior and other cultures.
Offered at Bryii Mawr as Interdepartmental Course 308.
LINGUISTICS (ENGLISH) 147a LINGUISTICS, RHETORIC AND
LITERATURE Mr. Ashmead
An inquiry into applications of the new linguistics and the new rhetoric to
the study, appreciation, and writing of literature. Each year the course will
concentrate on a special topic, usually with the aid of visiting scholars.
Not offered in 1970-71.
109
G)
m
2
HUMANITIES 101 AND 102 THE WESTERN TRADITION
(Freshman Seminar)
A sequence of four semester courses enrolling 24 Freshmen who engage to ITI
remain in the course for the full two years. The first year which takes the Tj
form of a sequence of two freshman seminars, will be devoted to a study of ^^
the epic, the drama, philosophic and biblical writings spanning, roughly, the ^
era from Gilgamesh to Augustine. The second year, moving from Dante to f"
Freud, takes in some of the major literary, philosophic, and artistic achieve-
ment of the West in modem times. Visits to museums, a concert or two, a O
film extend the range of the course beyond the written work. Two instructors m
each year (four in all) will lead class discussions together and conduct *J
tutorials separately. They will be drawn from Classics, Philosophy, History, ^
and one other department.
Humanities 101 offered in 1971-72 and thereafter.
Humanities 102 offered in 1972-73 and thereafter.
m
PSYCHOLOGY/SOCIOLOGY 153d,e,g STATISTICS FOR THE SOCIAL
SCIENCES Staff
A seven-week program designed to provide a basic level of insight into
statistics: description of data sets, probability and sampling, and inference of
population parameters from sample statistics. The specific statistics covered
will be t-tests, correlation, chi-square and simple analysis of variance. Pro-
grammed and conventional tests will be used with particular attention to
working problems.
SOCIAL SCIENCE 216a AFRICAN CIVILIZATION
Messrs. Glickman or Mortimer or MacGaffey
Selected problems in the study of culture and politics in Africa, with empha-
sis on a major country or region, different each year. In 1970-71: French-
speaking Africa. Visits by artists, writers, academic commentators and
statesmen. Research papers. Prerequisite: one year of social science and one
year of humanities or consent of the instructor.
SOCIAL SCIENCE 262b THE AFRO-AMERICAN EXPERIENCE: SOUTH
AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN Mr. Moore
A selective inquiry into the social and cultural experiences of black people.
Particular attention to Brazil, Cuba, Haiti, Jamaica, Guyana and the Do-
minican Republic. Prerequisite: one year of social science and one year of
humanities or consent of the instructor.
GERMAN
Professor John R. Gary, Chairman
Assistant Professor Edward F. Bauer****
Assistant Professor Robert E. Stiefel
Lecturer Maria Marshall
The program of German is designed to enable the student to express
himself in the spoken language, as well as to read, interpret, and write
about the best and most representative German literature. From the
early use of German in beginning classes to the investigation of style and
structure in German literature, the student will become increasingly
aware of the particular insights into human values and actions which
one associates with authors like Goethe and Schiller, Kleist, Stifter,
Kafka, Rilke, and Thomas Mann, and with epochs like early 19th
century Romanticism or 20th century Expressionism. It is fair to
assert that the German literary tradition forms an essential part of
Western culture; acquaintance with that tradition should provide a
heightened perception of the human condition and of artistic achieve-
ment.
= *0n leave, 1970-71.
110
]]
German Oil, 022 and 150a are primarily language courses. All Q
students offering German for entrance are placed at the level where they m
presumably can profit best by the course, according to a placement test
given by the Department. Work in the Department should be supple-
mented, whenever possible, by study in a language school or a university gj
in Germany, Austria, or Switzerland. K
The German Departments of Haverford College and Bryn Mawr Col- p
lege cooperate in order to offer the widest possible range of courses to ^
students in both colleges.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
a. German 150a or its equivalent; 151a, 152b; at least three courses at the 300
level (to be determined in consultation with the major adviser); 490.
b. Two semester courses beyond the introductory level in some other depart-
ment to be approved as related courses by the major supervisor.
c. A comprehensive examination.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors in German will be awarded on the basis of a consistently high per-
formance in the literature courses and a grade of 85 or better in the comprehen-
sive examination. High Honors will be awarded on the basis of a further oral
examination.
Oil BEGINNING GERMAN Staff
The course consists of five class meetings per week in sections of approxi-
mately ten students. The first semester covers the entire grammar, and
particularly stresses understanding, speaking, and writing of carefully con-
trolled compositions. In the second semester increased importance is given to
reading as the course progresses.
022 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Staff
The course consists of four class meetings per week in sections of approxi-
mately ten students. Attention is given to specific grammatical difficulties
and to vocabulary building. Modern literary texts are used as the basis of
further language instruction and for the acceleration of reading speed.
Progress in the language is supplemented by guided essay writing and tex-
tual interpretation. Prerequisite: German Oil or a satisfactory performance
on a placement test.
055 GERMAN READING COURSE
A special course designed for those who wish to acquire only a reading
knowledge of German expository prose. The course may be used to fulfill
the requirements of certain departments or graduate schools, but not the
College foreign language requirement.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
150a ADVANCED TRAINING IN THE GERMAN LANGUAGE
Careful attention is given to the development of fluency in speaking and
writing German. A variety of styles and readings will form the basis of
111
conversation, with a constant emphasis on an articulate and varied oral and
written expression. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
151a, 152b INTRODUCTION TO THE GERMAN LITERARY TRADITION
Messrs. Gary and Stiefel
Representative works of the major genres and movements of German litera-
ture from its beginnings to the present. The course offers students with a
reading knowledge of German a foundation in the techniques of literary
analysis as well as an introduction to a major European literary tradition.
Prerequisite: German 022 or the equivalent.
Fall term: From the beginnings through Goethe (800-1832) Mr. Gary
Spring term: From Romanticism to the present (1800-1970) Mr. Stiefel
351a GOETHE Mr. Gary
Offered in 197 1-72 and alternate years.
352a THE ROMANTIG MOVEMENT IN GERMAN LITERATURE, ART,
AND MUSIG Mr. Gary
Lectures, discussions, and readings of major writers (Novalis, Tieck, Bren-
tano, Hoffmann, Eichendorff, Heine), painters (Friedrich, Runge), and
composers (Beethoven, Schubert, Schumann) of one of the most pervasive of
all German cultural movements. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
355a STUDIES IN GERMAN LYRIG POETRY Mr. Stiefel
In the first part of the semester the class will read poetry representative of
the following authors: Walther von der Vogelweide, Andreas Gryphius,
Goethe, Holderlin, Heine, Hofmannsthal, Rilke, Brecht, Gelan, and Bier-
mann. In the latter part of the semester the class will choose, from among
the above, one poet whose works they will examine at greater length. Pre-
requisite: consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
356b THE GERMAN NOVELLE
Not offered in 1970-71.
358b AUSTRIAN LITERATURE, 1815-1930 Mr. Stiefel
Beginning with writings of Hugo von Hofmannsthal, we will seek to define
the concept of a peculiarly Austrian literary tradition. Hofmannsthal's poetry,
plays, and essays will lead us to a consideration of works by Raimund,
Nestroy, Grillparzer, Stifter, and Schnitzler, as well as music by Mozart,
Beethoven, and Mahler. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Stafi^
This course offers the student of German literature an opportunity to probe
more deeply and more independently into a problem or an area in which he
is particularly interested. The nature of the course will therefore vary to
suit the needs of each individual student.
490 SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
Conferences on selected writers. Members of the Department will share in
the conducting of the conferences, which will focus on the works of authors
to be included on the comprehensive examination.
112
GERMAN LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION
273a THE 20TH CENTURY GERMAN NOVEL
The German novels of the 20th century mirror the spiritual crisis in Western
society. The best of these novels belong to v/orld literature, among them
Rilke's The Notebooks of Make Laiirids Brigge, Mann's Magic Mountain,
Hesse's Glass Bead Game, Kafka's The Trial, and Grass' The Tin Drum.
Not offered in 1970-71.
274b THREE COSMOLOGIES Mr. Stiefel
A study of three epics, each of which is a major document of the German
cultural tradition: Wolfram von Eschenbach's Parzival (c. 1200), Goethe's
Faust (c. 1800), and Thomas Mann's Joseph and his Brothers (c. 1935).
Reading in Enghsh or German; discussions in English.
Offered in 1971-72.
276b MUSICAL DRAMA IN AUSTRIA AND GERMANY, 1750 TO THE
PRESENT Mr. Stiefel
A literary and intellectual-historical study of dramatic texts written or
adapted for music. Problems of musicology, dramaturgy, and stagecraft will
be considered, according to the interests of the group assembled for the
course. The list of works to be studied will include the St. Matthew Passion
of Bach-Picander, The Magic Flute of Mozart-Schickaneder, The Ring of
the Nibelungen by Wagner, selected writings of Nietzsche, Elektra and
Ariadne by Strauss-Hofmannsthal, Wozzeck by Berg-BUchner, Moses and
Aron by Schoenberg, and Mahagonny by Weil-Brecht. Conducted entirely in
English, although students with a reading knowledge of German will be
encouraged to turn to the original texts.
Offered in 1971-72.
277a THOMAS MANN'S DOCTOR FAUSTUS AND THE APOCALYPTIC
VISION Mr. Stiefel
A study of Thomas Mann's novel Doctor Faustus (1947) and some of its
sources in the Bible, the Faust Book, Luther, Diirer, Shakespeare, Nietzsche,
and Freud, in Monteverdi, Beethoven, Wagner, Mahler, and Schoenberg.
We will read the novel at the beginning and at the end of the term; during
the middle weeks we will consider the sources. We will also discuss parallel
materials in selected films of Ingmar Bergman. Our studies will require us to
consider problems in the nature of self-consciousness and to test seriously the
proposition that our present culture is on the verge of collapse. Readings and
discussion in English. Enrollment limited to 20; consent of the instructor
required.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
278b EXPRESSIONISM IN GERMAN CULTURE Mr. Gary
A study of Expressionism in various literary genres and in music and the
visual arts. In addition to the movement itself, we will examine its historical
roots by specialists in music and the visual arts. Lectures, discussion, and
reading in English.
113
i
HISTORY J
Professor John P. Spielman, Jr., Chairman Q)
Professor Edwin B. Bronner >|
Associate Professor Roger Lane Q
Associate Professor John W. McKenna ■■
Assistant Professor Linda G. Gerstein ^
The study of history involves a reflective and critical analysis of
human civilization through an investigation of a wide variety of its
characteristic institutions. The curriculum in history is designed to en-
courage the development of both critical and reflective habits of mind
by balancing emphasis on primary source materials with the study of
important secondary works. While the Department emphasizes the
western tradition, it welcomes comparative studies, and seeks to relate
its courses to the broadest possible spectrum of academic disciplines.
While the Department has no specific language requirement, students
who wish to major in history should note that some advanced courses
require special preparation in foreign languages.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
History 1 1 1 plus eight additional semesters in history, which must include
History 361f and History 399i (both of which are half-course units) and one
topics course or independent study course involving a substantial written paper.
Four semesters in related departments. At least two of these must be courses
above the introductory level.
Majors in history must take either a full year course at the intermediate level
or at least one semester at the advanced level in three of the following fields:
I) Ancient History, 2) Medieval History, 3) Modern European History, 4)
American History. With his adviser's approval a major may substitute appropriate
courses in Latin American, African, Near or Far Eastern History for one of
these fields.
History 36 If and History 399i are required of all majors. Both are half-course
units: the first, a seminar on the critical use of evidence, will normally be taken
the first semester of the junior year; the second, a seminar on historiography, in
the second semester of the senior year.
HONORS IN HISTORY
Honors in History will be granted to those senior majors who, in the Depart-
ment's judgment have combined excellent performance in History courses with
a good over-all record. A grade of 85 or above in a History course will be con-
sidered to represent work of Honors quality. High Honors may be awarded to
students showing unusual distinction in meeting these criteria.
115
COOPERATION WITH BRYN MAWR COLLEGE
The History Departments of Haverford College and Bryn Mawr College
cooperate in arranging their offerings so as to enrich as much as possible the
opportunities available to students in both institutions. Several intermediate courses
are offered jointly each year, alternating from one college to the other. Additional
Bryn Mawr history courses open to Haverford students are listed at the end of
this section.
Ill INTRODUCTION TO WESTERN CIVILIZATION
Messrs. Lane, McKenna, Spielman and Mrs. Gerstein
A year course surveying Western European civilization from the fall of
Rome to the present. The course deals with both institutional and intellectual
currents in the western tradition. Conference discussions and lectures deal
with both first-hand materials and secondary historical accounts. Open to
freshmen and sophomores only.
119a GREEK CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
A general survey of Greek history from Minoan Crete to the fall of Corinth.
146 B.C., focusing on institutions, political and cultural life, social change
and historiography. Lectures and discussions.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
120b ROMAN CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
A general survey of Roman history from the era of the foundation of the
city to the death of Justinian the Great, concentrating on institutional, cul-
tural and social history, with emphasis on the late Republic and the Empire.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
201 ENGLISH HISTORY Mr. McKenna
The evolution of English institutions from Saxon times to the recent past.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
202 AMERICAN HISTORY Mr. Lane
American history from colonial times to the present.
Offered in 1970-71 at Haverford, and in alternate years at Bryn Mawr.
203 MEDIEVAL EUROPE Mr. McKenna
A topical survey of the medieval West from the reforms of Diocletian to the
age of exploration. Particular emphasis on the development of political,
economic, and religious institutions.
Offered in 1970-71 at Bryn Mawr, and in 1971-72 at Haverford.
204 REVOLUTIONARY EUROPE Mr. Spielman
The political, intellectual, and technological revolutions in Europe from the
late 18th century to 1848.
Not offered in 1970-71.
225 EUROPE SINCE 1848 Mrs. Gerstein
The main political, social, and cultural developments of the European states
since the mid- 19th century.
Offered in 1970-71 at Haverford, and in alternate years at Bryn Mawr.
116
227 THE AGE OF ABSOLUTISM Mr. Spielman
The emergence of the European state system from the early 17th century to
the revolutions of the 18th century, including the revolutions in political and
scientific thought.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
236b THE PROTESTANT REFORMATION Mr. Luman
(See Religion 236b)
240b HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES OF QUAKERISM Mr. Brenner
The Quaker Movement is studied in relation to other intellectual and religious
movements of its time and in relation to problems of social reform. The
development of dominant Quaker concepts is traced to the present day and
critically examined. The course is designed for non-Friends as well as for
Friends. Open without prerequisite to sophomores, juniors and seniors.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
241a THE IMPRESSIONIST ERA Mr. McCarthy
(See French Civilization 241a)
242b THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHES
(See French Civilization 242b)
243b CONTEMPORARY FRANCE Mr. McCarthy
(See French Civilization 243b)
244 RUSSIAN HISTORY Mrs. Gerstein
A topical study of Russian history from Kiev to the death of Lenin. The
first semester will deal with the problem of Russian medieval culture, the
growth of Muscovite absolutism, and the impact of the West in the 18th
century; the second semester will cover modernization, the growth of the
radical intelligentsia and the Russian Revolution to 1924.
Offered in 1971-72.
340b TOPICS IN AMERICAN HISTORY Mr. Lane
Class discussions and papers based on readings in the sources and secondary
works. May be repeated for credit with change of content. Topic for spring
semester 1970-71: Interpretations of American History.
345a SEMINAR IN THE HISTORY OF WESTERN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT
Mr. Luman
(See Religion 345a)
351a TOPICS IN REGIONAL HISTORY Mr. Bronner
May be repeated for credit with change of content. Topic for fall semester,
1970-71: The Delaware Valley.
352b RELIGIOUS UTOPIAN MOVEMENTS IN THE UNITED STATES
Mr. Bronner
Utopian movements in the United States, with special emphasis on religious
Utopian thought and communities from colonial times to the present.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
117
355a TOPICS IN EUROPEAN HISTORY Mr. Spielman
Seminar meetings and an extensive research paper based on reading in
primary and secondary sources. May be repeated for credit with change of
topic. Topic for fall semester 1970-71: The French Revolution, 1789-1795.
Prerequisite: a reading knowledge of French. Topic for fall semester 1971-72
to be announced.
356b TOPICS IN MODERN EUROPEAN HISTORY Mrs. Gerstein
Seminar meetings and papers based on readings in source materials and
interpretive works. May be repeated for credit with change of content. Topic
for spring semester 1970-71: The Russian Revolution of 1917. Prerequisite:
History 1 1 1 or consent of the instructor.
357a TOPICS IN BRITISH HISTORY Mr. McKenna
Seminar meetings and a substantial paper. May be repeated for credit with
change of content. Topic for fall semester 1970-71: Tudor England. Pre-
requisite: consent of instructor.
Off eyed in 1970-71 and alternate years.
358b TOPICS IN MEDIEVAL HISTORY Mr. McKenna
Seminar meetings and a substantial paper based chiefly on contemporary
sources in translation. May be repeated for credit with change of content.
Topic for 1971-72 to be announced. Prerequisite: History 111 or consent of
the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
36 If SEMINAR ON HISTORICAL EVIDENCE Staff
Occasional seminar meetings to discuss the nature of historical evidence and
critical techniques for handling it; discussions and papers on mute evidence,
written sources and the critical edition of a manuscript source. A half-course
unit, enrollment limited to history majors for whom this is a required course.
399i SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
Occasional seminar meetings and papers exploring problems of historical
interpretation; final oral examination. A half-course unit, enrollment limited
to senior majors in history for whom this is a required course.
480a,b,f,i INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
COURSES OFFERED AT BRYN MAWR
209 EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY Mrs. Dunn
211b MEDIEVAL MEDITERRANEAN Mr. Brand
230 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY Mr. Aptheker
302 FRANCE 1559-1661 Mr. Salmon
303 RECENT AMERICAN HISTORY Mr. Dudden
305 ITALIAN RENAISSANCE Mrs. Lane ;
310b MEXICO Mrs. Dunn I
314 HISTORY OF SCIENCE Mr. Culotta !
320a HOLLAND'S GOLDEN AGE Mr. Tanis '
321b REVOLUTION WITHIN THE CHURCH Mr. Tanis
118
MATHEMATICS ^
Professor Dale H. Husemoller, Chairman P
Assistant Professor Harry J. Rosenzweig ^
Assistant Professor Francis X. Connolly 1
Assistant Professor Joseph NEisENDORFERf "»
Instructor Peter Atwood 5l
>
The aims of courses in mathematics are: (1) to promote rigorous j
thinking in a systematic, deductive, intellectual discipline; (2) to present —
to the student the direction and scope of mathematical development; fj
(3) to foster technical competence in mathematics as an aid to the [0
better comprehension of the physical, biological, and social sciences;
and (4) to guide and direct the mathematics majors toward an interest
in mathematical research.
The following sequences are open to qualified entering students: 11 3 a,
114b; 113a, 116b; 113a, 118b; 113a, 114b, 118b; and 119a, 220b.
Students will be sectioned according to their previous background.
Students with the equivalent of one or two semesters of college calculus
may be admitted to Mathematics 1 19a upon consent of the Department.
The more advanced courses cover work in the fields of analysis,
algebra, and topology. The student majoring in the Department extends
his studies into all of these areas.
A program consisting of Mathematics 113a, 114b, 220b and 221a is
especially suited for the needs of the physical sciences, while Mathe-
matics 1 1 8b deals with those concepts of statistics and probability
which are fundamental to the biological and social sciences. Mathematics
1 1 6b is especially appropriate for the general liberal-arts student.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Mathematics 221a, 222b, 331a, 332b, 333a, 334b, 335a, 336b, 399b, and either
361a, 362b or 363a, f, 364b, i. Recommended collateral courses are Physics 115a,
118b, 213a; Astronomy 211a; Economics 301a or for prospective actuaries,
Economics 101a, 102b, 301a.
Prescribed parallel reading on the history and general principles of mathe-
matics. Two written comprehensive examinations, each three hours in length.
It is recommended that facility in reading French and German be acquired
early in the college course.
tAppointed on the Sloan Foundation Grant.
119
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors will be granted to those senior Mathematics majors who, by means of
their course work and the comprehensive examinations, have given evidence of
their ability, initiative, and interest in the study of mathematics. High Honors
will be awarded to the exceptionally able student.
113a ONE- VARIABLE CALCULUS
Messrs. Atwood, Connolly and Neisendorfer
Differentiation and integration of functions of one variable. Applications:
Taylor's formula and series. Elementary differential equations.
114b MULTI-DIMENSIONAL CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA Staff
Vectors in n-space; partial derivatives; multiple integrals; theorems of Green
and Stokes; divergence theorem; introduction to linear algebra. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 113a.
116b TOPICS IN MATHEMATICS Staff
A survey of topics in mathematics, including number theory, set theory,
topology, geometry, probability, and game theory. The historical and philo-
sophical aspects of mathematics will be emphasized.
118b PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS Staff
Introduction to probability with applications to statistics; least squares ap-
proximations; general properties of distribution functions. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 113a.
119a CALCULUS AND ANALYSIS Mr. Rosenzweig
Review of calculus; series; partial derivatives and multiple integrals; intro-
duction to linear algebra. Open to students with a background in calculus,
but not open to those who have taken Mathematics 113a or 114b. Prerequi-
site: consent of the instructor.
220b ELEMENTARY COMPLEX ANALYSIS Mr. Rosenzweig
Line integrals; complex derivatives; Cauchy theorem and residue calculations;
elementary conformal mapping; harmonic functions; introduction to Laplace
transforms. Prerequisite: Mathematics 119a or 114b.
120
221a LINEAR ALGEBRA Mr. Husemoller
Groups; vector spaces; linear transformations; matrices; eigenvalues and
eigenvectors; inner-product spaces; multilinear algebra. Prerequisite; Mathe-
matics 114b or 119a.
222b ANALYSIS I Mr. Husemoller
The real number field; rigorous development of differential and integral
calculus; metric spaces; fundamental theorem of ordinary differential equa-
tions. Prerequisite: Mathematics 221a.
331a, 332b ANALYSIS H, III Mr. Atwood
Differential calculus on Euclidean space; inverse and implicit function theo-
rems; the Riemann and Lebesque integrals; manifolds; Stokes theorem on
manifolds; calculus of variations. Prerequisites: Mathematics 221a and 222b.
333a, 334b ALGEBRA Mr. Connolly
Topics from field theory, ideal theory of commutative rings, group theory,
structure of rings. Examples to illustrate the theory will be drawn from
Mathematics 221a. Prerequisites: Mathematics 221a and 222b.
335a, 336b TOPOLOGY Mr. Rosenzweig
General topology. Homotopy theory and fibre bundles; singular homology
theory. Prerequisites: Mathematics 221a and 222b.
361a, 362b SPECIAL TOPICS IN ALGEBRA AND TOPOLOGY
Mr. Husemoller
In 1970-71 the course will cover topics in covering spaces, Riemann surfaces,
algebraic curves and singularities. Prerequisites: Mathematics 220a and
Mathematics 333a, 334b or consent of the instructor.
363a,f, 364b,i SPECIAL TOPICS IN ANALYSIS AND GEOMETRY
Mr. Husemoller
Half-course each term on the representation theory of finite groups the first
term and Lie groups and algebras the second term. Prerequisite: consent of
the instructor.
399b SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
Review and correlation of the various branches of mathematics. Content
varies to fit student needs. This course may be taught as a seminar, a
tutorial, or a lecture course, depending on student needs.
121
ll ' ■*
♦a \ '\
P
«.
■. .■ * - «,1"%-^-^*-'^
^1
MUSIC 9
Professor John H. Davison, Chairman Q
Professor William H. Reese (Q
Professor Alfred J. SwANf Z
Lecturer Harold Boatrite
Lecturer Temple Painter
The courses offered in music have as their objectives ( 1 ) the mastery
of music materials and theory through the disciplines of counterpoint,
harmony, and analysis, and subsequendy (2) the stimulation of the
creative energies of the student through musical composition, (3) a
knowledge of the styles and literature of a great art with its interrela-
tion of trends, influences, aesthetic principles, personalities, and crea-
tive processes over the centuries, and (4) the development of perceptive
listening and refined hearing in connection with the aims stated above.
The furthering and strengthening of the disciplines of music theory,
performance and history is of value both to the general student and to
the student with specialized musical interest and talent. For the latter,
instruction in instrument or voice may be elected under Music 117a,
118b. Advanced and specialized work in musicology is available in
the form of supplementary courses at Bryn Mawr and Swarthmore
Colleges and the University of Pennsylvania. At Haverford the program
seeks in part to stimulate free composition in the vocal and instrumental
forms with a view to public performance of a successfully completed
work.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
A rounded course of study of music includes (1) work in theory, possibly em-
bracing composition, (2) the study of music history, (3) direct expression in
music through the medium of instrument or voice, and minimal abihty in the use
of the keyboard. The Music major will work in both academic fields of theory
and history, specializing in one of them.
Required courses: For specialization in music theory and composition: Music
011a or 012b, 113a-114b, 211a or 212b, 213a, 214b, 313a, 480, 490. For speciali-
zation in music history: Music 011a or 012b, 113a-114b, 211a, 212b, 213a or
214b, 480, 490.
Supporting courses are to be arranged in such related fields of the humanities,
history, language, history of art, and others, as may be approved by the Depart-
ment.
In addition the Music major is expected to reveal a proficiency and interest in
instrumental playing and/or choral singing to the degree of participating actively
tOn appointment first semester 1970-71.
123
in public performances from time to time during his college career. This will
assure his having a direct experience with the living practice of a creative art.
In addition, he must demonstrate a keyboard facility sufficient to encompass the
needs of his theoretical and compositional studies.
For those specializing in music theory and composition, the comprehensive
examination for majors will consist of: (1) the completion by the candidate
of a musical composition for instruments or voices in one of the larger forms,
(2) an examination in music history, (3) an examination in music theory includ-
ing harmony, counterpoint, analysis, dictation, and keyboard harmony.
For those specializing in music history, the comprehensive examination for
majors will consist of: (1) an examination in music history, (2) analysis of a
work and other exercises involving theoretical musical knowledge, (3) the
completion of a paper on an assigned subject in music history.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
The Honors candidate must perform satisfactorily in all required courses for
music majors, and submit (a) in the case of specialization in composition, an
orchestral composition of considerable stature showing creative talent as well as
technical craftsmanship, and hence being worthy of a public performance, or
(b) in the case of specialization in music history, a successfully completed project
in musicological research, demonstrating mastery of the tools of this discipline,
involving original thought, and showing ability in the creative interpretation of
assorted materials bearing on a specific subject.
OUa INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC HISTORY Mr. Reese
A study of the principal forms of musical literature of the 17th, 18th, and
19th centuries. No previous knowledge of music is required.
012b SURVEY OF MUSIC HISTORY Staff
A historical survey of the development of musical thought from the plain-
song era to contemporary idioms. This course complements Music 011a but
may be taken without it. No prerequisite.
113a-114b ELEMENTARY MUSIC THEORY Messrs. Davison and Boatrite
The basic materials of music: melody, scales, intervals, chords, meter, and
rhythm. Counterpoint in two and three parts and harmony in four parts will
be studied and implemented by ear-training, dictation, sightsinging, and
analysis. Previous instruction or experience in some aspect of music is
desirable.
115a, 116b SEMINARS IN ANALYSIS AND PERFORMANCE PRACTICE
Messrs. Davison and Painter
The work of this course will consist of (1) regular performance in a
choral, orchestral, or chamber-music group under the Department of Music
and (2) classwork involving analysis of the music being performed by these
groups in any given semester, as well as related repertoire, with attention
given to problems of performance practice. Prerequisites: one semester of
study in a music-theory or music-history course and consent of the instructor.
124
211a, 212b SEMINARS IN MUSIC HISTORY Staff
The detailed study of certain epochs in music history or of the works of
individual composers having special significance in the history of music. The
content of Music 211a, 212b will be altered from year to year so that a
diversity of subject matter will be available. It may be repeated for credit,
with change of content. Prerequisite: Music 011a or 012b or the equivalent.
Topics for 1970-71:
Music 211a: The Music of Russia. Mr. Swan
Music 212b: The Music of J. S. Bach. Mr. Reese
117a, 118b PRIVATE MUSIC STUDY
Private lessons (instrumental, vocal) to be arranged with the Department
Chairman.
Academic credit may be granted for private instrumental or vocal study under
the following circumstances:
1) The instructor must be approved by the Provost and the Music Depart-
ment Chairman, to whom he will submit a detailed report of the student's
work at the end of each semester.
2) The student must demonstrate his accomplishment in his chosen field of
study at an audition before members of the music faculty, or at a public
recital.
A short paper pertaining to the repertoire studied may be required. Prerequi-
site: One semester of study in a music-theory or music-history course or
the equivalent. The lessons will be at the student's own expense; in case of
financial need, loans from the College may be arranged.
213a, 214b ADVANCED THEORY AND COMPOSITION
Messrs. Boatrite and Davison
A continuation of Music 113a-114b, involving ear-training, keyboard har-
mony, sightsinging, analysis, and composition, along with an introductory
study of strict counterpoint as exemplified in the vocal style of the sixteenth
century. In the second semester pieces are written in the eighteenth-century
forms of the chorale-prelude, fugue, suite, and sonatina. Successful student
compositions will be performed at demonstration concerts. Prerequisite:
Music 11 3a- 114b.
313a OPERA Mr. Reese
A brief history, with concentrated investigation of representative works and
theories. Lectures, reading, analysis, reports. Prerequisite: Music 011a or
012b or the equivalent.
Not offered in 1970-71.
312b SEMINAR IN 20th-CENTURY MUSIC THEORY AND PRACTICE
Mr. Boatrite
Practical emphasis will be given to analysis of works of representative
composers such as Hindemith, Schonberg, and Bartok. Prerequisite: Music
214b.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY-PROJECTS IN MUSIC Staff
490 SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
125
PHILOSOPHY TJ
Professor Richard J. Bernstein, Chairman i
Professor Paul J. R. Desjardins* P"
Associate Professor L. Aryeh Kosman Q
Associate Professor Josiah D. Thompson, Jr. UJ
Assistant Professor Asoka Gangadean Q
Assistant Professor Andrzej ZabludowskiI "^
The philosophy curriculum has three major aims. In the first place, "L
it attempts to help each student develop a more self-critical attitude ^
toward life and the world by means of a confrontation with the thought
of great philosophers of the past and present. The student is introduced
to philosophical treatments of such problems as the nature of individual
and social man, the nature of the world in which he lives, and the
nature of his apprehension of, and response to, that world. Secondly, the
philosophy curriculum is meant to help each student acquire philosophi-
cal materials and skills which supplement and help integrate his other
studies, in the arts, the social sciences, the natural sciences, or religion.
Finally, the philosophy curriculum is designed to offer certain students a
foundation in knowledge and technique for further studies in philosophy
or related fields at the graduate level.
All philosophy majors are expected to have a reading knowledge of at
least one foreign language. Some advanced philosophy courses may re-
quire reading knowledge of a foreign language as a prerequisite for
admission.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Philosophy 101 (or equivalent), 399b, and eight other semester courses ap-
proved by the major supervisor, four from the Philosophy Department and four
from some other department or departments closely related to the student's
special study in philosophy.
A written comprehensive examination and an oral examination. The written
examination will cover the history of philosophy, ethics, social and political
philosophy, philosophy of religion, logic, metaphysics, the theory of knowledge,
and philosophy of science. The oral examination will be based on the written
examination.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors in philosophy are awarded for special work of high quality, usually in
the form of a thesis, on an important topic, problem, or philosopher approved
by the major supervisor. One or more project courses may be used toward this
*On sabbatical leave, first semester, 1970-71.
tAppointed on the Sloan Foundation Grant.
127
end. Honors will not be given unless the candidate has an average grade of at
least 85 in the comprehensive examination; High Honors require an average of
at least 90.
101 HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY Staff
An understanding of the nature and functions of philosophy and its relations
to other fundamental human concerns, such as religion, the sciences, and
the arts, is sought through a study of selected works of the great philosophers
in Western history. No prerequisite. Closed to juniors and seniors except in
special cases.
103 THE ORIGINS OF PHILOSOPHY Mr. Desjardins
The relative functions of myth, logic, and history in Homer, Hesiod, the
Pre-Socratics. These themes will be investigated in three non-Western cul-
tures: Chinese, Japanese, Dogon. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
105 PHILOSOPHY: EAST AND WEST Mr. Desjardins
Critical examination of theories about the differences between East and
West in light of selected classical texts: Plato's Republic, the Confucian
Corpus, the Tao Te Ching, and some early Chinese, Japanese, and Buddhist
literature. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
107a LOGIC Mr. Gangadean
Examination of classical term logic (syllogistic inference, categorical syllo-
gisms), propositional logic (truth-function theory), and introduction to
quantification theory. The interrelations between these will be examined.
Stress will be on logic as a theory of discourse — the connection between
logic and language will be explored. The above logical theories will be
applied to inferences and arguments in ordinary discourse. Examination of
validity, formal proof, and properties of a formal system. Some attention
will be given to inductive inference. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
108b ADVANCED LOGIC Mr. Davidon
A study of the capabilities and limitations of algorithms for proving or
refuting conjectures formulated in a first-order predicate logic. Topics con-
sidered include the Godel completeness and incompleteness theorems, de-
cidable and undecidable theories, and the use of computers for proof searches.
Some aspects of the foundations of mathematics will be explored. Pre-
requisite: permission of the instructor.
201a PLATO Mr. Desjardins
A study of a selected group of the Dialogues. Prerequisite: permission of the
instructor.
During 1970-71, this course will be offered in the second semester as 201b.
128
204b ARISTOTLE Mr. Kosman
A study of a selection of the primary works of Aristotle. Prerequisite:
Philosophy 101.
Offered in 1970-71 in the first semester as 204a.
225a, 226b RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS IN INDIA: ANCIENT AND
MODERN Mr. Long
(See Religion 225a, 226b)
229a RELIGIOUS IDEAS IN MODERN CULTURE Mr. Long
(See Religion 229a)
301 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY Mr. Kosman
A study of the development of philosophic thought in the seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries. Attention will be focused on the writings of representa-
tive thinkers. Selections from some of the following: Bacon, Locke, Ber-
keley, Hume, Descartes, Spinoza, Leibnitz. Prerequisite: permission of the
instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 in the second semester as 301b.
303a GREEK PHILOSOPHIC TEXTS Mr. Kosman
A close analysis of Greek philosophic writings. Prerequisite: Classics 101a
or permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
334b KANT
A study of selected major texts with special emphasis on the first Critique.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
337a RELIGIOUS ETHICS Mr. Stark
(See Religion 337a)
338a PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION Mr. Stark
(See Religion 338a)
309a PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Mr. Zabludowski
A study of important philosophical issues raised by the sciences concerning,
among other topics, the nature of scientific explanation and knowledge, law
and chance, theory and observation, causality, purpose, freedom and de-
terminism. This course is specifically designed for students without substantial
background in natural science. Natural science majors and other students
with a substantial background in the natural sciences are referred to Philos-
ophy 356b; The Logic of Explanation. Prerequisite: permission of the
instructor.
129
343 HEGEL AND POST-HEGELIAN THINKERS
Messrs. Bernstein and Spiegler
After a brief review of selected Hegelian texts in their cultural milieu, the
course of 19th and 20th century philosophy will be examined. Principal
texts from some of the following movements will be studied: Marxism,
Existentialism, Phenomenology, and Analytic Philosophy. Prerequisite: per-
mission of the instructor.
345a THE PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE Mr. Thompson
A study of some of the principal texts of nineteenth-century existentialism.
Readings in Kierkegaard or Nietzsche. Prerequisite: permission of the
instructor.
346a THE PHENOMENOLOGY OF EXISTENCE Mr. Thompson
A study of selected texts in 20th century phenomenology. Readings in
Heidegger, Sartre, or Merleau-Ponty. Prerequisite: permission of the in-
structor.
348a PHILOSOPHY OF LOGIC Mr. Gangadean
The focus will be on logic as an organon for philosophy. Theory of predica-
tion will be compared and constrasted with propositional logic and quantifi-
cation theory. The effectiveness of each as an instrument for dealing with
typical philosophical questions arising out of ordinary language as well as
typical metaphysical and ontological questions will be discussed. Such
meta-logical issues as the relation between intensional and extensional logic,
between meta-language and object language, between propositional negation
and predicate denial, between propositional and predicative truth, etc., will
be examined. Selected writings of Aristotle, Frege, Russell, Ramsey, Quine,
Strawson, and Sommers will be studied. Prerequisite: Philosophy 107a or
permission of the instructor.
348b PHILOSOPHY OF LOGIC Mr. Gangadean
Topic for 1970-71: The Logic of Language
An investigation into the nature and structure of language from the perspec-
tives of logical theory and linguistic theory (i.e., empirical linguistics and the
generative and transformational approach to syntax). Such topics as the syn-
tactic, semantic and pragmatic dimensions of language, theory of predication,
theory of types and categories, tree-theory for natural language, theory of
negation, etc., are explored. Writings of Frege, Russell, Wittgenstein, Quine,
Sommers, Chomsky, Fodor, Katz, and others are examined.
351a LITERARY THEORY AND CRITICISM Mr. Rose
(See English 351a)
Not offered in 1970-71.
350b MODERN ANALYTIC PHILOSOPHY Mr. Kosman
A study of the historical and theoretical development of analytic philosophy
130
in England and America. Selected writings of Russell, Wittgenstein, Ayer,
Wisdom, and others, with special emphasis on theory of language. Pre-
requisite: permission of the instructor.
352b METAPHYSICS AND EPISTEMOLOGY Mr. Gangadean
A critical examination of classical and recent conceptions of being and
existence, and of the nature and possibility of metaphysics. Such topics as
methodology of metaphysical analysis, the relation between the structure of
thought and the structure of reality, ontology; the nature and formation of
categories and conceptual frameworks, the relation between metaphysics and
science, etc., are explored. Writings of Plato, Aristotle, Descartes, Kant,
Heidegger, Strawson, Sommers, and others are studied.
Offered in 1971-72.
353a SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY Mr. Thompson
A critical exploration of the web of problems that concern man's place
in society. Classical approaches will be studied and the student will be en-
couraged to apply these approaches to the understanding of the salient social
problems of his time. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
354b CONTEMPORARY PHILOSOPHIC PROBLEMS Mr. Bernstein
A study of contemporary treatments of philosophic problems in Europe and
America. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
356b THE LOGIC OF EXPLANATION Mr. Zabludowski
A study of what the sciences have to say about the nature of the physical
world and the inquiring mind within it. Some of the topics discussed will
be the same as those mentioned in Philosophy 309a: Philosophy of Science,
But, unlike Philosophy 309a, this course is specifically designed for natural-
science majors and other students with a greater background in the natural
sciences. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
357 ETHICS Mr. Desjardins
A study of certain major proposals concerning the norms which ought to
govern human life. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71
399b SENIOR SEMINAR Staff
Seminar meetings, aimed at helping senior philosophy majors achieve
greater comprehension and comprehensiveness with regard to the history of
philosophy and selected problems. Required of, and open only to, senior
philosophy majors.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Individual consultation with independent reading and research. Prerequisite:
permission of the instiiictor.
k
131
PHYSICS
Associate Professor Douglas Miller, Chairman
Professor William C. Davidon*
Assistant Professor Walter J. Trela
Assistant Professor Jerry P. Gollub
Assistant Professor J. Kemp RANDOLPHf
The Physics curriculum introduces students to concepts and methods
which are now fundamental throughout the sciences. It provides oppor-
tunities for first-hand experimental investigations together with the
study of those basic principles that have led to profound scientific,
philosophical, and technological developments in the 20th century.
Non-science majors who wish a one-semester, largely qualitative and
historical study of those particular concepts which have had the most
general impact on our society are encouraged to take Physics 117b.
Those who wish a more quantitative one-year course with laboratory
should consider Physics 113a and 114b.
Prospective science majors are advised to study some physics in their
freshman or sophomore years because all contemporary sciences rely
heavily on basic physical principles. Potential natural scientists who
take college mathematics or have some background in physics should
take Physics 115a and 116b.
The Physics curriculum features a basic sequence of five introductory
and intermediate courses which are required of all majors. Following
this basic sequence of courses, a student is offered a maximum of
flexibility in pursuing his scientific interests. Students planning graduate
work in Physics will need five advanced courses in Physics, numbered
312a and above, which are to be chosen in consultation with the
Department. Students with interests in the interdisciplinary fields of
astrophysics, biophysics, chemical physics, mathematical physics, phi-
losophy of science, or medical science can base their studies upon a
foundation of introductory and intermediate Physics courses.
The senior year in the Physics Department features an opportunity
for a supervised research project and a supervised teaching experience.
=''0n leave first semester, 1970-71.
tAppointed on the Sloan Foundation Grant.
132
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS Jl
Classes of 1971 and 1972 — the former Physics 19, 20, 25, 26 and two J
additional courses in Physics numbered from 312a to 318b.
Class of 1973 — the former Physics 19, 20; 213a, 311b and two additional
courses in Physics numbered from 312a to 318b.
Class of 1974 — Physics 115a, 116b, 213a, 214b, 311a, and one additional
course in Physics numbered from 312a to 318b.
2. Mathematics 113a, 114b or 119a; 120b and 221a.
3. Two additional courses selected from Physics courses from 312a to 318b,
and Bryn Mawr courses 202b and 301a,
or from Astronomy 301a, 320b, 340b
or from Chemistry 203a, 304b, 306b
or from Biology 201b, 203b, Chemistry 203a
or from Mathematics 202b, 333a, 334b
or from Philosophy 107a, 301, 356b.
4. One semester selected from Physics courses numbered above 400.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
The granting of Honors in Physics will be based upon the quality of per-
formance in course work and in the supervised teaching experience, or the
research tutorial.
113a, 114b PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS Mr. Randolph
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Certain fundamental concepts of contemporary physics are presented, with
particular emphasis on conservation laws and symmetry principles. These
concepts are used in the analysis of both macroscopic and microscopic phe-
nomena. In Physics 113 a, the focus is on conservation of energy, linear
momentum and angular momentum; in Physics 114b, electric charge, entropy
and baryon number are considered. Those mathematical concepts beyond high
school algebra which are necessary for the course will be developed as
needed. No prerequisites.
115a BASIC PHYSICS Messrs. Trela and Miller
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Fields due to neutral and charged particles at rest and in motion; conserva-
tion laws; scattering; orbital motion.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 113a (concurrently). Prior acquaintance with
physics is desirable.
116b BASIC PHYSICS Messrs. Gollub and Davidon
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Induced fields, photons, special relativity, models of atomic and nuclear
structure. Prerequisite: Physics 115a.
133
n
]17b PHYSICS IN THE TWENTIETH CENTURY Mr. Davidon
Three hours; no laboratory
Development of the theory of relativity, the quantum theory, and nuclear
physics, with dual emphases on the scientific elements of the theories and the
broader implications that they have had in our culture. A study of the current
goals of science will lead into a discussion of such contemporary problems
for the scientific community as space research and the space program, high-
energy physics research, government and military support of science. The
latter problems will be studied by small groups of students and discussed in
seminar, with specialists invited from outside the Department, including
Philips visitors.
213a ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES Mr. Gollub
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Oscillations, circuit analysis, electronics, plane waves, optics. Prerequisite:
Physics 114b or 116b.
214b ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS Mr. Davidon
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Multipole moments. Maxwell's equations, static field distributions, spherical
waves. Laboratory work with the computer.
Prerequisite: Physics 213a.
Offered in 1971-72 and thereafter.
311a,b INTRODUCTORY QUANTUM MECHANICS Mr. Miller
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Inference of quantum principles from experiment, algebra of symmetries
and conservation laws, energy levels, intrinsic spin and quantum statistics,
emission of light.
Prerequisites: Physics 116b or 214b, and Mathematics 221a.
311b offered in 1970-71; 311a offered in 1972-73 and thereafter.
312a,b NUCLEAR PHYSICS Mr. Miller
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Properties of the deuteron, scattering theory, isotopic spin, nuclear models,
pion-nucleon interactions.
Prerequisite: Physics 311a or b.
312a offered in 1971-72; 312b offered in 1973-74.
313a,b PARTICLE PHYSICS Mr. Davidon
Three hours; no laboratory
Classification of particles and unitary symmetry; scattering theory including
relativistic kinematics; production and decay of unstable particles. Prerequi-
site: Physics 312a or b.
313b offered in 1971-72; 313a offered in 1973-74.
314b STATISTICAL PHYSICS Mr. Gollub
Four hours, including one optional laboratory period
The statistical formulation of the description of a system of many particles
134
is developed. This technique is used to deiive the laws of thermodynamics
and statistical mechanics. The macroscopic thermal properties of gases, solids
and liquids are then studied. Prerequisite: Physics 311a or b.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
315a DYNAMICS OF WAVES AND PARTICLES Mr. Gollub
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Oscillations, circuit analysis, electronics, plane waves, optics. Prerequisite: the
former Physics 20.
Offered in 1970-71 but not thereafter.
316b SOLID STATE PHYSICS Mr. Trela
Four hours, including one laboratory period
Crystal symmetries, binding forces, lattice vibrations, specific heats, free
electron theory of metals, energy bands, semi-conductors, magnetism, super-
conductivity. Prerequisite: Physics 311a or b.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
317a MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS Mr. Davidon
Three hours
Applications to physics of linear algebra, Fourier analysis, integration in the
complex plane, differential equations, calculus of variations, and group theory.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 120b, 221a.
Offered in 1971-72 and thereafter.
318a,b QUANTUM MECHANICS Mr. Miller
Four hours, including one optional laboratory period
Conservation of charge, leptons and baryons; creation and annihilation of
matter and anti-matter; symmetries in space and time; decay processes. Pre-
requisites: the former Physics 25 or 311a or b.
318a offered in 1970-71; 318b offered in 1972-73.
411a, 412b THEORETICAL PHYSICS Mr. Davidon
A program of lectures, readings and independent work on current problems
and methods in theoretical physics. Applications of group theory to the study
of symmetry in physics will be emphasized.
415a, 416b HIGH ENERGY PHYSICS Mr. Miller
A research tutorial including theoretical and experimental work on strong
and electromagnetic interactions.
417a, 418b LOW TEMPERATURE PHYSICS Messrs. Trela and Gollub
Supervised student research in superconductivity and hquid helium. Experi-
ments are performed at temperatures down to 1°K.
450a.b ASSOCIATION IN TEACHING BASIC PHYSICS Staff
Student association with staff in Physics 113a. 114b, 115a or 116b; involves
leadership in recitation meetings and supervision of laboratory meetings.
Open to seniors.
135
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Professor Harvey Glickman, Chairman'^*
Assistant Professor G. Eric Hansen
Assistant Professor Robert A. Mortimer
Assistant Professor Sara M. Shumer
Assistant Professor Sidney R. Waldman, Acting Chairman
Lecturer Zelbert MooREft
Visiting Lecturer Tadeusz K. Krauze f
Visiting Lecturer Murray S. LEViNft
Diplomat-in-Residence with the rank of Professor
Norman B. Hannah
The poHtical science curriculum is designed to give students an
understanding of political organization and political forces in modern
society, to provide knowledge and a basis for insight and judgment
on the problems involved in the relationship of the individual to
government, and of governments to one another. The broad areas
of study include: analysis of political theory in relation to its insti-
tutional environment, comparison and appraisal of different types of
governments and political organization, American political behavior
and institutions, and problems of international relations.
The courses are designed primarily for a liberal arts education and
are intended to create intelligent and lasting interest and participation
in the formulation of public policy. The training will also serve the
needs of men contemplating scholarship and teaching in political
science, as well as other professional careers such as law, journahsm,
and the public service.
In advanced courses, emphasis is placed upon individual research
and analysis — • practice in concept formation, location, organization,
and presentation of data - — and upon independent judgment.
Majors in political science are expected to understand the relationship
of this field to other social studies, as well as to the purposes and
methods of the social sciences as a whole. They are thus expected to
take supporting courses in economics, history, sociology, and psychology.
*'''On leave, second semester, 1970-71.
tOn appointment first semester 1970-71.
ttOn appointment second semester 1970-71.
136
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS "U
To enter the Department: Political Science 151a or 152b, and one other course Q
in the 100 series. Departmental studies: Political Science 391a, 392b, and six _
other courses in political science, distributed among three of the four areas of JZ
study: 1) comparative politics, 2) American politics, 3) international relations, J
and 4) poHtical theory and political philosophy. ^^
Four approved semester courses in other social sciences. fj
A general examination synthesizing major studies, including a special field ^
chosen from among the four areas of study indicated. p-
In the senior year majors vv'ill enroll in the Senior Seminar in Political Studies
(391a), and in Research and Writing on Political Problems (392b). Association ||j
in Teaching (371a or 372b) is open to selected seniors. rt
HONORS ni
The award of Departmental Honors is determined on the basis of a thesis, an 2
oral examination, the quality of course work, and performance in the general m
examination. *•
in
151a, 152b POLITICS: POLITICAL ANALYSIS AND PUBLIC POLICY
Staff and Student Associates in Teaching
Case studies in political affairs, focusing on problems of contemporary im-
portance, illustrating principles of political activity and techniques of analysis.
Examples of topics considered: The Politics of Selective Service; Governing
the University; Politics and Policy in Education; Pressure Politics: Oil; The
Urban Crisis; the New York Teachers' Strike; The Cuban Missile Crisis;
Revolution in China; Political Development and Decay: Nigeria; Decoloniza-
tion and Peacekeeping in the Congo.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
Political Science 151a and 152b provide the student with a basic understand-
ing of the major elements of the political process; either one is a prerequisite
for further work in political science.
154b THE POLITICAL LEADER Mr. Mortimer
Examination of the interaction between the political leader and his society;
impact of leadership styles on the polity, as well as impact of the exercise of
power on leadership; personality, ideology and institutions as determinants
of leadership. Case studies of selected leaders in Europe and the "Third
World" (e.g., De Gaulle, Senghor, Bourguiba), bearing on the leader as
political thinker and actor. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or
consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
156b POLITICAL THEORY: THE CITIZEN AND THE STATE Miss Shumer
Selected problems involved in the question of the individual's relationship to
the polity: liberty and authority, obligation and civil disobedience, political
thought and action. Examination of classical and contemporary theorists,
such as Plato, Machiavelli, Rousseau and Marx. Prerequisite: Political
Science 151a or 152b or permission of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
137
158b THE AMERICAN PRESIDENCY AND THE BUREAUCRACY
Mr. Waldman
Examination of the institution of the Presidency in the past few decades,
focusing on the ways the President relates to Congress, his own staff, the
executive bureaucracy, his party, the media and the public. Special attention
to the executive bureaucracy and its relations with Congress and interest
groups. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b and permission of the
instructor. Enrollment limited.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
160b PROBLEMS IN AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY Mr. Hansen
Examination of important substantive questions of policy in order to
illuminate major trends and premises evolved since World War II. Case
studies, such as: Berlin and Germany, Formosa and Communist China, re-
lations with India, foreign aid. Attention to policy-making processes. Pre-
requisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or permission of the instructor.
Enrollment limited.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
162b SCIENCE AND POLITICS Mr. Hansen
Survey of the impact of science and technology on American society and
politics. Emphasis on the impact of the growth of knowledge on the develop-
ment of social skills and stratification and on the consequences for the allo-
cation of political resources. Case studies, such as: the military-industrial
estabUshment, the space program, application of science and technology to
contemporary social problems. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b
or permission of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Open to freshmen and sophomores only.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
203a GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS IN EAST ASIA Mr. Steslicke
A comparative examination of East Asian political systems with special
emphasis on modern Japanese government and politics.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
205a GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS IN WESTERN EUROPE Mr. Frye
A comparative analysis of the contemporary political systems of Great
Britain, France, and Germany or Scandinavia, with special reference to
factors making for stable and effective democracy.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
208b INTRODUCTION TO LATIN AMERICAN POLITICS
A comparative analysis of political systems of Latin America.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
A
209b WESTERN POLITICAL THOUGHT Mr. Salkever'
A study of the fundamental problems of modern Western political thought,
based on an analysis of the writings of the leading theorists.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
138
210a THE SOVIET SYSTEM Mr. Hunter
(See Economics 210a)
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
216a AFRICAN CIVILIZATION Messrs. Glickman or Mortimer or McGaffey
(See Social Science 216a — General Courses)
218a URBAN POLITICS Mr. Ross
Rise of cities, urban groups, forms of political organization in urban areas,
current problems of cities. Cross-cultural comparisons.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
219b AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL LAW Miss Leighton
An analysis of some of the basic principles and processes of American public
law. Attention is centered on decisions and opinions of the Supreme Court
as they relate to the formation of public policy and to value patterns of
American liberal democracy.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
220a INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS Mr. Hansen
Examination of major theoretical problems, as well as substantive trends, in
international politics. Particular use of systems theory in illuminating case
studies drawn from the international arena of the years after World War II,
including the Soviet-American confrontation, the emergence of the "Third
World," and the revolution in weapons technology. Prerequisite: Political
Science 151a or 152b or consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
221a INTERNATIONAL LAW Miss Leighton
An examination of the doctrines and practices of international law. Tradi-
tional material is considered in the context of the contemporary political
process, with some emphasis on methodological problems.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
113a AMERICAN POLITICAL PROCESS: PARTIES, THE CONGRESS,
AND THE PRESIDENT Mr. Waldman
A functional and behavioral analysis of the policy-making process. Political
parties, legislative behavior, and powers and the interactions between the
President and Congress will be examined. Prerequisite: Political Science
151a or 152b and consent of instructor. Enrollment limited.
225b COMPARATIVE POLITICS: POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT
Mr. Glickman
A study of the theory and processes of political modernization in new states.
Problems include the impact of the West on traditional societies, the growth
and effects of nationalism, institutional transfer, political reconstruction and
development policy. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or consent
of the instructor.
226b INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION Mr. Hansen
Examination of underlying patterns of community in international political
systems and the possibilities for an emerging social consensus; survey of
139
international organizations, such as the United Nations and regional group-
ings. Attention to internationally organized processes such as peaceful settle-
ment of disputes, diplomatic practice, negotiation. Prerequisite: Political
Science 220a or consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
227a AMERICAN POLITICAL THEORY Miss Shumer
The study of the foundations of American politics through an exploration
of the roots and development of American political thought and institutions
and an analysis of their theoretical assumptions and implications. Pre-
requisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or consent of the instructor.
228b PUBLIC OPINION, PRIVATE INTERESTS, AND THE POLITICAL
SYSTEM Mr. Waldman
An in-depth analysis of the formation of political attitudes, the functions of
public opinion in shaping public policy, and the impact of interest groups on
that policy. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b and consent of
instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
229b PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY AMERICAN POLITICAL
THEORY Miss Shumer
A study of selected issues which pose fundamental problems to the American
political system, such as the decline of pluralism, mass society, bureaucracy,
technology and violence. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or
consent of the instructor; 223a and 227a are recommended.
231a RECENT POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY: SOURCES AND VARIETY
Mr. Salkever
Examination of alternative ways of formulating and answering basic ques-
tions in 20th century political philosophy. Attention given first to 19th
century theorists, e.g., Marx and Mill. Issues considered: value of liberty,
justification of democracy, articulation of personal autonomy, political obliga-
tion as discussed by modern authors such as Dewey, Niebuhr, Ortega,
Oakeshott, Wolff, Camus, Arendt and Strauss. Prerequisite: Political Science
299b or either Philosophy 101 or 201.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
232b LAW AND EDUCATION Mr. Wofford
An exploration of the principle of persuasion in the United States Constitu-
tion and the common law, with special attention to the educational implica-
tions of the First Amendment and to the theory and practice — uses and
abuses — of civil disobedience. Reading will include legal cases and com-
mentaries as well as some basic literature in political theory. Enrollment
limited.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
252b RATIONALITY, PURPOSE AND COLLECTIVE WELFARE
Mr. Waldman
An examination of the problems involved in defining "the public good."
Focus on recent attempts by political economists to bridge the gap between
140
I
individual rationality and welfare on the one hand, and collective rationality
on the other. Investigation of alternative models of individual and collective
rationality and their implications for definitions of social welfare. Prerequi-
site: Political Science 151a or 152b and consent of the instructor. Enrollment
limited.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
258b PUBLIC POLICY: CIVIL RIGHTS AND POVERTY Miss Shumer
An historical and analytical inquiry into the scope and nature of the prob-
lems in the selected policy area of civil rights and poverty, and the systematic
analysis of the capacity of the present political system (including the govern-
ment and non-governmental groups) to deal effectively with these problems.
Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or consent of the instructor;
223a and 227a are recommended.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
262b THE AFRO-AMERICAN EXPERIENCE Mr. Moore
(See Social Science 262b — General Courses)
263a IMPERIALISM, NATIONALISM AND DECOLONIZATION
Mr. Mortimer
Examination of forces in international politics leading to the decline of em-
pires and the rise of new states in the "Third World" in recent years. Em-
phasis on the connections between domestic and external politics; comparison
of foreign policies; role of ideologies. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a
or 152b or consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
266b POLITICS AND INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS IN THE MIDDLE
EAST AND NORTH AFRICA Mr. Mortimer
Examination of the main currents of internal political change and interstate
relations. Emphasis on the interaction of ideologies, leadership and social
transformations. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or consent of
the instructor. Enrollment limited.
268b AFRICAN POLITICS Mr. Glickman
Organization, distribution, aims and uses of power in selected areas of
tropical and southern Africa today. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or
152b or consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1972-73 and alternate years.
272b THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHES
{Also called French Civilization 242b.)
Not offered in 1970-71.
301a LAW AND SOCIETY Miss Leighton
An introduction to the nature of legal obhgation and its relation to selected
social institutions. Typical legal problems pertaining to the family, poverty,
and government are discussed.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
141
304b WEST EUROPEAN INTEGRATION Mr. Frye
An analysis of postwar moves toward integration in Western Europe, with
special emphasis upon the factors behind integration and upon the impact
of integration upon member societies.
Offered at Bryn Mawr, not in 1970-71.
316b URBAN AFFAIRS Mr. Ross
Seminar on selected topics in urban politics today. Field work.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
320a POLITICAL MODERNIZATION IN BRITAIN AND JAPAN
Mr. Steslicke
A critical examination of the concept "'political modernization" and a survey
of the relevant scholarly literature with particular reference to the experience
of Britain and Japan during the past century.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
351a COMPARATIVE POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY Mr. Glickman
Explorations in general political and social theory: problems of authority,
conflict, participation, integration and development. Emphasis on writings of
major social theorists and experiences of selected political systems in the
19th and 20th centuries. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or
consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
352b INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF COMMUNISM Mr. Hansen
Examination of some of the major dimensions of international politics as
practiced between Communist powers, and between Communist and non-
Communist states. The influence of differing ideological perspectives such as
Titoism, Maoism and Castroism will be explored, as well as common per-
spectives derived from various historical forms of Marxism. Illustrative case
studies from the relations of the Soviet Union with the Arab states, Yugo-
slavia and China. Prerequisite: Political Science 151a or 152b or consent of
the instructor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
354b LAW AND POLITICS Mr. Levin
An investigation of the relationship between law and politics in order to
discover how political power is exercised in the legal system. Consideration
of legal and political theory, the legal process and historic and contemporary
case studies. Distinguished visitors. Prerf^quisite: Political Science 151a or
152b or consent of the instructor. Limited enrollment, with preference to
Political Science majors.
355a MATHEMATICS OF POLITICAL AND SOCIAL CONFLICT
Mr. Krauze
Introduction to mathematical models of political phenomena. Consideration
of voting behavior, coalition-formation, collective decision-making and the
strategy of conflict. No prerequisites; acquaintance with mathematical reason-
ing desirable. Limited enrollment.
Not open to freshmen.
142
357a RESEARCH SEMINAR IN POLITICAL ANTHROPOLOGY
(See Sociology 357a)
371a, 372b POLITICAL ANALYSIS: ASSOCIATION IN TEACHING Staff
Student association with staff in Political Science 151a, 152b or, sometimes,
in other 100-level Political Science courses. Open to selected senior majors
only.
391a SENIOR SEMINAR IN POLITICAL STUDIES
Staff and Special Examiner
Main themes in contemporary political thought and analysis. Discussions,
papers, culminating in senior general examination.
392b RESEARCH AND WRITING ON POLITICAL PROBLEMS Staff
Tutorials, research projects, culminating in a senior thesis.
Open to Political Science seniors only.
48 If, 482i INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Individual consultation; supervised independent reading and research
Research papers and oral reports on special topics based upon the individual
interests of advanced students. Enrollment only by permission of the in-
structor.
483a, 484b TOPICS IN POLITICAL THEORY AND ANALYSIS Staff
Student-organized and student-conducted courses, with faculty supervision.
Topics chosen in the past: Student Rebellions; Conflict Theory, Strategy,
and Political Gaming. Minimum group of eight students and consent of the
Chairman of the Political Science Department required. Prerequisite: two
courses in Political Science. Registration one time only.
143
PSYCHOLOGY
Professor Sidney I. Perloe, Chairman
Professor Douglas H. Heath**
Associate Professor Thomas D'Andrea
Assistant Professor Preston B. Rowe, Jr.
The Psychology curriculum consists of three levels of courses and a
special Senior Program. The first or general level includes courses
which aim at providing students with the experience of how psychol-
ogists use their knowledge and skills to understand issues of con-
temporary concern. Although the courses will not attempt to survey
the field, it is hoped that the examination of a few problems in some
depth and the carrying out of research projects will also allow the
student to encounter methods and concepts in related areas of the
discipline. The second, intermediate level courses are oriented primarily
toward the systematic treatment of basic concepts, methods and data
in four broad areas of psychology. Advanced courses focus in greater
detail and with greater sophistication on topics drawn from the areas
covered at the second level. Several of the second and third level
courses carry practicums which involve the student in experiments and
field observation. The senior program is described below. Students are
encouraged to examine the program of the Bryn Mawr Psychology
Department for additional courses.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
The major program will include the following intermediate courses: 223a,
Personality Theory; 130b, Animal Learning and Ethology; 136b, Social Psychology;
and 235a, Perception and Cognition. Psychology 351a, Research Topics in Psy-
chology, may be substituted for one of the intermediate courses carrying an
associated practicum. Psychology 153d, e, g, the Social Science Statistics half-
course, will normally be taken along with one of the intermediate level courses.
Maiors will also be expected to take two advanced courses (other than 480) as
well as the Senior Program. The advanced courses may be taken at Haverford or
Bryn Mawr. Students expecting to go on to graduate school in Psychology should
take Psychology 351a.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
The award of Departmental Honors signifies that a student has maintained a
consistently high standard of performance in the work of his major program, and
has done distinguished work on an independent empirical research project as
well as in the Senior Program. Honors candidates should plan to take Psychology
351a during the senior year; they may also be given an oral examination.
■=On leave, second semester, 1970-71.
144
GENERAL COURSES T1
These courses are intended primarily for freshmen and sophomores. Normally, JU
students will take only one general course, but additional courses may be taken
for credit with the permission of the instructor.
■<
n
012b AGGRESSION Mr. Perloe
A consideration of the physiological, behavioral and social determinants of
aggression as it occurs in lower animals, normal and pathological humans, and Q
in relations among groups. Basic psychological concepts from a variety of
areas will be introduced throughout the course to provide a general view of
r
how psychologists approach the study of behavior and experience. Regular Q
class meeting will be supplemented by small discussion and project groups. «
No prerequisites. Enrollment limited to 25. "'
015a CONTEMPORARY PSYCHOLOGICAL TOPICS: ALIENATION AND "^
THE EDUCATIONAL PROCESS Mr. Heath
The course has two purposes: fl) to provide students with the experience of
how psychologists use their knowledge and skills to understand issues of
contemporary concern. We will begin by canvassing the meanings of aliena-
tion, identifying and examining in some depth the psychological assumptions
involved, and designing and conducting research about selected aspects of
alienation. Subsequent topics of study will be determined by the class and
might include racial differences in intelligence, the effects of the mass media,
technology and leisure on personality development. (2) To explore different
types of educational procedures that may reduce alienation and facilitate
educational involvement. Members of the seminar will share in the teaching
and evaluation processes of the course. Enrollment limited to 20 freshmen.
018a,b GAMES, DECISIONS AND ACTIONS Mr. Rowe
An analysis of how a psychologist studies processes of thinking and acting.
Students will begin by examining both subjective and objective features of
their own problem-solving behavior. Various theoretical positions concerning
thinking will then be considered. In the second part of the course, the student
will again provide himself with data concerning his participation and decisions
while playing games and solving problems within a group. Some attention
will be paid to such variables as trust, threat and competition. The student
will be guided to achieve some synthesis of his course work by considering
the variety of factors entering his decisions for action and the relationship
between knowledge and action based upon it. No prerequisite. Enrollment
limited to 25.
INTERMEDIATE COURSES
121a THE INDIVIDUAL IN SOCIETY Mr. Perloe
A consideration of the forces operating on individuals by virtue of their
participation in groups and larger social structures. Topics to be covered are:
the determinants of group cohesiveness, social influence and conformity,
crowds, role theory and role conflict, the impact of social systems and cul-
ture on personality and the relation between psychology and ethics. No
prerequisite.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
145
130b ANIMAL LEARNING AND ETHOLOGY Mr. D'Andrea
Three hours of lecture and three hours of laboratory
A study of the controlled laboratory investigation of learning and condition-
ing of animals and the ethological approach to animal behavior. Theories of
learning will be critically examined in view of experimental and naturalistic
observations of animal behavior. Students will do experimental work in the
animal laboratory and write an ethogram based on some naturalistic observa-
tion of a species. Prerequisite: Psychology 153d,e,g, the Social Science Sta-
tistics which may be taken concurrently, or permission of the instructor.
136b SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY Mr. Perloe
Three hours of lecture and three hours of research
A study of the perceptual, motivational and learning processes involved in
social behavior. Topics to be considered are: the judgment of social stimuli,
forming impressions of other people, evaluating one's abilities, opinions and
emotions, social exchange, achievement and failure motivation and imitation.
A research practicum will accompany the course. Prerequisite: Psychology
153d, e, g, the Social Science Statistics, or permission of the instructor.
153d,e,g SOCIAL SCIENCE STATISTICS Staff
{See General Courses 153d,e,g)
201a COMPARATIVE PSYCHOLOGY Mr. Gonzalez
Three hours of lecture and three hours of laboratory
The evolution of behavior: sensory and motor capacities, instinctive activities,
motivation, learning, group processes, social behavior. Prerequisite: Psy-
chology 130b.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
201b ANIMAL LEARNING Mr. Gonzalez
Three hours of lecture and three hours of laboratory
Comparative studies of conditioning and selective learning; theories of
learning; the evolution of intelligence. Prerequisite: Psychology 130b.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
202a MOTIVATION Messrs. Hoffman and Gonzalez
Three hours of lecture and three hours of laboratory
The activation and regulation of goal-directed behavior: affectional processes,
psychological drives, incentives, frustration, conflict, punishment, and anxiety.
Prerequisite: Psychology 130b.
Offered at Bryn Mawr in 1971-72 and thereafter.
llZa. THEORIES OF PERSONALITY Mr. Heath
Although the course will cover the major personality theorists, it will go
most intensively into Freudian, Rogerian, and existentialist views of per-
sonality. Reading in original sources will be extensive. Emphasis will be
placed on mastering the theoretical concepts and relationships. Research
issues and methods associated with each theoretical approach will be high-
lighted. The course material will be supplemented by case study material and
146
the opportunity to do a minor research project in lieu of a major paper.
Prerequisite: One course in psychology or the permission of the instructor.
Enrollment limited to 30.
235a PERCEPTION AND COGNITION Mr. Rowe
Evidence and hypotheses in psychology concerning the way we represent our
environments. Topics will include the act of perceiving, visual and auditory
memories, categorization and hypothesis testing in representation processes,
and computer simulation of perception and cognition. In the second part of
the course students will work together on a research project practicum in
the areas of perception, conceptuaHzation, or problem solving. Option: Those
students who do not choose to take the research practicum part of this course
may elect instead to participate in Psychology 34 le. Prerequisite: Psychology
153d, e, g, which may be taken concurrently, or permission of the instructor.
Not open to freshmen.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
238b PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE Mr. D'Andrea
The course will concentrate on the development of modem psycholinguistics.
Such topics as semantics, the interpretation of language in terms of associa-
tion theories, the relation between language and thinking, and the implica-
tions of recent work in generative grammars for a psychology of language
will be discussed. Students will have the opportunity to pursue their particular
interests, whether they be in the philosophical or mathematical theories of
language, in culture and language, or in more conventional linguistics. Pre-
requisite: One general course in Psychology or permission of the instructor.
ADVANCED COURSES
301a PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY Mr. Thomas
Three hours of lecture and one laboratory period
An examination of the physiological basis of a wide range of psychological
phenomena, including the role of the nervous system in learning, emotion,
motivation, perception and thought. Prerequisite: Psychology 130b. Students
wishing to take part in the laboratory must secure permission of the instructor.
Offered at Bryn Mawr.
307a SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY OF ATTITUDES Mr. Perloe
Three hours of seminar and three hours of research
A detailed coverage of recent psychological research on the determinants of
attitude formation and change. After examining the personal and social
sources of attitudes, the course will turn to a consideration of the effects of
the following variables upon attitude change: the nature of the communicator,
the use of emotional appeals, the structure of persuasive communications,
the personalities of communication recipients, and the occurrence of incon-
sistencies between communication and action. The consequences of gross
situational changes such as "brain washing" will also be discussed. A research
practicum will accompany the course. Prerequisite: One intermediate course
in Psychology or permission of the instructor; Psychology 153d, e, g
strongly recommended.
147
b
340b MATHEMATICAL THINKING PSYCHOLOGY Mr. Rowe
The first part of the course will cover mathematical models of psychological
processes, theory construction, and various mathematical tools such as
information theory, utihty theory, logic and set theory, and theory of re-
lations and graphs. The second part of the course will consider the human as
a decision-making system. Topics will include models of control systems
within the individual, brain decisions, the will and the mind, and control by
symbol systems.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
341e BRAIN, BEHAVIOR, AND EXPERIENCE {V2 credit) Mr. Rowe
An introduction to some of the recent neurophysiological evidence and
theorizing about brain function and states as they relate to psychological
constructs such as percepts, images, emotions, intention, choice, and attention.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor or one intermediate course, which
may be taken concurrently.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
344b DEVELOPMENT THROUGH THE LIFE SPAN Mr. Heath
Developmental problems of infancy, childhood, adolescence, and adulthood
will be viewed from different perspectives, including psychosexual, Erikson's
psychosocial and Piaget's cognitive theories. Emphasis will be placed on the
healthy mastery of problems like sexuality, identity, responsibility, marriage,
religion, and death. There will be a weekly practicum experience with children
in a local nursery or elementary school. Student reports, discussion, and
occasional lectures will be supplemented by demonstrations, some role-
playing, and other experiential forms of learning. Prerequisite: Psychology
223a and permission of the instructor.
345a ANALYSIS OF BEHAVIOR Mr. D'Andrea
Three hours of lecture and three hours of laboratoiy
The course systematically formulates and analyzes the problems of scientific
method, learning, motivation, and emotion, in terms of the principles of
operant conditioning. Detailed analysis will be made of such problems as
primary and conditioned reinforcement, reinforcement schedules, and avoid-
ance conditioning. Lectures will emphasize the systematic principles and their
application to a variety of human behaviors. The laboratory will involve the
study of an individual animal's behavior (e.g., acquisition, extinction, dis-
crimination). Students will also do independent research projects. Prerequi-
site: Psychology 130b or permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
346b ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY Mr. Heath
Three hours of seminar and three hours of fieldwork
The course has two purposes: 1) to introduce a student to the principal
forms of psychopathology and deviancy, etiological controversies, methods of
personality assessment and therapy, and the meaning of abnormality and its
relation to socio-cultural values; 2) to sensitize a student to the subtleties of
148
interpersonal dynamics as they are related to understanding psychopathology.
Intensive case analyses, work with a hospitalized patient, and guided experi-
ential encounters with others will supplement the formal course work. Field-
work will be at a neighboring mental hospital. Prerequisite: Psychology
223a and permission of the instructor.
351a RESEARCH TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY Staff
This course will involve students, at an advanced level, in the problems of
hypothesis formation and definition, experimental design, data analysis, and
report writing by means of closely supervised experimental research projects.
Students must have selected the problem on which they wish to work during
the spring of the previous year. They may enroll in Psychology 480 for half-
credit as a means of preparing for their research project. Prerequisite: Per-
mission of the instructor under whom one intends to work.
480 INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Students should normally plan to take this course for half-credit.
399 THE SENIOR PROGRAM
The senior program is designed to build upon the systematic basis established
at the intermediate level and to help the student gain an overview of the
theoretical and applied aspects of psychology. It also aims at increasing the
understanding of the processes through which psychological knowledge is
accumulated and the methods by which it can be communicated to non-
psychologists. The program has three aspects. The first is a series of case
studies of problems drawn from all areas of the discipline, with particular
emphasis placed on the ways in which problems and concepts have developed.
The second is a series of visitors, each of whom will meet intensively with the
seniors. Most of the visitors will be chosen because of their involvement with
the problems treated in the case studies. The selection of cases and visitors
will be based in part upon the suggestions made by majors toward the end
of the junior year. The third aspect of the program provides an opportunity
for students to participate in communicating psychology and supervising
student research in general and intermediate courses. Grades of 70 or above
in each semester of the program will satisfy the senior comprehensive
requirement.
149
RELIGION
Associate Professor Richard G. Luman, Chairman
Professor Gerhard E. Spiegler
Assistant Professor J. Bruce Long
Assistant Professor Craig L. Stark
Lecturer Samuel T. Lachs
At Bryn Mawr College
Professor Howard C. Kee
The Department of Religion is concerned with the historical study of
religious tradition in the Judeo-Christian-Islamic West; with the his-
torical-phenomenological study of archaic, ancient and classical, and
non-Western religious traditions; and with the philosophical study of
religious thought, East and West, particularly in its modem forms of
expression.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
The exact structure of the student's program must be determined in consulta-
tion with the major adviser (who is chosen by the student from among the
regular members of the Department) together with the advice of the entire
Department. The program must include the following courses:
a. Religion 101a or b, 102a or b, and 399b.
b. Six additional half-year courses. Two of these courses may be upper-level
courses in other departments, including languages. Also among the six
courses must be one of the following sequences: Religion 103a, 104a; 117a,
118b; 201a, 202b; 225a, 226b, or any year sequence on the scriptures and
sources of a major religious tradition.
Each student's program and record will be reviewed annually by the Department.
Final evaluation of the major program will consist of written and oral exami-
nations to be administered during the senior year in the context of the work for
Religion 399b. Specific terms of the synthesis will be reviewed with the majors
and members of the Department.
Where necessary for the major program, the Department urges the study of
the appropriate foreign language (s).
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors in Religion are awarded on the basis of the oral part of the senior
evaluation of students whose written work as juniors and seniors has been of a
consistently high standard. High Honors are awarded on the same basis, special
consideration being given to work done in project courses.
101 a,b RELIGION IN TRADITIONAL CULTURE Messrs. Long and Luman
A study of man's conceptions of himself and society through detailed ex-
amination of selected myths and rites, found in the traditions of tribal
Africa, Vedic India, or the Ancient Near East. An introduction to and
150
z
testing of divergent methodologies and theories of religion in the study of TB
major religious forms and types developed in the Hebrevz-Christian jji
tradition. Limit: 20 students in each section. iTl
One-semester course offered in each semester. I
102a,b RELIGION IN MODERN CULTURE Messrs. Spiegler and Stark Q
Modern forms of religious expression and critiques of religion will be ■■
studied in the work of such men as Kierkegaard, Marx, Freud, T. S. Eliot, Q
Buber, Bultmann, Tillich, and Camus. No prerequisite. Limit: 20 students in
each section.
One-semester course offered in each semester.
103a, 104a BIBLICAL HISTORY AND LITERATURE Mr. Kee
Offered at Bryn Mawr as History of Religion 103
117a, 118b HISTORY OF JEWISH THOUGHT Mr. Lachs
A systematic survey of the development of Jewish thought from the period of
the Bible to the present. Fall semester: From the Biblical period to the end
of the 15th century. Spring semester: From the 16th century to the present.
119a GREEK CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
(Also called History 119a and Classics 119a; for course description see
History 119a.)
120b ROMAN CIVILIZATION Mr. Luman
(Also called History 120b and Classics 120b; for course description see
History 120b.)
201a, 202b HISTORY OF WESTERN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT AND
INSTITUTIONS Mr. Luman
History of Christian thought and institutions from the first century to the
fifteenth. Religion 101a, b and 102a, b and/or History 111 desirable. Enroll-
ment limited to 20 students.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
225a, 226b RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS IN INDIA: ANCIENT AND
MODERN Mr. Long
(Also called Philosophy 225a, 226b)
A study of the various religious traditions in India (Hindu, Buddhist, Islamic,
and tribal) from the earliest developments in the Vedas, Brahmanas, and
Upanishads, through the two Indian epics, the Puranas, and the Agamas.
Special emphasis will be placed upon tracing the persistence of certain forms
of religious belief and worship throughout the course of Indian history.
Prerequisite: Religion 101a or b or consent of the instructor.
229a RELIGION AND THE CONTEMPORARY IMAGINATION Mr. Long
(Also called Philosophy 229a)
An introductory study of the basic ideas and issues in contemporary theology
and literature, designed to help the student bring into sharper focus the
religious dimensions or implications of modern literature — fiction, drama,
and poetry. Lectures and discussions will be devoted to close literary analysis
151
and theological interpretation of selected works of Kafka, Sartre, Camus,
Beckett, Auden, Eliot, Kierkegaard, Tillich, and others. Prerequisite: Religion
102a or b or consent of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
236b THE PROTESTANT REFORMATION Mr. Luman
(Also called History 236b)
A study of the rise and development of the Protestant Reformation during
the sixteenth century, its history and thought, with special attention to the
work and thought of Luther and Calvin. Prerequisites: Consent of the in-
structor, and either Religion 101a or b and 102a or b or History 111.
240b HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES OF QUAKERISM Mr. Bronner
(See History 240b)
326a MYSTICISM: EAST AND WEST Mr. Long
An investigation into the more central traits of religious and secular mys-
ticism in the history of religions. Readings will be drawn from the following
traditions: Hindu (Upanishads, Patanjali, Sahkara and Aurobindo), Islamic
(various Sufi poets), Judaic (Kabbalah), and Christian (Meister Eckhart,
St. John of the Cross, and George Fox). Prerequisite: Consent of the instruc-
tor. Enrollment limited.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
337a RELIGIOUS ETHICS Mr. Stark
(Also called Philosophy 337a)
An examination of conflicting approaches to such topics as freedom and
order, love and justice, vocation and avocation, church and state, just-war
theory and nonviolent resistance, population control, and personal responsi-
bility in the uses of power. Reports, lectures, and discussions. Prerequisite:
Religion 102a or b or consent of the instructor. Enrollment limited.
338a PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION Mr. Stark
(Also called Philosophy 338a)
A study of classical and contemporary treatments of such topics as faith and
knowledge, theology and history, science and religion, the nature and exist-
ence of God, evil and life after death, and problems concerning truth-claims
and meaningfulness in religious discourse. Lectures, reports, and class dis-
cussions. Prerequisite: Religion 102a or b or one course in Philosophy.
343a SEMINAR IN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT Messrs. Spiegler and Stark
(Also called Philosophy 343a)
Specialized study of the works of some major philosopher or theologian, or
work on a major theological problem. May be repeated for credit with change
of content. Fall semester 1970-71: Hegel (Messrs. Spiegler and Bernstein).
Prerequisite: reading knowledge of German or French and consent of the in-
structor.
152
i
350b SEMINAR IN HISTORY OF RELIGIONS Mr. Long
Intensive study of some period or set of problems in the field. Topic for
1970-71: Mythologies of Death and the Afterlife. Prerequisite: Consent of
the instructor.
345a SEMINAR IN WESTERN RELIGIOUS HISTORY Mr. Luman
(Also called History 345a)
Intensive study of a major thinker or movement in the history of Chris-
tianity. May be repeated for credit with change of content. Prerequisite:
consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
355a ANTHROPOLOGY OF RELIGION Mr. MacGaffey
(See Sociology 355a)
399b MODERN TRENDS IN RELIGION Staff
Advanced study of topics in the field. Required of senior majors and open
to other qualified seniors with consent of the instructor.
480a,b INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Individual consultation; independent reading and research.
OFFERED UNDER HISTORY OF RELIGION AT BRYN MAWR
001 ELEMENTARY HEBREW _ Mr. Lachs
103 BIBLICAL HISTORY AND LITERATURE Mr. Kee
207a THE HISTORICAL lESUS AND THE GOSPEL TRADITION Mr. Kee
208b PAUL AND THE RISE OF GENTILE CHRISTIANITY Mr. Kee
303a READINGS IN THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT Mr. Kee
303b MYTH AND HISTORY: A STUDY OF THE GOSPEL OF JOHN, ITS
SOURCES, ITS USE OF JEWISH, HELLENISTIC, AND GNOSTIC
CONCEPTS Mr. Kee
153
ROMANCE LANGUAGES
Professor Marcel M. Gutwirth, Chairman
Professor Manuel J. Asensio
Associate Professor Bradford Cook
Assistant Professor Patrick McCarthy
Admission of new students to all French and Spanish courses except
French 001 and Spanish 001 is contingent upon placement examinations
administered by the Department prior to the opening of such courses.
Students who complete French 001, Spanish 001 or Spanish 003 with
distinction are given opportunity to advance rapidly into higher courses
by passing a special examination in September on a prescribed program
of vacation study.
Residence in the French and Spanish Houses and participation in
the Cercle Frangais and Club Espaiiol afford an opportunity for sup-
plementary oral practice.
Students who might profitably spend their junior year in France or
Spain are encouraged by the Department to apply for admission to the
institutions sponsoring foreign study groups.
Students majoring in a Romance language are encouraged to spend a
summer in France or in a Spanish-speaking country. Foreign summer
schools and projects sponsored by the American Friends Service Com-
mittee and other organizations offer exceptional opportunities in this
regard.
FRENCH
The program in French is designed to give the student some facility
in handling the French language, by elucidation and review of funda-
mentals, by a progressive course of reading, and constant practice in
hearing, speaking, and writing French. Close scrutiny of style and
structure, of moral and artistic intentions, orients the study of the
masterpieces of French literature, which the student is then ready to
approach, toward a heightening of his perception of artistic achieve-
ment, an enlargement of his understanding of both heart and mind.
Reading in the original of the works of major figures such as Pascal,
MoHere, Balzac, Flaubert, Proust, moreover, will perfect his acquaint-
ance with some of the best in his own heritage, the culture of the West.
154
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS Jl
French 202a, 202b, 203a, 203b, 301a, 301b, and 490b. Q
Supporting courses to be arranged in individual conference with the major ^
supervisor.
Comprehensive examination.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
>
2
0
Honors in French will be awarded on the basis of consistently distinguished Pfj
work in the literature courses — including at least one project course — and of
a grade of 90 or better on the comprehensive examinations. High Honors will j^
be determined by a further oral examination. W
001 INTRODUCTION TO FRENCH LANGUAGE AND THOUGHT ^
Staff ^
Pronunciation and intonation; grammar, with oral and written exercises. Ul
Reading, in the second semester, of easy texts of literary merit. f
This course is not open to freshmen who have had more than two years J"
of high-school French. P
101 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH Staff C)
Training in the language is pursued on the basis of a sampling of works ni
designed to acquaint the student with the range of French thought and in
letters, from Francois Villon to the present. Grammar review, dictees, short *'
written compositions, classes conducted in French. Prerequisite: French 001
or satisfactory performance on a placement test.
201a DICTION AND COMPOSITION IN FRENCH Mr. McCarthy
Intensive language work in a small class. Grammar review, compositions,
pronunciation drill, oral reports. The work will be centered on literary
topics (e.g., the contemporary theatre), but the emphasis will be on perfect-
ing linguistic performance. Prerequisite: permission of the Department.
201b EXPLICATION DE TEXTES Mr. McCarthy
An introduction to the study of French literature by the method of intensive
analysis of style and structure applied to the several genres. Prose and poetry,
essay and fiction drawn from a variety of periods will come under scrutiny.
Prerequisite: French 201a or the equivalent.
202a THE CLASSICAL AGE
Reading in the French 17th century, from Pascal's Pensees to La Bruyere's
Caracteres, with special attention to the flowering of the classical drama.
Prerequisite: French 201b or the equivalent.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
202b THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
Three generations, those of Gide, Malraux, and Sartre, will be examined
in representative novels, plays, essays, and poems. Prerequisite: French 201b
or the equivalent.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
155
203a NINETEENTH CENTURY LYRIC POETRY Mr. Cook
The lyrical rebirth of the 19th century: Vigny, Baudelaire, Rimbaud,
Mallarme. Prerequisite: French 201b or the equivalent.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
203b THE NOVEL FROM LACLOS TO PROUST Mr. Gutwirth
The rise of the modern novel in France from the late 18th to the early 20th
century with particular attention to Balzac, Stendhal, Flaubert, Zola, and
Proust. Prerequisite: French 201b or the equivalent.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
301a ADVANCED TOPICS IN FRENCH LITERATURE Mr. Gutwirth
1970-71: Rabelais. A close reading of the first four books of the Gargantua
and Pantagruel adventures in light of recent views concerning the humanist
movement, verbal exuberance, and the comic spirit. Prerequisite: consent of
the instructor.
301b ADVANCED TOPICS IN FRENCH LITERATURE Mr. Cook
1970-71: Flaubert, Mallarme. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
480a,b INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
This course offers the student of French literature an opportunity to probe
more deeply and more independently into a problem or into an area in
which he is particularly interested. The nature of the course will therefore
vary to suit the needs of the individual student.
490b SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Staff
Masterworks from the Renaissance to the present. A representative sample
of major works by twelve writers of the first rank is assigned in this course,
together with a recent scholarly appraisal of each writer, to allow the
student to form a view of the high points of the literary tradition against
a background of authoritative, up-to-date assessment. From Montaigne
to Proust the readings cover a span of four centuries, and they range
from Voltaire's polemic wit to Baudelaire's aesthetic detachment. The
object of the course is to cap the student's acquaintance with French litera-
ture by a reconsideration of some of its main achievements. Among the
writers presented are: Pascal, Moliere, Racine, Flaubert, Gide. Prerequisite:
senior standing or permission of the Department.
FRENCH CIVILIZATION
241a THE IMPRESSIONIST ERA Mr. McCarthy
(Also called History 241a)
A study of late 19th century French civilization: painting, literature and
history. Examination of the Impressionist and post-Impressionist painters
(with slides and guest lectures). Readings from Flaubert, Zola, Maupassant
and the poets. Study of selected topics from the history of the Third Republic.
Particular attention will be paid to the links among the various cultural and
social phenomena. A knowledge of French is not required.
156
242b THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHES
(Also called Political Science 272b)
Montesquieu, Voltaire, Rousseau, Diderot. Readings in English from the
works of these four major figures of the European Enlightenment, whose
contribution to sociology, political theory, and theory of education singularly
broadened the idea of the writer's function in society. Some attention will
also be given to Helvetius, Condillac, and the Encyclopedie.
Not offered in 1970-71.
243b CONTEMPORARY FRANCE Mr. McCarthy
(Also called History 243b)
An examination of the main political, social and cultural trends of con-
temporary France. Selected topics in French history from 1940 to the May
riots and the resignation of De Gaulle. Discussion of cun^ent events. Study
of the structure of French family life, of the educational system, etc. Read-
ings from such authors as Celine, Camus, Sartre, Robbe-Grillet and Cayrol.
A knowledge of French is desirable but not required.
COURSES OFFERED AT BRYN MAWR
305a BALZAC Mr. Serodes
305b AUTOBIOGRAPHY: CHATEAUBRIAND TO SARTRE Mr. Maurin
SPANISH
The courses offered in Spanish are designed to give the students a
thorough knowledge of the Spanish language and an understanding of
Spanish and Spanish-American thought and culture. Elementary Spanish
and Intermediate Spanish are primarily language courses, with emphasis
on grammar, reading, and conversation. Even in these elementary
courses the approach corresponds to the liberal tradition of the College,
placing emphasis on the human value of the language, and its impor-
tance in international and continental solidarity and understanding. The
elementary courses are followed by general courses in civilization and
literature, as the basis for the more advanced courses covering special
periods, works, and authors in Spanish and Spanish-American litera-
tures. Interested students should consider, in addition to the courses
listed below, the offerings in Spanish at Bryn Mawr College.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Spanish 101, 201, 303a, 401a or 401b, 490.
Histoiy of Spain and Spanish America, as a background for literature.
Supporting courses to be arranged in individual conference with the major
supervisor.
Comprehensive examination.
Spanish majors are advised to take Spanish 202 (Spanish Readings and Com-
position) at Bryn Mawr College.
157
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors in Spanish are awarded to students who consistently show high-quality
work in their literature courses and undertake study beyond the normal require-
ments. Every Honors student must complete at least one project course. A
minimum grade of 88 is required in the comprehensive examinations. High Honors
are awarded on the basis of a further oral examination.
001 ELEMENTARY SPANISH Mr. Asensio
Grammar, with written and oral exercises; reading; thorough drill in con-
versation.
003 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH Mr. Asensio
Review of grammar, with written and oral exercises; composition, reading,
and conversation. Prerequisite: Spanish 001 or the equivalent.
101 INTRODUCTION TO SPANISH LITERATURE Mr. Asensio
A survey of Spanish literature from the beginnings to modern times; lectures,
written and oral reports. Prerequisite: Spanish 003 or the equivalent.
201 INTRODUCTION TO LATIN-AMERICAN LITERATURE Mr. Asensio
A survey of Latin-American literature from the Colonial period to modern
times; lectures, written and oral reports. Prerequisite: Spanish 003 or the
equivalent.
Not offered in 1970-71.
203 INTRODUCTION TO HISPANIC CIVILIZATION Mr. Asensio
Geographic, cultural, and historical background. Emphasis is laid on basic
attitudes underlying the Spanish and Spanish-American culture pattern and
contrasting with characteristic American attitudes. Lectures, reading, discus-
sion, written reports. Prerequisite: Spanish 003 or the equivalent.
Not offered in 1970-71.
303a THE AGE OF CERVANTES Mr. Asensio
The development of Cervantes' art in the drama, the short story, and the
novel with special attention to Don Quixote.
301a, 301b SPECIAL TOPICS IN SPANISH LITERATURE Mr. Asensio
Reading and lectures, written and oral reports. This course may be repeated,
with change of content, for full credit.
401a INDEPENDENT STUDY Mr. Asensio
490 SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES Mr. Asensio
158
RUSSIAN JJ
Professor F.^.CHSoeGKA.PP,C..>.«„« g
Instructor Frederick Schulze iL
At Bryn Mawr College _
Associate Professor Ruth C. Pearce y
2
The courses in Russian are designed to offer the students the oppor-
tunity to learn to read and speak Russian and to achieve an under-
standing of the thought and culture of pre-revolutionary as well as
contemporary Russia. Russian 001 and 101 are primarily language
courses. The elementary course teaches the basic grammar and enough
vocabulary to enable the student to speak and understand simple Rus-
sian. The intermediate course introduces the student to the Russian
literary language; also some newspaper articles and other contemporary
material are read.
Students who have completed Russian 101 can continue with the
more advanced courses offered at Bryn Mawr College.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
(Courses numbered above 200 are offered at Bryn Mawr College). Students
majoring in this field will be required to take: Eight semester courses in Russian
language and literature: 001, 101, 200 or 201, a 300-level course, either 302 or
303 in addition to the Comprehensive Conference.
Three semester courses in Russian history and institutions: History 244 (Rus-
sian History); Political Science 210a (The Soviet System). Other related courses,
including Russian 200 (Advanced Training in the Russian language), and Russian
203 (Russian Literature in Translation), are recommended.
A comprehensive examination in the Russian language and a special period of
Russian literature.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
Honors in Russian will be awarded on the basis of consistently high quality
work in literature, and a research paper. High Honors will be awarded on the
basis of further oral examination.
001 ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN Mr. Schulze
Five periods a week
j Russian grammar, conversation and reading. This course meets five times a
I week with corresponding reduction in outside preparation; three hours credit.
|*0n sabbatical leave first semester, 1970-71.
159
101 INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN Mrs. Pearce
Four periods a week
Grammar review, reading in Russian classics and contemporary materials,
conversation; three hours credit. Prerequisite: a grade of 70 or higher in
Russian 001, or the equivalent.
490 COMPREHENSIVE CONFERENCE
COURSES OFFERED AT BRYN MAWR
200 ADVANCED TRAINING IN THE RUSSIAN LANGUAGE Mr. Segall
201 READINGS IN RUSSIAN LITERATURE Miss Nagurski
203 RUSSIAN LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION Miss Nagurski
Not offered in 1970-71.
302 PUSHKIN AND HIS TIME Mrs. O'Connor, Miss de Graaff
303 RUSSIAN LITERATURE OF THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
Miss de Graaff
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY
Associate Professor Wyatt MacGaffey, Chairman'^**
Assistant Professor William Hohenstein, Acting Chairman
Professor A. Paul Hare
Lecturer Laura BLANKERTZf
Lecturer Paul E. Wehr
Sociology at Bryn Mawr
Professor Eugene V. Schneider
Sociology courses at Bryn Mawr and Haverford are intended to be
complementary. Students interested in sociology should consult the Bryn
Mawr College calendar.
A student majoring in sociology selects a member of the full-time
staff as his adviser and develops a program of study acceptable to the
adviser as fulfilling the college's general educational aims and as includ-
ing a coherent and relatively intensive exploration in the discipline of
sociology. The department expects such a program to lead to an under-
standing of past and present theories of social behavior, of their appli-
cation to concrete examples of interpersonal relations, institutional
structure, social conflict and change, and of the methods of sociological j
='=**0n sabbatical leave, 1970-71. '
tOn appointment first semester 1970-71.
160
research. As soon as possible in his work in this Department the student yj
should take at least the first part of the elementary methods course, «
Sociology 153d, e, g. In their senior year, all majors participate in the
Departmental Studies, Sociology 450b. Programs will include appropri-
n
ate courses from other departments such as languages, psychology, Q
biology and philosophy. A brief written explanation of each student's |.
program becomes part of the student's advising file, copies bemg sent |ii|
to the chairman of the department and the Associate Dean at the time ••
of course registration. Each semester, after the results of the previous ul
semester's work are complete and before registration for the next ^^
semester, additions are made to the program in the form of remarks
on progress and the reason for changes.
Students intending to specialize in social psychology should see
Mr. Hare; in institutional analysis and the classical sociological writers,
Mr. Hohenstein; in social anthropology, Mr. MacGaffey. The attention
of those interested in anthropology is also drawn to the departmental
offerings at Bryn Mawr, Swarthmore and the University of Pennsylvania.
Majors are encouraged to include in their programs a semester's involve-
ment in one of the off-campus programs offered by the Center for
Nonviolent Resolution of Conflict.
Candidates for Honors in sociology and anthropology are expected
to demonstrate high competence and seriousness of purpose in their
major courses, to complete a research paper, and to pass the compre-
hensive review with distinction.
055a SOCIAL CONFLICT Mr. Wehr
Various theoretical approaches will be applied to analysis of contemporary
instances of conflict between groups, organizations and states. The seminar will
draw heavily on the works of Lorenz, Coser, Boulding, Dahrendorf, Coleman
and Burton. Enrollment limited to fifteen. Prerequisite: consent of the
instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
056b HISTORY AND THEORY OF NONVIOLENCE Mr. Wehr
An examination of the philosophical and tactical origins of nonviolence, its
development as a change-oriented ideology, and social movements that have
developed around it. Thoreau, Tolstoy, Gandhi, King, and certain Quaker
pacifists are among the authors to be read and related to contemporary non-
violent movements. Enrollment limited to fifteen.
121a THE INDIVIDUAL IN SOCIETY Mr. Perloe
(See Psychology 121a)
161
152b AFRICAN SOCIETY Mr. MacGaffey
An introduction to social anthropology through the study of Subsaharan
African peoples. Special attention to kinship and economic institutions, re-
lating patterns of exchange to social structure. Enrollment limited to 30. Not
open to seniors.
153d,e,g SOCIAL SCIENCE STATISTICS Staff
{See General Courses 153d,e,g)
155a FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIOLOGY Mr. Hohenstein
An introduction to the key questions addressed by the major figures in the
sociological traditions. In particular the concepts of freedom, responsibility,
alienation, class, power, and progress will be examined for their relevance to
an understanding of contemporary societies.
159a SOCIOLOGY OF THE FAMILY Mr. Hohenstein
The course will examine the family as an ongoing social institution. Consid-
eration will be given to forces such as culture, social class, religion, and
education which affect family structure. Special attention will be paid to
changes and conflicts stemming from difficulties in sex and age role-adjust-
ment. Comparison will be made between the family structures of America
and Sweden.
162b ANALYSIS OF INTERPERSONAL BEHAVIOR Mr. Hare
The aim of the course is to improve the student's abilities to observe, analyze,
and understand his own behavior and that of others in everyday interpersonal
situations. The class constitutes a self-analytic training group in which the
student is expected to demonstrate his abilities by effective participation in
the group as well as in periodic written analysis. Problems for analysis are
drawn from events in the group.
216a AFRICAN CIVILIZATION Messrs. Glickman or Mortimer or MacGaffey
(See General Courses — Social Science 216a)
25 la SOCIOLOGY OF CRIME Mr. Hohenstein
Consideration will be given to: historical overview of criminological theory
from Lombroso to the present; social class, race, age, and sex as factors in
crime; the place of statistical and individual case studies in the development
of theory; and contemporary trends in treating the offender.
252b SOCIAL CHANGE Mr. Hohenstein
Major theories of social change current in contemporary sociology will be
considered. Readings include Marion Levy, Herbert Marcuse, Robert Nisbet,
Ralf Dahrendorf and Philip Rieff.
162
253a SOCIOLOGY OF SMALL GROUPS Mr. Hare
Theoretical and experimental analysis of the structure and process of inter-
action in small discussion, therapy, or work groups. The effects of variables
such as leadership, group size, members' personalities, and the communication
network will be examined. Class members will conduct and observe experi-
mental groups in the laboratory and use the computer to simulate observed
interpersonal behavior.
254b SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY Mr. MacGaffey
History, theory and method in social anthropology, showing how funda-
mental assumptions about human nature and social process affect the collec-
tion and interpretation of ethnographic data. Outline of fieldwork techniques
and experiences. Not open to freshmen.
Students interested in field research practice are invited to take additional
half-course (480) in a suitable individual program.
257a DYNAMICS OF NONVIOLENCE Mr. Hare
A review of social-psychological theories and other theories of nonviolent
direct action. Class discussion will be based on written case material and
field observation.
349a SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY OF ATTITUDES Mr. Perioe
(See Psychology 349a)
352b DATA PROCESSING AND COMPUTER TECHNIQUES Mr. Hare
An advanced course in sociological research methods with emphasis on
computer processing of survey data. Students learn to write programs in the
FORTRAN computer language and to use basic computer programs for
statistical analysis. Problems will include: research design, sampling, scale
construction, and the use of statistical tests. Data from actual surveys will be
prepared for the computer and analyzed by members of the class using the
library of programs at the Computing Center. Prerequisite: Sociology 153d,
e, g or the equivalent with the permission of the instructor.
354b SOCIOLOGY OF KNOWLEDGE Mr. Hohenstein
An analysis of European and American theories of the social factors which
influence and affect the development of knowledge. Emphasis will be placed
on the writings of Karl Marx, Emil Durkheim, Karl Mannheim, and Talcott
Parsons. Particular consideration will be given to the role of the intellectual
in contemporary America and to the epistemological assumptions behind
procedural rules in the social sciences. Prerequisite: Sociology 155a, or
equivalent with permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1971-72 and alternate years.
355a ANTHROPOLOGY OF RELIGION Mr. MacGaffey
(Also called Religion 355a)
Contemporary ethnographic work in the field of religion considered in
163
relation to the most important theoretical contributions, particularly those of
French authors. A knowledge of French is helpful but not essential. Not open
to freshmen.
356b SEMINAR IN SOCIAL THEORY Mr. Hohenstein
A comparison of the theoretical positions of Karl Marx, Max Weber, and
Talcott Parsons. Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Offered in 1970-71 and alternate years.
357a POLITICAL ANTHROPOLOGY
(A Iso called Political Science 357a)
Mr. MacGaffey
Selected topics in the comparative study of government and law, including
insurrectionary phenomena such as revolution, rebellion, and messianism.
450b SENIOR DEPARTMENTAL STUDIES
Required of majors in their senior year.
Staff
480d, e, g, h INDEPENDENT STUDY Staff
Research papers and reading courses on special topics based upon the indi-
vidual interests of advanced students. Prerequisite: approval of a research or
reading proposal by the instructor.
SPANISH
(See Romance Languages)
164
PECIAL PROGRAMS
OF INSTRUCTION
FRESHMAN SEMINARS
EDUCATIONAL INVOLVEMENT
URBAN STUDIES
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
FRESHMAN SEMINARS
Administrative Staff
Professor Edgar S. Rose, Chairman
Professor Frank J. Quinn
Associate Dean David Potter
(See Guidelines for Liberal Education)
Freshmen will take one seminar each semester, which they will
choose in consultation with the faculty member teaching the seminar.
In most cases the professor who teaches it will be the academic adviser
of the students in the seminar so that the seminar will become the focal
point of the freshman year from the standpoint of creative advising as
well as of intellectual exploration.
Class size is normally limited to twelve students, although there may
be some experimentation with classes of 24 students and two faculty
members.
In addition to group seminar meetings, there will be tutorial sessions
with smaller groups of students and frequent occasions for writing short
papers and discussing the work of other students. It is expected that
there will be an atmosphere in which there is freedom to experiment
with a variety of educational forms.
Grading consists of a brief written evaluation.
The two-year sequence Humanities 101, 102 [see General Courses)
may be substituted for the Freshman Seminar.
I-A WE WEAR THE MASK Mr. Aswell
A study of the ways in which both black and white authors have depicted the
voluntary and involuntary roles assumed by black men. Aspects of the
problem to be examined include: the black as "invisible man;" the act of
writing as a form of role-playing; the independent, autonomous life of myths
and stereotypes; the interplay between the self-protective and self-deceptive
functions of masks. Certain contemporary works will be studied to try to
determine whether the purpose and effect of the black man's role-playing
have changed. Reading will include works by Wright, Ellison, Fanon, Genet,
Melville, LeRoi Jones, James Weldon Johnson.
I-B THE DIALOGUE: ANCIENT AND MODERN Mr. Clay
A study of the nature of the dialogue in its Greek origins and of its use as a
current term in the language of modern social and political thought. The
speeches of epic and history (Homer, Herodotus, Thucydides) lead to the
Platonic dialogue which is the main concern of the seminar — especially the
166
Phaednis which is the Platonic dialogue on the dialogue. The dialogue of TPI
pastoral poetry (TTieocritus, Vergil) follows; then the "Aristotelian" dialogue
illustrated by Cicero, On the Nature of the Gods; Galileo, Dialogue Con
•n
cerning the Two Chief World Systems; and Hume, Dialogues on Natural fH
Religion. The last dialogues to be taken up — ^Plato, Symposium and Castig
lione, Courtier — offer the contrast between the ancient and the early modem
dialogue. I
(0
UNSOLVED AND UNSOLVABLE PROBLEMS FROM GREEK ^
MATHEMATICS Mr. Connolly ^
A study of some of the problems left unsolved by Greek mathematicians such ■■
as the angle trisection problem, the N-sided polygon problem, and the £
attempts to prove Euclid's fifth postulate. The effect that these unanswered
questions have had on modern mathematics will be investigated, especially UJ
the way in which wholly new theories have blossomed in the successful 111
attempts to solve them. Rudimentary Galois Theory will get particular _
attention. Some historical material will be presented. Readings will include ^
Boyer, A History of Mathematics; Rapport and Wright, Mathematics; Rade- ^
macher and Toeplitz, Enjoyment of Mathematics. ^
>
(D
I-D UTOPIAS AND COMMUNAL SOCIETIES Mr. D'Andrea
An examination of Utopias and communal societies which will seek answers ]J
to questions such as the following:
What are the characteristics of Utopian societies? What features of society
have been emphasized or eliminated from Utopias? How have some of these
ideas worked in planned communities? A study of the psychological and
sociological investigations of planned communities (e.g., the kibbutzim) will
be made. Students will be invited to help plan the course. Reading will
include: Huxley, Brave New World; Lewis, The Story of Utopias; More,
Utopia; Plato, The Republic; Skinner, Walden Two; Zamiatin, We.
I-E LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN REVOLUTIONARY RUSSIA
Mrs. Gerstein
A study in which literary evidence will be considered in an attempt to under-
stand the effect of European experience on a traditional society. Reading
will include works by Tolstoy, Dostoevsky, Turgenev, Chekhov, Bunin,
Gorky, and end with the Revolution of 1917 seen through the works of
Babel and Pilniak. While the historical and sociological approach will be
important to this study, the emphasis will be on the treatment of the novels
as imaginative literature.
I-F LITERATURE OF THE GHETTO Mr. Kannerstein
A study concentrated on the experience of black people and Jews in
American ghettoes. The chief aim of the course will be to make clear the
ways in which various writers have portrayed the ghettoes, and to achieve an
understanding of the individuals who live in them. Reading will include:
Cleaver, Soul on Ice; DuBois, The Souls of Black Folk; Washington, Up From
Slavery; Paton, Cry the Beloved Country; Oliver, The Meaning of the Blues;
H. Roth, Call It Sleep; Abrahams, Deep Down in the Jungle; P. Roth,
selections from Portnoy's Complaint.
167
I-G THE SELF Mr. Kosman
A study of various theories and views concerning the nature of the self and
self-knowledge. Readings will be from literature, psychology, and philosophy,
including, among others, works by Plato, Jung, Sartre, and Hesse.
I-H THE CONDITION OF MAN Mr. Lester
A study of some recent views of man which have helped to make us what
we are; an examination of how we view ourselves and of our guesses as to
the future. Readings will engage with evolutionary theory and its implications
as seen in imaginative literature, the faith of the existentialist, and selected
science fiction.
I-I THE PHENOMENON OF MAN Mr. Loewy
A historical and analytical study of man as he emerges from his primate
ancestry, a tool-making, social, self-conscious being, moving through a series
of socio-technical revolutions into an uncertain future. Besides creating an
awareness of man as a major ecological phenomenon capable of producing
far-reaching changes in the economy of our planet, this seminar is concerned
with the interrelationship between commitment and analysis in human
thought and in social action. Readings will include: Lynd, Knowledge for
What; Gaylord Simpson, The Meaning of Evolution; LeGros Clark, History
of the Primates; Morris, The Naked Ape; Howell, Early Man; Vercors, You
Shall Know Them; Childe, Man Makes Himself; Turnbull, The Forest
People; Ruesch, Top of the World; Kramer, History Begins at Sumer; Lorenz,
On Aggression; Ehrlich, The Population Bomb; Ehrenfeld, Biological Con-
servation; de Chardin, The Phenomenon of Man.
I-J THE INDIVIDUAL AND HIS SOCIETY IN THE MODERN NOVEL
Mrs. Quinn
An examination of the individual's responsibility to his society and society's
responsibility to the individual. Questions such as the following will be
examined: To what extent should the individual accept or reject the values
of his society? What should be the basis of his acceptance or rejection? What
is the individual's responsibility to the social, religious and political life of
his society? What is the eflFect of society's pressures on the individual? What
is the effect of the absence of society's restraints on the individual? What is
the value of the rebel in society? Is man prepared to accept the responsibili-
ties that go with freedom? Readings will include: Camus, The Plague;
Conrad, Heart of Darkness; Ellison, Invisible Man; Faulkner, Light in
August; Kafka, The Trial; Malraux, Man's Fate.
I-K MUSICAL DRAMA Mr. Reese
An examination of selected operas, in whole or in part, with a two-fold
purpose: (1) to deal with the basic concepts of text, music and dramatic
action, determining the extent to which a synthesis of these concepts has
been achieved by the composers in each work, (2) to investigate the role of
tragedy and comedy in the works studied. The seminar does not pretend to
offer a history of opera nor to follow a chronological pattern of presentation.
Representative works and some writings of the following composers will be
included in the course of study: Monteverdi, Gluck, Beethoven, Verdi,
Wagner, Debussy, Richard Strauss, Berg, Britten.
168
I-L THE HEROIC EPIC Mr. Russo
A reading of such masterpieces of "primary" epic as Gilgamesh, Beowulf,
Song of Roland, and Icelandic saga, and comparison with Homer's Iliad and
Odyssey. Discussion and tutorial reports will focus on those qualities that
distinguish heroic epic from other kinds of epic and the epic hero from the
hero of other literary forms; on the role played by archetypal and universal
folk-tale patterns in these epics; and on certain qualities that seem to set the
Homeric poems apart from the heroic epic tradition in which they originate.
I-M GIANTS OF RUSSIAN FICTION Mr. Satterthwaite
A study of Dostoevsky's The Brothers Karamazov and Tolstoy's War and
Peace, two disparate yet similiar views of the world.
IN SOME ROOTS OF RADICALISM IN AMERICA Miss Shumer
A study of the development of the early labor movement in the U.S. from
the 1880's to the 1930's. The seminar will deal with, (1) the social conditions
that gave rise to union organizing, (2) the ideas and strategy of various
organizing attempts, both radical and moderate, and (3) the response of the
government and society. Some consideration will be given to contemporary
radicalism. Readings will include: Sinclair, The Jungle; Dos Passes, 1919;
Preston, Aliens and Dissenters; Marine, Black Panthers Reports to the Com-
mission to Study Violence and Civil Disorders in America.
I-O MODERN EUROPEAN DRAMA Mr. Cary
A study, with occasional dramatic readings, of plays by Ibsen, Chekhov,
Shaw, Brecht, Eliot, Strindberg, Pirandello, Sartre, lonesco, Beckett, Pinter,
Frisch, and Diirrenmatt.
I-P THE ENVIRONMENTAL CRISIS Mr. Trela
A study of selected aspects of the interaction between man and his physical
environment. The major emphasis will be on global and long-range problems
rather than local and short-term problems. There will also be opportunities,
through the use of outside speakers who are specialists in these areas, to
examine some political, economic, social and moral aspects of the environ-
mental question. Readings will include: Novick, The Careless Atom; de Bell,
ed. The Environmental Handbook; Ehrlich, The Population Bomb; Dubos,
Man Adapting; Ewald, ed. Environment for Man: The Next Fifty Years;
I Wagner, The Human Use of the Earth.
FRESHMAN SEMINARS TO BE OFFERED IN SECOND SEMESTER
1970-71, AND IN 1971-72, WILL BE ANNOUNCED.
169
EDUCATIONAL INVOLVEMENT PROGRAM
For students seeking an academic experience in which they can both
learn about and contribute to the solution of urban problems, the Edu-
cational Involvement Program provides both full and part-time projects
which can be integrated with their academic program. Full-time partici-
pants live for a semester in a Philadelphia lower-income neighborhood.
While there, they do field-work with community-based organizations,
take an on-site seminar taught by Haverford and Bryn Mawr faculty,
and participate in an on-campus seminar. The project is counted as
one of a student's eight semesters needed for graduation. Two inner-city
projects are currently in operation.
Community Organization Assistants Project. Community Organization
Assistants live and work in the Germantown section and are assigned
to various community agencies and action groups. Working under the
supervision of a coordinator, they work in a variety of assignments that
range from organizing lower-income tenants in pursuit of their rights,
to block- work with neighborhood renewal programs.
The academic component of this project consists of two seminars:
161a,b TOPICS IN COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION
Mr. Elder (first semester), Mr. Galper (second semester)
A weekly on-site seminar built around field-work of participants in the
project. Theories of community organization and social change are discussed,
illustrated and criticized in the light of field-work experience. Participation
limited to students in the project.
SEMINAR ON URBAN PROBLEMS
Students participating in the Community Organization Assistants and School-
Community Assistants projects meet regularly with interested faculty and
on-campus students in a forum-seminar to discuss issues emerging from
field-work experience in the projects. Topic areas are defined by the group,
with each faculty participant involved in a block of sessions calling on his
particular expertise, and with appropriate readings suggested by him and the
field experience of students. Foci for discussion include anti-poverty programs,
poverty law, social medicine, social and economic factors in pupil perform-
ance, and financing urban education.
This seminar does not ordinarily confer separate academic credit, but on-
campus students may, by arrangement with their departmental chairman, take
it for a half or whole course credit in the department concerned.
School-Community Assistants Project. School-Community Assistants
live and work in a North Philadelphia community where, as employees
of a neighborhood school corporation, they work as teaching assistants
170 I
in two elementary schools. Field-work activity includes in-service J||
teacher training, the teaching of basic reading and mathematical skills, ri
and the initiation of projects of special interest to School-Community mm
Assistants and the corporation. •"
n
The academic component of this project consists of two seminars: ^
162a,b TOPICS IN URBAN EDUCATION Mr. Wehr
A weekly on-site seminar built around field-work of participants in the -^
project. The several sections focus on 1) basic teaching techniques, 2) an |J
Forum-Seminar SEMINAR ON URBAN PROBLEMS (See description under
Community Organization Assistants project.)
H
5
z
analysis of the Philadelphia school system, 3) theories of innovative educa-
tion, and 4) general problems of urban education with an emphasis on the
black child. Readings on innovative education, teaching, and the black D
experience and resource persons from the community and the school system ■«■
provide a basis for discussion of problems observed in field-work assignments.
Participation limited to students in the project. "■
Z
<
0
r
<
Suburban Involvement Project. Part-time involvement in the Educa-
tional Involvement Program centers around nearby suburban commu-
nities. A Suburban Involvement Coordinator assists students returning
from inner-city projects, and other interested students, in affiliating with ill
suburban institutions and action organizations concerned with problems ^
of racism, economic injustice, and urban violence. Students work as
teaching assistants in public schools, and with religious organizations
and action groups working for changes in racial attitudes and for oppor-
m
Z
tunities for minorities in metropolitan Philadelphia. T
This part-time involvement is often the basis for independent and
group study taken for academic credit.
The Educational Involvement Program provides work-study oppor-
tunities for three specific groups of students: 1) black students who
wish to relate their academic program more closely to their participation
in the political and economic development of the black community,
2) social science majors, and 3) other students interested in a thorough
understanding of urban problems and the suburban role in their solution.
Anyone interested in participating in Educational Involvement Pro-
gram projects should see Mr. Wehr or Miss Dickson at the Center for
Nonviolent Conflict Resolution located in Yarnall House.
171
URBAN STUDIES
Assistant Professor Samuel Gubins, Adviser
The program in Urban Studies is designed to permit the student to
acquire a background of data, methods, and experience relevant to the
problems which face cities and to encourage students to focus their
studies on these problems and their possible solutions.
Utilizing courses currently offered in several departments, students
will focus the methodology and content of various disciplines on urban
life. The program is designed to create lasting interest in and concern
with the urban milieu. In addition, the program will serve those students
contemplating graduate work in history or the social sciences as well
as the areas of law, business, journalism, planning, and public service.
MAJOR REQUIREMENTS
Major requirements and the overall course of study will be agreed upon in
consultation with the adviser, taking account of the student's special strengths and
interests. In planning his schedule a student should anticipate the following
requirements:
An introductory course in two of the following fields: economics, political
science, psychology, and sociology.
A disciplinary base will be established by taking one of the following sequences
of courses:
Economics 101a, b, 209a, 214b, 301a, 304b or 305a.
Political Science 151a or 151b, 223a or 252b, 225b or 220a, 218a, 316b, 258b.
Psychology 136b, 130b, 223a, 235a.
Sociology 153d,e,g, 155a, 159a, 251a, 252b:
A course on quantitative methods;
A senior thesis based on empirical, field or theoretical work;
A senior evaluation. Each student will choose one faculty member to associate
with the Urban Studies Adviser in supervising the thesis and the senior evaluation;
Four additional courses which may be chosen from those listed below as well
as others offered at the University of Pennsylvania and Swarthmore College.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HONORS
The award of Honors will be determined on the basis of the senior evaluation,
course work, and an outstanding paper.
COURSES AT HAVERFORD AND BRYN MAWR COLLEGES
Economics 101a,b INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS Staff
Economics 208b PUBLIC FINANCE AND FISCAL Mr. Hubbard
POLICY
Offered at Bryn Mawr
172
I
Economics 209a
Economics 214b
Economics 300b
Economics 301a
Economics 302b
Economics 304b
Mathematics 118b
Mathematics 119a
Political Science 151a,b
Political Science 218a
Political Science 316b
Political Science 252b
Political Science 258b
Psychology 015a
Psychology 223 a
Psychology 235a
Psychology 130b
Psychology 307a
Social Science 262b
Sociology 153d,e,g
Sociology 155a
Sociology 159a
Sociology 251a
Sociology 252b
Sociology 352b
Sociology 354b
Sociology 357a
ECONOMICS OF URBAN POVERTY Mr. Gubins
ECONOMICS OF MINORITIES
RESEARCH SEMINAR ON Mr. Gubins
HUMAN RESOURCES, POVERTY,
AND URBAN ECONOMICS
STATISTICAL METHODS IN Mrs. Hunter
ECONOMICS
INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMETRICS
Mrs. Hunter
MICROECONOMIC THEORY Mr. Gubins
PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS Staff
CALCULUS AND ANALYSIS Mr. Rosenzweig
POLITICS: POLITICAL ANALYSIS AND Staff
PUBLIC POLICY
URBAN POLITICS Mr. Ross
Offered at Bryn Mawr
URBAN AFFAIRS Mr. Ross
Offered at Bryn Mawr
RATIONALITY, PURPOSE Mr. Waldman
AND COLLECTIVE WELFARE
PUBLIC POLICY: CIVIL RIGHTS Miss Shumer
AND POVERTY
CONTEMPORARY PSYCHOLOGICAL Mr. Heath
TOPICS: ALIENATION AND THE
EDUCATIONAL PROCESS
THEORIES OF PERSONALITY
PERCEPTION AND COGNITION
ANIMAL LEARNING AND
ETHOLOGY
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY OF
ATTITUDES
THE AFRO-AMERICAN
EXPERIENCE: SOUTH AMERICA
AND THE CARIBBEAN
STATISTICS FOR THE SOCIAL SCIENCES Staff
FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIOLOGY Mr. Hohenstein
SOCIOLOGY OF THE FAMILY
SOCIOLOGY OF CRIME
SOCIAL CHANGE
DATA PROCESSING AND
COMPUTER TECHNIQUES
SOCIOLOGY OF KNOWLEDGE
POLITICAL ANTHROPOLOGY
Mr. Heath
Mr. Rowe
Mr. D'Andrea
Mr. Perloe
Mr. Moore
Mr. Hohenstein
Mr. Hohenstein
Mr. Hohenstein
Mr. Hare
C
S
01
>
2
(0
H
C
□
m
(0
Mr. Hohenstein
Mr. MacGaffey
173
m
D
c
PHYSICAL EDUCATION -p
Dana W. Swan, II, Director of Athletics and Chairman a
Professor William Docherty, Jr. ffj
Richard O. Morsch —
Anthony J. Zanin d
Ron Barnes S
Assistants: Francis E. Dunbar r
R. Henri Gordon
Frederick Hartmann
George Leute
Joseph McQuillan
James Mills 0
Howard Price S
Frederick C. Schulze, Jr. j
Oliver G. Swan, Jr. -■
John B. Wilson Q
College Physician: William W. Lander, M.D. Z
The Physical Education Department stresses three elements in its
program: the promotion of physical fitness as beneficial to physical and
mental health, the attainment of proficiency in sports with lifelong
participation value, especially in group endeavor, and the development
of sportsmanship and community spirit through intramural and inter-
collegiate competition.
The Department aims to guide the student to activities which are
commensurate with his level of physical development, while teaching
him the physiological and psychological advantages of physical activity.
The Department places special emphasis on providing facilities for,
and instruction in, sports with lifelong participation value. Haverford's
courses in physical education seek to insure that each student will
develop both interest and proficiency in a sport which he can continue
after graduation.
The intramural program offers a variety of individual and team
activities from which the student may derive the rewards and satisfac-
tions of working with others and of sharing responsibility in a group
endeavor. Intramurals also provide an important component in the
recreational offerings of the College.
The athletic program as a whole, from basic instruction to intercol-
175
legiate competition, is concerned with the individual student's develop-
ment and enjoyment. The sports selected are determined mainly by
current student interest.
PROGRAM
The intercollegiate program consists of schedules in 13 sports. Par-
ticipation in these sports may be substituted for the physical education
requirement. The following table summarizes the sports and physical
education activities available. Special programs may be arranged with
the permission of the Department.
Instructional
Intercollegiate and Intramural
Fall:
Football
Cross
Golf
* Tennis
Soccer
Country
* Soccer
Weight training
Cricket
Sailing
Sailing
* Touch Football
** Modern dance
Winter
: Basketbal
Swimming
Badminton
Karate
Fencing
Wrestling
*Basketball
Handball
*Volleyball
Weight training
** Modern dance
Spring:
Baseball
Sailing
Golf
* Tennis
Cricket
Tennis
Lacrosse
** Modern dance
Golf
Track
Soccer
* Softball
Special physical
activities
* Intramural competition available.
**At Bryn Mawr College.
Evidence of satisfactory physical condition is required by the Depart-
ment before a student is permitted to participate in any aspect of the
program. A swimming test is given to all entering students. This test
must be passed by all students before graduation. Swimming instruction
is given in the gymnasium pool during the fall and spring.
176
I
The outdoor facilities include: Walton Field for football and track
with a 440-yard oval and a 220-yard eight-lane straight-away cinder
track; 4V^-mile cross country course within the campus limits; the
Class of '88 - '22 and Merion Fields — which are used for soccer in
the fall and softball and lacrosse in the spring; a skating pond, Cope
Field for cricket, the Class of '16 Field used for practice football in the
fall and baseball in the spring; fifteen tennis courts, six of which are
all-weather; a driving range with green and sandtraps for golf practice,
and the privileges of Merion West Course for the varsity golf team.
Indoor facilities include the Gymnasium and Alumni Field House.
The basement of the Gymnasium contains dressing rooms, showers,
lockers, a swimming pool, wrestling room, and training room. Through
the generosity of the Class of 1928 it has been possible to provide addi-
tional locker and dressing facilities, a new stock room, and a laundry
and drying room. A regulation basketball court is on the main floor,
with handball and badminton courts.
Alumni Field House, donated by alumni and friends of the College
in 1957, provides extensive facilities for additional athletic activities.
Included are a 7-lap-mile track and areas for field events, a 120' by 120'
indoor dirt "playing field," a batting cage for baseball and cricket, nets
for golf, two basketball courts, and two tennis courts. Spectator seating
capacity exceeds 1000.
177
STUDEIMT
AND
ACTIVITIES
HEALTH PROGRAM
The Haverford College health program is under the direction of the
College physician, who holds office hours at the Infirmary at stated
hours and is available in any emergency. The advice and help of expert
medical consultants may be obtained readily at the Bryn Mawr Hospital.
When necessary, additional consultants are obtained from one of the
university hospitals in Philadelphia. A College nurse is on duty at the
Infirmary at all times.
Each student is required to have a complete physical examination
by his own physician before entering the College and each year before
returning to campus. A report of this examination, on a form supplied
by the College and signed by the student's physician, must be submitted
to the College physician not later than October 1 each year. Follow-up
examinations are given when indicated by the College physician. In-
fluenza vaccine is recommended and given to the entire student body
each year, at no additional cost to the student. Immunization against
smallpox, tetanus, poliomyelitis, and typhoid fever is required before
entering the College. Pre-entrance chest X-ray examination is strongly
recommended.
Each student is entitled to unlimited dispensary service, at stated
hours, and emergency service at any time.
In case of illness, each student is entitled to two weeks of residence
in the Morris Infirmary each semester, ordinary medicine, diagnostic
laboratory work, X-rays needed for diagnosis, and the services of the
College physician and resident nurse.
Students will be charged $5 a day for residence in the Infirmary after
their first two weeks. Day students will be charged for board in addition,
while in the Infirmary.
Each student is also covered by a blanket accident policy which pays
actual expenses resulting from any accident up to a limit of $1000 for
each accident. The expenses covered include X-rays, medicine, surgical
appliances, hospital bills, nursing care, physician's fee, surgeon's fee,
and also dentist's bills for repair or replacement of natural teeth as a
result of an accident, subject to the approval of the College physician.
The coverage is in force from 12:01 a.m. Standard Time three days
before the date when registration of entering students begins until
midnight three days after Commencement Day.
All of these services and benefits are covered by the unit fee which
is paid by all students.
180
COUNSELING SERVICES
The College offers counseling for personal, educational, or vocational
problems, under the direction of two clinical psychologists and a con-
sultant psychiatrist. When warranted, referral is made to outside sources
for psychotherapy in private practice. All student communications with
the counseling staff are held in strict professional confidence, as are the
names of students counseled.
An important part of the broader function of the counselors is to
lead and provide supervision for the "Interact" group program which,
in a manner similar to "sensitivity training," seeks to deal with broader
concerns of facilitating interpersonal communication, important to com-
munity life at Haverford as well as to individual growth. "Interact"
groups are open to a limited number of students each year. The goals
of the program are to broaden the spectrum of emotional experiences;
to provide training in open, honest, but also empathic confrontation of
others; to enhance a spirit of group responsibility for each individual;
and to promote growth in interpersonal perception.
STUDENT GOVERNMENT
The Students' Association is made up of all students enrolled at
Haverford College. The College has delegated to the Students' Associa-
tion — and the Association has accepted — the responsibility for nearly
all aspects of student conduct and of student organizations on the cam-
pus. The Students' Association in turn delegates authority to the Stu-
dents' Council and to the Honor Council to carry on its executive,
legislative, and judicial functions.
The Students' Council consists of the five officers composing the
Executive Committee of the Students' Association (who are chosen in
campus-wide elections) and the Hall Representatives Council.
The Students' Council manages extracurricular activities, exclusive of
athletics, and allocates to each organization a percentage of the unit fee.
Through its several committees, the Council is involved in almost every
facet of student life.
The First Vice-President of the Students' Association presides over
the Honor Council, which is composed of three representatives elected
by each class. However, the President and the First Vice-President of
the Students' Association are automatically among their classes' repre-
sentatives.
181
The Honor Council administers all aspects of the honor system and
has the responsibility of interpreting specific matters pertaining to the
honor system.
HONOR SYSTEM
The honor system at Haverford is based on the belief that students
can successfully take the responsibility of establishing and maintaining
standards in social and academic life. In the academic area the honor
system stipulates that one should distinguish clearly between one's own
work and material from any other source. Since examinations are not
proctored at Haverford, suitable conduct is required by accepted code.
In the social area the guiding principle is respect for women guests and
for the College commimity.
The honor pledge is called to the attention of each applicant for
admission to Haverford College:
"I hereby accept the Haverford College honor system,
realizing that it is my responsibility to safeguard, uphold,
and preserve each part of the honor system and the atti-
tude of personal and collective honor upon which it is
based."
Specifically, each student who enters Haverford pledges himself to
uphold three responsibilities under the honor system: (1) to govern
his own conduct according to the principles which have been adopted
by the Students' Association; (2) in case of a breach of the honor
system to report himself to the Honor Council; (3) if he becomes
aware of a violation by another student, to ask the oifender to fulfill
his pledge by reporting himself. If the offender refuses, the student
is pledged to report the matter to the Honor Council. In this manner
each individual becomes personally responsible for the successful opera-
tion of the entire honor system.
There are several ways in which the honor system contributes to the
quality of student life at Haverford. There is educational value in
considering carefully the factors which make standards necessary and
in deciding as a group what standards and regulations are needed in
the College. It follows that a large degree of self-government is made
possible, since students are willing to respect those standards which
they themselves have set up.
Each entering student must feel confident before selecting Haverford
that he can give his active support to the honor system. He should
182
realize that its success, which is of great importance to him personally
and to the whole student body, and indeed to the College itself, depends
upon his willingness to give it his complete support.
Because of the honor system, students at Haverford can schedule
their own midyear and final examinations within the period of time
set aside for them. The inequities which result when the examination
schedule is arranged impersonally are thus eliminated. The system is
administered by a student committee cooperating with the recorder,
and is perpetuated by serious student commitment to academic respon-
sibility and the honor system.
STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS AND PUBLICATIONS
Haverford students participate in a wide variety of cultural and social
activities. The extracurricular life here is less formalized than that of
many other colleges. There are many activities and organizations which
continue to function year after year and others which flourish when
there is sufficient student interest. At Haverford every student is encour-
aged to join with others in pursuing mutual interests, with the under-
standing that in this way he will be making the kind of contributions
which are so necessary if this small community is to maintain diversity
and to provide a rich experience for all its members.
Many of the organizations, such as the Drama Club, various musical
groups, and the Modern Dance Club, cooperate with organizations at
Bryn Mawr College. Others are more exclusively composed of Haver-
ford students.
A program for chamber music was instituted in 1969 in conjunction
with the appointment of the De Pasquale String Quartet and Sylvia
Glickman, pianist, as artists-in-residence. The artists-in-residence offer
a series of public performances during the year as well as a program
of chamber-music coaching. Any student with sufficient instrumental
background is eligible to participate.
Publications include the Haverjord-Bryn Mawr College News, the
campus newspaper which appears weekly and semi- weekly on occasion;
the Haverford College Handbook, published each fall with the help of
the Students' Council; and the Record, a yearbook. Several literary
magazines have, over the past decade, provided an opportunity for
publication of literary works by Haverford and Bryn Mawr students.
Opportunities for participation by all interested students are available
on business and editorial staff's of these publications.
183
All organizations on the Haverford campus hope to attract committed
and imaginative participants. It is also hoped that each student will
endeavor to participate in those activities which interest him and to feel
especially free to explore new interests while on campus.
COMMUNITY CONCERN
Haverford College has traditionally been concerned with the larger
community. In recent years, many students have demonstrated a desire
for greater involvement in community concerns during their undergradu-
ate years. There are many ways a Haverford student can find this
involvement. He may do it through one of the curriculum-related
involvement programs, which may include course work or individual
projects. He may participate in Students' Council committees which are
involved with both local communities and broader outside concerns.
Examples are the Community Relations Committee, which carries on
tutoring and recreation programs, and the Social Action Committee,
which unites all civil rights, civil liberties, peace, and other groups in a
single organization. He may work with the Serendipity Day Camp,
which members of the College and local communities operate during
the summer for neighborhood children. Haverford students can gain a
great deal from working with individuals and groups in ofT-campus
communities, and students, faculty, and administration are continually
seeking new avenues for meaningful involvement.
184
FELLO\A/SHIPS,
SCHOLARSHIPS
AIMD
PRIZES
V
gUif-'*^ III
HUPWfm"^
ENDOWED FELLOWSHIPS FOR HAVERFORD GRADUATES
Clementine Cope Fellowships, established in 1899 by Clementine
Cope, granddaughter of Thomas P. Cope, member of the Board of
Managers from 1830 to 1849.
These fellowships are to "assist worthy and promising graduates of
Haverford College in continuing their studies at Haverford or at some
other institute, in this country or abroad, approved by the Board of
Managers."
First and Second Cope Fellows are nominated by the faculty, and
selected by the Board of Managers. Individual stipends, not to exceed
$1,000, are determined by the Board.
Letters of application, accompanied by relevant statements of extra-
curricular activities, must be in the hands of the President by March 1.
Augustus Taber Murray Research Fellowships, established in
1964 by two anonymous friends "in recognition of the scholarly attain-
ments of Augustus Taber Murray, a distinguished alumnus of Haverford
College of the Class of 1885."
These fellowships are for further study in English literature or
philology, the classics, or German literature or philology, in other
institutions, toward the degree of Doctor of Philosophy or its future
equivalent.
Only unmarried students are eligible. Further considerations are the
candidate's promise of success in graduate work and the availability of
other financial assistance in his proposed field of study.
Usually one Augustus Taber Murray Research Fellow is nominated
by the faculty, on recommendation of the Committee on Student Stand-
ing and Programs. Individual stipend is $900. The same student may be
awarded the fellowship for two or three years.
Letters of application must be in the hands of the President by
March 1.
ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIPS
(// is not necessary for applicants to mention specific scholarships in
their applications except in those cases where they meet the special condi-
tions stated for the award.)
1 890 Memorial Scholarship Fund — Established by a member of
the Class of 1923 in memory of his father, of the Class of 1890, and in
recognition of his father's friendship with the members of his class. The
186
income from this fund is to be awarded as a scholarship by the College
to a deserving student.
M. A. Ajzenberg Scholarship Fund — Established in 1962 in
memory of M. A. Ajzenberg, for students planning to major or majoring
in physics or astronomy, preferably graduates of public schools in New
Jersey or New York City.
Joseph C. and Anne N. Birdsall Scholarships — Scholarships,
awarded at the discretion of the faculty to some student or students
preparing for medicine, the selection to be based on character, scholar-
ship, and financial need.
Caroline Chase Scholarship Fund — Established December 10,
1951, by Caroline Chase, daughter of Thomas Chase, one-time President
of the College. This fund is an expression of Thomas Chase's enthusi-
astic appreciation for the College's high standards of scholarship in
Greek, Latin, and English literature.
Class of 1904 Scholarship Fund — Established June 4, 1954, in
commemoration of the 50th Anniversary of the Class of 1904. The
income from this fund, which was contributed by the class and the
families of its deceased members, will provide one scholarship.
Class of 1912 Scholarship Fund — The fund was given in com-
memoration of the 50th Anniversary of the Class of 1912. The income
is to be used for scholarship purposes, such scholarship being awarded
preferably to an African or Asian student, but if no such recipient is
available this scholarship may be assigned to some other deserving
student.
Class of 1913 Scholarship — One scholarship, preference to be
given to descendants of members of the Class of 1913 who may apply
and who meet the usual requirements of the College.
Class of 1917 Scholarship — One scholarship, preference to be
given to descendants of members of the Class of 1917 who may apply
and who meet the usual requirements of the College.
Class of 1936 Scholarship Fund — Established in 1961 by the
Class of 1936 as a 25th Anniversary Gift, the income is to be used for
scholarship aid without restriction.
W. W. Comfort Fund — This fund was established in 1947 by the
Haverford Society of Maryland. Grants from this fund are made with
the understanding that the recipient shall, at an unstated time after
187
leaving College, repay to the fund the amount which he received while
an undergraduate.
J. Horace Cook Fund — Established in 1955 by a bequest under
the will of J. Horace Cook, of the Class of 1881, for a scholarship,
one to be awarded each year so that there will be a student in each
class receiving his tuition from this fund.
Howard M. Cooper Scholarship — Upon her death, on April 11,
1966, a gift of part of the residue from a Deed of Trust created by
Emily Cooper Johnson, a friend of the College, became effective. This
fund is for the estabhshment of the "Howard M. Cooper Scholarship,"
the use of which is intended for such students as need assistance to
acquire education, preference being given to members of the Religious
Society of Friends and especially to those affiliated with Newton
Preparative Meeting of Friends of Camden, New Jersey, of which
Howard M. Cooper was a life-long member.
Thomas P. Cope Scholarship — One scholarship.
Daniel E. Davis, Jr. Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship,
awarded at the discretion of the faculty, "on the basis of character,
scholarship, and financial need."
Kathleen H. and Martin M. Decker Foundation Scholarship
— Established in 1958, the Kathleen H. and Martin M. Decker Foun-
dation Scholarship is awarded annually to young men preparing them-
selves in the fields of physics, mathematics, chemistry, and biology. The
Scholarship Committee, in making their selections, will have regard for
candidates who rank high in scholarship, leadership, and character. At
least one scholarship will be given each year with a maximum grant
of $1000. The actual amount of the stipend will be determined by the
financial need of the candidate.
Jonathan and Rachel Cope Evans Fund — Founded in 1952 by
the children and grandchildren of Jonathan and Rachel Cope Evans,
one half of the income of this fund is to be used for scholarships.
The F of X Scholarship — Established by the bequest of Legh Wilber
Reid, who died April 3, 1961 and who was the esteemed professor of
mathematics at the College from 1900 to 1934. His wiH provides that
the scholarship is to be known as The F of x Scholarship. The scholar-
ship is to be awarded to a student in the sophomore, junior, or senior
class who has successfully completed the freshman course in mathe-
matics at Haverford College, who has shown a real interest in mathe-
188
matics and who has given promise for the future of his work in that
subject.
Christian Febiger Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship,
estabhshed June 13, 1946, by Mrs. Madeleine Seabury Febiger in
memory of her husband, Christian Febiger, of the Class of 1900. The
income of this fund is applied in paying tuition and other College
expenses of worthy, needy students.
Elihu Grant Memorial Scholarship Fund — Two or more
scholarships, established February 2, 1944, by Mrs. Elihu Grant to
commemorate the service to Haverford College of Dr. Elihu Grant,
from 1917 to 1938 a member of the College faculty. The income from
this fund is applied to scholarship assistance to students in humanistic
studies, primarily those specializing in the study of Biblical Literature
and Oriental subjects. In special circumstances the income may be
utilized to assist those working for a postgraduate degree at Haverford
College.
Roy Thurlby Griffith Memorial Fund — Estabhshed in June
1952, by Grace H. Griffith, in memory of Roy Thurlby Griffith of the
Class of 1919. The income from this fund is to be awarded as a scholar-
ship by the College, preference to be given to boys who have no father
and who are in need of financial assistance.
Samuel E. Hilles Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship.
Sarah Tatum Hilles Memorial Scholarship Fund — Founded
November 1, 1954, by bequest of $75,534.58 from Joseph T. Hilles,
Class of 1888, in memory of his mother, Sarah Tatum Hilles; to pro-
vide for such number of annual scholarships of $250 each as such
income shall be sufficient to create; to be awarded by the Managers to
needy and deserving students; and to be known as Sarah Tatum Hilles
Memorial Scholarships.
Isaac Thorne Johnson Scholarship — One scholarship, estab-
hshed in 1916 by a member of the Class of 1881 "to assist worthy young
men of Wilmington (Ohio) Yearly Meeting or of the Central West to
enjoy the privileges of Haverford College."
Mary M. Johnson Scholarship — One scholarship.
Jacob P. Jones Endowment Fund — This fund was established in
1897. The donor stated: "My hope is that under the blessing and favor
of God there will come from this source a revenue which shall be
189
productive of growth and vigor in the institution as well as help at
this critical period of their lives to many deserving young men of
slender patrimony."
Richard T. Jones Scholarship — One scholarship.
RuFUS Matthew^ Jones Scholarship Fund — Established in 1959
by Clarence E. Tobias, Jr., as a testimonial to Rufus Jones "and in
gratitude for the excellent educational facilities Haverford provided for
me and my son." The principal and income of this fund are to be used
for scholarships or loans to students majoring in philosophy. Preference
is to be given to seniors. The recipient will be selected by the chairman
of the Philosophy Department in consultation, if he desires, with his
departmental associates and in accord with the usual scholarship
practice of the College. The donor welcomes additions to the fund from
any who might be interested.
George Kerbaugh Scholarship — This fund was estabhshed in
1960 in recognition and appreciation of the leadership and personal
generosity of George Kerbaugh, Class of 1910, who headed the efforts
of the Triangle Society to provide additional stands for Walton Field.
George Kerbaugh's many services to the College include his chair-
manship of the committee which raised the funds of the Library addition
built in the 1930's. The Board of Managers then expressed to him
"its heartfelt appreciation and its sense of great obligation for a notable
achievement."
C. Prescott Knight, Jr. Scholarship — Established by the Haver-
ford Society of New England for a New England boy from a New
England school. In the award of this scholarship a committee, com-
posed of alumni of the New England area, will consider character and
personal qualities as well as the scholastic record and need of the
applicant.
Morris Leeds Scholarships — Established in 1953 by the Board
of Managers of the College in memory of Morris E. Leeds, a member
of the Class of 1888 and chairman of the Board from 1928 to 1945.
Max Leuchter Memorial Scholarship — Established in December
1949, in memory of Max Leuchter, father of Ben Z. Leuchter of the
Class of 1946. One scholarship, awarded at the discretion of the faculty,
on the basis of character, scholarship, and financial need.
Archibald Macintosh Scholarship Fund — This fund was estab-
190
_
lished in 1959 and later increased by admirers and friends of Archibald
Macintosh, and is used preferably for scholarship purposes.
Joseph L. Markley Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship,
awarded at the discretion of the faculty, on the basis of character,
scholarship, and financial need.
Sarah Marshall Scholarship — One scholarship.
Charles McCaul Fund — Established in 1951 by Mary N. Weath-
erly. One or more scholarships which shall be awarded to students who
show special interest in the field of religion and the social sciences.
William Maul Measey Trust — Established in 1952 by the late
William Maul Measey, a friend of the College, who was deeply inter-
ested in education and who wished to help students of high quality in
the pursuit of their education.
J. Kennedy Moorhouse Memorial Scholarship — One scholar-
ship, intended for the member of the freshman class who shall appear
best fitted to uphold at Haverford the standard of character and conduct
typified by the late J. Kennedy Moorhouse of the Class of 1900 — "a
man modest, loyal, courageous, reverent without sanctimony; a lover of
hard play and honest work; a leader in clean and joyous living."
W. LaCoste Neilson Scholarship — Established in 1957 by the
family and friends of W. LaCoste Neilson, Class of 1901, in his memory.
The income is to be used for the payment of one or more scholarships
at the discretion of the College, preference if possible being given to
students taking scientific or practical courses rather than those in the
field of the arts.
Scholarship of the New York Haverford Society — Established
in 1963 for a resident of the New York area who is a member of the
freshman class.
Paul W. Newhall Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship.
Inazo Nitobe Scholarship Fund — Established in November, 1955,
under the will of Anna H. Chace, the income to be used and applied
for the education at Haverford College of a Japanese student who shall
be a resident of Japan at the time of his appointment to such scholar-
ship and for his traveling expenses from and to Japan and his living
expenses during the period he shall hold such scholarship.
The Jose Padin Puerto Rican Scholarship Fund — The fund was
191
established in October 1966 by a gift from Paulina A. Padm in memory
of her husband, Dr. Jose Padin, of the Class of 1907. As both Dr. and
Mrs. Padin had their origins in Puerto Rico, the donor desires that this
fund should benefit deserving students from that island. The amount of
the scholarships, their number and the method of locating such deserv-
ing students is to be in the hands of the administration of the College.
It is the principal wish of the donor that Puerto Rico should profit by
the education of its students at Haverford College and that this fund
should be a perpetual memorial for Jose Padin, who during his lifetime
did so much for education in his native land.
Louis Jaquette Palmer Memorial Scholarship — This scholar-
ship is awarded on application, preferably to a member of the freshman
class who, in the opinion of a committee representing the donors and
the President of the College, shall give evidence of possessmg the
qualities of leadership and constructive interest in student and com-
munity welfare which his friends observed in Louis Jaquette Palmer of
the Class of 1894.
Reader's Digest Foundation Scholarship Fund — This fund was
established in July 1965 by a grant of $2500 from the Reader's Digest
Foundation, and substantially increased in 1966 and 1967. The income
only is to be used for scholarship purposes.
Scott Award — Established in 1955 by the Scott Paper Company
Foundation. A two-year scholarship award for the junior and senior
years, to be given to that student who is planning to embark upon a
business career and who is judged by both students and faculty as an
outstanding member of the sophomore class.
Geoffrey Silver Memorial Scholarship^ — One scholarship, avail-
able to a public school graduate in this general area who may enter
Haverford.
Daniel B. Smith Scholarship — One scholarship, awarded in the
discretion of the faculty, as an annual scholarship for some young man
needing financial aid in his college course. Preference is to be given to
a descendant of Benjamin R. Smith, if any such should apply.
Jonathan M. Steere Scholarship Fund — Established in Decern- ^
ber, 1948, by Jonathan M. Steere of the Class of 1890. The scholarship |
is intended primarily for a graduate of Moses Brown School, Provi-
dence, R. L, who shall be a member of the Society of Friends.
Summerfield Foundation Scholarship Fund — Established in
192
li
February, 1956. One scholarship, awarded at the discretion of the
faculty, on the basis of character, scholarship, and financial need.
William Graham Tyler Memorial Scholarship — Founded in
1949 in memory of William Graham Tyler of the Class of 1858. Prefer-
ence shall be given to students from Oskaloosa, Iowa, or from William
Penn College, on the basis of character, scholarship, and financial need.
A. Clement Wild Scholarship — Established May 14, 1951, by
Mrs. Gertrude T. Wild in memory of her husband, A. Clement Wild of
the Class of 1899. The income from this fund is to be awarded as a
scholarship by the College to a deserving student. Preference shall be
given to an English exchange student or someone in a similar category.
Isaiah V. Williamson Scholarship — Three scholarships, usually
awarded to members of the senior and junior classes.
Caspar Wistar Memorial Scholarship — One scholarship, avail-
able preferably for sons of parents engaged in Christian service (in-
cluding secretaries of Young Men's Christian Associations) or students
desiring to prepare for similar service in America or other countries.
GiFFORD K. Wright Scholarship Fund — Established in December,
1955, in memory of Gifford K. Wright of the Class of 1893.
Edward Yarnall Scholarship — One scholarship.
Robert Martin Zuckert Memorial Scholarships — Two or
more scholarships, preference to be given to a native of New York or
Connecticut who now resides in one of those states.
PRIZES AND AWARDS
Alumni Prize for Composition and Oratory — A prize of $50
was established by the Alumni Association in 1875 to be awarded
annually for excellence in composition and oratory. Competition is open
to freshmen and sophomores, but the same man may not receive the
prize twice. The competition for this prize is administered by the
Department of English.
John B. Garrett Prizes for Systematic Reading — A first prize
of $150 and a second prize of $75 will be given at the end of the
sophomore, junior, or senior year to the two students who, besides
creditably pursuing their regular course of study, shall have carried on
the most profitable program of reading in a comprehensive topic during
a full college year.
193
Candidates for these prizes must register with the chairman of the
department under whose supervision the work will be performed. The
department is responsible for guiding the work and, not later than
April 15, for reporting the achievement to the Committee on Student
Standing and Programs, for final judgment. Either or both of these
prizes may be omitted if, in the judgment of the committee, the work
does not justify an award.
Interested students should apply directly to a relevant department
for information.
Class of 1896 Prizes in Latin and Mathematics — Two prizes
of $10 each, in books, to be known as the Class of 1896 Prizes in Latin
and Mathematics, were established by the bequest of Paul D. L Maier
of the Class of 1896. They are awarded at the end of the sophomore
year to the students who have done the best work in the departments
concerned.
Lyman Beecher Hall Prize in Chemistry — An annual prize of
$100 was established by the Class of 1898 on the 25th anniversary of
its graduation, in honor of Lyman Beecher Hall, Professor of Chemistry
at Haverford College from 1880 to 1917.
This prize may be awarded to a student who has attained a high
degree of proficiency in chemistry and who shows promise of contribut-
ing substantially to the advancement of that science. It may be awarded
to a junior, to a senior, or to a graduate of Haverford College within
three years after graduation. It may be awarded more than once to the
same student, or it may be withheld.
Class of 1902 Prize in Latin — A prize of $10, in books, is offered
annually by the Class of 1902 to the freshman whose work in Latin, in
recitation and examinations combined, shall be the most satisfactory. At
the discretion of the professor in charge of the department, this prize
may be omitted in any year.
Department Prize in Mathematics — A first prize of $30 and a
second prize of $20 are awarded on the basis of a three-hour examina-
tion on selected topics in freshman mathematics. The examination is
held annually on the first Monday after the spring recess, and is open
to freshmen only.
Elliston p. Morris and Elizabeth P. Smith Peace Prizes —
These have been combined into a single competition offering three
194
awards of $400, $200 and $100 respectively. It is open to all under-
graduates and to graduate students.
The prizes are awarded for the best essays bearing on the general
topic of "Means of Achieving International Peace." Essays should be
deposited with the Recorder not later than May 1. The judges shall be
appointed by the President of the College. Prizes will not be awarded,
if, in the opinion of the judges, a sufficiently high standard of merit has
not been attained.
Prizes in Philosophy and Biblical Literature — A first prize of
$40 and a second prize of $25, in books, are offered annually to the
students who, in the judgment of the professor in charge, do the most
satisfactory outside reading in philosophy in connection with the courses
in that department.
A first prize of $40 and a second prize of $25, in books, are offered
annually to the students who, in the judgment of the professor in charge,
do the most satisfactory reading on the Bible and related subjects.
Scholarship Improvement Prizes — A first prize of $50 and a
second prize of $45 are awarded at the end of the senior year to the
two students who, in the opinion of the judges appointed by the Presi-
dent of the College, show the most steady and marked improvement in
scholarship during their college course.
Founders Club Prize — A prize of $25 is awarded annually by
the Founders Club to the freshman who is judged to have shown the
best attitude toward College activities and scholastic work.
S. P. LiPPiNCOTT Prize in History — A prize of $100 is offered
annually for competition in the Department of History under the
following general provisions:
First — Competition is open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who
have taken or are taking work in the Department of History.
Second — The prize shall not be awarded twice to the same student.
Third — The prize may be withheld in any year if, in the opinion of
the judges, a sufficiently high standard of merit has not been attained.
Fourth — An essay of not less than 5000 words, written in con-
nection with course or honors work in history, or independently of
course work, treating a subject selected with the approval of a member
of the History Department, shall be submitted as evidence of scholarly
195
ability in the collection and presentation of historical material. It shall
be typewritten and deposited with the Recorder not later than May 1.
Newton Prize in English Literature — A prize of $50 estab-
Hshed by A. Edward Newton may be awarded annually on the basis of
final honors in English, provided that the work of the leading candidate,
in the judgment of the English Department, merits this award.
William Ellis Scull Prize — A prize of $50, established in 1929
by William Ellis Scull, Class of 1883, is awarded annually to the upper-
classman who shall have shown the greatest achievement in voice and
in the articulation of the English language. This prize is administered
by the English Department.
George Peirce Prize in Chemistry or Mathematics — A prize
of $50 in memory of Dr. George Peirce, Class of 1903, is offered annu-
ally to a student of chemistry or mathematics who has shown marked
proficiency in either or both of these studies and who intends to follow
a profession which calls for such preparation. Preference is to be given
to a student who has elected organic chemistry, and failing such a
student, to one who has elected mathematics or some branch of chem-
istry other than organic. Should there be two students of equal promise,
the one who is proficient in Greek shall be given preference. The prize
is offered, however, exclusively for students who have expressed the
intention of engaging in research.
Edmund J. Lee Memorial Award — Classmates of Edmund Jen-
nings Lee, Class of 1942, who lost his life in the service of his country,
have established in his memory a fund, the income from which is to be
given annually to that recognized undergraduate organization which has
contributed most toward the furtherance of academic pursuits, extra-
curricular activities, spiritual growth, or college spirit in individuals or
in the College as a whole during the year. The award is to be used in
continuing to render such service.
William W. Baker Prize in Greek — A prize of $25, in books,
established in 1954 in memory of William W. Baker, professor of
Greek at Haverford College from 1904 to 1917, is given in the study
of Greek, and is administered by the Classics Department.
KuRZMAN Prize in Political Science — A prize of $125, estab-
lished in 1958 by Harold P. Kurzman, is awarded annually for the
senior who has performed best and most creatively in political science,
except when in the judgment of the department no student has done
work of sufficient merit to warrant such award.
196
Hamilton Watch Award — A Hamilton watch is awarded to that
senior, majoring in one of the natural sciences, mathematics, or engi-
neering, who has most successfully combined proficiency in his major
field of study with achievements, either academic or extracurricular or
both, in the social sciences or humanities.
John G. Wallace Class Night Award — A silver cup to be
awarded annually to the best actor in the Class Night performances.
Prizes for Excellence in the French Language — The French
Department may recommend to the Associate Dean the names of two
students in French 022 who, in its opinion, are worthy of the award
of a full scholarship to the Summer in Avignon Program of Bryn Mawr
College (covering all but transportation). These two scholarships will
be awarded upon approval of the Associate Dean and acceptance of
the applicant by Bryn Mawr College, as the First and Second Prize for
Excellence in the French Language.
The Varsity Cup — An award given to the member of the Senior
Class who excels in leadership, sportsmanship, and athletic ability.
Stephen H. Miller Memorial Award — His friends have estab-
lished in his memory an award which is to be given to that graduating
political science major who best exemplifies the ideal of political in-
volvement and social service expressed in the life and career of
Stephen H. Miller, 1962, who lost his life while serving his country
and his fellow man, taking part in village development in Vietnam.
197
^.
IIMDEX
IIMDEX
PAGE
Academic Buildings 35-37
Academic Council 27
Academic Flexibility 55
Accident Insurance 42, 180
Administration 20-22
Admission 40-41
Admission — Advanced Standing .. 41
Admission — Early Decision 41
Admission — Examinations 40
Admission — Requirements for ... 40
Admission — Transfer Students ... 41
Advanced Standing 41
African Studies 64
Alumni Association 200
Alumni Clubs 201-204
Alumni Representatives . . 41, 205-212
Anthropology 160-164
Application for Admission 40
Applied Science 95-97
Arboretum 32
Art Collection 39
Artists-in-Residence 183
Arts, Fine 105-107
Astronomy 37, 71-73
Athletic Facilities 177
Audited Courses 60
Autograph Collection,
Charles Roberts 35
Bachelor's Degree 49-54
Barclay Hall 38
Biology 37, 74-79
Board of Managers 6-9
Board Fees 42-43
Bookstore 39
Borton Wing 33
Brown, Mary Farnum, Fund 26
Brown, Thomas Wistar, Library . . 32
Bryn Mawr College,
Cooperation with ... 50-51, 59, 63
Buildings 35-39
Business Office 39
Calendar 4-5
Campus 31-39
Campus Map Inside rear cover
Center for Nonviolent
Resolution of Conflict 64-65
Chase Hall 35
Chemistry 36, 81-85
Classical Civilization 89
Classics 87-89
Collections, Library 32-35
College Calendar 4-5
College Entrance Board Tests . .40-41
College History 31
College Honors 54-55
College Purpose 30
College Responsibility 43
Comfort Hall 38
Committees — Board of Managers 8-9
Committees — Faculty 27
Community Concern 184
Community Relations Committee 184
Comprehensive Examination 53
Computing Center 37-38
Concentrated Program 56
Conflicting Courses 59
Cope Field 177
Correspondence Directory 218
Corporation — Officers of 6
Corporation — Standing
Nominating Committee 6
Counseling Services 181
Course Changes 60
Course Intensification 50
Course Load 50, 57
Course Numbering System 70
Courses of Instruction 67-177
Crawford Mezzanine 33
214
\
PAGE
Curriculum 45-67
Degree, Bachelor's 49
Developmental Reading 58
Diets, Special 43
Dining Center 39
Diplomat-in-Residence 136
Distribution Requirement 50-51
Dormitories 38-39
Drama Club 183
Drinker, Henry S., Music Center . . 36
Dropped Course 61
Early-Decision — Admission .... 41
Economics 90-93
Educational Involvement
Program 170-171
Electives, Free 51
Electives, Non-Academic 51
Endowed Fellowships for
Haverford Graduates 186
Endowed Scholarships 186-193
Endowment 43
Engineering and
Applied Science 95-97
English 99-104
Enrichment and
Independent Study 56
Evaluation of Academic
Performance 60-62
Examinations for Admission . . . 40-41
Expenses 42-43
Faculty, Members of 12-20
Faculty, Standing Committees of . . 27
Fees and Special Charges 40-43
Fellowships, Scholarships
and Prizes 186-197
Fellowships, T. Wistar Brown .... 66
Field House 177
Fifth Day Meeting 31
Final Honors 54-55
Financial Aid 43-44, 186-193
Fine Arts 105-107
Five- Year Program 58
Flexibility Program 55-58
Foreign Languages. . 45-46, 51, 63-64
Founders Club 67
Founders Hall 35-39
Free Electives 51
French 154-157
French Drama Collection 35
French House 39
Freshman Inquiry 48
Freshman Program 47-48
Freshman Seminars . . 47-48, 166-169
General Courses 109-110
German 110-113
Gest Center for Religion 65-66
Government, Student 181-183
Grades, Courses Taken Without ... 62
Grades, Policy on Release 61
Graduate Fellowships 66, 186
Greek 88
Guidelines for Liberal
Education 45-46
Gummere Hall 38
Gummere-Morley Room 33
Gymnasium 177
Hall, Lyman Beecher, Building ... 36
Handbook 183
Harris, J. Rendel, Collection 35
Harvey Peace Research Room ... 33
Haverford-Bryn Mawr News .... 183
Health Program 180
Hilles Laboratory 36, 39
Hires Room 33
History 115-118
History of College 31
Honor Pledge 182
215
PAGE
Honor Societies 66-67
Honor System 30, 181-183
Honors 54-55
Housing 38-39, 42-43
Humanities 109
Humanities, Social Sciences
and Natural Sciences 46
Independent Study 56
Independent Study Courses 54
Infirmary 39, 180
Intercollegiate Cooperation 63
Intercollegiate Sports 176
Interdepartmental Program 56
Jones Hall 38
Jones, Rufus M., Collection on
Mysticism 34
Jones, Rufus M., Study 33
Junior- Year Language Program 63-64
Laboratory Courses 60
Language Program, Junior- Year 63-64
Languages, Foreign 45-46, 51, 63-64
Late Papers 62
Latin 88-89
Lecture and Laboratory Courses . . 60
Lectures and Lectureships . .23-26, 64
Leeds Hall 38
Library 32-35
Library Collections 34-35
Library Staff 22
Lincoln Family Foundation Fund. . 26
Linguistics 109
Lloyd Hall 38
Loan Fund, Student 43-44
Location, College 31-32
Lockwood, Dean P., Collection ... 35
Lunt Hall 38-39
Lyman Beecher Hall Building .... 36
Magill, James P., Library 32
PAGE
Major Concentration 52-54
Managers, Board of 6-9
Mathematics 46, 1 19-121
Medical Staff 21-22
Meeting, Friends 31
Microforms Room 33
Modern Dance Club 183
Monthly Payment of College Bills . . 43
Morley, Christopher, Alcove 33
Morley, Christopher, Collection . . 35
Morris Cricket Library
and Collection 33
Music 39, 123-125, 183
Music Center,
Henry S. Drinker 36
Music Collection 39
Non-Academic Requirements
and Electives 51, 174, 176
Numbering System 70
Observatory 37
Organizations, Student 183-184
Painting 106-107
Phi Beta Kappa Society 66
Philips Collection 35
Philips Visitors (Fund) . . . 23-25, 64
Philips Wing 33
Philosophy 127-131
Photography 106
Physical Education 175-177
Physics 36, 132-135
Placement Service 44
Political Science 136-143
Post-Baccalaureate
Fellowship Program 66
Princeton University,
Language Study at 63-64
Prizes and Awards 193-197
Professions, Preparation for . . . 58-59
216
4
PAGE
Psychology 37, 144-149
Publications, Student 183
Quaker Collection 34
Radio Station WHRC 39
Record 183
Regulations, Academic 59-62
Religion 150-153
Residence Fee 42-43
Residence Halls 38-39
Resources 32-39
Rhoads Fund 26
Roberts Autograph Collection .... 35
Roberts Hall 39
Romance Languages 154-158
Room and Board 42-43
Russian 159-160
Scholarships,
Application for 43-44, 186
Scholarships, List of 186-193
Science Facilities 36-37
Sculpture 106-107
Serendipity Day Camp 184
Sharpless Gallery 33
Sharpless Hall 36-37
Shipley Lectures (Fund) 26
Snack Bar 39
Social Action Committee 184
Social Science General Courses . . 110
Society of Friends 30-31
Sociology and Anthropology 160-164
Spanish 157-158
Special Appointments 19-20
Special Diets 43
Special Programs 166-177
Sports, Intercollegiate 176
Staff, Administrative 20-22
Standing Committees of the
Board of Managers 8-9
PAGE
Standing Committees of the
Faculty 27
Stokes Hall 36
Strawbridge Memorial
Observatory 37
Strawbridge Seminar Room 33
Student Activities (Unit) Fee 42
Student Aid 43-44
Students' Association 181
Students' Council 181
Student Government 181-183
Student Organizations
and Publications 183-184
Student Services and Activities 179-184
Study Abroad 63
Swarthmore College,
Cooperation with 63
"Term Away" 57
Thesis Program 56
Tobias Collection 34
Transfer Students 41
Treasure Room, Library 33-34
Tuition 42-43
Union 39
Unit Fee 42
University of Pennsylvania,
Cooperation with 63
University of Pennsylvania,
Language Study at 64
Urban Studies 172-173
Varsity Sports 176
Visiting Committee 9
Visiting Faculty on
Special Funds 23-26
Visitors and Lectures 64
Walton Field 166
Williams House 39
Woolman Walk 32
Yarnall House 36
217
CORRESPONDENCE DIRECTORY
For information on: Write to:
Academic and Faculty Affairs Gerhard E. Spiegler
Provost and Dean of the Faculty
Academic Student Affairs David Potter
Associate Dean of the College
Admissions and Catalog Requests William W. Ambler
Director of Admissions
Alumni Affairs William E. Sheppard
Director of Alumni Affairs
Athletics Dana W. Swan, II
Director of Athletics
Business Affairs Charles W. Smith
Vice President for Business Affairs
Gifts and Bequests Stephen G. Gary
Vice President for Development
Medical Matters William W. Lander, M.D.
College Physician
Non-Academic Student Affairs James W. Lyons
Dean of Students
Public Relations and Press Relations William F. Balthaser
Director of Public Relations
Purchasing and Personnel Stephen P. Theophilos
Assistant Business Manager
Records and Transcripts Delores Davis
Recorder
Scholarships and Loans Wilham W. Ambler
Director of Admissions
Student Bills and Scholarship Accounting Marie Stefan
Accountant
218
NOTES
I\l
IMOTES
^-vS#Wl
.^>^^-
t. W 'J^?
I-
^
li
■-V-
xlH'v
^
k^r<:
■>•■,.•«.
»^-\^
1^^:
-■^ .•*>' > -_?rs?:^
NOTES
NOTES
Haverford College • Haverford. Pennsylvania 19041 • C215] 649-96
Haver ford College
TREASURER'S REPORT
1970-71
TREASURER'S REPORT 1970-1971 HAVERFORD COLLEGE
CONTENTS PAGE
Report of the Treasurer 4
Auditor's Report 9
Balance Sheet 10
Statement of Changes in Fund Balances and Unexpected Gifts, Grants and Income... 12
Statement of Operations 14
Notes to Financial Statements 15
Statement of Income 16
Statement of Expenditures 18
Report on Consolidated Funds 22
Report on Non-Consolidated Funds 28
Summary of Consolidated and Non-Consolidated Funds 29
Classification of Investments 30
Computation of Market Value of Units 31
Additions to Funds 32
William Maul Measey Trust Auditor ' s Report 4.33
William Maul Measey Trust Statement of Cash Transactions and Book Value 34
STATED MEETINGS OF THE CORPORATION AND THE MANAGERS
The annual meeting of The Corporation of Haverford College is held in Tenth Month at
such time and place as the Board of Managers may determine. The stated meetings of the
managers will be held on the fourth Sixth-day of First, Third, Fifth, Ninth and
Eleventh months.
REPORT OF THE TREASURER
PRESENTED AT THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE CORPORATION OF
HAVERFORD COLLEGE
October 29, 1971
TO THE CORPORATION AND THE BOARD OF MANAGERS:
This year, aside from a brief statement of our operations,
I propose a somev/hat different annual report dealing with the long
range view of our financial affairs and going back for several years.
I regret that I am not able to accompany my report with
the usual audit statement of Price Vaterhouse and Company. Since
they have not been able to complete their examination, due primarily
to the fact that Charles Smith our Vice President for Business
Affairs, as you know, was on a well deserved leave of absence
during the summer. I might add that I do not anticipate serious
difficulties!
OPERATING STATENENT
Again this year the college operations for the year
ending June 30th, showed a deficit of $579,469, of which $466,003
Mas attributed to interest on borrowed funds and the capital
payment to the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD)
leaving $113 f 466 attributable to operations at the college; of
this latter amount $50,000 resulted from the increase in the cost
of fuel and $43»000 by reason of additional student aid payable
from our general funds.
One item of interest in connection with our invested
funds is the increase in the unit value (market value) of our
Consolidated Funds to $29.51, from a year ago when it was $26.17.
There was also a modest, in fact very modest, increase in the unit
value of income of ^i to $1.35.
REVIEW OF FINANCIAL PICTURE
Twenty-five years ago we were for the most part satisfied
with our operations. Ve frankly considered ourselves, and were
considered by others, a wealthy institution; we had adequate
endowment for our enrollment, some four and a half million dollars,
and for the most part we operated with a small annual surplus,
or a minor deficit, which latter would be wiped out oy the next
year's operations. Even as late as 1958, we had no need for a
very active annual giving campaign, though we permitted Alumni
to contribute to Alumni Sustaining Fund, which in that year
amounted to $14,700, obviously a minor part of a total budget
of one and a quarter million dollars. Also, by that year, our
endowment, thanks largely to the bequests of Morris E. Leeds
and William Pyle Philips, amounted to $14,660,582.
As a result of a campaign in 1954 and 1955, we raised
the amount needed for the construction of Leeds Hall, the first
new dormitory for many years, and for the Field House.
The financial turning point of the college might almost
be pinpointed to the year ending in the summer of 1963. Continually
rising salaries and increased costs of operations had caught up
with us and even after using all of the $70,000 of accumulated
income, in a total budget of two million dollars, we had a deficit
of $30,000.
Also that year marked the end of a three year campaign
during which there had been raised almost enough for the completion
of Stokes Hall and a complete renovation of Sharpless Hall, made
necessary by the growing biology and psychology departments and
the removal of the physics department to Stokes.
That year marked two important decisions; first that we
must in the future look to annual giving as a substantial
and very necessary part of our income, and second, that we must
implement decision to expand, by the construction of more dormitories
In fact in November of 1963 the agreement with HUD was signed for
the financing by Federal Funds of Gummere Hall. I might add a
nostalgic note — at the rate of 3 5/8^.
The removal of the Chemistry Department to Stokes Hall
required a complete renovation of the Lyman Beecher Hall Chemistry
Building into faculty offices — also a fairly expensive procedure.
Again, by reason of the planned increase of the student
body, the college was faced with the need for further dormitories
after Gummere Hall. The students were consulted as they had been
in the case of the previous dormitories, and approved the plan
for the suite system which, as you know, we have long had at
Haverford. Lunt, Comfort and Jones Halls were in due course erected.
HUD funds had been curtailed by the government and were not available
for these dormitories and it was decided to raise the necessary funds
through capital gifts, but unfortunately a falling market severely
curtailed major gifts and the funds were not forthcoming. As a
matter of fact a considerable part of the cost of over two million
dollars had been pledged but the cash was not then in evidence.
The funds for the construction were provided by a loan from the
Provident National Bank, I am glad to say at the prime rate — and
without the need for collateral.
Meanwhile, a quiet, efficient and most successful drive
under the leadership of James P. Magill had raised over $2,000,000
for the complete renovation and enlargement of the library, greatly
enhancing its beauty and usefulness.
Another "must" due to the increasing student body, and
also due to the utter inadequacy of the old dining hall for more
than 450 students, was an entirely new dining facility. Due to
the interest and great generosity of T. Kite Stiarpless the funds
for this approximately $2,500,000 were made available by a gift
of stock of his company, Technitrol, Inc. Most unfortunately, due
to the fact that the shares were what is known as ownership stock,
we were unable to sell it on the market for at least two
years except by a public offering in accordance with SEC rules
with its various requirements. Also, unfortunately Technitrol
just at the time was involved in a serious strike bringing about
a deficit; the effect, of course, was that the stock ceased to
be considered a growth stock and rapidly declined to a price of
approximately $3, from which it has not so far recovered. Here
I should like to add, emphatically, that these events occurred
after Kite Sharpless' death and were in no way his fault, and
further, that for the short time he was a member of the Board
his interest and sound advice were much valued by the college.
Thus this large sum had to be assumed by the college
and we sold securities to raise it. We did this intentionally
as we, in effect borrowed from ourselves rather than to forever
mark off some of our unrestricted Funds. I was loath to eliminate
such Funds from our books, since for the most part, they represented
gifts of our most devoted and generous donors, and others, whose
generosity and vision were largely responsible for the progress
of the college and whose names and Funds, I think we ought to
perpetuate in our financial reports. We, of course, have to
pay ourselves interest on the amounts borrowed in order to
fairly reflect income from all of our Fvinds. It also seemed to
the Finance Committee that this was a more prudent method of
procedure than increasing our loan at the bank at a much higher
interest rate.
On the brighter side, I am happy to report that as a
result of strongly led annual giving campaigns, we have each year
raised larger amounts of money, and this past year total contrib-
utions amounted to $345,018, the largest amount yet raised and
almost $50,000 more than last year, also we had the largest number
of donors contributing. The Board has determined on a strenous
campaign for $5,000,000 over the next three years to be raised
from a relatively small group of Alumni and friends, coupled with
further efforts to increase ajmual giving especially this year
by a rather exciting challenge program to raise an additional
$100,000.
In line with the foregoing decision, the administration
is undertaking a hard look at our annual budget figures so that we
may have a truly balanced budget.
As an example of this realistic financial approach, we
are proceeding with the construction in the basement of the Dining
Hall of a student center only so far as we have contributions in hand.
The same is true for the Founders Annex renovation, financed through
the generosity of Miriam Thrall. The funds for the Barclay renovation,
about $624,000 are almost in hand.
THE COMMON FUND
One item of special interest this year was the decision
of the Finance Committee and of the Board to entrust part of our
funds to The Common Fund. This Fund was started at the instigation
of the Ford Foundation, for the management of monies turned over
to it by schools, colleges and universities. The limit is currently
set at $250,000,000. The Ford Foundation is to pay, during at
least three years, all costs of administration, custody and financial
advisors' fees. The Fund opened its accounts as of June 30th of
this year. We then placed $3,500,000 with the Fund. ($2,000,000
by the transfer of securities). It appiears to be a good investment
for at least three reasons: I believe the Ford Foundation wants
it to succeed, I think the mangement is good, under John Meek, the
very able Vice President of Dartmouth College, who is Chairman of
the Board, and the Investment Advisors selected are, I understand,
among the best in the country.
Finally I would like to express on behalf of the College
appreciation for the substantial increases in annual giving, to
which I have referred, during the past year and urge that we do
even better this year for we must get ourselves on a firm financial,
basis.
Respectfully submitted.
Price ^\!aterhouse & Co.
Independence Maj-l West
Philadeuphia 19106
October 22, 1971
To the Board of Managers
The Corporation of Haverford College
We have examined the balance sheet of the Corporation of
Haverford College as of June 30, 1971 and the related statements of
operations and changes in fund balances and unexpended gifts, grants
and income for the year then ended. Our examination was made in
accordance with generally accepted auditing standards and accordingly
included such tests of the accounting records and such other auditing
procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances, including
confirmation of marketable securities by correspondence with the
depositary. It was impracticable for us to extend our examination of
contributions received beyond accounting for amounts so recorded.
The College follows the practice of writing off property
and plant additions as their cost is funded. Accordingly, the cost
of College property, other than certain residences which are included
in endowment fund assets and unfunded construction costs, is not
reflected in the accompanying statements.
In our opinion, except that the cost of College property is
not fully reflected, as described in the preceding paragraph, the
accompanying financial statements present fairly the financial posi-
tion of the Corporation of Haverford College at June 30, 1971 and the
results of its operations and changes in fund balances and unexpended
gifts, grants and income for the year, in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles applied on a basis consistent with that
of the preceding year.
\j^;Clc«^VK^fc^<'^-'<^ '^^
^
¥
Assets
General fund
THE CORPORATIOM
Bal;
June 30,
1971
1970
Cash
$ 111,140 $ 651,496
Accounts receivable - Faculty and students 116,220 129,125
- Others 36,137 54,377
Bookstore inventory, at cost
28,794
24,281
Prepaid expenses and other assets
85,200
18,437
Deferred charges
Loan funds - Note 2
Cash
Accrued interest receivable
Loans to students
Endowment fund
Marketable securities, at cost (market
value $13,856,048 in 1971, $15,128,214
in 1970)
The Common Fund, at cost
Mortgages
College real estate - at cost less amor-
tization of $257,624 in 1971 and
$236,712 in 1970
Other investments
Advances to other funds - Note 3
General fund
Loan fund
Plant fund
Plant fund
44,138
39,744
Unfunded costs of completed construction
Construction in progress (additional
commitments approximate $340,000)
Joint Computer Center
?
421,629
$
917,460
$
2,372
15,437
425,121
$
38
12,939
354,440
$
442,930
$
367,417
$13,487,928 $17,167,000
3,528,091
367,792 375,525
1,136,504
71,536
1,139,528
60,146
18,591,851 18,742,199
1,278,522 1,149,268
298,150 224,195
4,850,512 3,992,728
.6,427,184 5,366,191
$25,019,035 $24,108,390
$ 7,782,206 $ 7,456,986
11,699
191,607
142,379
188,363
$ 7,985,512 $ 7,787,728
$33,869,106 $33,180,995
10:
ERFORD COLLEGE
Liabilities and Fund Balances
General fund
Liabilities
Accounts payable
Accrued expenses
Advance receipts
Advance from endovment fund
Note 3
Unexpended gifts, grants and income - Note 1
Donations for special purposes
Special purpose endowment income
Post-baccalaureate program
Faculty and sponsored research
General fund balance
Restricted
Income reserve (deficit)
Loan funds
Advance from endowment fund - Note 3
Loan fund balances - Note 2
Endowment fund
June 30,
1971
1970
99,406 $ 200,641
189,240 185,841
47,541 29,628
1,278,522 1,149,268
1,614,709 1.565,378
612,996
51,215
41,560
(268,808)
325,647
80,888
25,263
(46,775)
436,963
385,023
59,791 77,423
(1,689,834) (1,110,364)
(1,630,043) (1,032.941)
$ 421,629 $ 917,460
$ 298,150 $ 224,195
144,780 143,222
$ 442,930 $ 367,417
Endowment fund principal (including
realized gains on non-consolidated
investments)
$16,990,079 $17,097,207
Undistributed gains on consolidated investments
8,005,756 6,987,983
24,995,835 24,085,190
Funds functioning as endowment
Plant fund
23,200
23,200
Demand notes payable to banks at prime and
l/27o above prime rate
3-5/8°/, Housing and Home Finance Agency
dormitory mortgage bonds, due through 2013
Advance from endowment fund - Note 3
$25,019,035 $24,108,390
$ 2,325,000 $ 2,975,000
810,000 820,000
4.850.512 3,992.728
$ 7,985,512 $ 7,787,728
$33,869,106 $33,180,995
11
THE CORPORATION OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE
Statement of Changes in Fund Balances and Unexpended
Gifts, Grants and Income
Year Ended June 30, 1971
Restricted
fund
balance
Income
reserve
(deficit)
Donations
for special
purposes
Balance - July 1, 1970
Net decrease from
operations
Restricted gifts, grants
and income - development
program
- other
Realized gains (net)
Donations and transfers
to principal
Interfund transfers
Restricted gifts, grants
and endowment income
expended in current year
Net interest income
(expense) for the year
Life interest payments
Special purpose funds
liquidated or transferred
Miscellaneous transfers
Applied to unfunded
construction
Computer center capital
costs
Transfer of computer
center cost to plant fund
Balance - June 30, 1971
$ 77,423
(20,209)
2,577
$(1,110,364)
(579,470)
$325,647
152,416
905,971
(5,009)
(457,005)
12,712
(321,736)
$ 59,791 $(1,689,834) $612,996
12
General Fund
Special purpose
endowment
income
$ 80,888
Post-Bacca-
laureate
program
(Note 1)
$ 25,263
Faculty and Loan Endowment
sponsored fund fund
research balance principal
$ (46,775) $143,222 $24,085,190
419,849
(13,399)
243,395
317,553
905,682
72,276
5,009
(413,898)
(227,098)
(539,586)
(64,861)
(3,451)
42,804
(168)
(67,313)
3,244
(3.244)
$ 51,215
$ 41,560
$(268,808) $144,780 $24,995,835
13
THE CORPORATION OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE
Statement of Operations
Year ended
June 30,
1971
1970
General
Restricted
sources
sources
Total
Total
(Note 1)
Income
Student fees
$1,729,805
$1,729,805
$1,491,276
Endowments and trusts
838,372
$ 413,898
1,252,270
1,278,207
Gifts and grants
240,605
991,624
1,232,229
1,165,427
Auxiliary enterprises
1,060,658
1,060,658
909,617
Rental of facilities
and other
153,625
25,176
178,801
183,655
Post- baccalaureate
program - Note 1
196,726
4,023,065
1,430,698
5,453,763
5,224,908
Expenses
Educational and general
Administration
306,388
72,166
378,554
377,357
Student services
244,880
9,120
254,000
242,743
Staff benefits
309,215
27,288
336,503
318,642
General institutional
160,397
79,629
240,026
288,292
Instruction
1,154,920
161,845
1,316,765
1,187,996
Libraries
175,840
127,978
303,818
273,814
Maintenance and
operations
608,817
3,859
612,676
572,558
Sponsored research
5,000
563,423
568,423
550,742
Computer center
30,817
4,967
35,784
73,532
2,996,274
1,050,275
4,046,549
3,885,676
Auxiliary enterprises
1,034,740
3,017
1,037,757
852,295
Student aid
105,518
377,406
482,924
433,154
Post- baccalaureate
program - Note 1
196,726
4,136,532
1,430,698
5,567,230
5,367,851
Net deficit resulting
from college operations
(113,467)
(113,467)
(142,943)
Interest expense -
general and plant
funds - Note 3
(456,003)
(456,003)
(425,311)
Amortization of mortgage
principal
(10,000)
(10,000)
(10,000)
Net decrease in general
fund balance - Note 1
$ (579,470)
$ (579,470)
$ (578.254)
14
THE CORPORATION OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE
Notes to Financial Statements
Note 1 - Unexpended gifts, grants and income
The College follows the practice of reflecting restricted
gifts, grants and endowment income in the statement of operations
only to the extent of expenditures from such funds during the year.
The unexpended balances are increased or decreased by the differences
between restricted amounts received and those actually expended in
each year. This method of reporting is generally acceptable for
colleges .
In 1971, the College ceased to administer the Post-
Baccalaureate program and, accordingly, the funds expended during the
year ended June 30, 1971 are not included in the statement of operations,
Note 2 - Loan funds
Loan funds comprise the Class of 1934 Revolving Loan Fund,
established in 1959 by gifts from the Class of 1934 (100% participation)
in the amount of $10,784, and the Haverford College Loan Fund
established in 1926. At June 30, 1971 pertinent information
as to each fund is as follows:
Student loans outstanding
Advance from endowment fund
Fund balance
The student loans outstanding bear interest at varying rates
and are payable ten years after the student completes his formal
education. Of the total loans outstanding at June 30, 1971 , balances
aggregating $45,811 are currently payable.
Note 3 - Interest expense
Interest is charged on interfund advances from the
endowment to the general and plant funds at 4-l/27o which approximates
the average rate of return on endowment fund investments. The
advance to the loan fund bears interest at the rate of 4%.
The College follows the practice of capitalizing interest
relating to income -producing properties while such properties are
under construction or renovation. Accordingly, interest charges of
$10,000 and $65,000 have been capitalized in 1971 and 1970 respectively.
15
Class of
1934
1926
fund
$316,154
Total
$108,967
$425,121
68,376
229,774
298,150
42,865
101,915
144,780
THE CORPORATION OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE
Detailed Report of the College
Statement of Income
30 June 1971
Unrestricted
Restricted
1. Educational and General
$1,232,747.15
132,834.79
72,625.56
148.095.00
$1,586,302.50
124,382.50
19.119.64
$1,729,804.64
A. Student Fees
Tuition
Cash
Scholarship and
General Funds
Wm. Maul Measey Trust
Donations
Unit Fee
Other Fees
Total Student Fees
B. Endowment Income
From Unrestricted Funds
From Restricted Funds
Library
Special
Stock. Dividends
Total Endowment Income
C. Gifts and Grants
Alumni
Business Corporations
Foundations
Other
Donations
Sponsored Research
Total Gifts and Grants
D. Organized Activity
Computer Center
E. Other Sources
Rental of Facilities
and Miscellaneous
Total Educational and General $2,962,407.01
$ 833,463.64
4.908.01
$ 838,371.65
$ 214,473.21
26,132.43
$ 240,605.64
$ 4.742.47
$ 148.882.61
$ 35,252.57
162,378.72
$ 197,631.29
$ 19,525.00
113,761.42
297,939.20
540, 045. 4>
$ 971,271.07
Total
$1,232,747.15
132,834.79
72,625.56
148.095.00
$1,586,302.50
124,382.50
19.119.64
$1,729,804.64
$ 833,463.64
35,252.57
162,378.72
4.908.01
$1,036,002.94
$ 214,473.21
45,657.43
113.761.42
297,939.20
540.045.45
$1,211,876.71
>6, 967.00 $ 9.709,47
20,209.44 $ 169,092.05
$1,194,078.80
$4,156,485.81
16
Statement of Income (Continued)
30 June 1971
11. Auxiliary Enterprises
Athletics
Dormitories and Dining
Room
Faculty Housing
Bookstore
Infirmary
Coop
Total Auxiliary Enterprises
Ul. Student Aid
Scholarships and Fellow-
ships
Prizes
Employment - Work Study
Total Student Aid
TOTAL INCOME
Unrestricted
$ 252.50
808.814.76
95,877.90
153,006.45
1,606.79
1.100.00
Restricted
$1,060,658.40
$4,023,065.41
$ 213,493.77
2,773.00
20,352.68
$ 236,619.45
$1,430,698.25
Total
252.50
808,814.76
95,877.90
153,006.45
1,606.79
1.100.00
$1,060,658.40
$ 213,493.77
2,773.00
20,352.68
$ 236,619.45
$5,453,763.66
17
Statement of Expenditures
30 June 1971
Educational and General
Administration
A-1. Aditdnistratlon
President's Office
Provost's Office
Ad Hoc Committee
A-2. Financial
Treasurer's Office
Development Office
Business Office
Total Administration
B. General Expenses
B-1. Student Services
Admissions
Registrar
Dean of College
Dean of Students
Buildings and Grounds
Guidance Counsellor
Student Activities
Total Student Services
B-2. Staff Benefits
Faculty
TIAA
Social Security
Medical Plan
Disability Insurance
Tuition Grants
Moving Expenses
House Allowances
Mon-Faculty
TIAA
Social Security
Medical Plan
Tuition Grants
Unrestricted
70,152.86
40,210.22
2,235.14
30,657.21
45,919.91
117.212.56
$ 306,387.90
69,941.16
16,719.84
22,838.70
30,477.65
23,254.62
25,541.37
56.106.52
$ 244,879.86
123,229.38
36,274.43
14,269.66
3,791.28
14,082.26
3,276.19
6,000.00
48,218.60
34,938.23
6,559.69
4,053.34
Restricted
$ 10,142.28
62,023.71
$ 72,165.98
420.10
7,500.00
1.200.00
9,120.10
5,058.00
1,888.32
132.00
Total
80,295.14
40,210.22
2,235.14
30,657.21
107.943.62
117.212.56
$ 378,553.89
70,361.26
16,719.84
22,838.70
30,477.65
30.754.62
25,541.37
57.306.52
$ 253,999.96
128.287.38
38,162.75
14,401.66
3.791.28
14.082.26
3,276.19
6,000.00
48.218.60
34,938.23
6.559.69
4,053.34
18
Stateneot of Expenditures (Continued)
Unrestricted
Pensions
Disability Insurance
House Allowances
Total Staff Benefits
30 June 1971
$ 12,187.A0
1,135.19
1,200.00
$309,215.65
General Institutional
Expenses
Alumni Association
Alunnl Office
Public Relations Office
Coinmencement and Parents
Day
Printing
Subscriptions and
Memberships
Mail and Switchboard
Service
Insurance (General)
Speakers
Entertainment
Addressograph Room
Visiting Committee
Other Expenses
Total General Institu-
tional Expwises
Total General Expenses
Instruction
Salaries
Supplies and Services
Faculty Secretaries
Telephone and
Telegraph
New Programs
F»xd Program in the
Humanities
Total Instruction
7,940.90
26,827.13
35,481.73
9,132.88
25,178.09
9,654.90
15,582.67
17,974.31
533.77
2,636.77
5,827.77
^1,016,445.10
68,082.13
41,401.01
10,582.81
4,402.00
14,006.41
Restricted
$ 20,209.44
$ 27,287.'76
$ 7,662.02
2,000.00
39,851.99
$ 103,745.02
44,069.23
24.80
14,006.40
Total
$ 32,396.84
1,135.19
1,200.00
$ 336,503.41
7,940.90
26,827.13
35,481.73
9,132.88
32,840.11
9,654.90
17,582.67
17,974.31
40,385.76-
2,636.77
5,827.77
33.32
3,592.18
4,454.42
25,661.08
4,487.74
29,253.26
$160,396.42
$ 79,629.51
$
240,025.93
$714,491.93
$ 116,037.37
$
830,529.30
$1,120,190.12
112,151.36
41,401.01
10,607.61
4,402.00
28,012.81
$1,154,919.46
$ 161,845.45
$1,316,764.91
19
Statement of Expenditures (Continued)
30 June 1971
F.
Organized Activities
Computer Center
Sponsored Research
General
African Studies
Biology
Chealatry
Economics
Astronooy
Psychology
Physics
Political Science
Sociology
Faculty Research
Total Sponsored
Research
Libraries
Unrestricted
1 ^n,flif^.<sn
Restricted
Total
$ 4.967.00 $ 35>7P3.60
18,557.70
1,437.41
206,996.54
8,717.59
6,729.24
50,303.64
14,455.28
23,162.02
24,874.37
184,352.62
18,557.70
1,437.41
206,996.54
8,717.59
6,729.24
50,303.64
14,455.28
23,162.02
24,874.37
184,352.62
$
5,000.00
23,836.20
28.836.20
$
5,000.00
$
563,422.61
$
568,422.61
Salaries
$
147,784.03
$
11,583.
.06
$
159,367.09
Operating Expenses
14,055.96
14,055.96
Book Blading and
Periodicals
Total Libraries
Maintenance and Operati
14,000.00
116,395.
,46
130,395.46
$
175,839.99
$
127,978.
,52
$
303,818.51
6.
on
C-1.
Plant
Supervision
$
52,932.75
$
52,932.75
Janitorial Services
100,631.79
100,631.79
Repairs to Buildings
116,448.13
116,448.13
Equipaent
2,898.52
2,898.52
Water, Heat, Light
Power
117,003.68
117,003.68
Grounds
78,395.86
$
3,858
.30
82,254.16
WatchMn
Total Plant
General
77.510.39
77.510.39
$
545,821.12
$
3,858,
.30
$
549,679.42
G-2.
Property Insurance
$
20,268.12
$
20,268.12
Auto Service
15,092.96
15,092.96
Social Security
18,657.40
18,657.40
20
Statement of Expenditures (Continued)
Unrestricted
30 June 1971
$ 5,106.50
3,871.74
$ 62,996.72
Medical Plan
TIAA
Total General
Total Maintenance and
Operations $ 608,817.84
Total Educational and General
Administration
11. Auxiliary Enterprises
Athletics
Dormitories
Dining Room
Faculty Housing
Infirmary
B9okstore
Coop
Serendipity Day Camp
Total Auxiliary Enterprises
127,454.82
198,457.10
429,753.62
98,661.29
41,820.48
132,337.52
255.12
6,000.00
$1,034,739.95
Restricted
3,016.98
3,016.98
Total
$ 5,106.50
3.871.74
$ 62,996.72
3,858.30 $ 612,676.14
$2,996,273.72 $1,050,275.24 $4,046,548.96
$ 130,471.80
198,457.10
429,753.62
98,661.29
41,820.48
132,337.52
255.12
6,000.00
$1,037,756.93
111.
Student Aid
Scholarships
Fellowships
Employment
Prizes
Total Student Aid
62,335.84
6,000.00
35,657.56
1,525.00
$ 105,518.40
$ 353,555.35
2,000.00
20,352.68
1,498.00
$ 377,406.03
$ 415,891.19
8,000.00
56,010.24
3,023.00
$ 482,924.43
TOTAL EXPENDITURES
$4,136,532.07
$1,A30,698.25
$5,567,230.32
21
0) i-H
(J C-.
OS o
m -^
OQ vO
U4
o
u
z
c
X
0)
E
4-» O
0) (J
z c
.-i.-tCT>t--rMotn^-^-ooor>itH>oio<M«-tr--t-i(Oooio>ototor^r~»ooo<oO'00o
ooo»oaoLn\o>or^NOfOOt-(»-ioooi-iot^vof>4CT>o«s-to'a-'»-^'r~^^-ooooi/>«oo»
OiO^r- 1— lvO^00O>-t^CT»i-(tO<MOt^i1t-l\O''>Oi-tOi0t-ta0PJ OlOlOi-IOIOt^
rMi-(tnK)r-~.-it^'*<MOcM^<vii-^K>Tro»«-iOiHiOO>c.i«-ti/>roONOtOi-~roor-tOi«
K) 1-1 lO i-H
^^o^r^-lLn^•^0(^^-l^o
OOr-4CT>I~--cvJOirt^^OOOCNlr-l>OiO(vi>-ir--«-ltOOOtO\OrOKlt~~t~~000>00>00<0
o»jNiaoo^<Njtor^<vi<7»^ooooto<vi\ooo^ooaoc7»<Na^^>oo>-to»Ht-~mCT>K>>o^r^
CT>o»oooLnvoot-^vo»oo»-i»-tooot-ior^>ocvia>o^riO'*^^t~-^^ooooi/>ooo»
oio^r^i-ivo^oooi-iTj'CT»i-i»op>ior^ini-i>otno»-ioio»-ioorjoi/>i/it-i<MOr--
tO<-itOi— I 1— iror^i— iLOi— t^-
>H LO (SI
C>1 tH (VI r-H tH
w
u
PJ
i->
^
(U
J
>-.
o
3
u
!/)
rt
Q
(U
Qi
)-l
O
E-
Uh
IX
0)
PJ
j=;
>
'f-i
^
tw
o
Ut
o
•»->
^1
z
o
o
ex
>— (
a>
H
OS
^
t3
o
OJ
ex,
I-H
Qi
•H
O
ns
u
■i-J
0)
UJ
Q
X
t-
o o
c/)
UJ
CO
o
a,
a:
3
ex
-J
^
-a
UJ
c
z
3-13 T3
UJ
u- c a
o
3 3
♦-> u- u.
ce:
c -o
o
(U^ C --1
u.
e ^ 3 ^
5 CO U- 3
C/3
O *-> U
Q
-O -H .— 1 to
Z
c x: -H
:3
UJ a 3 •
LU
U -J
^ • to
CO 2 -O
>- Ta ii
(U C -H CO
c x: > a
O O CO -T3
o >-) a UJ
-J S u.
c
6 C
S 3
O uu
C C
UJ S
o
(/) (h
c
O E
-^ 3
C
XI
i o c
CO O
c
3
4-> T3
0) 3 C
6 U, 3
S U,
o g
•n CO e
c x: 3
UJ 00 c
c t-
0) -H CO
o .-H
u -H .
c -x:
•iH OJ 4-)
4-> 0)
c X X
0) ex CO
e o N
--( o
U '-D UJ
73
c
3
Uh
-n r-l
C CO
-0 3 0
c: u- -H
3 e
u, X o
(U c
0) rH o
0) T-t fl
tjo e <->
CO CO w
z <
• i-J c
Qi CO
<-> E
irt f-iX
(U 0) u
e X c
t3
t3 C
a 3
3 tJUTJ
Uh C
<-* 3
rH ~ lU
<-* e
3 t3 0) >-H
O C S CO
CO 3 ■•-*
U< T> »H
o o
-J •-• o 6
CO bO V
••H ^.S
O ■•-> flj
x: 6 4-» JH
4-> 0) CO 0)
•H s o 6
ti CO e
UJ <-> 3
4-1 4) CJ>
US' 0) (/)
^1 CO •
• tH X CQ
Q CO U
)-■ X» -i-t
<U C "-I «J
+J -H O C
rH X C
rHCOi-H.HCOi-HKHfH
^<XS<<U,i-i
CJT3
3 C
Oh 3
Uh
rH
CO-O
•H ^
^ CO
o o
s c
O
tn -H
0) CO
rH O
a.3
CO UJ
X!
CO rH
CO
o u
CO V
CO C
</) a>
n3
3
Uh
3 3
Uh Uh
4) <-*
00 CO
•O -H
■r( K.
I- O
♦J 6
i-H a>
73
C
3
Uh
0)
o d
•H O
•M 4->
CO 0
p; ^ _
3 PQT3 O S
O CX
Uh rH 3 CO +->
t-H Uh tH
CO • o.
C tH C 1-5 4h
« tH o 6
ex CO -H X o
CJ +J 4-> U
e CO 4)
CO ^H ^H X "O
•H O O CO tH
rH -M CX N CO
rH rH tH -H J
•H CO O rH O
:s s u UJ X
tH
9)
fl tH
3 CO
Uh *
X! c: tH
*J 3 CO
0) Uh 4->
(A
4-> >»-H
Irt rH ^
OO-H
C CO •
o PQ a
.-J
•X
^1
0)
00
o
oc:
4->
(A u?
0) "O
3 • CT3
(TK- 3 C
flj "D Uh 3
A Uh
Mh Ui
(/) -H CO M
0) a> '«-> "O
rH V4 W «>
rH tS-H ©
•H * J
X •
rH tH -O l/>
rH Cd ^ -H
< C Ca »H
O » >H
• 4) t3 O
UJ < UJ E-H 1-1 u) Z
^ 4>
■t-» X
C tH CO
4> 4> M
rH X -H
T3
3TJ
Uh G
3
T> Uh
O 13
o <2 c
OOg 3
tH cd u.
« -H
<-• rH >,
4-> rH ^1
eO-H u,
to
•CJi
XCO
>< ♦J
C tH K,
«> « 4)
x^x
tH rH:
. eO.H
•-5 ex CJ
CO t---
-H ^ r-0
OCJ>CT>Ln'3-'<3-Tj-'Or--tNJ'^\OOOOrHOCT>i-(l'OIOtOCT)'*OrHCJ»OOrHOOOOvOrsJ
■^OLnro<Njcrihor^or^(N»criO'*KiOLnLO'*oo»a-r-^CTiororHOOtooooor>io
LOO\0'S-TtrHLn(TltOTa-OLf)OLOOrHrHait»VOr~-lOtX30I~~000^00(N10lOrH
rHTj-OvOTj-QOI^O^(7iC7lvOr^OrHvOt-~<»\0(SIt---\OCVl(S10(sa{S)LOLOOOOCT»OCTlOO
rootx)Ki'-ir^roooTi-t^>-iOLOLOir>r--roLnr--oorHo^OLntnrHO^r~oiot-~OCT>Ln
OOO'S-'— (LnOrHl/>^HrsJ0%LnrH0»«3-v0'*L000\0<VlT^rHOL0r-Ln'*Ot^(V)CT»(M»0v0
^rHTj-,— I rHOt-— (Nl'^ Tj- t^t--tSlrslCSlrHtslOrH'S-rH \0 00 r-4rHO
rH torsi rHrHrslrHrH (Vl»*r-I
C CT>
X CNI
'*rH'^OOOOrHr-((V)rH^>0>0>0(M(VlCTll/»OfOCvl«a-rOrOOOO»vOin»OC>lt^l/>OOl-tl/>00
CTlT»-rHrH(N|\000^0»TrrHrHl/5CT»(M^l/lCT>t-~tO(S10r^t^Ot^OOI~~l/1>0<0»'>lOfvJ
r^OOOOl/>OOlO<SIOOrH<3»tOrHT*(S|{NJ^rHrHO>rH'^rO ^00Lr>"*rOLO(M»/>0000^
0> r4rH rOO 't' tn tOr^KjrHrHOOrHOlrHCVJ \0 C^l 1^ 00
22
ao>o (sitOrHOOr~-i-iOkO(>i>/)>ONOaoeook r-^i/)r--o<Oor~-aoioaoao\o
tH oo >o fo <m »o
o «-! ■* jH
ro»-i>o\otoo>r>*>omoooiotoa»o»Ht^oo ^voaoio^^aotnmm>oo
i/»o>o«-tmt-~o>^i/iioo»«HOfOoor--Tj-r<i .Ht-ir~^t-^\ot^oo\o^t^o
ooo>otoi/><N»t-tm.H\0>ot^<vi<vi'*-^rcMNO loto^ioi/ioioooooror^m
00\O <MrOrHOtMt---T-ll/10rs|tO»0000000» l->-tnfMO>OOt~~OOrOOOOOPJ
p4.-ii/>io.Hroin^ioiOfOr-ioo<oiooiooo Tti-t»o»oio^-.-iCT>roop>icM
3 tf)
0) o
o
m ♦J
rH O
•H ^
c »-•
at A
OS
c
•H
u
(0
4)
M-l
o
t> >
<:
u
XOT3
«J 3
rHT3 Uh
CO tu
CO <-i
in i-H
C 0) 4>
t30C PQ
•H O
OJ '-3 •
fX OQ
C4Z e
U 09
0> 3 r-1
tT VH r-t
0» 3 -H
C
3
0)
p.
TJ CO
C JS
3 W
^i 3 o.a
CO tu O 3
4J U U.
•H 3 CO r-
S CO -H to
U T3 0>
W U >ST-4
C02 J
e iw
o in u? o
>-• CO (A
• CO GO CO
flX (A I-H
Q CJ t-H o
0)
g
•iH
•O CO
T) 4-> 4) ti
tS C 3 3
3 4) 00 [JU
U. g CO
4-> (A >-•
4) i-( 4) «/)
6 O.'-i f->
> g 4> 4>
O O B TJ >
C U uO- 3 C
«» ■«j;
■X) d C 4) X
c o o c 4>j::
3 -H -H -H > +J "O
tu -•-> '•-> CO (-1 LO d
CO CO X CO r>i 3
O C tS X M
O 3 3 4) O.IO 4)
CJ O O > O C> g
PU Ph »h X ^ 3
4> CO 10 X
o Ti TJ X -H m
CO ^ ^ pq o •
u o o in M
o u. b CO X in
X g i-H w c
4> 4) O -H CO ji:
• J3X J3 gr-l O
•-5HH t- WUiD
11
4)
MM
•H -H
Kif-I
* O
CO U
ii
<-> •
WX
• g
X CO
4>»
4> 4)
(A
c
3 C
Z 3
lA
4> (A
O rH
§^
u u
(JU-H
z
>»
eOt-t
TJ "O "O
c c a
3 3 3
HL, U< U<
>xXX
^ h ^l
CO CO cO
I (A (A M
I »4 ^1 »-■
I 4> 4> 4>
. > > >
•H -H .H
) (3 C C
I (3 C ti
> c
:j::xx 3
i 4J 4J 4-1 bU
o LO Ln
I LO (M CM (A
I I I I CO
) I-H LO r-- g
I iH ro to O
I at o> ot X
I i-H i-H tH H
)
MH 14H MH •
i O O O U
I
I (A (A (A C
I (A (A (A 4)
I CO CO 01 f-H
* OU U <
CO
3
CO (JU
C
-^^
$< il
[L, JS'O 4>^
♦J C2
4>0 3 C
lA lO tU 4> O
3 1 C «A
CO 00 to -H CO
O t-H^ i-H iH
W (3 US'
MhM-i O
«A O Oi-H •
4) X U
i-H (A (A CO
il (A (A Z iH
CO CO CO ^1
J- .-Hi-H •CO
UUUUM
ooa>ocMioooo>ooTj-oooor-.otnovooi-Ht--.r-4i/it-~i/><Moo
OOtviOOi-Hr4^O<»O0>T-lom»-HO,-IOt0O00O00^0»t^iHOO
OOO^0000r^OOt^O«-H>0OCV100OOO<MO^l0O00r~<M00OO
oooocvit^vooooooooo<vioiocMOfHO^ooor~i-H^^oi^oo
uOO<MOO.HOi-HOm«-HOOO^OO>OOOrHOIOOO<Mr~t-HiH>00»00
(vio<Nio»voiot^in^«otoin<Mooomoioi/»ooi/>>ot^oom.Hr>»moi/»
•-ttHOiOfMto to^r--i-Hi-H tOr-tooiNjr~pg <Mc>^<>* ^ in
CVl ^ i-H to 1-H PJ
iotoo^oooTHaio«i/)OtOkr~Oko^ot>oao^o^aoooiHio
t-H\o«i*-a>oooioior>»oaoc>400rHtoto^oo<oi^<Mr^io<o»Oin^too
rM 00 r-. o lO r-. \0
iiM*c>»i>»vo^^i/>^oooov<M(MOoor^c><»i/»to
to r^ CM rH fs|
.-H 00 rH
23
00 ^ r- K) to fs) vO
O O O O O r-H O
r-- o to vo rsi oo vo
rH i-H r^ ,— I T-H to
I— lOOOOvOvOrslTi-pyltOCTlOiCM
tOO'^OOOOOLOCTJvOCslvO'S'O
t-~.TttO^CTi(SIC7>i-ICTlO
[ — i-ntotor~)C7^ \otocsi
vO 00
(NI VO
OOOOOOOr-JOOOOOOOOOOOOO
ooooooor--ooooooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOLOOOOOOOOOO
OLOOLOooo'^oootoooLnooLoooo
t--\ovot-~oooovoot-~cj>tnori-^(viocvjLor-jr-~
r-\ .-ItSl tH 1-1 to i-Hi-lOlOrj
CM Ift
vO 00
Ln\oo>tooofM<Ni.-ioo»-t\ot^ooooo»-(ooTrocj4
i/iTtoooo'*'*pvit~~r^Loo>oooototOLOoorHo>OP-i
tovot-^tvio^OLr)or>jvooO'«*TrvOvOLni~^i-(Tj-»-(r~
o>»ooto\o\or^Ti-<vi»-iLn\OTt-oooootOr-i«a-r^
\0\Ovor^t~-a»o\oot^r^LOO»Tr^(viocNito«-(o
i-i fMi-ii-icvj t-ii-iOLn«N>
to CNi oo o to rvi «*•
Ln T*- .-I (NI vo t-~ «*
vO'S-LnoiCTir~-r-itoooovOoor~-
to \o LTi to r-j r-~ 1— t
fvi vo to ^a- rf vO
LOtOt-- 00 tOLDtOtOOOvOrvl
C
3
U.
<-• c
C 3
0) U.
E
2 E
O CO
T3 JZ
C ^
Ul C
■'* c
c o
z
o
l—>
z
3
a
Qfi
o
u.
Q£
T3
(U
C
>
3
<
UU
X
C
a:
o
O
•rH
u.
c
3
to
Q
-o
Z
>-i
3
o
U.
«w
>M
0)
>
eg
X
CO
o.
>— t
t>
X
C
CO
3
OC
o.
<
>J
c
o
•OT3 O
X
c c <n
u
3 3 e
CO
UU UU (0
•H
oc
4) i-H .-(
p
a.<-i --H
u.
O «.H
U C X
CO
t-
a
• cd •
z
a. >- >
3
u.
in-ojz
CO ^ CO
e oj.^
o » ea
a: TJ w
^ OJ -H
(3 -0^3
-C3 3^3 C CT3
C U, C 3 3 C
3 3 tJU U- 3
tu a.U< U>
T3 -r-l o. D,
3 C-Ona-H whjSjSjS
u-,3c:cjsi-'Xw«o
Li,33tnc«t«Kit-icO
•HO. COOrtt-Ht-ti-H
J2 -H o. &.•-< JS t-l o o -
wjs-H-r-i o o ox:x e
ti tnjsxj^cox: o o fl)
cd>-itf)u)U ococos
i-t cd t-i J CO t-t CO
OrHrtO Ca lHr-t*J
jsoi— ••-4c-'-<a>fl)- t-<
CJjSOr-tOJ-lIflEeflJ
cocja24)<no3>-iajJ<
couuL-cEocos:o
M (O X V .C O. 3
c o — t o.'-i o « .-•
0<rt«-HO >i04->aJC
•-5Cc«c_)a>csS4J^-H
£^ C 4-> 4> 2 4->
•OiA0>IhMX3U)-i
H "-5 J-" C O -H tj o*Z cd
cd -H j5 X « cd S
T3 • 2 4-> H C •-) •
>H s: C ^- C X ♦J
Cd jsvcjcdvv) I"
js >N cd e Cd o.ixS H .-I tt)
U>->>-i4)Cd(A 33.0
■■-4cdcd<— itncd •ocdo
ciSScocji-icj'-j-Ja.a:
c
3
LU tS TS
0,3 3
■H U. CJU
x:
V) o. o.
J-1 -H -H
Cd js js
QUI"
X cd cdTJ
o •-< 1-1 c
CO O O 3
js X u,
Irt u o
oj CO CO X
.-1 *->
^H to r-- -H
•1-1 I-I I-I e
X en a> CO
U) IH >4-l CQ
o o
f-i i-i
a> tn (A a>
3 tfl w -H
e cd cd c
ed I— < f— I cd
CO U U Q
•OT3
d d
3 3
13 pu tu
C
3 Oi O.
-o a, -H -H
c x:x
3 O. fi M
X Cd cd
• W i-l I-I
JH U O O
o cdX jS
CO .-• o o
O CO CO
.-IX
- O r-( rH
6CO
<U £ S
S I-I « 0)
Cd 23
«>-■(-■>,
rH o 4> a>
.-( 6 00^
•H V ■<-> M
X SX ^1
0) cd
3 C
4J Cd c •
cd h Cd -J
t- O -H
4->X
X 3 (A O.
cd X -H tt>
(I .H >-• (/)
Cd —1 X O
CO UJ U -J
to cj>
in i/)
vO o
(MtOOiOi— t>0»Of^0^iOt0OOi-tOOO00i-HOO
oorj^rMvor^-oootoooi-iOOtoooOLnooo
^~■a>^^^Otoa>lOO^^lln^OLOor~-ooO'*LOOO
i/1>0»-tiO>-''-<^'~^>Oi/1Ln^-i/>i— lOOOtOPMi/iO
fMOOOOOCT»OOtO>Oi-ii/10fvJOO(viomtOOO
io>OOii/it~-t^fMOi-imoior>jmtOf-iomp>ir^i/>
.^ij. .— I rsi»-t.— < (VI <vi i-i.-ii^i/>i— I
o -^
CM O
at m
(v|«v|t-~i-l00CT><NI'^i/>0»t-~r~^C»OO^t0t0«-HO
i-tCTioo^-vOOtor-inr-iOi-tt^iooCTk^'i/ifMOOO
to^i— imi/>r~i/>^-r^i/>to^i-itotooor~-mo»tn«/»
24
rgor-iLno^O'*-i/>oo^t-(i-t(M^Ln>*o>oooroo
bOi-(o»ooo^o>'^«vir~o>o^*-oooinLn ^\OvOTtr~»
cnoooo t-tfMtOLno\oaoio(NirOCT4vOt-i o»r~Lntnr^
ooooor~~ooooooooo
oooooor-~i-oooooooo
»otot--r^T*-tsa'^fsjvOLnr-t-~-oooo
K) r-t i-i ^ iH C-J
OOOOOOOMOO OOI^
oooLntnooraoio oocm
ooNO(Naiooor-~\0\OLOLO o^o
CT>fMoovor-~oor-~tHO»\ooooLr>ioo%"*\0(MtviLO(vj»-(t-iCT>r~vOvOoooi/i
^Lnr-T-iroooooaitsiLncni/>ootN)\OLn^»-tor^o>oo^-K)ooi-~o»,— I r--\o
CTl^"*T-lor--tOCTit-~r-00\O00Ln.-lK1CT>O>0irt0Jt~~\OvO0»fsl^,— i<vi\o
otOi-(rvi<Nii~-i-ip4LOK)\0'HtOLO.-trvi vo^oinoo
3
o
rH CO
•H 2
« •
< >
cd
(17 a
3 ^^ TS-O
TJ (3 X) C fl 3 3
C 3 -O D-rt 3*0 3 UU U,
30U C .h3u-(3 U.
tt, "0 3 j2 ou cd T3 • •
CUpC TJ T3 3 (3 tS (h 0,-H M 3 "O TJ -H O O
•Hot;t3'Ott.3.Hfl'0(d-Hj:c u-ccxtow
j3t/D33C u,c83d.Hj3(npJ 33(0
(n UUtL.3P. •HUi30Mi-> T) Q4U, U. t-'O C
Ur-i UH-Ho.i-> Pux^A^d-i-i a o a
c0-O.fti J3-HOO. Oed.-i©3XO. ft-H > O
rH 6 -H •!-( Ou (A j3 e -H CUW t-l O Z U. (fl -H .H O O -H
ouxx-hv«(aoj3-h ox: u ji Ji jz 'O oi
ji:s:tninjiciu:^injsCJSO • (x« vt tn o ti
o u u w <-^ a %*inoointi-Hr-tuti(r>tiio
4)i-Hr-l(ajSO*-»t-t(d*J ifl <flJ3^.-tJ3CtH
Vt-ioo<-tujC-HO<-i(dcv •iiuooin'oa)
K> X^^ OC/3U<4hx:ot3OC«-><0(OXj3OU.3
0) lOWOTa •Hc/503•-^'^oao o«i/j c/i c «->
♦JE Wi-t«>-i COO'H •HXt-i i-i(rtC
• (« .1-1 .H 0) J3 XC7» X»T3 X CO»<7>aE'HCd
U]l-ii.ica4J4-)U.Of-HOf-l«)4-) "X©"-!^ QO.
• • cj o o..g c <-t ♦Jo*->4-»a. N TJ
CJWC E£UV©>-<*4-|.H*H(ACa >4-l 'i-tU-l <4-l f-l (/> ©
cde«ea36C302M-i02C0<00(«- <fl
X<-IJ3(83EU©«-HX tiU O ^^lO
CX.©'«->-i-i j.-ii-tf-i«>0©(ain4->u. •(n(«-.-i©>-3
©■Hcdi-ioat UO iAKiE>J3C '<(/)mj3'0
(ncC'-icTiorX ii>sea(gE «m.h© (dcduea©
0(40-w(X>C7kca •edO>-«C3 -StHjC 'r-ti-ti-iOX
c
3
w
X
•O C oj c
d CUT} 3 (0 3
3 -H C U. Uli.
LL.X 3 ©
M u. • > a.
Ci,U j3 -H -H
•H « o. O C J=
j3 >-• -iH Ui d m
i« 0J3 < ^1
tiX M C3 CO
C0 U ^1 TJ -H J3 »H
ft CO (fl c •-< *-» o
o i-i 3 t«i ex
X T) O tL. O © U
U ex X H W
(h (/] -H Cd O I/)
JH *J XX r^ »H
© h li (A (_} 0> ©
a.© © >-■ •-) i
OOQ^ Cd X 6
O cd fH »4 (M 3
U •CQ O C 010
Z X ©
• ox «« •
Z © U. C/) M ^
(A E cd
■O C © M (d i-H >«
^ O M © 'H U ©
(dx ^X •-• i-i
» OuO e«.-i ©t)
O — t © 3 -H X 3
X<OXX H Q
OOOOO<Ma0Of-HOOOOOOOOOO0)>0OOl0l^^>-IOOO
ooooo(»mOf-ioooooooooot-ii-HOLno<ot/>>-iooo
ooooovo>-iot/)OO^OLnoooi/>t^akr^or^ot.r«iiO<OOfMO
oooooi/)f>)0^^ooot^ooo(^intM<ooK>t/)()00t^oaoo
ooooiootoo(MOOooioo«oo»Hr^<MOtn^'i/»m«-ioo(MO
orooLnLr>^r-LO<0(/>ooLn(M(vi^Ouit^r^tn<Moom<oao<-ti/>>-<o
K1 (V41-I Lni-H(M t-Ht-li-ti-t t-tt-HPsI t-l.-l.-lr>»l/»<M<>J«MtO •-(
o
\0i/>OO00^9-i/»O»0<-10»»-tCT»O>>O'00»l^<O»0»-ir^O>CT«O j-ll^tOO*
oin>-ioiO)'^OLn(NiLnoot(S3rMaoaotoao>o>oi/)(Maki-HC^oOf0^rio
I
25
f-i Ok o to o o
CM o to 1^
r^r-t0CT>Ln>OCT»fvlCT»f-«>000l-~-O(Mt0O^
Ot0'-t0>i-l^»-'*OtO00CJ»0000.-H00r^L00>
i/)aotOi/)\oo>Lna>aoaoaooaorMcoatr^to
OtOLOO«-iO»'r^Loao\o^*-<-trooooo\o^
^ (VI a> to CM
oo tsi to vo a>
<si OO LO CM tT
l/> <NJ t^ <VJ lO
<H O \0 T*- 00
(V1^0000int-^>OlOP>JC>J^«Or-l^lOt-(\OtO
OLOO>i/>i-irN)^csiro«or~ooo>ooovorviio
tnc7»mt-~NO»-ti/>i^CT><Ni^ioioot-~r~-t-~oo
O^-rslvOftOOtOOOOtOr-OOvOtOi-IOirHO
^-(.-^^-ICM^O i-IOOf-IKlt-lLOlO.-lt-(\OLO<-«
rvi 00 tn (SI T»-
i/> rsi t~~ (VI ro
rH ^ \0 ^ 00
lo»-i ^■eor~i-~-^(»ior>\oto^vOt-i
f-iTT <-tot^oior^rotnoooo>i/>^
r-~oo (vio»-(0>r-to\ooocM^-i-tvom
(vio» \Oi-((vico itoo tnrOtotO
.j,^!-^ (VI Lrt t-t r^ \o to
X
o
3 CJ
U. 3
U. I/)
X E
CO Ih -H
>-i OS — (
UI) ti f-H
• H ^ -H
-O J -H S
C J
3 C C-O
U, > W > C
O ^ O 3
X ^ C >-■ u.
>-■ cQ a> o)
C8 "-J f-H
^- e I- ^
X5 3 • (8 (8
•H C X <-• c
_: v« <n u
CO E -H CO
•-H OL. cd X >-
C -H
e >s'H X «
3 U i-H Ih C
.— » CO -iH CO t;
< Si s: <
>v
w
C C C O
3-3 3 --J
o
Xifl >vX 2
^ (A Ih (h
CO 3 CO CO I/)
ii 00 fi !-• 3
..^ 0) ••-• •H 3
^ U.^ ^ T3 Otf
0) (/> 00 00 3 (i
ii -H 00 i-l U, O
o ti 00 at <4-i
E (i <-i •-• CO
6 O CT3
3 Z«4Hl44 CO U.
O O O -H
• c </) I/) a> c
03 3 M M .M O
e CO CO coj3
. T3 r-1 r-l 3 O
U- W (_) U C/S
B
V
C (fl
•0 3 0)
>3 O
»4
^ CO •
OUT.
03 -H •
C QCO
O -H C7>
•-) CO --l
• 6<4H
S CO O
in I/)
3 a> ifl
<4-l TT CO
3 CTl 1-H
DS iH U
t3
C
5 -«
^ C
>v 3
»•• T3 [Li
en C
fi 3 0)
^ CU in
•H O
^ xo
ee CO
•o c »- •
3 r-t .ft
UU » ^ CO
CO ii
xa, X CO
tn in c f-
i-H -i-l 3 to
0) U li OQ
cO tcr
• J-i •
^ UU o: 4)
i-H
0) 0.-H
C CO « t-H
X >-■ « tH
CO 00 O CO
Qi to "D U
c
3
T3 uu
CO
3 C 4-»
U, 3 -H
in 0)
w >vC
0) 0) 0)
^ M «
a< V)
»-• C (fl
(0 0) a>
x: X c
w o
*-> a,
c
0) E o.
t3 CO
•H -H ^
(fl rH O
0) i-H O
Ih -H CO
a. * -^
T3
3 C
b 3
« C
•H O
^1 -H
O (0
E C
V a>
0) a>
in 00
CO 0)
o
V u
i-H
^< TS
CO U
w o
>vl-i
C (U
•H >
1-t CO
CUX
\0^0'*'9-r~~Ta-o(vioooor^o^oo(X3
0(VIOt~-i-(^IOOLnOOO'-l'a-OCT>000
L0(viOv000Lf)(VioeOOOO>OOi/1OO^
roooor-^tooiOLOOOOi-HtorO'^oto
^■■«*-orooooLn(vi\OLnoi— itotovoovo
t^^-iLnoto t-HvOi-t
(VI r^ (vj r-~
00 vO 00 ^ to
O O t^ (VI (3>
r~ 00 to (VI (7^
to LO t-l t^ to
(VI 1-^ t-H (VI TT
»-t vO oo to o>
TT to >0 LO
^•00t0'»'>0OOi-0i-0O0^'-Hr0vOt-^i-0(v|t^
inr-o»r-~c7>\OOLn(vivO<vito»s-cj>ooi— i<-ic»
Ln<vi oo I— ivO"— t I— I't'vO I/)"*
^ CM C» (VI ^
O t-l CM .-t to
oo r-~ (71 to to
26
I ro
OOvOl/l CD<v«(V|00 >OaO lOCM
<vi ro I— I (N| Csi K1
\Oi— iKio^-tot-^r^o
Tj-Tj-orooovOLnO'*
vOOOi-HOOOOOOOtOi-l
LO LO \0 C3 O
0> rj i/i O o
««5- CM 00 tn ^
vO O O 'S- O^ O LO
CTt O 1/1 ^O i/l i/l lO
\0 i-l O (Nl t^ i-H
1-t \0 o Lo o
to 1/1 O tH I-H
0» tvl i-H OO
o o o» o oo
l/l "If o> o •>*
.-I \0 o
OI-lf--00^•«*l/>^O^Ol/>^l/1P-^^0•-^l/>fMCT»^O^Ol/l^tnr^^-•^l/»^l/)0
00Lni/i.-i.-(ror^L0fM»or4i-ii')O»^-00^Oc>ic^*o»rOt— iiOT-i.-(\orji-ii/>oo
o»(Nioo>oi/>Tri/>»^\OCTioO'^rooLnao.-(>or-~Trootoi/)oo»ooo<o^r>io
OKli-lintMt0N0CT»0l0>0>OOr~-K>i-Hr0i/>»0\0.-t<N)t-ir0^-r0Trt-l\0v0O
r~ ^00t0tM»0o>OCMK)cviTt-(M>-ii/lCTirv|»O00 l^.-i.-irOi-l p>i.-io>
■fee- « • »
r4 fNl J-H CM t-t tH to
OOxOOOlO^^in^OOKltOfNJ^-
OCT>Troo^o»OP<i<M^-iotr>in
OCT>CT»Oi-lt-~ l/>inrH\0^l/>
^c^ i-iooao ir> <-i t ^ t-\ ^
W
w
o
a:
a.
<
U
w
00
o
w
z
(JL,
c
3
u.
C w
3-H
u. ^
u
(UZ
iH
O. •
•H &,
O) C
o
in ■•-•
Ctf (A
6-H
O rH
j3 .-I
tJ« ♦J •«
CO C C
•H C V 3
73 3 6 U,
CO lb V
« >J5
oe: 4-> O 4J
■•J e e CO
(U »!-.
Jh o
O W J3 j3
M 4-)
• i-t ^4 4)
U) (0 Cd ^
•H i-t td
COON
.C «X -H
O (X (J f-t
•-J c/j en w
u
o
4->
.HT3
oc c
3
••-> ti,
4J
O M
(J V
dM
•H O
0.(/}
■H
•-) M
•H
• O
• u
•O 0) ♦->
C N 0)
3 -H •-(
U, »-■ X
a. 4->
0) <
N 1-1 -o
•H rH C C
*H « 3-H
eu X u,f-t
a> (-> a> c;
U 0) N o
•H «J ^»
a> 0) cu •
a. o m
« c:
0) »•«
M c o »-•
It a 4J et
o e > »
C 3
3 U,
4>
6 N
3-H
4-> ^
« CL<
O .H
J3 .H
>H 3
< o
w
c:
cd in
6-H
O f-t
O Ui
e
•a «
l-> -H
>^
•O-H
U) 2
Ui
4>
U
C-OTJ
« U. C
C 3
O iH (L,
4-> Id
rt-H ©
-H ^1 M
ed O-H
z s >-
«> Ci. T)
IH 4-> 3
73 O C U.
c <-> X©
3 ctM e a
U. > U 4-> o
V< 3 >H 4J
^ © CQ (d C
© M 0.-H
-H X> © 9M
ed O C Q<-H
Z © W
©MM
• 003 O •
l-H -O W -H {-■
•H ♦J
• (h US' Cd 6
Q^ e cd
»^ ©-H
iH Cd O X "H
3 ^ U «-> (H
(d 4-1 td cd -H
CU W-) Z »
3
N
»H
a.
•o
c c:
3-H
PU ^
cd
tH J
cd
-H PJ
M o
O Oi
firH
o
Z«M
o
o in
C in
rH Cd
73
a
3
UUTJ
73 3
Id
•< ed
O
rH -H
edTJ
•H ©
»4 E
4-> O O
«« e Ki
•H © CU
uz
c
00 © ©
en © »
oo _] O
-H OQ
M-l»-> •
O Q£
73
in C73
in 3 -H
cd g >
ihtJ ed
u w Q
3
in "O
fl CT3
«d 3 IS
>tt. 3
(U lb
iH
© cd ©
D.-H N
O ^ -H
U O Ki
ecu
©z ^
X ©
u in^
cd c «
Qtf-HCQ
M
«B » •
l«x
ex
« e
j-tJ ed
4J M-H
ed cd iH
0*0 -H
•-5 W *
c
3
a.
vC -H
•O 00 4-1
§3 C
o od
(bjC B
H-O 3
73 CX
Vi s0 3
cd U< ©
> C X
< O © 4J
•H M
© 00-H C
U-H l-l -H
CdlH CU
t-i o in
rHOtf C I-
C0 CD CO
» C B-H
cd M o
• •H ma
ta 4-» 3 o
£ U 0 9
oi/)t-~.t---aooaooLoou'>OLnoo^i/)>ooooooo(N^oooaoo
or~oooooooofor~-or--or^ooi/>tooi/>OCT>oinr»->o^oooio«~~
oo\ot-^r^vor--<oo>otnr->oc>iooai<oo<Hor4t/>>ooiK>r~ooo^o
^r4a»fMO»<v«^c>ja»ioO»o>ooo»o>or~o»o^<Hooo^toooooo<>i
p>iiHtHfM(Mr~-tniH^iHK>^rooooo^p>»^OiHioo<MO^i/»toor-.*
int-t^a»CMtH«MinO><M«H(N»^CM.HKlTHK>C>II-^
V» »H iH
O rH r4 1/) iH
««■ CM Irt
•^'^OkiMOtoorMvOtH^Lnoootor^oOkoo^^ioooocMoc'itnooo
CM CMO»0^r--r^rHK><M0»0»r0OO00O0»^l0iHt000a>0>Or0«HCTlCMtH
l/» (0«0fMr-«r>4Lni/>CMCM<HO«M<H(0r-iHIM« l/» 0»t-| tHtHO
fH lO
27
O 1/1 lO O^
a> a» •»»■ o
iH O 00
.-1 Tf to
o »*
o in
o
O r^i
o o
<V1
O
o
o to
tn o
CM
^
o
O CT>
r- oo
r-
o
o
o to
00 o
1—1
a»
>o
o r-
•<* rs4
r-i
1-1
M
•k
M
«
»-l
y-i
«V1
o
fsl
LO
o r- •»!■
00
00
o
LO
r--
o
oo
o
r--
o
Ln
r-l
oo
vO
o
oo
to Tt
o^
•<i-
cvi
Ol Tt
00
o
NO
o
t^
•>*• vO
vO o^
1— 1
r~-
C7» >*
fM
LO
o
to
Cft
I— 1
O vO
00
•^
rvl
o
LO
oo
LO
r~-
LO
o
o
r--
to rH LO \0
O ^ 1-1 <~«l
O to 'S- to
LO lo^ooi •«a-ooo^r~-r-~rM
O OlfOOtO <viC>OxOi-lt^vO
tn i-HcMi-ir- ^{MiHi-tfNir-j
LO (SI r~~ ^ 00 00
r^ Tj- lo i-i 00 »o
O LO 1-t O 00 00
O 00 O »* CT> CT»
i-ltOO^'S-rgLO OtOOOiHOO
ootoraoLOoo lovoloooo
««j- 1-t
O 1-1 to 1-1 LO LO
<vi 00
1-1 ^
O TT
O LO
o 00
O yO
3
CS
9) -O
CQ U. O.
(A
•H
V "O
-^ X J=
•H U,
CO M >-■ inT} o.
<-•
h 3 cd » C 3
•H -O
3 a^ O 3 U
C »-
4-> E A 1-1 u.
e9T3 ed
c8 e8 t/5 "O i-i 1-t
E C »
Z U C VMM
3 3<
>s 3 T3 U. a> H
T3 X U, tJ
V 'O 4-> U. C -H ^
3 « XO 3
JS U 1-1 3 C <-• O
4->03UU.O-'^g
u. js *-> tn u.
«4-l U •'H -H C 4)
4J ^ 1-1
<<1^.ca^«^^Jca2
<fl 3 -H V"
o 0) u. 3 u ca E
U Ih U 2 4)
> s: i-'o 3 4-»
•H o rt j<
• e9>* a c XJS
♦J »4-l U. Ifl u
> X O >- 0) 3 M
•H -iH -H
« Ot V (A O U -H
^ C (A U ^
qvm—ij^ a>u.js V.
•H 73 « »- U
O COC «J X "O
U U.^ A
« VM.^ C
c
(0 O X (A
as o ^- w o c c
3 U. C ♦J -w
4-> O U •'^ -w v
u.
^ (/} «j i^
tA "4 C **•>
lA O »- ti
t^ «fl • C -H Vm
>» O O 'DO
o ca u) o E 4> ^
•-H C OQ X) 2
Vh ^ V« O «-•
M
«-) -^ 1-1
u x*J Q tr)<
« -J CO < •
•o ^- u
1-1 -H L)
C V C VO CB
4> £ 0) "O U
3 J2 «»^ ^ -oas
4JJS XJ= •
U. HXttIO <H<H-3HU
w
3
a
^-T>
z
E- U,
3
(JU
1-1 "T3
1-1 J= CT>
Q
•H O 3 C '^'-N
Hi
73 OOW U, 3 »-• i-l
H
[JU CO (JU CO CO
<
35 j: o. »-•<-•
Q
4> U -H O. O U
1— 1
C .-( J-. J3 -H C 0)
^
•T3
«->
CO 1-1 CO (A a:: 0) o.
O
(5
(A
0) CO 0) fx (A U O)
WJ
3
9
Q ♦J X (A CO iH ^-^v^
z
u.
»i
4-> (A "O (A 0) ■-• CO
o
f-
(A •ac^'oso.-i'a
u
I-I
3C/3»-i3cO XOC
«
t-l
W" Hii-2:>sOja3
z
•H
.-1
HO) CO CO u u.
o
!-•
•iH
lA 1-t (AX Vh (/]
z
O
X
C-Hi-l(A4->*-ilA (A
E
«-•
O3c0V33a)CO.
z
V
lA
c
(A o c •-• ds ae -H -H -H
o
z
3
o
O. J V- O. »H « rH
Ih
(A
E eOJ->T3»-cO*J-H
H
EH
c
•Hu7><(ecvu<c/)js
QC
3
CO v) Si ctxi cu
o
C
<A
»4
• *J W5 eo • •
Q.
Sm
3 CQ
>^cQ wi • H oe :>^ «
lU
CO
O
U «> V O. iH
QC
u.
E
c
h O.^ *-» ♦J 1-1 C X
>xeO
V-H O-HCAIAVCOO.
c
carcLr-iofriitf «> 34-> E
JS
o
4->
.^ E oo^ t- •
o
c
CO
• J= • • CO 3 CO O E
•-3
<Z*0,QH'D<XXX
<0 O O 00
o^ o >o 00
O to O O O to LO
O O O to i/> o rsi
«-i»n^rsi ooao>orMr~Ln
oooooo mr-^oi— *i-^Ok\o
ioolo^ moo^Lootioto
o m (SI o i/t Ok
0> O "(SI i-t o ^- 1~~ o o>
t^^- lO lOOO»(S10tO
tOI^ to CT>iOt~-00^O>
oo o i-(t^r~-oo»-i
^H(SIOO>OO^00l-~00(SlO
to 00
o
m ^ ^ m Ok vO
to 1-t
•o
^^ (SI to oo to to
v»«o
O O (SJ
^ to o>
^> t~» «-^ I
«-^ ^H 00
00 (SI O to 1/) «/>
rH >o o o <o o >o
to 00 tA (SI (O
28
a>
3
iH r-i
o
O ^
O vo
O
CO
z
o
u
z
o
a
z
<
Q
W
H
<
Q
t— t
^
O
W5
Z
o
u
0)
•-•o
>\
rH
Q 1^
O
OQ
to i-H r-
O O CM O 00
r-\ yO
r~
CM i-H OO
to o vo o en
r^ vO
i~~
t-~ r- ^
>o T-t to ^ a>
•<*• CM
NO
CNI vO CM
^ r-~ \o T- 1 o>
i-H .H
CM
oo t« en
.-1 .-( r^ t-H r-l
r~ \0
to
«v) o ^
O Tl- LO t~~
CM to
NO
vO •^t
OO «3- CM CM
00 o
OO
vO
OO to
iH
^/5-
iH
be-
CT>fM'*tNjLr>Tj-0»i-iO
vO CM
00
to vO o»
00 i-i cn vo o 'S-
cn o
cn
rH \0 CM
tX) 00 \0 tH t-t \0
to 1-1
Tt
a> t~- i-H
r~. r~- 00 ^ 00 LO
o to
to
LO i-( r--
OO O ■«* 00 t~~ t-~
to LO
CO
1-t vO ^
r-i f-. in 00 t-i m
to CM
LO
X*- CM .-1
\0 'i- O lO o
VO to
cn
OO x*
O 'i- (vi ^ o
^ lO
cn
•k
•k M
M *
M
vO
.H 00
r-- r~-
^
«/»■
r-i
CM
■be-
00
O O CM O
O tH
r-
CJ»
"S- O 00 O
CM cn
I-l
1-1
to to o ^
to LO
cn
1-1
O i-l O 00
I-l o
I-l
t-~
CO o o r~-
to to
vO
«k
M MAM
M 4
M
CM
.-• LO I-l vO
t~- to
o
iH
CM CM
\0 LO
CM
«^
CM
to
•&e-
(y, rH
CM ^ 00 CM
\0 lO
i-i
o r>-
O .H CT> vO
lO rH
t^
CM o
OO rf \o r^
LO 00
to
•<J- LO
o r~ LO LO
cn vo
NO
o o
to vO ^ LO
O iH
CM
•k »
<k MM
M «
M
en ^
vO .-• Tt
>0 lO
iH
•W3-
•-t ^ CM
O
cn to
o .-•
ro
CM
m
M
M
y-i
I-l
-b%
OOiH^<MO»OCT4tOOO
\0 OO
Tf
CM o> a>
OO LO 00 >o 00 r^
\0 t~~
■«9-
i-la>CM00rOCM^^CM
T-l 00
O
>0>-ti-ir~t~-.-iLOcMoo
CM \0
Oi
CMiHt-OOLOOOOOlOO
lO \0
t-l
•* o
LO
^ rM T-t
r~ ^ r-l to 00
ro LO
00
00 Tf
O ^ CM ^ 0»
^ NO
o
«k
«k •
M
M
>o
.-• >o
^o r-»
^
■«/>
I-l
rM
1
o
o
JS
u
lO
o
4J
CO
3
T>
«
Ih
M
in
o
c
•o
in
X
O M
§
s§
u e
•H O
« o
CO to
M U.
o o
E-H
C O
•o
».>'
** C
m
^e-
§•2
MOQ .^O
O.
3
<4-i
•r4
3
U. 4J
O. Ki
CTJJS
O CL
«
CO
l-H U
W
•-«
•OT3
rH *J
o
kl
XX^
o>r4 in
CS M
W<M
cd
h
4J l«
«-» <-H -O
»< —1
•H ^ rH
ca ui 'H
(doe
«2
^ o
o
Ki
U
•O in 3
C
Ki >jS^-0 O
•»H C u.
o •
o (d
u-n^ Q.
rH O
t3H3EXcnJOC0
m
OCJ-H
c
M I Id
h li
ii ^
^
Ki
Wi h -^
e e «->
o o
<M«4-I
o o
«M<4-l
O
o
o o
<4H «M
CO
o o o
UZH
M n
m w
M
(A
m M
i-i I-l
•O'O-O'O-O'O'O'O
(d «
e c
§§
c
c
C C
«J 4J
3 3
3
3
3 3
o o
U.U.U.U.U.U.U.U.
HH
TS
0)
4J
(d
c
M
•H
•
in
0)
a> •-•
TJ J
Id
c
i-H
«
•H
4)
(d
U3
>
Id
V
>
in
(d
•H
X
1-1
o
(d
^
a
•
•H
r«-
u
o
c
(M
•H
•
Si
00
o.
.-1
K)
e
«*
4>
X
<M
>
o
e
o
o
3
•H
•^
«J
(d
U
>
3
Ki
^ «-•
o
M
o
e
x>
o
u
(d
•o
MO
CtJ
•^
c
>
3
(d««4
X
e
M
3
•o
3
o
29
U
o
►J
•<
r^c*M»\t^O\0
>
6-
•« Pk » M M «
H
W
^ -^r-tovOvo
Z
b«:
v£) r^CV<v^O -4
Z>
«
CM o< r^r»>
o
o
o
-69-
■<
a
ta
-^
E-
to
<
a
J
to
M
■«<
c^
J
&-•
»rv
o
O
CO
e-i
r-
z
c^
o
-*
1
a
o
3
M
i^-*-*r-oo
3
-*-*c>jr~oo
►J
■<
r- u^r^vo kr\(*>
>
On\0 C^O^C^^^r)
«
•k M M « * «
o
>/N On 0\ O 0\ «*
o
totovo -*r^o
P3
CV CV r^^
to,- f^
CV,-vO
o
;>::
o
r^
C^
O
O)
t~--
r—
C\i
-*
o
o
•—
UN
NO
E-
»-"* *
•
«n
o
r-
Cx-
CO
-4-
00
CNJ
2
IM
O
tr^
vO
o
»
•
*
E-
IfN
<
3
CJ
o
-*
C^
H-*
Olf^
bt)«n
c-e>
•H
-U tM
.-H O
vO
o
f
CNi
o
-*
-4
i»>
O
x:x:
•
•
«
•
(0
a^
r^
t^
(u m
r~-
O
cv
c^
Si o
o
O
IT
u\
*j
*
«
«k
^
T~
ITk
CV
CM
hOtO
CO
J-
to
<r\
C D,
CM
o\
in
>/N
•H^
•k
«
,«
(U O
ir\
^-
t^
J3 C
■&>»■'
•H
vO C^»-
C^r^cO
-i-(MtO
sO'- tXD
T- r^CTv
C3N»- On
NO
r^ rr\ r-
d)
3
•-4
«<
-l-t-OO*-
>
s
,« K M A •
6-«
-*OnOO»^
Z
Si
\0 u>-C0tO -*
3
ct*
»-«0C>JOOn
o
s
«k M
o
^
r* T*
u
-^
<
a
u
-*
E-«
vO
<«
a
-1
«A
M
<
«0
h4
O
s
vO
CO
H
^"
Q
cv
O
O r^T- O m
vO lAt^o r~-
•r- t- -i-CM (N^
r-tor^fTto
\OvO»- C^u>
»/N»r»ONO C^
tM«0l/^OO
«nOvO<»\M>
4J O
•1 ♦> CO
r-l flt «J 4J iH Q
« -HS h tg u
o.t. O C-H «
■^ 4> u O.MU a:
u (0-H n^H c M
•H 3iH C » <« (X.
C-Oi3 (« h C (d
3 C 3 U O-H ftj
S M OU H {K {>. O.
ON
On
t0-*irNr-O
■00 C7ni/\t- O
OtOC~~tOO
ONr-,-00
^— -*nO-*
>>c:
ti O Ui
M ♦J O
iH -H «0 Q>
>-t (fl »> *J C
ta -rH :r> tn (11
U 4J U 0.)-H
C CO-H 10 4>
(0 3rH C O
C "O jO (Q «l
^5
Q
\>
to
•H
•H+J
H
«H«M
•r
OS
0) Vi
Oh
>T3
O ti
td >
o
0)
♦J (0
C (0
-* r^
-*
r^
r^ O 1
^^
O
tc
■J-
c^
NO
NO
73
i/> vC
ON
CTn
i/\| ^/^|
0) T)
•*
»
M
•*
NO
ON
rr\
nO
O
rv.
3 d
r^ vO
r\
-*
ir\
rH(M
r^
O
5
o
t^
O
^
«k
H ol
c w
NO
NO
to
•H -H
x:
o
c
o c
rH 0)
o
c: c
r>-
lO
CM
r^
(7N
NO
;d ri
o
CM
^
CO
O
oi
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
■H-^
-^
ro
-*
o
fn
Cr\
«M a>
o
to
^
-J-
vO
O
■a
VfN
NO
C7N
c^
UN
<*N
C 3
•
••
•H i-t
NO
CJN
r\
CM
O
r^
O
<*>
nO
r^
O*
-*
^
NO a
T—
ro
O
ir>
ON
O-M
M
m
r-
NO
\t\
r-
t^
-i *i
«
^
T- O
NO C
NO M
irv-H
T3 O
»x:
o
0)
♦J -a
oo
u
c
OTZ
t"
M
3
'-<0
<:
Vb.
alb.
E-<
O
cn
(0
C 4J
<o c
g
loe-i
•hLe,
VI
>
a>
3
R
-9
£3
•o
u
b.
wed
a
o
OJ
(h
u
&j
»
3
z
ve-i
OS
[4
2
T3
c
O
o
^25
O
^
<0
o
H
H
o
• •
_)
O
ac
M
-J
WJ
&»
M
H
O
►-I
<
s
o
o
^
o
e-
5*
30
THE CORPORATION OF HAVERFQRD COLLEGE
COMPUTATION OF MARKET VALUE OF UNITS AT JUfJE 30. 1971
Market value of Consolidated Investments 6/3O/7I
To Conunon Fund
Less: additions to funds 7/1/70 - 6/3O/7I
income to principal
$58,876
12.661
$16,816,997
1.940.563
$18,757,560
71.537
$18,686,023
Units outstanding -6/30/70
Units increased
Units decreased
Market value per unit 6/30/7I
628,421
5.748 634,169
1.031
633.138
$29.51
Income per unit 7/1/70 - 6/30/71 - $1.35
31
ADDITIONS TO FUNDS
1970 - 1971
GENERAL ENDOWMENT FUND
From: Solon E. Summerfield Fdn,
Class of 1943 FUND
From: Various donors
LOUIS JAQUETTE PALMER SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Triangle Society $ 530.00
Charles M. Bancroft, M.D. 200.00
THE SUMMERFIELD FDN. SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Foundation
CLINTON P. KNIGHT, JR., NEW ENGLAND
SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: *Bequest of Clinton P. Knight, Jr.
*of bequest $7,500 to Barclay Renovation
ARCHIBALD MACINTOSH SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Robert G. Wilson Fdn.
ALPHONSE N. BERTRAND SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Final distribution of legacy
THE CLASS OF 1970 TENTH ANNIVERSARY
SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Various members of the Class of 1970
DUDLEY W. SUMI^ERS SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From: Anonymous donor
CARLISLE k BARBARA K, MOORE FUND
From: Mr. & Mrs. Carlisle Moore (in securities)
JACOB & EUGENIE BUCKY MEJ^IORIAL FOUNDATION
From: Foundation {through Robert C. Thomson, Esq.)
DAVID R. BO\vTN PREMEDICAL FUND
From: Lewis H. Bowen
C. C. MORRIS CRICKET LIBRARY FUND
From: C. Christopher Morris (in securities)
THE CLASS OF 1964 FACULTY SALARY FUND
From: David S. Olton
THE ALBERT HARRIS WILSON AWARD FUND
From: Walter Penn Shipley, Jr.
32
WILLIAM MAUL MEASE Y TRUST
This trust was established bv VTilliam Maul Measey by agreement dated
June 27th, 1952, and supplementary agreement dated April 26th, 1956.
The trust agreements provide that the income shall be granted as aid
to students without restriction as to sex, race or religious affil-
iation, in selected secondary schools or colleges, who on the basis
of character, scholarship and financial situation, merit assistance
in continuing their education. In secondary schools aid is to be
given to students who live in the institutions during school terms,
and not to day students. The capital of the trust is to be invested
solely in common or ordinary corporate shares.
Price W^aterhouse &. Co. independence mao. west
Philadelphia I9106
October 22, 1971
To the Board of Managers
The Corporation of Haverford College
In our opinion, the accompanying statement of cash transactions and book
value of the William Maul Measey Trust presents fairly, on a basis consistent with
that of the preceding year, the income and principal transactions of the Trust for
the year ended June 30, 1971 and cash balances and book value at that date in
accordance with the provisions of the Trust agreement. Our examination of this
statement was made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards and
accordingly included such tests of the accounting records and such other auditing
procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances including confirmation
of cash and securities by correspondence with the depositary.
^\^^'^v^=6dL^.z^,
33
WILLIAtl MAUL MEASEY TRUST
Statement of Cash Transactions and Book Value
For the Year Ended June 30, 1971
Book value of Trust at July 1, 1970 $2,187,373.48
Realized capital gains 146,192.93
Book value of Trust at June 30, 1971
including principal cash $2,333 ,566 .41
Market value of Trust at June 30, 1971 $3.790.060.00
Cash Statement of Receipts and Expenditures
Principal
Cash balance July 1, 1970 $ 8,871.78
Investments realized 249 ,971 . 76
$ 258,843.54
Investments made $ 218,111.57
Cash balance June 30, 1971 40,731.97
$ 258,843.54
Income
Cash balance July 1, 1970 representing
prior year income and reserve $ 141,027.33
Disbursements in year
To Haverford College for administration
of Trust $ 13,129.84
To Haverford College for aid to 67 students 65,649.18
To secondary schools for aid to 63 students 49 ,600. 00
Current year income
Income from investments July 1, 1970 to
June 30, 1971 136,059.32
Interest earned on income invested 8,829. 95
128,379.02
12,648.31
144,889.27
Cash balance June 30, 1971 $ 157,537.58
In order that the income available from the Trust for aid to students may be known
at the beginning of each fiscal year, such income is accumulated and not awarded
nor disbursed until the following year.
34
Haver ford
College
HAVERFORD, PA. 19041
I
i
i
i
SUPPLEMENT
^TO THE
^.^1^"%*c
Haverford College
Publication
Haverford College Publication, Vol. 69, No. 4, August, 1971.
Issued six times a year by Haverford College, Haverford, Pa. 19041 :
f January, February, May, August, September and December. Entered as
second-class matter and postage paid at Haverford, Pa.
Haverford College
CALENDAR 1971-72
Freshmen arrive (Customs Week) Fri.
Other new students and Returning students arrive Tue.
All student academic course registrations to be
completed by 5:00 p.m. Wed.
Upperclassmen register for Physical Education courses . .Tue. 7 and Wed.
Opening Collection 7:30 p.m. Wed.
First semester classes begin 8:30 a.m. Thu.
First faculty meeting 4:15 p.m. Thu.
Last day for changing courses Thu.
9
9
23
Last day for dropping a course without penalty Mon. 1 4
Last day to request no numerical grade option (juniors & seniors) . . Mori. 14
Winter Term Physical Education courses end Fri. 25
Registration for Spring Term Physical Education
Courses Mon. 28 thru Thu. March 2
AppUcations for Cope and Murray Graduate Fellowships
due in the President's Office 5:00 p.m. Wed. 1
Spring Vacation Begins 4:00 p.m. Fri. 10 and ends 8:30 a.m. Mon. 20
Last day for dropping a course without penalty Thu. 7 O
Last day to request no numerical grade option (juniors & seniors) . . Thu. 7 C
Fall Vacation Begins 4:00 p.m. Fri. 22 and end 8:30 a.m. Wed. 27 T.
Fall term Physical Education courses end Fri. 5
Registration for Winter Term Physical Education
courses Mon. 8 through Thu. 1 1
Swarthmore Day (no classes) Sat. 20
Thanksgiving Vacation
Begins 12:30 p.m. Wed. 24 and ends 8:30 a.m. Mon. 29
Registration for Spring Semester Mon. 29 through Fri. 3
Midyear examination schedules due in Recorder's
Office Mon. 29 through Fri. 3
Last day of classes Tue. 14 ^
Review period Wed. 15 through Thu. 16 E
All papers (except those in lieu of examinations) due by . 4:00 p.m. Thu. 16 C.
Papers in Heu of examinations (and laboratory notebooks)
due as scheduled by instructor, but not later than .... 4:00 p.m. Mon. 20
MIDYEAR EXAMINATIONS Fri. 17 through Wed. 22
Grades due in Recorder's Office Fri. 7 j
Second semester classes begin 8:30 a.m. Mon. 17 A
Last day for changing courses Mon. 31 N.
N
O
V.
F
E
B.
"m"
A
R.
Sophomore major registration cards due in
Dean Potter's Office 4:00 p.m. Fri. 7
Registration for Fall (1972) Semester academic courses .Mon. 10 thru Fri. 14
Applications for scholarships due in Admissions Office Fri. 14 A
Prize competition manuscripts due in Recorder's Office . . . 4:00 p.m. Fri. 21 P
Final Examinations schedules due in Recorder's Office . . Mon. 1 7 thru Fri. 21 R,
Spring Term Physical Education courses end Fri. 28
Last day of classes Fri. 28
Review period Sat. 29 thru Tue. 2 May
All papers (except those in lieu of examinations) due by . . Noon-12:00 Tue. 2
Senior Comprehensive examinations Tue. 2 thru Thu. 4
Final examinations for Seniors Wed. 3 thru 12:00 noon Tue. 9
Final examinations for all other students . . Wed. 3 thru 12:00 noon Fri. 12
Papers in lieu of examination (and laboratory notebooks)
due as scheduled by instructor, but not later than . . . . 4:00 p.m. Tue. 9
Oral examinations for College Honors Mon. 8, Tue. 9 and Wed. 10
Final faculty meeting 9:00 a.m. Thu. 1 1
COMMENCEMENT Tue. 16
M
A
Y
Parent's Day
October 16, 1971
Homecoming Day
Nov. 20, 1971
Alumni Day
May 20, 1972
This supplement updates information in the 1970-72 Haverford College
catalog and ^ould be used in conjunction with that catalog. There have been
many changes at Haverford during the past year; this supplement mainly
describes those changes that would be of most interest to new or prospective
students.
^ The Haverford curriculum is designed to develop in its students the
^capacity to learn and to understand, to make sound and thoughtful
judgments. In line with this purpose, the curriculum is continually developing
and evolving. During the past year, several academic departments have made
changes in their course offerings or requirements. The English department has
revised its requirements for students majoring in English; the psychology
department has changed its major program and has made changes in its
courses offered. More specific information is available by writing to the
chairman of the proper department. The engineering department is continu-
ing its scheduled phase-out, and will no longer accept majors.
The physical education department has also adjusted its offerings to
match student interests and college resources. Swimming, for example, will
not be offered in 1971-72 as a varsity sport.
One major change of special interest to new students is the introduction
of freshman English into the Freshman Program (see catalog pages 47-49).
Beginning in the fall of 1971, each freshman is assigned to either a freshman
|English section or to the freshman seminar program; for the second semester,
Pthese assigrmients are reversed.
The freshman English program emphasizes the development of skills in
expository writing, since clear writing is not only convincing evidence of clear
thinking but is a central requirement for most advanced academic work at
Haverford. A few freshmen who demonstrate mastery of such writing skills
may be exempted from freshman English.
Each 12-man section of freshman English meets for two discussion
periods weekly. In addition, the section divides into four-man tutorials, which
meet weekly. Each student is expected to write a paper every second week.
The reading for the course consists of literature covering several genres.
Grading for the course will be in the form of written evaluations.
In most cases the teacher of the student's freshman English or freshman
seminar section will serve as the student's adviser for the first month.
However, if the student's teacher is new to Haverford, an experienced
averford teacher will be assigned as adviser. After the first month, the
/
student is free to select a "permanent adviser" from among his experienced
Haverford teachers. The only factor limiting his choice will be the advising
load of the faculty member he selects.
What was formerly called the Freshman Inquiry (see catalog p. 48) is
now the Freshman Conference. The name was changed to emphasize the
advisory function of the program. m
In the spring of his freshman year, each student is required to
participate in a Freshman Conference. The purpose of the conference is to
advise the student through a review of his performance and future study
plans.
The conference consists of an oral discussion with two faculty members
and two seniors, representing different divisions of the college. In prepara-
tion, each participating student must prepare an essay describing his current
intellectual position and submit a justified plan for his future course of study.
As with most colleges, rising costs have forced Haverford to raise fees
for 1971-72. Tuition is now $2,425 for the academic year; room and board is
$1,450. Weekly maid service is no longer provided. In line with the increased
fees, the refund for students who withdraw more than four weeks before the
end of a semester, or who are absent because of illness for more than four
weeks, has been increased to $25 per week.
During the past year, the renovation of Barclay Hall dormitory was
completed. In 1971-72, Barclay will house some 120 students, mostly
freshmen. In 1971-72, some 113 women students from Bryn Mawr College
are expected to live in portions of Guiranere, Jones, Leeds, Lloyd and Lunt
dormitories; an equal number of Haverford students will live at Bryn Mawr.
If you would like additional information on programs at Haverford,
you can consult the 1970-72 Haverford catalog or write to the proper person
as indicated in the Correspondence Directory, page 218 of the 1970-72
catalog. For information on Academic and Faculty Affairs, write to Thomas
J. D' Andrea, acting provost and dean of the faculty for 1971-72.
i
1152
I
FACULTY
AND
AD MIIMi STRATI ON
FACULTY
John R, Coleman president
B.A., University of Toronto; M.A. , and Ph.D., University of Chicago; LL.D,
Beaver College; LL.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Manuel J. Asensio ........ professor of romance languages, emeritus
B.A. , University of Granada; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Hugh Borton ..... ... president, emeritus
B.S., Haverford College; A.M., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of
Leyden; LL.D., Temple University; LL.D., University of Pennsylvania; LL.D.,
Haverford College.
Howard Comfort ........ professor of cu^ssics, emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
^Thomas E. Drake . professor of American history, emeritus
A.B., Stanford University; A.M., University of Michigan; Ph.D., Yale University.
Cu\YTON W. Holmes professor of engineering, emeritus
B.S. in M.E. and M.E. , University of New Hampshire; M.A. , Haverford College.
Archibald Macintosh ...... vice president and director of admissions, emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M., Colvombia University; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania; LL.D., Haverford college.
Cletus 0. Oakley ..... professor of mathematics, emeritus
S.B., University of Texas; S.M. , Brown University; Ph.D., University of Illinois.
Abraham Pepinsky ..... professor of psychology, emeritus
A.B., and AJl., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., State University of Iowa.
Harry W. Pfund ....... professor of german, emeritus
B.A., Haverford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Frank J. Quinn .■ professor of English, emeritus
B.A. , M.A. , and B. Litt. , Oxford University.
Roy E. Randall professor of physical education and
director of intercollegiate athletics, emeritus
^ Ph.B., Brown University.
Leon H. Rittenhouse professor of engineering, emeritus
M.E. , Stevens Institute of Technology.
Ralph F1, Sargent, . , francis b. gummere professor of englisH/ emeritus
A.B., Carleton College; Ph.D., Yale University,
Edward D. Snyder professor of englisH/ emeritus
A.B., Yale University; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Douglas Van Steere t. wistar brown professor of philosophy/ emeritus
S.B., Michigan State College; B.A. and M.A. , Oxford University; A.M. and Ph.D.,
Harvard University; D.D., Lawrence College; L.H.D. , Oberlin College; L.H.D.,
Earlham College; S.T.D., General Theological Seminary; LL.D., Haverford Colleg^
Howard F1. TeaF/ Jr professor of economics, emeritus
B.S. in Economics, M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
PROFESSORS
Manuel J, Asensio+++ , , , .professor of romance languages
B.A. , University of Granada; M.A. and Ph.D. , University of Pennsylvania.
John Ashmead, Jr professor of English
A.B. , A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Richard' J, Bernstein professor of philosophy
A.B., University of Chicago, B.S., Columbia University, M.A. and Ph.D., Yale
University.
Edwin B, Bronner , professor of history
A.B., Whittier College; M.A. , Haverford College; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania.
Robert H. Butman. ....,.,■.■. director of DRAm with rank of professor
ON JOINT appointment WITH BRYN MAWR COLLEGE
B.A. and M.A., University of North Carolina.
William E. Cadbury, Jr.**** director/ post-baccalaureate I
FELLOWSHIP PROGRAM AND PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY^
B.S. and M.A. , Haverford College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
John R. Gary professor of german
B.A. , Haverford College; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University.
John P. Chesick professor of chemistry
B.S., M.S. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Bradford Cook professor of romance languages
B.A., Williams College; Ph.D., Yale University.
William C. Davidon professor of physics
B.S., M.S. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
John W. Davison ■ professor of music
B.A. , Haverford College; A.M., Harvard University; Ph.D., University of
Rochester.
Frances De Graaff professor of Russian
ON joint appo indent with bryn mwR college
Ph.D., University of Leyden.
**** On leave of absence, 1971-72
+++ On appo indent, 1971-72
Paul J. R. Desjardins . professor of philosophy
B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
William Docherty, Jr professor of physical education and
DIRECTOR of PHYSICAL EDUCATION
S. B., Temple University.
Harmon C, Dunathan ..,,.., professor of chemistry
B.A. , Ohio Wesleyan University; M.S. and Ph.D., Yale University.
" Irving Finger, professor of biology
B.A. , Swarthmore College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Harvey Glickman professor of political science
A.B., Princeton University;A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Lduis C, Green professor of astronomy.
and director/ strawbridge memorial observatory
A.B. ,A.M. and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Marcel N. Gutwirth***, professor of romance languages
A.B. , Columbia College;A.M. and Ph.D. , Columbia University.
A, Paul Hare professor of sociology
B.A. , Swarthmore College ; B. S. , Iowa State University; M.A. University of Penn-
sylvania; Ph.D., University of Chicago.
DouGUs H, Heath professor of psychology
A.B., Amherst College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Theodore B. Hetzel** professor of engineering
B.S. , Haver ford College; B.S. in M.E., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. and
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University.
f Holland Hunter. ... professor of economics
B.S., Haverford College;A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Dale H. Husemoller professor of mathematics
B.A. (University of Minnesota; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
John A. Lester, Jr?** professor of English
B.S. , Haver ford College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Ariel G. Ldewy professor of biology
B.S. and M.S., McGill University ; Ph.D. , University of Pennsylvania.
Colin F. I^cKay professor of chemistry
B.S. , University of Notre Dame;M.S. and Ph.D. , University of Chicago.
LjDUIS MaCKEY*+<- VISITING PROFESSOR OF PHILOSOPHY
A. B., Capital University;M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Sidney I. Perloe professor of psychology
B.A. , New York University;Ph.D. (University of Michigan.
Frank J. QuiNfsH-H- professor of English
B.A.,M.A. and B.Litt. , Oxford University.
h WiLLi/w H. Reese . . . professor of music and director of glee club and orchestra
r A. B., Amherst College; M.A. , Columbia University; Ph.D., University of Berlin.
**^ a^ sabbatical leave, second semester, 1971-72.
On sabbatical leave.
APPOIN-mENT, 19/1-72
Edgar S. Rose professor of English
A.B. , Franklin and Marshall College; A.M. , and Ph.D., Princeton University.
Melvin Santer. ■ . , professor of biology
B.S., St. John's University; M.S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., George
Washington University.
Alfred W. Satterthwaite , , professor of English
A.B. , A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Gerhard E. Spiegler*** provost and professor of religion "
D.B., M.A., and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
John P. Spielman, Jr professor of history
B.A. , University of Montana; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
Thomas A, Benham , associate professor of engineering
B.S. and M.S., Haverford College.
Thomas J. D'Andrea acting provost and associate professor of psychology
B.A. and Ph.D., University of Minnesota.
Robert K Gavin, Jr associate professor of chemistry
B.A. , St. John's University; Ph.D., Iowa State University.
Linda G. Gerstein***, ... associate professor of history
B.A. and M.A. , Radcliffe College; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Daniel J. Gillis , associate professor of classics
B.A., Harvard College; M.A. and Ph.D., Cornell University.
Dietrich Kessler*** associate professor of biology j
B.A. , Swarthmore College; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin. m
L. ArYEH KdSMAN ****. .... ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF PHILOSOPHY
B.A. and M.A., University of California; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Roger Lane .associate professor of history
B.A. , Yale University; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Richard Luman associate professor of religion
A.B., A.M. and Ph.D., University of Iowa.
Wyatt PIacGaffey associate professor of anthropology
B.A. and M.A., Cambridge University; Ph.D., University of California, Los
Angeles.
John W. McKenna. . scull associate professor of
ENGLISH CONSTITLTTIONAL HISTORY
B.A. , Amherst College; M.A. , Columbia University; Ph.D., Cambridge University.
DOUGUS G. NiLLER** ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF PHYSICS
A.B. , Yale University; Ph.D., University of Rochester.
R. Bruce Partridge associate professor of astronomy
on the sloan foundation grant
B.A., Princeton University; D. Phil., Oxford University. A
Joseph Russo. . ... associate professor of classics
B.A. , Brooklyn College; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
** On sabbatical leave, second semester, 1971-72.
»*«
sabbatical leave,
****0n leave of absence, 1971-72.
James F. SLIFKER^-H- visiting associate professor of mathematics
B.S., Loyola College; Ph.D., University of Notre Dame.
Charles Stegeman assxiate professor of fine arts
Academie Royale des Beaux-Arts, Brussels.
JosiAH D, Thompson, Jr associate professor of philosophy
B.A.,M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
I CU\UDE E. WiNTNER ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY
' A. B. , Princeton University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS
KATRIN T. BeAN+++ . ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF GERMAN
B.A., Rockford College; M.A. , and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College.
R. Christopher Cairns assistant professor of fine arts
A.B. ,Oberlin;M.F.A. , Tulane University.
DisKiN Clay. . . assistant professor of classics
B.A. , Reed College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Washington.
Vernon Dixon. assistant professor of economics
B.B.A., Manhattan College; M.S., Columbia University; M.A. , Princeton
University
ASOKA GaNGADEAN **** ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF PHILDSOPHY
B.A. , City College of New York; Ph.D., Brandeis University.
Jerry P. Gollub assistant professor of physics
A.B.,Oberlin College; A.M., Harvard University; Ph.D., Harvard University.
assistant professor of economics
A. B., Reed College; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University.
G, Eric Hansen***** assistant professor of political science
A.B., Lawrence School; A.M., M.A.L.D. and Ph.D., The Fletcher School of Law
and Diplomacy, Tufts University.
William F. Hohenstein assistant professor of sociology
A.B., Maryknoll Seminary; M.A., University of Pennsylvania.
J. Bruce Ldng assistant professor of religion
B.A. , Baylor University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago.
Richard J. Lubarsky assistant professor of English
B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. , University of Pennsylvania.
Elaine FIaimonh-i- assistant professor of English
B. A., M.A. , and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Maria flARSHALL+ assistant professor of german
D_iplom-Psychologin, University of Munich.
Patrick FIcCarthy assistant professor of romance languages
A. M. , Harvard University; D. Phil., Oxford University.
Danielle R. niHRAM+++ assistant professor of romance unguages
I B.A., University of Sidney;. Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
**** On leave of absence, 1971-72
n>, ^j^^^ Qp absence, first SEMESTER 1971-72
+ On appointment, first semester 1'
++ On appointment, second semester
-H-f On appointment, 1971-72
ii?2
Robert A, PIortimer assistant professor of political science
AND DIRECTOR OF AFRICAN STUDIES
B. A., Wesleyan University; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University.
Joseph Neisendorfer. ........ assistant professor of mathematics
on the sloan foundation grant
B.S., University of Chicago; M.A. , Princeton University.
Doris Quinn. assistant professor of English ^
B.A. and M.A. , Oxford University. m
J. Kemp Randolph assistant professor of physics
ON THE SLOAN FOUNDATION GRANT
B.A. , Williams College; Ph.D., Harvard University.
James C. Ransom assistant professor of English
B. A., University of New Mexico; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Michael K. Showe . assistant professor of biology
B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., University of California, San Diego.
Sara M. Shumer assistant professor of political science
A.B., Barnard College; M.A., University of California, Berkeley.
Robert E. Stiefel. assistant professor of german
A.B., Oberlin College; A.M. and Ph.D., Harvard University.
Walter J. Treu. assistant professor of physics
B.S., Brovm University; Ph.D., Stanford University.
Sidney R. Waldman assistant professor of political science
A.B., Oberlin College ; Ph. D. , University of North Carolina.
i
Andrzej Zabludowski assistant professor of philosophy
on the sloan foundation grant
M.A. and Ph.D., University of Warsaw.
INSTRUCTORS
Dorothy Borei-hh- , , , , instructor in history
B.A. , Lycoming College; M.A., State University of New York at Binghampton.
FrEDERICA W. BrIND instructor in ENGLISH
A.B. and M.A. , Bryn Mawr College.
Constant I NE 6. CAFFENTZIS^^^- instructor in philosophy
B.A. , City College of New York.
Rosemary Desjardins+ . . instructor in philosophy
B.A., M.A. , University of Melbourne
David L. Elder-h- instructor in center for non-violent conflict resolution
B.A., and M. A., Oberlin College.
JEFFRY GaLPER+ INSTRXTOR IN CENTER FOR NON-VIOLENT CONFLICT RESOLUTION
B.A. , Dartmouth College; M.S., Columbia University.
Daniel Larkin instructor in religion
B. A., Haverford College; M.A. , University of Chicago. M
+ On appo indent for first semester, 1971-71
++ On appointment for^second semester, 1971-7^
+++ Oj appointment, 1971-72
John FIasley-h-i- , , instructor in mathematics
B.S., University of Notre Dame. *
James A, SMIT^+^-H- instructor in psychology
A.B., Harvard College; M.A. , University of Pennsylvania.
Janet Young-h-h. instructor in economics
B. A., McGill University.
LECTUERS
HaROU: B0ATRITE+++ LECTURER IN MUSIC
D. Mus., Combs College of Music.
Wendy Gollub-i-h- . , . , lecturer in center for non-violent conflict resolution
A.B., Oberlin College; Ed. M. , and Ph.D., Harvard University
ZeLBERT FIOORE-H- , . LECTURER IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
B.A., and M.A. , University of Oklahoma.
Temple Painter++ ,.,,., lecturer in music
B.Mus., Curtis Institute.
William Paul-+++ visiting lecturer in humanities
B.A., Columbia College; M.A. , Columbia University
Paul E. Wehr , lecturer in sociology
B.A. , University of Connecticut; M.A. , University of North Carolina; Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania.
Tadeusz Krauze-i-h- lecturer in political science
M.A., University of Lodz.
SPECIAL APPQINTOfrS
John E. Butler assistant in biology
Thomas Davis assistant in the science division
Francis De Pasquale. .... member of the resident chamber music group
Cellist, Philadelphia Orchestra, De Pasquale Quartet.
Joseph De Pasquale member of the resident chamber music group
Diploma, Curtis Institute of Music; Violist, Philadelphia Orchestra Member,
De Pasquale Quartet.
Robert De Pasquale member of the resident chamber music group
New School of Music; Violinist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member, De Pasquale
Quartet.
William De Pasquale member of the resident chamber music group
violinist, Philadelphia Orchestra; Member De Pasquale Quartet; Concert Master,
Philadelphia Orchestra for Robin Hood Dell Summer Concerts.
FIarthalyn Dickson student involvement coordinator,
center for non-violent conflict resolution
A.B., Asbury College; M.A., Cornell University.
Sylvia Glickman pianist in residence of the resident chamber music group
B.S. and M.Sc, Juillard School of Music; L.R.A.M., Royal Academy of Music.
++ On appointment for second semester, 1971-72
■H-fON APPOINTMENT, 1971-72
Elizabeth U, Green , research assxiate in biology
A.B., M.A. , and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College.
I^RY HoxiE Jones. research associate in quaker studies
A.B., Mount Holyoke College.
Louise G. Onorato , . laboratory instructor in biology
B.S., Wilkes College; M.S., Temple University.
Rudolph ToLBERT community organization assistant field coordinator, J
center for non'-violent conflict resolution ^
James L. Vaughan , director of counseling services
B.A. Earlham College; B.D., Yale Divinity School; M.S. Yale University.
Jane Widseth , , . counselor
B.A., University of Minnesota; M.A. , Boston University.
APPOINTI^BirS mm SPECIAL GRAMTS
Carolyn von Allmen research assistant in biology
B.A., Skidmore College.
PI^bel N. Chen , , . research assxiate in astronomy
B.S., The National Taiwan University; M.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College.
Linda J. Dilworth. ..■■.......■ research assistant in biology
Russell Eisenman research associate in center for non-
violent conflict resolution
B.A. , Oglethorpe University; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Georgia.
i
Carol C. Heller .,....,. research assistant in biology
B.A. , Wilson College.
Eleanor K. Kdlchin research assxiate in astronomy
B.A. , Brooklyn College.
Philip J. Krape. research assistant in biolxy
B.A. , University of Pennsylvania.
Patricia Uuanchy research assistant
B.S., University of Michigan; M.S., Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn
Cecily D. Littleton . research associate in astronomy
B.A. and B.Sc, Oxford University.
Patricia I^rker research assistant in biology
Slavica S. Matacic , research associate in biology
B.S., M.S., and Ph.D., University of Zagreb.
Ann flEANY . . research assistant in biology
B.A. , New York State University College at Brockport.
ViVIANNE T. NAChf^IAS RESEARCH ASSXIATE IN BIOLXY
B.A., Swarthittore College; M.A. Radcliffe College; M.D. , University of
Rochester. M
Dean Peabody research assxiate in center for non-
violent CONFLICT resolution
B.A. , Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Harvard University.
Ursula V. Santer research associate in biology
B.S., Swarthmore College; M.S. and Ph.D., Yale University.
Sara Shane research assistant in biology
B.A. , Swarthmore College.
Allen G. Shenstone research associate in astronomy
B.A. , Swarthmore College.
) Harriet Stone research assistant in biology
B.A. , Antioch College.
ADMINISTRATION
John R. Coleman president
B.A^, University of Toronto; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Chicago; LL.D.,
Beaver College; LL.D. , University of Pennsylvania.
William W. Ambler director of admissions
B.A. , Haverford College.
William F. Balthaser . director of public relations
B.S., Temple University.
Elmer J. Bogart superintendent of buildings and grounds
Temple University Technical Institute.
William E. CadburY/ Jr director of post-baccalaureate fellowship program
B.S. and M.A. , Haverford College; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Stephen G. Gary vice president for development
B.A. , Haverford College; M.A., Col\ambia University.
George N. Couch public reutions associate
B.A., Haverford College.
Delores R. Davis recorder
Thomas J. D 'Andrea acting provost and dean of the faculty
B.A. and Ph.D., University of Minnesota.
Janet Henry. ... administrative aide
Gregory Kannerstein assistant to the president
B.A. , Haverford College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania.
James W. Lyons dean of students
B.A. , Allegheny College; M.S. and Ed.D., Indiana University.
Wayund Melton assistant dean of students
B.S., Missouri Valley College.
Zelbert L. Moore assistant to the president
B.A. and M.A. , University of Oklahoma.
Charles Perry associate director of development
B.A. , Haver ford College.
David Potter associate dean of the college
B.A., Haverford College; Ed.M., Temple University.
WiLLiw^ A. Shafer, Jr assistant director of admissions
B. A., Haverford College.
William E. ShepparD/II director of alumni affairs
B.S., Haverford College.
Charles W, Smith vice president for business affairs
F.C.A., Institute of Chartered Accountants'; A.C.I.S., Chartered Institute of
Secretaries; CPA.
Gerhard E. Spiegler***, . . provost and dean of the faculty
D.B., M.A., and Ph.D., University of Chicago. ^
Dana W, Swan, II director of athletics "
B.A., Swarthmore College.
Stephen P. Theophilos, ■ , , , , assistant business manager
B.A., and B.D., Hellenic College; M.S., Boston University.
Paul E. Wehr director of the center for research on
non-violent conflict resolution
B.A. , University of Connecticut;M.A. , University of North Carolina; Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania.
M, Jane Williams. . ■ assistant director of development
B.A. , University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , Temple University.
John A. Williams, .,.,.. , , .assistant director of admissions
B.A., Haverford College.
feiCAL STAF
William W. Lander physician
B.S., Ursinus College; M.D. , University of Pennsylvania.
Peter G. Bennett. , psychiatrist
B.A. , Haverford College; M.D., University of Pennsylvania. M
FIargaret L. Gledhill head nurse
R.N.
LIBRARY STAF
Edwin B. Bronner, ■ . , . librarian; curator of the quaker collection
B.A. , Whittier College; M.A. , Haverford College; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania .
Barbara L. Curtis cataloger, quaker collection
B.A., Bryn Mawr College; M.A.T., Radcliffe College; M.S.{L.S.), Drexel
University.
David A. Eraser associate librarian, administration
B.A., Hamilton College; M.A. and M.S. CL.S.), Syracuse University.
Else Goldberger acquisitions librarian
Ph.D., University of Vienna.
PI, Constance Hyslop ........ circulation and government documents librarian
B.A. , Mount Holyoke College; M.A. , University of Pennsylvania; M.S. (L.S.),
Drexel University .
Bjorg FIiehle reference librarian I
University of Oslo; Graduate, Norwegian State Library School; B.S. O^.S.I, ^
Drexel University.
***0n sabbatical leave 1971-72
RhONA OvEDOFF. CATALOG LIBRARIAN
B.A. and Dip. Lib., University of the Witwatersrand.
Esther R. Ralph assistant librarian, reader services
B.S., West Chester State College; B.S. (L.S.), Drexel University.
Ruth H. Reese associate librarian, technical services
B.A., Acadia University; B.S. (L.S.), Simmons College.
Sylvia Schnaars serials librarian
B.A. , Ohio Wesleyan University; M.S. (L.S.), Villanova University.
Herbert C. Standing catalog librarian
B.A. , William Penn College; M.A., Haverford College; B.D., Drake University;
M.S. (L.S.), Drexel University.
Shirley Stowe sxial sciences bibliographer
B.A., Radcliffe College; M.S. CL.S.), Drexel University.
THE JOIMT COMPUTING CENTER OF BRYN WWR,
HAVERFORD, SWARTTORE
Charles J. Springer. acting director
B.S., Union College.
David S, Bailey. systems analyst
B.S., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., University of Southern
California; Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Hazel C. Pugh. . operator
ACADB1IC COUNCIL
i
The Academic Council consists of the President as chairman; the Provost;
the Associate Dean as executive secretary; three elected divisional repre-
sentatives of the faculty, one to be elected yearly; and the two faculty rep-
resentatives to the Board. The Academic Council: 1) appoints the standing
faculty committees, 2) makes recommendations to the President on faculty
appointments, reappointments, promotions, and tenure in accordance with ac-
cepted procedures, and 3) may consider matters having college-wide academic
implications which are referred to it by the President and/or by members of
the Council. The elected members of the Academic Council for the academic
year beginning September 1, 1971 are Mr. Waldman (Social Sciences), Mr. Santer
(Natural Sciences), and Mr. Bernstein (Humanities).
STANDING COmiTTES OF THE FACULTY
(The President and Provost are ex-officio members of all committees)
Educational Policy: COLIN MACKAY , Chairman
DISKIN CLAY, IRVING FINGER, ROGER LANE, DAVID POTTER
Subcommittees :
Educational Facilities:
Computer-Library : JOHN CHESICK, Chairman
JOHN ASHMEAD, EDWIN BRONNER, LOUIS GREEN
Inter-College Acadsmic Cooperation: LOUIS GREEN, Chairman
FRANK QUINN, JOSEPH RUSSO
Distinguished Visitors: RICHARD LUMAN, Chairman
WYATT MACGAFFEY, MICHAEL SHOWE
Student Standings and Programs: PATRICK MCCARTHY, Chairman
WALTER TRELA, SARA SHUMER, DAVID POTTER
Subcommittee :
College Honors, Fellowships and Prizes: EDGAR ROSE , Chairman
PAUL DESJARDINS, DOUGLAS HEATH
Administrative Advisory: SIDNEY PERLOE, Chairman
HARMON DUNATHAN, DANIEL GILLIS , ALFRED SATTERTHWAITE, JOSIAH THOMPSON
Subcommittee :
Faculty Compensation, Study and Research: HOLLAND HUNTER, Chairman
WILLIAM DAVIDON, BRUCE LONG
1161
September, 1971
TO: Students, Faculty and Staff
FROM: Public Relations office
Attached are the photo portions of the class of 1975
and Faculty/Staff directories for the 1971-72 Haverford
Handbook. These pages were prepared during the suirimer
months, using in many cases photos supplied by the subjects
themselves. Where a suitable photo was not available, a
blank appears.
These pages have been printed and three-hole punched
to fit your loose-leaf Handbook binder. Discard this
cover page, carefully remove the staple and bind the
directory pages into the proper section of your Handbook.
The address and phone listing portions of the Student
and Faculty/Staff directories will be issued in October.
The Library Guide, Students' Guide and Catalog Supplement
will be distributed separately.
1156
I
i
BOARD OF MANAGERS 1971-1972
GIFFORDP. FOLEY
JOHN F. GUMMERE GAYLORD P. HARNWELL ARTHUR R. KANE, JR.
Kk^
NOT
AVAILABLE
DR. JAMES A. KATOWITZ STEPHEN L KLINEBERG BERNARD V. LENTZ BENJAMIN S. LOEWENSTEIN
BOARD OF MANAGERS 1971-1972
MAURICE A. WEBSTER, JR
JOHN C. WHITEHEAD
FACULTY-STAFF 71-72
►
NOT
AVAILABLE
W.W. AMBLER M. ASENSIO J. ASHMEAD W. F. BALTHASER K. BEAN
T. A. BENHAM P.G.BENNETT R.BERNSTEIN D. V. BOREI E. BOGART
>
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
F.W. BRIND E. BRONNER R. H. BUTMAN W. E. CADBURY C. CAFFENTZIS
C. CAIRNS
J. GARY
S. GARY J. P. CHESIGK D.CLAY
J. R. COLEMAN B. COOK
G. COUCH
NOT
AVAILABLE
J.H.DAVISON F.DE GRAFF P. DESJARDINS R. DESJARDINS V.J.DIXON
FACULTY-STAFF 71-72
W. DOCHERTY H. DUNATHAN D.L.ELDER L FINGER
NOT
AVAILABLE
A. GANGADEAN L. GERSTEIN D. J.GILLIS M. GLEDHILL H. GLICKMAN
E. GOLDBERGER J. GOLLUB
L. GREEN
S. GUBINS
M. GUTWIRTH
G. E. HANSEN A. P. HARE
D. H. HEATH
T. B. HETZEL W. F. HOHENSTEIN
D. KESSLER L A. KOSMAN T.KRAUZE W.W.LANDER D. LARKIN
FACULTY-STAFF 71-72
J.W.LYONS W. MACGAFFEY C. MAC KAY
I
L. H. MACKEY
I
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
E.MAIMON
M. MARSHALL
NOT
AVAILABLE
P. MCCARTHY J.W. MCKENNA
J. MASLEY W. C. MELTON
NOT
AVAILABLE
J. K. RANDOLPH J. C. RANSOM
FACULTY-STAFF 71-72
NOT
f ^ ^
AVAILABLE
•i. -'■'■ ,
^
R.REESE W.REESE E.S.ROSE J. RUSSO A. SATTERTHWAITE
%
S. SCHNAARS W. A. SHAFER W. SHEPPARD M. K. SHOWE S. SHUMER
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
^^
J.SLIFKER C.W.SMITH J.SMITH G. SPIEGLER J.SPIELMAN
NOT
AVAILABLE
C. SPRINGER C. STEGEMAN R.E. STIEFEL S. STOWE
D. SWAN
NOT
AVAILABLE
P. E. WEHR J.A.WILLIAMS M.J.WILLIAMS C. WINTNER J.YOUNG
I
FACULTY-STAFF 71-72
A. ZABLUDOWSKI A. ZANIN
I
i
i
i
CLASS OF 1975
NOT
AVAILABLE
R. B. ADAMS
NOT
AVAILABLE
S. J.ANDERSON B. P. BAKKE T. W. BARLOW 0. E. BARNES, JR
W. A. BEDROSSIAN R.W.BIRCH J.W. BLENKO
A.J. BORSON P. E. BOSTED J. P. BRENNAN
A. BROMBERG S. L. BRONSTEIN F. C. BROSIUS
F. J.BUZOLITS G.J. CACCHIONE B.H.CAMPBELL G. B. CARGILL J. S. CARP
CLASS OF 1975
T. CARROLL
7^
G.L CORNELL J. L CRITE E. T. CROOKS G.R.CUNNINGHAM D. Y. CURRAN
C. A. DALE R. H. DAVISON R. DE JESUS A. F. DOAN L, M. DOLLET
,J^
1 i £.
R.M.DOUGLAS M.N.DUNCAN C.N.EDMONDS C.M.EDWARDS ^ D. D. ENGEL
C.EVANS S.C.EVANS E. D. FEiGELSON P. L. FINE J. D. FLOWER, JR.
'■AMBbM HmT^' iktek.
J. B. FLOYD G. B. FOOTE C. S. FORMAL J. M. FOX
L M. FREDANE
CLASS OF 1975
I
m p. C.GREIF L. R. GROBMAN D. P. HACKETT D. A. HANSELL J. W. HARRER
L. A. HAUSNER
S. G. HEALD
>
S.N.HERMAN P.J.HOCHMAN D. M. HUDIAK
J. K. HUIBREGTSE P. T. INGMUNDSON D.A. IRACKI T. E. ISENBERG R.S. JANETT
'^•JENKINS E.L. JURIST D. A. KAHN H. E. KAVROS D. YOUNG SOON KIM
CLASS OF 1975
NOT
AVAILABLE
f^ I
A.J. KROL
J.M. KROM P. L. KUHL S.N.KURTZ A. C. LAPEYRE
i
A. C. LARNER
T.H. LEIGH H.M. LEVIT M. J. LIGHTEN
J.P. MCGLAFFERTY
J.M. MGGREIGHT
i
^^
\ fjKi
J. L. MALIN M. MANDELKERN T. A. MANZONE
S. MASON, JR. L. S. MILLER
W.E, MURPHY J. NAGEL R. D. NAGELE N. NANDHABIWAT C. E. NEELLEY
CLASS OF 1975
^fk iM
H.W. NEIGHBORS J.E. NESTLER B. P. NEWBURGER B. NEWHWN
T. J. PELL
T.J.PENDLETON C.M.PERKINS J.P. QUINLAN D.U.RABIN J. A. RODRIGUEZ
G. P. ROMANSKY A. ROOT L. C. RUFFIN, JR. M. J. RUSS M. M. RUTTER
J. L SAMPLE J.E. SARFATY C. L. SCHOEN R. SCHOUTEN C. F. SEIGLER
E. D.SHAVIN - R. K. SHEUNEIII M. SHENKER S. A. SHERK S. B. SHUBERT
CLASS OF 1975
NOT
AVAILABLE
i
iiil
k
\ z:
D, B. SITMAN D. M. W. SKEELS
NOT
AVAILABLE
A.J.SMITH J.R. SOLENDER J. E. SPAULDING M. D. SPINRAD A. R. STEIN
W. W. SUDERLEY J. R. SUSSMAN D. W. THOMFORDE G. M. TOBIN A.S.TOBY
T. TSUJIMGTO S, TUHRIM E. N. TURKHEIMER P. N. UHLIG S. C. VAUGHN, JR.
K. WEAVER J.C. WEISBERG S.M.WERNER D. M. WESSEL M.B.WILLIAMS
R.E.WILLIS R.J.WILLIS P.W.WOOD J.W.WRIGHT
W. B.YOUNG
CLASS OF 1975
Y.ZEGEYE K.J. ZIMMER B. L ZUBROW
FORMER SPECIAL STUDENTS, NOW FULL-TIME
NOT
AVAILABLE
S. B. COOK A. C. CRUZ
I
J.S.DUNN
. H.FINKLE R. GENTILE
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
J. E. GOLIN C. GOUTMAN S. E. O'GRADY E. J. SCHORK, JR. M. A. SPRINGER
H.D. UDERMAN R.I.WHITE E.W.WRIGHT
TRANSFERS ARRIVING
AT H AVERFORD 1971-72
NOT
AVAILABLE
NOT
AVAILABLE
J.VANOUS P.M.WASHINGTON
i
I
a
^
LIBRARY
GUIDE
I
HAVERFORD COLLEGE
1971
AVERFORD COLLEGE LIBRARY The library at Hoverford College
consist's of two main parts: the 'Thomas Wistar Brown Library,
portions of which date from 1864; and the James P. Magi 1 1 Library,
completed in 1968. When the Magi 1 1 Ubrary was built, extensive
alterations and improvements also were made to the older structure.
The Library has some 73,000 sq. ft. of floor space. Its shelves
will hold a half-million volumes, and it can seat 500 persons. Air and humidity
are controlled throughout the building. Rare books and manuscripts are guarded
in a fireproof vault protected by a carbon -dioxide fire -extinguishing system. There
are 260 carrels. Thirty-one are enclosed and reserved for faculty use, and 24 are
reserved for students who wish to use typewriters. The original north wing of the
Library building was renovated in 1952 and named the Philips Wing in honor of
one of the college's principal benefactors, William Pyle Philips, a member of the
Class of 1902.
WHO MAY USE THE LIBRARY This is a private library provided for the use of
the faculty, students, and other members of the
Hoverford academic community. It is not open to the general public. Exceptions
to this rule are made for several categories of persons. Students and faculty of
Bryn Mawr College and of Swarthmore College are extended use of the library upon
presentation of proper identification. Hoverford College alumni, members of the
Library Associates, and faculty members of neighboring colleges and universities
may also use the library, and will be provided library cards. Other persons wish-
ing to use the library, including checking out books, will be asked to pay an
annual fee of fifteen dollars. Regulations are available at the Circulation Desk,
This fee will not be collected from persons wishing to check references in the
library. Such visitors will be asked to sign a visitor's book and are requested
to come during the day, in order to leave the library free for Hoverford and Bryn
Mawr students in the evening, after 7:30 p.m.
LIBRARY HOURS MAIN LIBRARY: 8:30 a.m. to 12 midnight, Monday - Friday;
Saturday/ 8:30 a.m. to 6 p.m.; Sunday, I p.m. to 12 mid-
night. The Quaker Collection: 9 a.m. to 12:30 p.m., and 1:30 p.m. to 5 p.m.,
Monday - Friday. DEPARTMENTAL LIBRARIES: Stokes: Monday - Friday, 9 a.m.
to 6 p.m., 7 p.m. to 12 midnight; Saturday, 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.; Sunday, I p.m.
to 6 p.m., 7 p.m. to 12 midnight. Sharp I ess (Biology): Monday -Saturday,
8 a.m. to II p.m.; Sunday, 2 p.m. to II p.m. Hi lies (Engineering): Monday -
Friday, 8 a.m. to 6 p.m.; 7 p.m. to 10 p.m.; Saturday, 8 a.m. to 6 p.m.;
7 p.m. to 10 p.m.; Sunday, closed. Drinker (Music): Hours to be posted at
Drinker and in Main Library. Observatory: Open by appointment.
CARD CATALOG To ascertain whether a book is owned by the Library, look
in the Cord Catalog under the author's name, the title of
the book, or the name of the editor or translator of the book. When works on a
certain subject, rather than a specific book, are wanted, these can be found by
looking in the catalog under the appropriate subject heading, e.g., a German -
English dictionary could be found under the heading "GERMAN LANGUAGE —
DICTIONARIES ~ ENGLISH."
In order to find the book in the stacks after deciding, by consulting the
catalog, which book or books will be useful, it is necessary to note (in writing)
fhe call number (including any caption above fhe number), which will be found
in the upper left hand comer of the catalog card. The call number (example:
HC 102. 5. A2 H7) tells where in the Library the book is shelved. (See alpha-
betical location guide below.) If the book wanted is not found in its place on
the stack shelves, the call number should be given to the attendant at the Circu-
lation Desk, who will be able to give its location.
Green slips in the Card Catalog indicate new books. If a full call number
is penciled on the slip, the book is on the shelves. If a single number (between
I and 365) is on the slip, ask the circulation attendant for the book.
Special locations for books (e.g., Gummere-Morley Room, Philips Wing,
Music Library, Biology or some other laboratory) are indicated on the catalog
cards by captions printed over the call numbers. In these cases, the book will be
found not in the same area of the main library as other books with the same
classification but in the particular room of the Library or in the other building
mentioned. An asterisk (*) beside a call number indicates that the book is over-
sized; if the book is not in its normal place on the shelf, it is shelved on the
bottom shelf in the same section of the stack, in some instances oversized books
are located elsewhere. Consult the circulation attendant.
The Haverford Card Catalog includes author cards for all books added to the
Bryn Mawr College Library since 1947. It also contains full entry (author, sub-
ject, title) cards for Russian holdings at Bryn Mawr and Swarthmore. Books are
not to be put back on the shelf by the reader. They should be left on the near-
est table.
ALPHABETICAL LOCATION GUIDE TO BOOKS BY CALL NUMBER
Classes
A CniNI'RAL WORKS
(General cncy'clopcdias, reference books, periodicals, etc.)
Basement
B PHILOSOPHY— RELIGION
B-BJ Philosophy, including BF, Psychology
BL-BX Religion Basement-ist Tier
BX 7600-7799 Quakerism 2nd Tier
C AUXILIARY SCIENCES OF HISTORY
CB History of civilization (General)
CC Archaeology
CD Archives
CJ Numismatics
CN, & 687-763 (old classif.) Epigraphy
CR Heraldry
CS Genealogy
CT Biography (General) 1st Tier
D HISTORY: GENERAL AND OLD WORLD
(Including geography of individual countries)
D World history, including World Wars 1st Tier
DA
Great Britain
DB
Austria
DC
France
DD, etc.
Other individual countries
\sf Tier
E-F HISTORY OF AMERICA
(Including geography of individual countries)
E 1-143 America (General)
E 151-857 United States (General)
F 1-957 United States: States and local
F 1001-1140 Canada
F 1201-3799 Spanish America Ist Tier
G GEOGRAPHY, ANTHROPOLOGY, FOLKLORE, ETC.
G Geography (General)
GB Physical geography
GC Oceanography
GN Anthropology
GR Folklore
GV Recreation 1st Tier
H SOCIAL SCIENCES
HA Statistics 3rd Tier
HB-HJ Economics 3rd-4fh Tiers
HM-HX Sociology 4th Tier
J POLITICAL SCIENCE
JA-JC Political science
JF-JQ Constitutional history and public
administration
JS Local government
JV Colonies, Emigration, etc.
JX International law 4th Tier
K & 276-299 (old classif.) LAW ' 4th Tier
4th Tier
M
N
MUSIC
M
Scores
ML
Literature of music
MT
Musical instruction
FINE ARTS
NA
Architecture
NB
Sculpture
NC
Graphic arts
ND
Painting
NK
Decorative arts
4th Tier
1st Tier
*Afev^ M books are kept in the main library; most are in Drinker Hall.
R
LANGUAGE
P
PA
PA 8000
PC
PD-PF
PG
PJ-PL
PN
PQ
PR
PS
PT
Fiction
SCIENCE
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QH
QK
QL
QM
QP
QR
MEDICINE
AND LITERATURE
Philology and ling^uistics
Classical languages and literatures
-8595 & 772-773 (ol'd classif.)
Medieval & Modern Latin literature
Romance languages
Germanic languages, including PE, English
Slavic languages and literatures
Oriental languages and literatures
General and comparative literature
Romance literatures 4th Tier
English literature 2nd Tier (South Wing)
American literature 3rd Ti er
Germanic literatures 5th Tier
Fiction in English. Juvenile literjiture 3rd Ti er
Mathematics
Astronomy
Physics
Chemistry
Geology
Natural history
Botany
Zoology
Human anatomy
Physiology
Bacteriology
5th Tier
5th Tier
AGRICULTURE
5th Tier
TECHNOLOGY
TA General engineering, including general civil
engineering
TC Hydraulic engineering
TD Sanitary and municipal engineering
TE Highway engineering
TF Railroad engineering
TG Bridge engineering
TH Building construction
TJ Mechanical engineering 5th Tier
**Location of Q (Science) books is determined by the caption above
the coll number. Q books kept in the main library have "Main
Library" above the call number on the catalog card. These books
are on the 5th tier. Biology laboratory Q books are in Sharpless;
Observatory Q books are in the Observatory; Engineering Q books
are in Hilles; all other Q books are in Stokes Library.
TK
Electrical engineering. Nuclear engineering
TL
Motor vehicles. Aeronautics. Astronautics
TN
Mining engineering. Mineral industries.
Metallurgy
TP
Chemical technology
TR
Photography
TS
Manufactures
TT
Handicrafts. Arts and crafts
TX
Home economics 5th
U MILITARY SCIENCE
V NAVAL SCIENCE
Tier
5th Tier
5th Tier
Z BIBLIOGRAPHY AND LIBRARY SCIENCE 5th Tier
Government and International Documents Basement
Reference 2ncl Tier
Current periodicals and newspapers 2nd Tier
Ruskin Collection 2nd Tier
FLOOR PLANS The Magi II Library has six levels; basement, Ist tier, 2nd tier
(where circulation desk, catalog, periodicals room, reference
section, and main reading room are), 3rd tier, 4th tier and (on older or north side
of the building only) 5th tier. Maps of the various areas are installed near the
stairways on each tier. These maps show the location of books and special rooms,
if at any time you need information about these matters, do not hesitate to inquire
at the circulation desk. Staff members will be glad to help you.
FECIAL ROOMS AND WORK AREAS Gummere-
Morley Room (Ist tier), a browsing room commemorat-
ing Professors F. B. Gummere and Frank Morley, Sr.
(Smoking permitted)
Microforms Room (2nd tier), equipped with micro-
films, microfiche, microcards, and readers.
Rufus M. Jones Study (2nd tier), a replica of Rufus
Jones' study, with some of his books and furniture.
The Quaker Collection (2nd tier) is housed in a suite of rooms. The new Borton
Wing includes the vault below the main floor and the Harvey Peace Research Room
on the balcony. The Quaker Collection contains 25,000 volumes, the Rufus M.
Jones Mysticism Collection, 100,000 manuscripts, a collection of microform
materials with readers, and other material. All of the manuscripts, including the
Charles Roberts Autograph Letters Collection, and all of the rare books of the
Library are housed in the vault in this area. The Quaker Collection, Borton Wing,
and Harvey Room are not undergraduate reading areas. Mrs. Barbara Curtis,
Quaker Bibliographer, will be happy to assist you in using this collection.
The Colli nson/Fothergi II Library (2nd tier. Philips Wing), is the name given
to the college's collection of pre-nineteenth-century imprints. A great number
of books in the collection are primary sources - sources more profitably used in
the pursuit of original research than in the composition of survey papers. This
port of the Ubrary is open only when there is an attendant on duty.
These books, mostly eighteenth-century items, form a commemorative
collection - honoring tv/o British Quaker scholars, associates of Benjamin Franklin
and patrons of American libraries. The one, Peter ColHnson, was the eighteenth-
century British botanist who gave books, advice, and energies to the budding
libraries of Pennsylvania, among them the Friends' Library of Philadelphia (now
in Haverford's custody); the other. Dr. John Fothergiil, one of Britain's great
physicians in the eighteenth century, patronized several literary projects, aided
the fledgling medical schools in the colonies, authored several volumes and, like
Collinson, was active in the Royal Society.
The Christopher Morley Alcove (2nd tier), at the east end of the building,
serves as a browsing area and contains exhibits and collections of Christopher
Morley' s writings.
The Sharpless Gallery (2nd tier), named in honor of Isaac Sharpless, presi-
dent of HaveriFord College, 1887-1917, and furnished by the Class of 1917, is a
public gallery where some of the college's paintings are hung and exhibits are
displayed.
The Hires Room (1st tier), named for Harrison Hires, Class of 1910, and
Mrs. Hires, is an audio room where discs and tapes can be heard. This room is
to be used primarily for listening to recordings of the spoken word.
The Strawbridge Seminar Room (1st tier), is used for seminars and committee
meetings. (Smoking permitted)
The C. C. Morris Cricket Library and Collection (2nd tier, off the Philips
Wing), named in honor of an internationally famous cricketer and a member of
the Class of 1904, houses material illustrating the history of American cricket
with special emphasis on the sport at Haverford College and in the Philadelphia
area. This room is not open for general undergraduate use.
The Crawford Mezzanine (2nd tier), in the South Wing provides writing and
study tables for forty-four students. It is named for Alfred R. Crawford, Class of
1931, vice-president of Haverford College, 1964-1966.
There is a reading area at the end of the South Wing (2nd tier), the gift
of the Class of 1942, with additional study tables and easy chairs; also a lounge
area on the 4th tier near the elevator.
NEWSPAPERS AND PERIODICALS The Periodicals Reading Room is located on
the main (second) floor adjacent to the Sharp-
less gallery. Mrs. Sylvia Schnaars, Periodical and Government Documents Librarian,
may be consulted in her office at the end of the room. Current issues of periodicals
may not be removed from this area by anyone except for Xeroxing, and bound
periodicals may be charged out only by members of the Haverford faculty. News-
papers, including a number of foreign language editions, are also to be found in
|-his room.
The New York Times is available on microfilm bock to 1851, the current
microfilms being received about tv/o weeks later than the paper. Microfilms and
readers are in the Microforms room (2nd tier) and the New York Times index is
shelved nearby in the Reference area. The Library also has films of the Philadelphia
Public Ledger from 1836 through 1929. Back numbers of other Philadelphia news-
papers are available on film at the Free Library of Philadelphia.
Quaker periodicals are housed in the Quaker Collection.
A metal visible file of titles and call numbers of ail periodicals received
currently will be found near the public card catalog and a copy of this list is in
the Periodicals Reading Room. The Kardex File in the Periodicals Reading Room
should be consulted for complete holdings of a given title which is currently
received. For holdings and call numbers of periodicals which the Library no longer
receives or which have been discontinued, consult the public card catalog.
The Union List of Serials and New Serial Titles are useful in verifying
information about periodicals and in locating those not available at Haverford.
These are kept in the Catalog Room.
U.S. GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS Haverford College Library Is a depository
for selected United States government
publications, with holdings concentrated in the following areas: Census bureau;
HEW; Labor; The President's Office; State Department. The bulk of this material
is housed as a separate collection in the basement, arranged by Superintendent of
Documents Schedule, which makes items easy to find. All of this material is
indexed in The Monthly Catalog of U.S. Government Publications, copies of which
may be found in the Periodicals Reading Room as well as in the basement with
the collection. A few publications are cataloged and shelved in the main library
collection and may be found by consulting the public card catalog.
EPARTMENTAL LIBRARIES Use of these departmental
libraries is restricted to Haverford, Bryn Mawr, and
Swarthmore College faculty and students. Anybody
else wishing to borrow a book from a departmental
library must apply to the circulation desk in the
main library and use the book there. He should
request the book 24 hours in advance of the time
it is needed.
Bound volumes of periodicals may be charged out
of a departmental library only by a member of the
faculty and only for use within the building where
the departmental library is located (or for use at the secretarial office for copy-
ing purposes). Current issues may not be charged out.
With the exceptions noted above, rules governing the use of departmental
libraries are the same as those applicable to the main library.
Carrels in the Stokes Science Library and the Biology departmental library
in Sharpless are assigned on a seniority basis to science majors. Books charged
for use in carrels may not be taken from the library rooms.
Smoking is not permitted in any departmental library.
All science libraries are administered by the Stokes Hall Librarian, whose
office is adjacent to the Stokes Library. Any questions regarding them should be
addressed to her.
To borrow a scienHfic publication through Interlibrary Loan, see or call the
Stokes Hall Librarian (Extension 269).
,^ yr^-.-r-,,^^, ^^, IRCULATION DEPARTMENT All books to be taken
, ,'fe /^^ 'm^ci^!^i^ O"*" °^ ^^^ Ubrary building must be charged at the
'' (f^iI'l^j^^^A^^^ o circulation desk. Use the colored cards found there.
"^'^^^^S^'^ff^^'^^^^^.^^ The call number found at the top of the bookplate or
^ u'^'f^^ ''^^tr^"' °" ^^^ spine of the book should be written rn the
r \i^y '^'^i!!^j/j0' '^ upper left hand corner of the card; then the borrower' s
^^^^^iB^J^^-^r name, status, and campus address. Finally, the name
*r|»i^^, '^]^^Hi-^ of the author and title of the book borrowed should
^ "^ be added.
The loan period is one semester, but any book may be recalled after a month, if
it Is required by someone else. Current fiction may be recalled within two weeks.
The front-door attendant will stamp the dye-date in the front of each book charged.
If you need assistance at the circulation desk and no one is in sight, ring
the bell.
A book in circulation may be reserved by giving the desk attendant the call
number of the book and asking to have it held. The person requesting the book
will be notified when the book has been returned.
To return a book which has been charged out, simply place it in the slot at
the circulation desk. When the Library is closed, the book slot at the entrance
should be used for the return of books.
BOOKS IN CARRELS Books kept in carrels must be charged at the circulation
desk on green cards labelled for carrel use, carrel num-
ber to be given instead of campus address. A long green slip with space for
carrel number at the top should be placed in each book. Any book without this
slip will be removed from the carrel.
BOOKS ON RESERVE Reserve books may be borrowed for two hours only,
unless an instructor has specified a longer period. They
must be used in the Library building. If they are not returned on time, the
borrower will be fined. If no one else needs the reserve book at the end of the
two hour period, however, it may be borrowed for another hour.
Reserve books taken out overnight are due back at 10:15 a.m., and the
borrower will be fined if they are not returned promptly.
CHECK OUT AT LIBRARY ENTRANCE The Library has suffered serious losses of
books, periodicals, and bound volumes of
periodicals in recent years, and has decided to institute a check-out system at
the door.
All persons leaving the library - faculty, students, and visitors - will be
asked to present their books to the checker for charging and will be asked to
open briefcases, bags, or other containers.
We regret that it has become necessary to follow this new procedure. We
feel, however, that it is the only way in which we can protect the library
collections, keep a record of the location of all material at all times, and
guarantee that books, periodicals, and other sources will be on the shelves when
they are needed.
PHOTOCOPYING A coin -operated machine has been installed in the Card
Catalog Area, on the second tier. The cost is 10 cents a
page. Please go to the circulation desk if the machine fails to operate properly.
INTERLIBRARY LOAN AND USE OF OTHER LIBRARIES When there is a need
for a book not owned
by the Haverford College Library, apply at the circulation desk for an interlibrory
loan form; if the work desired is one on a scientific subject, however, apply in
the Library in Stokes. The Interlibrory Loan Librarian, Mrs. Bjorg Miehle, will
In most cases be able to borrow the book from another library for use under the
terms and time limit stated by the lending library.
Haverford College students are permitted to use the Bryn Mawr and Swarth-
more College Libraries upon the presentation of their identification cards. They
must carry such cards with them. The University of Pennsylvania requires a special
card which may be obtained from the Circulation Librarian. The University of
Pennsylvania requires a new card each month. When using the library of another
college Haverford students are expected to acquaint themselves with the regulations
of that library and abide by them strictly.
REFERENCE SERVICE We hope you know that all members of the Library Staff
are willing to assist you with problems you may encounter
in using the library. The advice of a trained bibliographer is available through the
circulation desk, where you should make your needs known. There are three
bibliographers on the library staff. Miss Shirley Stowe (Social Sciences), Mr. David
Eraser (Humanities), and Mrs. Suzanne Newhall in the Stokes Library (Natural
Sciences). These people have specialized In learning the research techniques
peculiar to their fields and are anxious to share the short-cuts and time-savers
that make research In libraries less tedious and more efficient.
During periods of peak library use an additional Reference Service will be
available - a staff member will be stationed at the card catalog to offer suggestions
on library use, and to give direction to those of you who become entangled in
our bibliographic network.
To supplement our advising service, the Library has begun issuing a series
of pamphlets describing the most useful bibliographical tools in certain disciplines.
EW BOOKS New books are put on display daily on top
of the book case in front of the circulation desk. You may
place a "hold" on a new book and pick It up at the circu-
lation desk after 2 p.m. Mondays, when new books are
cleared for circulation. New books on science are sent
directly to the appropriate departmental libraries each Monday after they
have been removed from display. They may not be reserved.
The Librarian welcomes suggestions for new books. They should be
placed in the box provided on the new book shelf.
CARRELS Student carrels are located on all tiers except the 5th. To reserve
a carrel, inquire at the circulation desk. Typing carrels are on the
1st and 4th tiers (old stacks). Lockers where typewriters may be kept are on the
1st tier. To obtain the combination of one of these lockers, inquire also at the
circulation desk.
Enclosed carrels on the 1st and 4th tiers are reserved for faculty members.
10
TELEPHONES Two pay phones are available on the Isf Her, near the front stair door.
LIBRARY RULES The construction of the Magi 1 1 Library and renovation of the
older structure were made possible by the generosity of many
Haverford graduates and friends. Users of the building are expected to treat the
furnishings and equipment with appropriate care. We want to make this building
and the Library services as convenient and efficient as possible. In turn we require
that readers observe some simple rules which are necessary to assure proper mainte-
nance, safety, and comfort.
Smoking. Permitted only in the Strawbridge Seminar Room and the
Gummere-Morley Room, on the 1st tier.
Food and drink. Do not bring food or drinks into the building.
Animals. Please do not bring animals into the building.
Posters. Posters are allowed only in the display case at the front door and
on the board opposite the 2nd tier elevator.
Coats and umbrellas. These should be left in the racks andumbrella
stands provided.
Doors and windows must not be propped open.
Typing. Carrels where typewriters may be used are located on the south
side of the old stacks, 1st and 4th tiers.
"Abeunt studio in mores": Library books are not to be marked, torn,
defaced, or damaged in any way. Readers must observe silence in the
Library and must cooperate in maintaining an atmosphere conducive to
undisturbed study. They are responsible for proper care of Library tables
and chairs, as well as books. Imitation of Machiavelli ' s custom of donning
his best clothes before spending the evening in the company of ancient
authors is not required, but readers are expected to observe conventional
standards of dress and decorum at all times, and for all authors.
Fi nes. All books must be returned by the last day of the semester. A fine
of 25 cents a day per book is charged for books returned late to the circu-
lation desk.
The Library reserves the right to call in any book at any time, even be-
fore it is due. A fine of 25 cents a day is charged for books not returned
promptly in response to an "emergency recall."
A special schedule of fines applying to reserve books overdue is posted
on the library bulletin board near the Reserve desk.
All student fines remaining unpaid at the end of the semester following
that in which they were incurred will be doubled and charged against the
student's account.
The Library has an obligation to make every effort to regain books which
have not been returned by readers. In a very real sense the library
belongs to future generations of students as much as to current ones. May
we gently remind you that there are even legal steps which we may take
as a last recourse to regain books not returned to the Librory on time.
Lost books. Lost books should be reported immediately. From the date
on which they are reported lost, no more overdue fines wi|l accumulate.
The borrower is responsible, however, for payment of the cost of the book
and processing it. (If one volume of a set is lost and cannot be replaced,
the whole set must be paid for.)
NOTES ON ILLUSTRATIONS
The woodcut appearing on the cover of this guide is taken from Johann Geiler
von Kaisersberg' s Narrenschif. . . (Strassburg, 1520). It is ascribed to the young
Albrecht Durer. The cover design is typical of those appearing on sixteenth-
century imprints.
The initial "H" on page 2 is a decorated uncial, circa 1475.
The initial "S" on page 6 was designed by Hans Holbein. It was used by the
Basel printer Valentin Curio, 1522.
The initial "D" on page Sis taken from an alphabet designed in 1710 by the South
German writing master George Heinrich Pari ti us.
The initial "C" on page 9 is taken from an alphabet designed by the New Yorker
Daniel T. Ames in 1879.
The initial "N" on page 10 is taken from a wood engraving by Eric Gill which
appeared in The Four Gospels (1931).
*Each of the initials described here has been reduced from its original size.
12
Haverford College
STUDENTS' GUIDE
1971-72
Published by the Dean of Students for
the students of Haverford College, Haverford, Pa.
RESIDENCE HALLS
Opening and Closing. Rooms may be occupied from noon on Tuesday,
September 7, until noon on the day after Commencement, except for
vacation periods as noted below.
Vacation Residence. Students may occupy their own dormitory rooms
without additional cost during fall and Thanksgiving vacations. No
students may remain on campus between the first and second semesters.
Arrangements for spring vacation will be announced during the year.
Fees — Room and Board. The room and board fee of $1450 is due in two
equal installments. The first semester bill must be paid in full by
August 25, unless other arrangements have been explicitly made with
the Business Office. The second semester bill is due on January 7,
1972.
No refund of room rental is made if a student vacates his room
during a semester. If a student vacates his room during the first
semester, he will not be liable for a second semester room charge.
Room Assignments. In the spring students choose rooms for the follow-
ing year in a room draw giving priority to upperclassmen. A student
must receive consent of the Dean of Students to transfer his room
assignment. A student permitted to move must return the key of the
room vacated and obtain a new key for his new room. A $2 charge is
made for a room change.
Furniture . Furniture and equipment provided by the College must
remain in the dormitory room. The only exception should be that
when a student decides that he will not want a particular item of
furniture for the entire year, he should take the piece of furniture
to the storage area provided in the Dining Center basement, and notify
the Buildings and Grounds Department in writing. He is then re-
sponsible for making sure the item of furniture is returned to its
original location at the end of the academic year.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Following year-end inspection, students will be charged for
missing or damaged equipment and for damage to the room or suite.
Personal rugs and furniture must comply with fire and sanitation
regulations. Students' furniture must be portable and not attached
to the walls. Construction of scaffolding and platforms is not
permitted.
Keys . Students should have keys for their rooms and should keep
their rooms locked for security reasons. Keys are issued by the
Buildings and Grounds Office at the beginning of the academic year.
A $2 deposit is required at this time and is refunded when the key
is returned. Replacement of a lost key entails a $2 charge. Failure
to return a key within three days after Commencement will result in
an additional $10 charge -
Refrigerators . Refrigerators are permitted but are limited as to
size, use, and location. An outside firm will rent refrigerators
to Haverford students at a fee of about $36 a year. Arrangements
for rental may be made at the time of non-academic registration.
Specific regulations regarding use and location of refrigerators
will be available then. Refrigerators must be emptied and cleaned
at the end of the year.
Antennas . The College does not allow the installation of wire
antennas or connections between rooms or outdoors.
Laundry Equipment. The College provides laundry equipment in the
basements of Barclay, Gummere, and Jones.
Telephones . Students may arrange to have private telephones
installed in their rooms. Representatives of the Bell Telephone
Company will be on campus the first week of school to take orders.
Room Decoration. A damage charge is likely when articles are tacked,
taped, fastened, or pasted with stickers to the walls, furniture,
doors, or fixtures resulting in damage. Jiffy hooks may be used
only in those dorms without picture moldings in the walls. Special
hangers for use with the picture moldings are available in the
Bookstore. Use of scotch tape is permitted only in Barclay.
Painting of Rooms. Dormitories are painted on a regular schedule.
Excessive damage to the painting that requires either repainting
or washing will result in a charge to the student. Students are
not allowed to paint their rooms.
Damages . The resident of each room is responsible for any damage
to his room or its contents, including windows, doors, and furniture,
whether he is present or absent when the damage occurs. He may
notify the Buildings and Grounds Office of the name of the person
responsible for the damage.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
New occupants of a room should report in writing all existing
damages to the Buildings and Grounds Office. All rooms are inspected
prior to occupancy in the fall and existing damages noted. All
damages which are not allocated to a particular individual or group
will be apportioned among all members of the student body. A list of
common charges is available in the Buildings and Grounds Office.
Repairs . Faulty equipment, trouble with heat, light, or water, and
damages should be reported to the Buildings and Grounds Office or to
the dorm keymaster as soon as discovered.
Maid Service and Linens . The College does not provide maid service or
a linen supply. Efforts are being made to organize a student-run
linen concession, but students should be prepared to furi-ish their
own sheets and pillowcases . Students are asked to keep their rooms
in reasonably orderly condition. Rooms left in a chaotic condition
at the end of the year will be cleaned by the College, and the cost
of such cleaning charged to the students involved.
Storage . Designated dormitory storage sections will be open on
certain days at the beginning and end of the academic year. At other
times students wishing to arrange for opening of storage areas should
contact the keymasters of the dormitories involved. If the keymaster
cannot be located, students must contact the Security Department 24
hours in advance to gain access to storage areas. Graduating
students and others leaving the College are not permitted to store
any articles. The College accepts no responsibility for loss or
damage due to theft, fire, or any other cause.
In the past many students have had valuable items stolen or
damaged during vacations, both in the academic year and during the
summer. We strongly recommend that NO valuable items be stored in
the dorm storage areas.
Weapons . Firearms and other dangerous weapons are not permitted on
the campus .
Fire. Tampering with fire alarms, fire fighting equipment, and
blocking fire doors are serious offenses. These and other actions
which create hazards to the safety of others may result in a student's
being asked to live off campus as well as charges to cover costs of
repairing and reactivating the equipment.
Pets. Students are allowed to keep pets on campus, subject to the
rules of POOH (Pet Owners' Organization of Haverf ord) . If damage to
the campus and destruction of wildlife continues unabated in the
coming year, pets will no longer be permitted on campus. Following
is a brief digest of POOH regulations concerning student pets:
1.) All pet owners are required to register their pets with POOH
and show proof of rabies and/or distemper inoculation within the
last year.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
2.) All pet owners must pay a $5 registration for their first
pet and $3 per additional pet to cover operational costs of POOH,
including registration tags. They are to be worn by the pet at all
times on his collar in addition to a small bell intended to warn
wildlife. This fee also covers the cost of room inspections by POOH
representatives and the housekeeping staff at the end of each
semester.
3.) All pet owners must agree to abide by the decisions of a
POOH jury or its central committee in the event that the pet be-
comes a campus nuisance. Should any pet owner refuse to honor this
pledge, the rules of the Honor Code regarding confrontation will
apply.
4.) Arrangements for boarding pets must be made for vacation
periods; cat boxes must be kept clean and sanitary; all diseased
animals must be treated soon after becoming infected (a list of
local veterinarians can be obtained from POOH) .
5.) All dogs must be accompanied by their owners when outside.
Pet owners must realize that any member of the community bothered
by pets running loose is entitled to call the pound; these in-
dividuals, however, are requested to notify POOH after taking such
an action so that the pet's owner can be told of his whereabouts.
6.) Every POOH member will spend a certain period of time
acting as POOH proctor for the dormitory in which he resides.
The POOH proctor will be responsible for rectifying all pet-
related problems in the dorm.
Grounds . Students should recognize that only cooperation by every-
one will preserve the beauty of the grounds. Organized games
should be played behind Barclay or on the athletic fields.
Security. Efforts are made to protect the security of residents'
rooms and storage areas, but the College is not responsible for
losses due to theft or other causes. Rooms and windows should
be locked; Theft should be reported immediately to the keymaster
and the Security Department. Strangers wandering through dorms or
other buildings should be questioned or reported to the Security
Department immediately.
Housekeeping Inspections. College employees may enter students'
quarters during normal working hours to perform necessary main-
tenance. Employees will try to give advance notification before
entering students' quarters.
Items prohibited by College regulations which are visible
during housekeeping or Students' Council inspection may be con-
fiscated. The student will be notified by campus mail; items will
be held in the Security Department. The student may appeal within
48 hours of receipt of notification.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Routine room inspections will be limited to vacation periods.
The Students' Council has the right at any time to conduct a
search entailing investigation beyond what is visible. A Council
member and a College official must be present for all searches.
Insurance. The College is not responsible, directly pr indirectly,
for loss or damage to any article of property anywhere on the campus
due to fire, water, elements, theft, or action of third parties.
Students may wish to carry insurance against loss or damage of
personal property. The College offers fire insurance coverage on
property of students on a blanket policy. Students families often
have homeowners' policies which cover their possessions at college
up to $1,000.
Meeting Rooms. The Students' Council Room in Union (or in the new
Student Center) may be reserved through the Council secretary
for meetings of campus organizations. Other meeting rooms can be
reserved through Mrs. Henry's office on the first floor, of Founders
Hall.
Calendar Coordination. Campus organizations should be in touch with
Mrs. Henry's office regarding calendar planning and room and time
reservation.
Music Practice Rooms. Practice rooms and pianos are available for
students' vocal or instrumental practice. Interested students
should contact the chairman of the Music Department.
Ganib ling . Gambling is not permitted.
Smoking. Members of the community are asked to observe carefully
the "No Smaking" regulations in campus auditoriums and other
designated areas .
Concessions . The privilege of selling on campus is reserved for
students. The Students' Council awards concessions. When a student
sales representative cannot be found, outside firms must have written
permission from the Dean of Students in order to sell on campus.
Unauthorized persons anywhere on campus should be reported promptly
to a member of Students' Council or the Security Office.
Use of the College's Name. No student organization or individual
student may enter into any contractual agreement using the name of
the organization or of the College without prior approval by the
College through the Dean of Students.
Change of Home Address. Each Student must keep the College in-
formed of his home address. Any change in a student's home address
should be reported immediately to the Recorder.
students' Guide 1971-1972
MOTOR VEHICLES
Motor Vehicle Registration. Students wishing to possess or operate
a motor vehicle on campus must register the vehicle with the College.
Any student may register a car with the exception of resident first-
semester freshmen and students receiving financial aid. Students
receiving aid who need a car for employment purposes must have
permission from Mr. Ambler.
Registration Procedure. A student should register his vehicle with
the Buildings and Grounds Department. The registration fee for cars
is $30 per year. The fee for motorcycles is $20 per year. The fee
for additional vehicles is $15 per car and $10 per motorcycle.
There is no additional charge if a student changes cars during the
year, but the change must be reported.
At registration the student must present proof of ownership
and the name of the insurance company and the number of the policy
under which he has liability insurance. A temporary permit will
be issued when insurance or other information is incomplete. Cars
must be registered within one week of the opening of the academic
year. Cars brought on campus later must be registered within one
weekday of arrival.
Haverford and Bryn Mawr students participating in the dormi-
tory exchange program are subject to the motor vehicle regulations
of the host campus.
Temporary Registration. A student may have a car at Haverford for
up to three days if he secures a temporary registration permit at
no charge from the Buildings and Grounds Office.
Parking. Parking is permitted at any time (except in designated
reserved spaces) in the Field House lot and along Carter Road,
Walton Road, and Hall Drive.
The Security Department upon reqest will assist a student
with starting a disabled car or in moving it to an appropriate
location. Inoperable cars are not allowed on the campus, nor are
extensive repairs to be carried out here.
Decals . Car owners should place the College registration decal
on the left side of the rear bumper. Defective decals will
be replaced without charge. Decals are not transferable from
one vehicle to another and must be removed after change of
vehicle ownership.
Safe Driving. The campus speed limit is 15 miles per hour.
Vehicles must be fully muffled. Cars are allowed on regular
campus roads only. They may never be driven on paths or lawns
except by prior written permission from the Security Department.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Enforcement and Fines . The person in whose name a vehicle is
registered is responsible for any violations charged to it.
Violation notices and fines are forwarded by mail, and if possible,
by notice left on the car windshield. Warnings are not given.
Fines are:
Failure to register a vehicle $15
Speeding or reckless driving $20
Driving or parking on lawns $20
All vehicles parked in unauthorized places will be towed away
as indicated on posted notices. They will be towed to an off-
campus location. Operators of towed vehicles should immediately
see the Security Department. Ordinarily, a cash payment of $20
will be required at the service station to which the vehicle has
been towed. The College receives no part of this fee.
Driving while intoxicated will result in automatic loss of
driving privileges.
Bicycle Registration. The College asks that all campus bicycles be
registered with the Security Department. There is no cost involved
for the owner. Registration of bikes is essential to efforts to
retrieve lost or stolen bikes, and to avoid mistakingly identifying
bikes as abandoned.
FOOD SERVICE
Service. Service is cafeteria style. Seconds are usually avail-
able. All diners are asked to return their trays to the designated
areas .
Meal Hours. The Dining Center's regular meal hours are:
Breakfast Lunch Dinner
WEEKDAYS 7:30-9 a.m. 11:30 a.m.-l p.m. 5-7 p.m.
SATURDAYS 7:30-9 a.m. 11:30 a.m.-l p.m. 5-6:30 p.m.
SUNDAYS Brunch, 10 a.m.-l p.m. 5-6:30 p.m.
On Mondays through Saturdays, continental breakfast will be
served from 9 until 9:30 a.m.
The Dining Center will not be open when the College is not
in session.
Check-In. Students are asked to give their names to the checker
as they pick up their trays. Guests mat pay at this time.
Guest Meal Rates.
Breakfast $ .90
Lunch $1.10
Dinner $1.50
7
students' Guide 1971-1972
Private Dining Room Reservations . There are several small dining
rooms which can be reserved for meetings and private and College
functions. They should not be used for classes or seminars.
These dining rooms may be reserved on 48 hours notice through
Mr. Grant's office in the Dining Center. There is no charge for
use of the room if the meal is to be served, and arrangements for
the cost of the meal itself are to be worked out with Mr. Grant.
If diners are to carry their trays to the room, the rates for
use of the rooms are:
Room Capacity Rate
Sharpless 8 $5
Smith 20 $5
Swarthmore 34 $10
Bryn Mawr 100 $15
Bryn Mawr-Haverford Meal Exchange. Any Haverford student may eat
at Bryn Mawr at any time (and vice versa) at no extra cost by
showing a valid Haverford (or Bryn Mawr) ID card to the dining room
checker.
Coop. The Coop will probably reopen under new management this fall.
Watch for announcements about hours and policies.
Special Diets. A vegetarian meal is usually available in the kitchen
for those who notify Mr. Grant of their continuing interest in such
meals. Other requests for special diets should be given to Mr.
Grant, who will make whatever arrangements are possible.
Suggestions . Complaints, criticisms, suggestions, and words of
praise should be directed to Mr. Grant in the Dining Center or to
a member of the Dining Center Committee.
Students' Guide 1971-1972
COLLEGE POLICIES
A Statement of Principle About Certain Rights and Obligations.
Haverford College holds that open-minded and free inquiry is
essential to a student's educational development. Thus, the College
recognizes the right of all students to engage in discussion, to
exchange thought and opinion, and to speak or write freely on any
subject. To be complete, this freedom to learn must include the right
of inquiry both in and out of the classroom and must be free from any
arbitrary rules or actions that would deny students the freedom to
make their own choice regarding controversial issues. Further, the
College endeavors to develop in its students the realization that as
members of a free society they have not only the right but also the
obligation to inform themselves about various problems and issues, and
that they are free to formulate and express their positions on these
issues. Finally, the College reaffirms the freedom of assembly as an
essential part of the process of discussion, inquiry, and advocacy.
Students, therefore, have the right to found new organizations, or
to join existing organizations, on or off campus, which advocate and
engage in lawful actions to implement their announced goals. Student
actions such as those here involved do not imply approval, disapproval,
or sponsorship by the College or its student body; neither do such
actions in any way absolve a student from his academic responsibilities.
Similarly, students are expected to make clear that they are speaking
or acting as individuals and not for the College or its student body.
The freedom to learn, to inquire, to speak, to organize and to
act with conviction within the bounds of law, are held by Haverford
College to be a cornerstone of education in a free society.
Relationship With Law Enforcement Agencies. While the College assumes
no responsibility for acting as an arm of the lax«i, neither does it
knowingly afford its students any greater protection from the law than
that enjoyed by all citizens. In the absence of parents, the College
does assume an individual responsibility for assuring its students
equal protection under the law.
Security Checks. Members of the faculty are often asked by government
agencies for information about students or former students. This
fact has led to some concern among the faculty. A special committee
studied the matter, and submitted a report to the faculty meeting of
May 19, 1955. The faculty accepted the report "as a series of advices
to be included in the 'Information for Members of the Faculty'." The
report is as follows :
STATEMENT OF THE HAVERFORD COLLEGE FACULTY
ON GOVERNMENT SECURITY CHECKS
Chief Justice Holmes once stated that we must retain in
this country the "free trade in ideas - that the best test
of truth is the power of the thought to get itself accepted
in the competition of the market."* Our primary concern
about the security program of the federal government is
that students and faculty members should not avoid contro-
versial topics or unpopular positions for fear that these may
be held against them in the future.
9
students' Guide 1971-1972
The basic assumption of the security program is that the
government has a right to, and indeed must, protect itself
from disloyalty and subversion. Ascertaining the loyalty
of any individual or the possibility of future acts of
subversion by him, however, is fraught with danger. Under
present security regulations it inevitably involves con-
siderations of beliefs or opinions of both the person being
investigated and the person being asked for information.**
We must consider carefully what information should make us
question a man's loyalty or think of him as a possible
security risk, and what information we should pass on to
security investigations.
Let us first look at two general considerations, apart
from any special features which may exist because of the
nature of an academic community. First, the spoken or
written word or the reading or studying of certain
materials is far removed from actions . To act requires
more than intellectual assent. Often we may not know
what we believe until we are challenged to act upon our
beliefs. Second, few people reveal to others their
deepest thoughts and feelings; and even when they do,
opinions which are voiced are easily misinterpreted.
In addition to these two general considerations, there are
certain special features of a college education which must be
taken into account in arriving at judgments of loyalty or
riskiness of members of the college community. One of the
aims of education at college is to question and shake opinions
and beliefs previously arrived at largely from knowledge and
experience of others and to form opinions which have been
tested by the individual himself. The student is exposed
to new ideas put forth by faculty members, by other students,
or in reading, and has four years in which to find himself,
before taking a responsible position in society. During four
years he is asked to look with an open mind at different
theories and philosophies. He is also encouraged to try out
ideas in experience. Many students go through a series of
divergent yet passionately held philosophical convictions
while at college. They may defend each strongly, this being
one way of testing it. The espousal by some students in
discussion or papers of ideas considered subversive outside
the campus, must therefore be recognized as normal activity
in a college.
Indeed, it is the person who has been completely uninter-
ested in controversial problems when in college who may turn
in times of crisis to movements advocating treasonable acts
for lack of training in analysing the claims and social inter-
pretations of such movements. Experience shows that those
who tried to understand controversial issues are usually less
likely to be taken in by panaceas. An active interest in such
issues may be more a sign of loyalty than ground for question-
ing a man's loyalty.
10
Students' Guide 1971-72
It follows from what has been said that there must exist a
special relationship of trust among students and faculty in their
professional association. Members of the college community
should feel confident that expressions of their ideas will be
regarded as strictly professional matter. We believe that
this relationship of trust is indispensable to a college
community if it is to serve its proper function in society.
We believe further that if there is doubt expressed about the
loyalty of one member of the college community by another, or
about his safety as a security risk because of his thoughts,
opinions, or beliefs, as distinct from his character or stability
of personality, a full statement of the charge should be given in
writing to the investigating authorities, a copy of which should
go to the person being charged with disloyalty or potential subver-
sion.
*The dissenting opinion in Abrams et al V. United States,
250 U.S. 616 (1919).
**Some information specifically required in a full field check
under the existing security program relates to beliefs and
opinions - for example, "Membership in, or affiliation or
sympathetic association with, any foreign or domestic organi-
zation, association, movement, (etc.) which is totalitarian.
Fascist, Communist or subversive..." In addition, the regula-
tions state that infomation collected should not necessarily
be limited to that which is specifically required; in practice
it may be directly related to opinions or beliefs.
Relationship With Governmental Investigative Bodies. From time to
time the Federal Bureau of Investigation or other governmental in-
vestigative body conducts a security investigation as a step in the
employment of a student, alumnus, or faculty member in government work.
Our policy is to cooperate fully in such an investigation. The F.B.I,
agent has routinely told our security office that he will be on campus
for this purpose. The College hopes that whatever the agent is told
is something the interviewee is also prepared to say directly to the
student, alumnus, or faculty member being investigated. This type of
investigation should be an open matter (as the above statements from
the Faculty Handbook make clear) .
But we will not condone or participate in any undercover investi-
gation of a College community member, except where the President or
his deputy is shown reasonable grounds for linking that member with
a specific crime and where no alternative way exists of gathering
the necessary facts about the crime. In particular, we will not be
involved in any undercover searching into the thoughts or teaching of
a professor, student, or staff member.
To make this College policy effective, it is imperative that
there be a check with the President's office before any positive
action is taken on a request for confidential information about a
person at Haverford. Anyone on campus who is asked, in his role as
a member of the College community, for information to be provided
on a covert basis concerning another member of the community should
immediately report that request to the President. Any failure to do
so will be considered a violation of College policy.
11
Students' Guide 1971-1972
STUDENT SERVICES
Health Services. Students may call at the dispensary or for emergency
service in the Morris Infirmary at any time. Students seeking routine
appointments, such as allergy inoculations, are asked to schedule
appointments during normal working hours. Students who wish to go
to the Infirmary after 10 p.m. should call the night and weekend
emergency number, MI 2-3133, first.
The College physician is available at the Infirmary from 2 to 3 p.m.
Monday through Friday and will be called by the nurse on duty if needed
at other times. Visiting hours for patients in the Infirmary end at
9 p.m. The Infirmary is closed during vacations.
Counseling Services. The College offers counseling for problems
of a personal, educational, or vocational nature. Students are
encouraged to make an appointment with any of the counselors for
an evaluation. When a problem warrants, a student may be re-
ferred to another member of the staff, or occasionally to an
outside source for further help. All student communications
with the counseling staff are held in strict professional con-
fidence, as are the names of students counseled. The counseling
staff consists of a psychiatrist. Dr. Peter Bennett, and two
clinical psychologists. Miss Jane Widseth and Mr. James Vaughan.
Appointments should be made at the counseling center on the
ground floor of Whitall Hall.
Psychological Testing. The records of the psychological tests
which each student takes during Customs Week are available in
the counseling center. Any student desiring an explanation of
them may ask for an appointment. Students who desire counseling
in regard to majors or vocational plans may ask to take supple-
mentary tests of aptitudes, interests, or personality.
Financial Aid - Scholarships. All scholarships for the current year
have been awarded. Students should pick up applications for renewal
of scholarships for 1972-73 early in the second semester. Students
expecting to receive aid for the first time In 1972-73 should see
the Director of Admissions early in the second semester. The deadline
for all financial aid applications for 1972-73 is March 31, 1972.
Financial Aid - Student Loans. A loan fund is available for students
who may require financial assistance during their college course.
Students wishing loan information should see the Director of
Admissions .
Financial Aid - Term Time Employment. All but a very few campus
jobs are reserved for students with established need for funds to
help offset the education costs of the College. Students wishing
to take a job on campus first file an application in the Dean of
Students' Office. In addition to jobs on campus, there are regular
opportunities for part-time and occasionally steady work off campus.
All such jobs are listed in the Dean of Students' Office.
Summer Employment. While there is no summer placement service,
the Dean of Students' Office does maintain a file of summer jobs
that have been brought to the attention of the College.
12
students' Guide 1971-1972
Bryn Mawr and Haverford Bus Schedule. The two Colleges jointly operate
a bus to facilitate cooperative classes, lectures, and library use.
The bus makes regular trips between the two campuses on weekdays
when classes are in session. The bus leaves from Stokes Hall at
Haverford and from Goodhart Hall at Bryn Mawr.
Leave Bryn Mawr Leave Haverford
8:00 a.m.
8:15 a.m.
8:30
8:45
9:15
9:45
10:15
10:45
11:15
11:45
12:15 p.m.
12:45 p.m.
1:15
1:45
2:15
2:45
3:15
3:45
4:15
4:45
5:15
5:45
7:15
7:45
9:45
10:15
10:45
11:15
11:45
12:15
Changes or additions to this schedule may be announced in the fall.
Also, there may be limited car service to Swarthmore in the fall.
Student groups may charter the Haverf ord-Bryn Mawr bus on week-
ends provided a regular driver is available. There is an initial
fee of $9.60 plus $4.80 per hour and 20 cents per mile. The mini-
mum charge is $35. Inquire at Mr. Trucks' Office at Bryn Mawr.
Graduate School Catalogs and Information. The catalogs of most colleges
and universities in the United States are available for loan from
the Recorder's Office. Announcements of special summer and graduate
programs of study as well as information about fellowships are posted
along the stairway leading to the Recorder's Office.
Selective Service. Students are required by law to register for
Selective Service on or within five days after their 18th birthday.
Students on campus can register with the nearest local board in
Bryn Mawr.
Since especially at this time Selective Service policies,
regulations, and procedures are often changing or subject to
interpretation, all students are urged to keep themselves informed
and up-to-date on these matters.
Students wishing general information or advice about the draft
should talk with Messrs. Lyons, Melton, Potter, or Kannerstein.
Students considering conscientious objection are invited to consult
with Mr. Vaughan, Mr. Charles Perry, or Professor John Gary. In
addition, other members of the administration, faculty, and student
body are usually able and willing to give advice on a variety of
draft matters. There are several well-known draft counseling services
in Philadelphia.
13
students' Guide 1971-1972
Graduate School Advisors. Students planning to do graduate work in
a departmental subject should consult with the chairman of the depart-
ment at Haverford. Students planning to go to professional schools
may seek advice and information from appropriate faculty members
as follows :
Education Messrs. Lyons, Melton, Kannerstein
Business Administration ... Mr. Hunter
International Affairs .... Mr. Hansen
Law Messrs. Mortimer and Levin
Medicine To be announced
Theology Mr. Luman
Placement Services . Haverford does not maintain a formal placement
service. Mr. Sheppard, Director of Alumni Affairs, maintains a list
of positions open in business, government, and other institutions
in the Alumni Office in Founders Hall. Interviews with representatives
of business concerns, government agencies, and institutions can be
arranged. Students are encouraged to consult members of the faculty
and administration about possibilities for employment outside of
College.
Peace Corps and VISTA. Students interested in applying for the Peace
Corps or VISTA should talk to Mr. Lyons, the campus liaison officer
for these organizations.
Use of Campus Mail Services. Every now and then members of the campus
community feel compelled to share some wise piece of writing, or some
announcement of assumed importance with all other members of the
campus community. The policies regarding such "general distribution"
materials are simple, and are intended to assure that the origin of
the material is always an open matter.
1) The use of the campus mail service, without cost, is restricted
to members of the College community, i.e., faculty, students, staff,
Board and Corporation members. 2: EVERY piece that is distributed
must carry clear explicit identification of who the originator is.
This means that each piece should carry the name of at least one
individual who assumes responsibility for the mailing, together
with the name of the sponsoring organization if any. 3) It is
expected that no member of the College community will allow his
name to be used to permit an off-campus commercial organization
to distribute its advertising material through the College mail
room without going through the U. S. mail service. The only
exception to this will be for franchises which have been allocated
through Students' Council to current students.
Items Lost, Found, or Stolen. Items that have been lost, found,
or stolen should be reported to the campus Security Office. The
security functions of this office are more effective when
students promptly report items they believe may have been stolen.
14
students' Guide 1971-1972
The Campus Calendar - Registering Campus Events. All campus events
other than regularly scheduled academic functions and intercollegi-
ate athletics, are registered in advance in Mrs. Henry's Office.
This includes events such as social events, mixers, lectures,
concerts, etc.
Bookstore. The Bookstore is located in Union and is open from
10 a.m. to 4 p.m. Monday through Friday. Extended hours are
announced during the beginning of each semester.
Accident Insurance. Every student is covered by a blanket accident
policy paid for from the unit fee. This insurance pays actual ex-
penses resulting from any accident up to a limit of $1,000 for each
accident. All claims under this policy should be directed to the
College physician.
Notary Public. A notary public is provided for the convenience of
students in the Recorder's Office and in the Business Office.
Guests . A student can arrange rooms in faculty homes and at Bryn
Mawr for out-of-town dates. The faculty does not expect remunera-
tion for this service, but students should observe the following
suggestions: 1) The faculty host or hostess should be contacted
as soon as possible. She should be given the name and home address
of the guest and approximate time of arrival and departure.
2) The hostess should be kept informed of any changes in plans.
3) Thank you notes are appreciated.
Art Rental. The College has a collection of framed prints which
are rented to students at a very nominal rate. Announcements will
be made in the fall about when students may make selections from
this collection.
15
Students' Guide 1971-1972
STUDENT GOVERNMENT
I. The Honor Code
II. Students' Association Constitution
III. Student Officers and Appointees
This is the Haverford Honor Code. We ask that you read it
carefully, bearing in mind that these are the standards and
concepts by which the College functions as a community. The
Standards section is part of the Constitution of the Students'
Association. The Specific Concerns are reviewed each year at
the beginning of the second semester. The concerns printed below
were adopted in a Plenary Session, February 3, 1971.
Article VI. The Honor Code
Section I . Standards
Each student shall accept the Haverford Honor Code realizing
that it is his responsibility to uphold the Honor Code and the
attitude of personal and collective honor on which it is based.
One of the stated purposes of Haverford College is that we
strive for a sense of community marked by a lasting concern of one
person for another and by shared responsibilities for helping the
community achieve its highest aims. The Honor Code, as the founda-
tion of community life at Haverford College, is the demonstrated
concern of people for each other. We here attempt to express in words
the form that these concerns take, while asserting that any such
statement has meaning for the community only as it forms a basis for
subsequent action by individuals.
The goal of the Honor Code is to encourage individuals to
develop responsible judgment capable of directing their conduct
as active members of the community. The Code demands that every
individual in the community be aware of his own standards of
behavior in relation to the standards of others. Upon entering
Haverford College, every student must sign the following pledge:
"I hereby accept the Haverford Honor Code and the attitude of
personal and collective honor on which it is based." This attitude
is manifested in confrontation, respect, concern and discretion.
In its broadest sense, confrontation is communication. A con-
frontation means subjecting one's beliefs and those of others to a
new examination. It is not a unique or limited process; it is simply
the dialogue which logically should occur between persons with
different standards — an expression of concern and of the need to
understand the standards of others. A confrontation is not an in-
quisition, but rather an exchange of values. The process of forming
personal standards involves both interpersonal and personal confron-
tation. These standards then form the basis of community at Haverford
College and provide the necessary standards of community life.
Respect is the attitude necessary for confrontation to occur
and entails the recognition of other individuals as members of the
community. Discretion is the manifestation of respect in one's inter-
action with others. The fact that an individual is morally at peace
with his actions does not confer the right to impose their existence
upon the sensitivities of others. The practice of respect and discre-
16
Students' Guide 1971-1972
tton is not an admission that one's own beliefs are wrong, but rather
a recognition of and a concern for the community of which one is a
part.
The code emphasizes the dual necessity of personal freedom and
community life. The individual is obligated to make decisions under
the scrutiny of his conscience, to challenge and accept the challenge
of others whose views differ from his own, and to modify those
decisions if it becomes clear that they were made upon an unsatis-
factory basis. It is imperative that the attitude of personal and
collective honor not be limited by any rigid definition of the words
used herein to describe it. The vagueness of these precepts raises
many questions; but they are healthy questions which must be answered,
not by the external authority of others, but rather by the individual
with the help of the concerned individuals who comprise the college
community.
Section 2. Implementation
1. A plenary session of the Students' Association shall be held
during the first three weeks of the second semester of each year to
formulate a set of specific concerns to implement the standards of
the Honor Code. These specific concerns shall help students determine
the conduct which they must observe under the standards of the Honor
Code set forth in Article VI, Section 1. Though different Honor Code
Councils may interpret specific matters pertaining to the Honor Code
in different ways, only legislative action of a plenary session of
the Students' Association can maintain or change the details of the
specific concerns.
2. Each entering student shall, upon his agreement to enter
Haverford College, sign the following pledge: "I hereby accept the
Haverford Honor Code realizing that it is my responsibility to uphold
the Honor Code and the attitude of personal and collective honor on
which it is based."
3. After each of his examinations each student shall sign on
his examination paper the following pledge: "I accept full respons-
ibility under the Haverford Honor Code for my conduct on this
examination. "
Section 3 . Reporting Procedure
The student who believes that his actions may be in conflict
with the principles of responsibility and respect inherent in the
Honor Code shall discuss the matter immediately with a member of
the Honor Code Council. Should a student believe that the actions
of another may be in conflict with the Honor Code, he shall discuss
the matter immediately with the individual concerned. If after
discussion either student finds said actions to be in possible conflict
with the Honor Code, the student whose actions are in question shall
bring the matter to a member of the Honor Code Council. If the matter
cannot be resolved on this level, it then comes to the entire Council.
SPECIFIC CONCERNS
Arising from personal concerns, there are a number of questions
that become specific community concerns. An opinion is voiced by
the community in these particular areas and codified in the following
sections .
17
Students' Guide 1971-1972
A. Academic Work
Each student shall be responsible for his proper conduct in all
scholastic work.
During examinations: (1) No student shall give or receive aid.
(2) No person shall act as an official proctor. (3) Students shall
obey all restrictions which the professor may prescribe as to ta,me,
place, and material aids to be used.
In the preparation of papers : (1) A student shall never represent
another person's ideas or scholarship as his own. He shall indicate
his sources by using, where appropriate, quotation marks, footnotes
and a bibliography. (2) Professors may prescribe limitations on the
sources to be used; waive any restrictions concerning crediting of
sources. (3) Permission -must be obtained in advance from all pro-
fessors concerned if a paper is to be submitted for credit in more
than one course.
In the preparation of written homework and laboratory reports:
CI) Students may work together, provided that each member of the
group understands the work being done. C2) All data must be reported
by the student as observed in Ms experiment. (3) Professors may (a)
require that secondary sources consulted be credited. (b) waive any
restrictions in 1 and 2 of this paragraph.
Responsibility for observing special requirements: A student is
responsible for observing any requirements which the professor
announces under the option specified above.
B. Social Relations
Each student shall b-e responsible for his proper conduct with
respect to guests and the individuals comprising the Haverford College
community. Any person aware of an act which fails to show proper
respect is obligated to confront the individual involved. For example,
students are expected to exercise good judgment as to a reasonable
hour of departure of guests, taking into consideration the convenience
of other students and any possible reflection on the reputation of
tha guest, the individual student, and the College. If confrontation
does not resolve the conflict, ,. the Reporting Procedure applies to this
section.
C . Drugs and' Intoxicants
Through, the statement of policy regarding drugs and intoxicants,
the Haverford student body is trying to prevent the development of
the many serious problems inherent in the drug phenomenon; a phenom-
enon present here and on many other campuses.
Intemperate use of mild drugs and intoxicants, and simple use of
dangerous and powerful drugs, are acts which often have interfered
with, a student's primary roles at the College: disciplined involve-
ment in scholarship and healthy personal development. There is ample
evidence that individual s-tudents have been seriously hurt by drugs.
The medical and psychological services are not intended for long-
term treatment of students who become severely abnormal or impaired
because of drug use of other causes.
The drug phenomenon also interferes with the maintenance of a
free and healthy campus community. State laws make it illegal for
minors to possess or consume alcoholic beverages. A variety of State
and Federal laws prescribe severe penalties for the use or possession
of dangerous drugs and narcotics. Marijuana is legally considered to
be a narcotic.
18
Students' Guide 1971-1972
The College assumes no responsibility for acting as an arm of
the law. Neither will it knowingly interfere to protect students
from law enforcement activities or their consequences. In the
absence of piirents, the College does assume an initial responsibility
for assuring its students equal protection under the law.
The sometimes unduly severe sanctions of the larger society make
many students fearful of openly (and lawfully) discussing drugs and
drug-related issues . This is at a time when the issues and related
personal beliefs all need full and open discussion.
Certain drug-related activities almost always violate the
collective sense of respect for the welfare of the community, and
for the rights and welfare of the individuals within it. Because
of this, each member of the community is obliged personally to con-
front these queries:
(1) Do my actions involve non-students in drug use or distribu-
tion either on or off the campus?
(2) Do my actions involve the use of addictive and/or especially
dangerous drugs such as the opiates, heroin, amphetamines, barbitur-
ates, or potent hallucinogens? Do they constitute abuse, by frequent
use or excessive dosages, of potentially dangerous drugs such as
cannabis or alcohol?
(3) Am I facilitating in any way an unwise choice by another
student to use drugs; a choice based on ignorance of the full legal
and medical (and therefore academic) risks involved?
(4) Am I party to, or aware of, any drug-related activity
which exposes the College to the risks of outside intervention; an
intervention which would threaten the development of the openness
and trust necessary to curb drug abuse within our community?
(5) Have I taken care to assure by forthright discussion that
my drug-related activities are not offensive to others? That they
have not jeopardized the rights of others?
(6) If I have been offended or jeopardized by the drug-related
activities of another student, have I made reasonable efforts to
discuss my concern with him in a friendly and forthright manner?
(7) Where the propriety of my drug-related actions , or those
of another, is still in question after discussion, have I sought the
counsel of other students, the appropriate officers of the Students'
Association, or the Administration?
The Reporting Procedure clause of the Honor Code applies to
this section.
EXPLANATION OF THE TERM "QUERY"
Queries come out of Haverford's Quaker traditions and practices.
A query challenges the community and individuals to examine their
actions and attitudes. Specific queries arise out of the community's
concern over problems which have led to conflict in the community
and harm to individuals. Each Haverford student is obligated to
confront personally the standards expressed in these queries.
ADMINISTRATION OF THE HONOR CODE
Any student brought before the Council for discussion of a
possible breach of the standards of the Honor Code is considered
individually. The Students' Association, in granting certain
judicial powers to the Council, recognizes each person and each
incident as having unique characteristics. Consequently, flexi-
bility of evaluation in an Honor Code discussion is necessary if the
rights and freedoms granted by the Honor Code are to be preserved
and guaranteed.
19
Students' Guide 1971-1972
The Honor Code Council has responsibility for maintaining the
Honor Code and for responding to actions inconsistent with it. In
situations involving the section on Drugs and Intoxicants, however,
the First Vice-President and the Dean of Students are delegated initial
responsibility. When any possible breach of responsible conduct
which seems to require further action comes to the attention of the
Honor Code Council, the representatives who comprise it shall dis-
cuss the relative seriousness of the matter and agree on how it best
should be handled. Discussion with the student or students involved
is often sufficient. If not, the problem comes to an Honor Code
Jury of 12 students.
Disciplinary action which may limit a student's freedom, or even
separate him from the College, is taken only when it is clear that
discussion alone is not sufficient to resolve the difficulty and
that action is called for to protect the community and the individuals
who comprise it from serious damage.
CONSTITUTION OF THE STUDENTS' ASSOCIATION OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE
Article I. Preamble
Section 1. Name
The name of this Association shall be the Students' Association
of Haverford College.
Section 2. Membership
All students enrolled at Haverford College are ipso facto members
of the Students' Association.
Section 3. Powers
All powers herein defined derive from the Students' Association
and are delegated by it to such bodies of its own creation as are
needful to carry out the functions of student self-government.
Section 4. Right of self-government
The right of student self-government is granted by the Administra-
tion of Haverford College to the Students' Association provided that
the Students' Association maintains the standards of the College to
the satisfaction of the Administration.
Article II. Legislative Powers
Section 1. Regulations and Council Rules
1. The Students' Association shall make Regulations governing
the conduct of students on campus. Regulations pertaining to the
Honor System shall be enacted by a two-thirds vote of a meeting of the
Association. Every member of the Association is responsible for en-
forcement of these regulations. Should the Administration find any
regulation unacceptable, the dispute shall be referred to three re-
sponsible and impartial persons, satisfactory to the Association and
the Administration.
2. The Students' Association delegates such legislative authori-
ty to the Students' Council as is necessary to carry out the functions
of the Council herein provided for. Such legislation shall be well-
publicized and shall be reported to the members of the Asso cLation
at hall meetings, provided for in Article III, Section 9. The students'
Association reserves to itself the ultimate legislative authority,
20
Students' Guide 1971-1972
to be exercised only in plenary session.
Section 2. Meetings or the Association
1. The Students' Association shall meet in plenary session
within the first three weeks of &ach semester.
2. The President of the Students' Association shall call a
plenary session of the Students' Association whenever he deems it
necessary by publicizing it as far in advance as possible of the
time scheduled for the plenary session. The number of students re-
quired for a quorum shall be forty per cent of the Students' Association.
3. The President shall call a plenary session of the Association
in the manner provided for in paragraph 2 of this section whenever
he receives a petition signed by ten per cent of the members of the
Association stating the purpose for which^ the plenary session shall be
called. Such plenary sessions shall be held within seven (7) days of
the receipt of the petition.
4. The President shall publicize the agenda of any plenary
session as far in advance of the meeting as possible.
5. The "Haverford Rules of Parliamentary Procedure" shall be the
authorized and final guide in all parliamentary procedure except
wherein it conflicts with the Constitution of the Students' Association
or the Regulations of the Students' Association. The President of the
Association shall appoint, upon assumption of office, a Parliamentar-
ian from the members of the Students' Counil. The Secretary of the
Students' Association shall have with him at plenary sessions of the
Association a copy of the "Haverford Rules of Parliamentary Procedure".
Article III. Executive Powers
Section 1. Students' Council
The executive power of the Students' Association is vested in a
Students' Council.
Section 2. Membership of the Students' Council
The members of the Students' Council shall be the officers of
the Students' Association, elected dormitory representatives, and the
elected off-campus representatives.
Section 3. Meeting of the Students' Council
The President of the Students' Association shall call a meeting
of the Students' Council at least once each month. A quorum of the
Council shall consist of two-thirds of the membership. Upon the
written request of at least five members of the Students' Council, an
official meeting of that body shall be called immediately. Legisla-
tive and executive sessions of the Students' Council, except those
concerned exclusively with appointments and awards, shall be public.
The agenda for Council meetings shall be well-publicized as soon as
possible before each meeting.
Section 4. Nomination and Election of Officers in the Executive
Committee of the Students' Association
1. Nominations for the offices of the Executive Committee —
President, First Vice-President, Second Vice-President, Secretary, and
Treasurer — of the Students' Association shall open on the second
Friday of the second semester and shall close on the following Tuesday.
Nominations for the offices of President and of First and Second
Vice-Presidents shall be restricted to members of the Junior Class;
nominations for the offices of Secretary and Treasurer shall be
21
Students' Guide 1971-1972
restricted to members of the Freshman and Sophomore Classes. Should
there be more than four (4) candidates nominated for any officer,
there shall be a primary election for that office on the Monday
following the close of nominations, to be conducted according to
the preferential system. Space shall be provided for write-in votes.
The four (4) highest candidates shall then enter the final election
for that office.
2. On the Monday following the third Friday of the second semes-
ter, the Students' Association shall vote by secret ballot to elect
officers of the Students' Association. Voting shall be held according
to the preferential system; space shall be provided for write-in
votes. If, for any reason, more than one election is required to
secure a valid vote, or if a primary election is necessary, subsequent
voting shall be called for by the Executive Committee within twenty-
four hours of the previous voting. Votes must be cast officially by
at least forty per cent of the membership of the Students' Association
for the election to be valid.
Section 5. Election of Representatives
Each Haverford dormitory (presently Barclay, Comfort, Gummere,
Jones, Leeds, Lloyd, and Lunt) shall be entitled to one representative
on the Students' Council. Students residing off the main Haverford
campus shall be entitled to representatives as stipulated by the
Students' Council. Representatives to the Students' Council shall be
elected from each constituency by preferential ballot within the first
three weeks of the first semester, the date to be specified by the
President of the Sti.idents' Association.
Section 6. Nomination and Election of Members of the Honor
Council of the Students' Association
1. Nominations for members of the Honor Council shall open on
the Tuesday following the third Friday of the second semester and
shall close on the following Friday. The Freshman Class shall elect
three (3) freshmen, the Sophomore Class three (3) sophomores, and the
Junior Class one (1) junior to serve with the President and First
Vice-President on the Honor Council.
2. On the Monday following the close of nominations, each class
shall vote by secret ballot to elect its members of the Honor Council.
Voting shall be held according to the preferential system of voting.
Votes must be cast officially by forty per cent of the membership of
a class for the election to be valid.
3. Within two weeks following the selection of Hall Representa-
tives, the exact date to be specified by the officers of the Students'
Association, the Freshman Class shall elect three (3) freshmen to
serve on the Honor Council.
4. The officers of the Students' Association shall have final
authority over the procedure for all elections.
Section 7. Assumption of Office
1. The officers of the Students' Association elected in the
manner provided for in Section 4 of this article shall assume office
on the fourth Sunday of the second semester.
2. The members of Students' Council, elected as specified in
Section 5 of this article, shall assume office immediately upon
election .
22
Students' Guide 19 71-19 72
3. The members of the Honor Council of the Students' Association
elected in the manner provided for in Section 6 of this article shall
assume office on the day they are elected.
Section 8. Duties of the Students' Council of the Students'
Association
1. The Students' Council shall supervise the Regulations legis-
lated by the Students' Association, all extra-curricular activities
with the exception of athletics, and perform other duties as herein
provided.
2. The President of the Students' Association shall preside at
all plenary sessions of the Association and at all meetings of the
Students' Council. He shall conduct the election of officers of the
Students' Association and shall certify and publish the results of
these elections, specifying the names of candidates nominated or
elected. Each year he shall supervise the presentation of the system
of student self-government to the Freshman Class. In the absence of
either of the Vice-Presidents, the Secretary, or the Treasurer from any
plenary session, the President shall appoint from the other members
of the Council a Vice-President, Secretary, or Treasurer pro tempore.
He shall serve as a member of the Honor Council. He shall nominate,
with the concurrence of the Students' Council, student representatives
to faculty-student committees, and Students' Council committees.
3. The First Vice-President of the Students' Association shall
serve as Chairman of the Honor Council. If the office of President
is vacant or if the President is absent from any plenary session of
the Association or meeting of the Council, the First Vice-President
shall act as President pro tempore .
4. The Second Vice-President of the Students' Association shall
serve as coordinator of all faculty-student and Students' Council
committees. He shall bear primary responsibility for drawing up the
agenda for each Council meeting and for publicizing it before the
meeting to the Councilmen and the rest of the student body. He shall
also be responsible for soliciting committee reports and for summar-
izing them periodically in a report to the Students' Council.
5. The Secretary of the Students' Association shall keep in
permanent form minutes of all plenary sessions of the Association and
of all meetings of the Council. He shall publicize the minutes of
all plenary sessions and of all Council meetings.
6. The Treasurer of the Students' Association shall disburse the
funds of the Students' Association and shall keep a permanent record
of all transactions. He shall appoint from the Students' Council an
Assistant Treasurer. When retiring from office, he shall post or
publish for the inspection of the members of the Students' Association
a summary of his accounts.
Section 9. Duties of Students' Council Members
1. The council representative shall hold dorm meetings to dis-
cuss the issues on the agenda of each Council meeting. He shall be
responsible for communicating the views of the members of his dormitory
to the Council or any of its committees. He shall discuss any action
of Council or its committees with the members of his dorm. He shall
participate in the Council to make all policy decisions, to appoint
all committee members, to allocate the budget, and to do all such
things as the Students' Council may be empowered to do.
23
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Section 10. Duties of the Honor Council of the Students'
Association
1. The Honor Council of the Students' Association shall adminis-
ter all aspects of the Honor Code, including judicial power herein
described and the responsibilities of interpretation of specific
matters pertaining to the Honor Code. Each year, the Honor Council
shall present the Honor Code to the Freshman Class.
Section 11. Committees
1. Each students' Council shall have the power to establish
such committees as it deems necessary to aid in the execution of its
duties .
Article IV. Judicial Power
Section 1. Honor Code Jury
The judicial power of the Students' Association Is vested in the
Honor Code Jury.
Section 2. Membership
The membership of the Honor Code Jury shall include four members
of the Honor Code Council, including the First Vice President, and
three others to change each time the Honor Code Jury is called into
session. Membership in the Honor Code Jury shall also include eight
other students . These eight shall be chosen when needed by lot from
a pool of 50 eligibles. The 50 eligibles shall be chosen each month,
by lot, from the Students' Association, by the President of the
Students' Association. Each student called to service on the Honor
Code Jury shall be expected to serve. Exceptions may be granted by
the First Vice President at his discretion. The First Vice President
shall serve as chairman of the Honor Code Jury.
Section 3. Functions
The Honor Code Jury shall meet when called by the Honor Code
Council to consider matters of application of the Honor Code to
particular cases or issues when more personal and individual attempts
as specified in the Reporting Procedure of Article VI, Section 3 of
this Constitution have failed. The Honor Code Jury shall discuss the
matter in question with all individuals involved, and among its own
membership, and respond with the course of action which it believes
most beneficial to the individual and to the community at large.
Section 4. Scope of Action
1. The Honor Code Jury shall take action within such limits as
the Students' Association may prescribe.
Section 5. Rights of Those Appearing Before Honor Code Jury
1. An individual appearing before Honor Code Jury has the right
to petition Honor Code Jury to exclude any of its members from the
consideration of his case; the right to bring with him any other per-
sons of his choosing; and the right to publicize his own case as he
sees fit.
24
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Article V. Resignation and Removal of Officers and Representatives
Section I. Vacancies
1. In the event of the resignation or removal of an officer
of the Students' Association, the Association shall fill immediately
the vacancy with a member of the appropriate class according to the
election procedure specified herein. In the interim the vacancy
shall be filled by the pro tempore replacements provided for herein.
2. Should a vacancy occur among the Students' Council when a
representative ceases to reside within the dormitory or is elected by
his class to the Honor Council or is elected by the Students' Associa-
tion as one of its officers, or resigns or is removed from office, the
vacancy shall be filled immediately according to the election procedure
specified herein.
3. Should a vacancy occur among the members of the Honor Council,
it shall be filled immediately by the class whose representation has
been reduced, according to the election procedure specified herein.
Section 2. Removal
1. Any officer of the Students' Association shall be removed
from any office for malfeasance or neglect of duty or other good cause
by not less than a two-thirds vote of a plenary session of the
Students' Association. The Council shall call a plenary session for
this purpose at its own discretion or on the petition of ten per cent
of the Students' Association.
2. Any Students' Council representative shall be removed from
office for malfeasance or neglect of duty or other good cause by
not less than a two-thirds vote of at least forty per cent of the
members of the dormitory in gene.ral meeting assembled.
3. Any member of the Honor Council shall be removed from office
for malfeasance or neglect of duty or other good cause by not less
than a two-thirds vote of at least forty per cent of the members of
the class which he represents, to be conducted in a general meeting
of that class .
Article VI. The Honor Code (Please see page 16 of this Handbook)
Article VII. Student Representatives to the Board of Managers
Section 1. Definition of Office
1. By consent of the Haverford Board of Managers, the Students'
Association is entitled to two representatives to the Board of
Managers. One representative must be a member of the senior class,
and the other a member of the junior class. Each member is expected
to serve a full term of two years.
Section 2. Nomination and Election
1. Nominations for the junior position as a student representa-
tive to the Board of Managers shall open on the second Friday in April
and close on the following Thursday.
2. Candidates must be members of the sophomore class upon nomina-
tion and election.
3. The election of a representative and his alternate by pre-
ferential ballot shall be held on the first Monday following the
close of nominations, with all members of the Students' Association
entitled to vote .
4. The alternate, who shall serve in the representative's
absence, is the candidate receiving the highest preferential votes
25
Students' Guide 1971-1972
after redistribution of the winner's ballots.
5. The elected representative and his alternate shall assume
office upon the opening of the next academic year.
Section 3. Resignation and Removal from Office
1. Any representative or his alternate shall be removed from
office for malfeasance or neglect of duty or other good cause by
not less than a two-thirds vote of a plenary session .of the Students'
Association. The Students' Council shall call a plenary session for
this purpose at its own discretion or upon the petition of ten per
cent of the Students' Association.
2. Upon resignation or removal from office, the Students'
Council shall hold an interim election within two weeks of that
resignation or removal. The nominees shall be from the class in
which the vacancy occurs .
Article VIII,
Amendments
Section 1. Proposal
1. Amendments to this Constitution may be proposed by the
Students' Council or by action taken in a plenary session of the
Students' Association called for that purpose.
Section 2. Ratification
1. Amendments shall be ratified by a two-thirds vote of a
plenary session of the Students' Association.
Section 3. Approval
1. Amendments shall go into effect upon approval by the President
of the College.
Article IX. Previous Constitutions Invalid
With the enactment of this Constitution all previous Constitutions
of the Students' Association of Haverford College shall be rendered
null and void.
STUDENT OFFICERS AND APPOINTEES
Executive Committee of the Students' Association
Larry Phillips '72, President
Paul Haagen '72, First Vice-President
Jim Smalhout '72, Second Vice-President
Gary Gasper '74, Secretary
, Treasurer
Honor Council
Paul Haagen '72
Larry Phillips '72
Lucy Weinstein '72
Danny Conrad '73
Dave Fox ' 73
Chris Wise '73
Chris Fleming '74
William Pugh ' 74
Tom Weisman ' 74
Three members of the Class of '75 will be elected in the fall.
26
Students' Guide 1971-1972
Students' Council Conunittee Chairmen
Art Series - Paul Richman '74
Collection Conunittee - Stan Lacks '74
Customs Committee - Dave Cotlove '72
Fred Curtis '73
Jon Stubbs '74
Film Series - Bill Levin '72
Dining Center Committee - Wendell Wylie '73
Mindy Mitnick '72
Student Representatives to the Board of Managers (chosen by Students '
Council)
Neil Stafford '73
one vacancy
Student Representatives to Faculty Committees
Administrative Advisory
Frank O'Haxa '72
Curt Smith '72
Jon Tumin '73
one vacancy
Community Concerns
Roger Midgett '72
Dave Gann '72
Ben Lentz '73
Student Standing and Programs
Carl Freedman '72
Kendall Martin '73
one vacancy for Class of ' 74
Computer Center
Gene Hodges '73
Jon Bondy ' 73
Distinguished Visitors
Bob Katz '72
Ghebre Mehreteab ' 72
Pete Rozental '73
Educational Policy
Bill Loughrey '72
Bill Juch '72
Chris Wise '73
Inter-College Cooperation
Gary Greenspan ' 72
Tom Wright '73
Jim Loucky '73
Physical Property
Dick Rodeheffer '72
Roger Easton '72
Doug Ley '73
Bob Atwood '73
Study Group on Governance
Jim Smalhout '72
Larry Phillips '72
POOH Co-Chalrmen
Peter Hales '72
Dominique Grossin '73
27
Students' Guide 1971-1972
INDEX
Accident Insurance 15
Art Rental 15
Antennas 2
Bookstore 15
Bryn Mawr-Haverford Bus Schedule .... 13
Calendar Coordination 5
Change of Home Address 5
College Policies 9
Relationship With Law Enforcement
Agencies 9
Security Checks 9
Statement of Principle About Certain
Rights and Obligations 9
Concessions 5
Constitution of the Students' Association
of Haverford College 20
Counseling Services 12
Damages 2
Fees — Room and Board 1
Financial Aid 12
Term-Time Employment 12
Scholarships 12
Student Loans 12
Fird 3
Food Service 7
Bryn Mawr-Haverford Meal Exchange . . 8
Check-In 7
Coop 8
Guest Meal Rates 7
Hours 7
Private Dining Room Reservations ... 8
Furniture 1
Gambling 5
Guests 15
Graduate School Advisors 14
Graduate School Catalogs & Information . 13
Grounds 4
Health Services 12
Honor Code 16
Housekeeping Inspections 4
Insurance, College Coverage 5
Insurance , Accident 15
Keys 2
Laundry Equipment 2
Lost, Found, or Stolen 14
28
students' Guide 1971-1972
Maid Service 3
Meal Hours 7
Meeting Rooms 5
Motor Vehicles 6
Decals 6
Enforcement and Fines 7
Parking 6
Registration Procedures 6
Regulations 6
Safe Driving 6
Temporary Registration 6
Music Practice Rooms 5
Notary Public 15
Opening and Closing, College 1
Painting of Rooms 2
Peace Corps and VISTA 14
Pets 3
Placement Services 14
Psychological Testing 12
Registering Campus Events 15
Repairs 3
Refrigerators 2
Residence Halls 1
Room Assignments 1
Room Decoration 2
Scholarships 12
Security 4
Selective Service 13
Storage 3
Student Government 16
Constitution of the Students'
Association 20
Legislative Powers 20
Executive Powers 21
Judicial Powers 24
Honor Code 16
Administration 19
Standards 16
Implementation 17
Reporting Procedures 17
Specific Concerns 17
Student Loans 12
Student Officers and Appointees 26
Student Services 12
Summer Employment 12
29
StudeiLts' Guide 1971-1972
Use of Campus Mail Services 14
Use of the College's Name 5
Telephones 2
Term-Time Employment 12
Vacation Residence 1
Weapons 3
30
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11